SYLLABUS - · PDF fileSYLLABUS (With effect from ... in the academic year 2008-09. Since, then...

SYLLABUS (With effect from 2015-2016 Academic year)

¥ÀoÀåPÀæªÀÄ (±ÉÊPÀëtÂPÀ ªÀµÀð 2015-16)

V & VI Semester

Bachelor Degree in

Automobile Engineering

Out Come Based Education With

Choice Based Credit System ¥sÀ°vÁA±À DzsÁjvÀ ²PÀët ºÁUÀÆ LaÒPÀ «μÀAiÀiÁz sÁjvÀ UÀ½PÉ ¥ÀzÀÞw

P.E.S. College of Engineering Mandya - 571 401, Karnataka

(An Autonomous Institution Affiliated to VTU, Belagavi) Grant -in- Aid Institution

(Government of Karnataka) Accredited by NBA, New Delhi Approved by AICTE, New Delhi.

¦.E.J¸ï. vÁAwæPÀ ªÀÄºÁ«zÁå®AiÀÄ ªÀÄAqÀå-571 401, PÀ£ÁðlPÀ

(«.n.AiÀÄÄ, ¨É¼ÀUÁ« CrAiÀÄ°è£À ¸ÁéAiÀÄvÀÛ ¸ÀA¸ÉÜ) Ph : 08232- 220043, Fax : 08232 – 222075, Web : www.pescemandya.org

http://www.pescemandya.org/

Preface

PES College of Engineering, Mandya, started in the year 1962, has become autonomous

in the academic year 2008-09. Since, then it has been doing the academic and examination

activities successfully. The college is running eight undergraduate and Eight Postgraduate

programs. It consists of Six M.Tech programs, which are affiliated to VTU. Other postgraduate

programs are MBA and MCA.

India has recently become a Permanent Member by signing the Washington Accord. The

accord was signed by the National Board of Accreditation (NBA) on behalf of India on 13th June

2014. It enables not only the mobility of our degree globally but also establishes equivalence to

our degrees with that of the member nations such as Taiwan, Hong Kong, Ireland, Korea,

Malaysia, New Zealand, Russia, Singapore, South Africa, Turkey, Australia, Canada and Japan.

Among other signatories to the international agreement are the US and the UK. Implementation

of Outcome Based Education (OBE) has been the core issue for enabling the equivalence and of

Indian degrees and their mobility across the countries.

Our Higher Educational Institution has adopted the CBCS based semester structure with

OBE scheme and grading system.

The credit based OBE semester system provides flexibility in designing curriculum and

assigning credits based on the course content and hours of teaching.

The OBE, emphasize setting clear standards for observable, measurable outcomes of

programs in stages. There lies a shift in thinking, teaching and learning processes moving

towards Students Centric from Teacher Centric education. OBE standards focus on mathematics,

language, science, attitudes, social skills & moral values.

The key features which may be used to judge, if a system has implemented an outcome

based education system is mainly Standard based assessments that determines whether students

have achieved the stated standard. Assessments may take any form, so long as the process

actually measure whether the student knows the required information or can perform the required

task. Outcome based education is a commitment that all students of all groups will ultimately

reach the same minimum standards. Outcome Based Education is a method or means which

begins with the end in mind and constantly emphasizes continuous improvement.

Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) provides choice for students to select from the

prescribed courses (core, Foundation, Foundation Elective, elective, open elective and minor or

soft skill courses). The CBCS provides a ‘cafeteria’ type approach in which the students can

Choose electives from a wide range of courses of their choice, learn at their own pace, undergo

additional courses and acquire more than the required credits, adopt an interdisciplinary

approach to learning which enables integration of concepts, theories, techniques, and,

perspectives from two or more disciplines to advance fundamental understanding or to solve

problems whose solutions are beyond the scope of a single discipline. These greatly enhance the

skill/employability of students.

In order to increase the Industry/Corporate readiness, many Soft Skills and Personality

Development modules have been added to the existing curriculum of the academic year 2015-16.

Industry Interactions have been made compulsory to enhance the field experience. In order to

enhance creativity and innovation Mini Project and Industrial visit & Interaction are included in

all undergraduate programs

Sri.B.Dinesh Prabhu

Deputy Dean (Academic)

Associate Professor,

Dept. of Automobile Engg.,

Dr.P S Puttaswamy

Dean (Academic)

Professor,

Dept. of Electrical & Electronics Engg.

PES COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING, MANDYA (Autonomous Institution affiliated to Visvesvaraya Technological University, Belagavi)

VISION

PESCE shall be a leading institution imparting quality engineering and management education,

developing creative and socially responsible professionals

MISSION

1. Provide state of the art infrastructure, motivate the faculty to be proficient in their field of

specialization and adopt best teaching -learning practices

2. Impart engineering and managerial skills through competent and committed faculty using

Outcome Based Educational curriculum

3. Inculcate professional ethics, leadership qualities and entrepreneurial skills to meet the

Societal needs

4. Promote research, product development and industry-institution interaction.

Department of Automobile Engineering The discipline Automobile Engineering was established in the year 1980, and has gained expertise

and contributing vitally to the Automobile Engineering community. The focus is to consistently

pursue in providing innovative and quality training to the talented and dedicated students, to

empower them in engineering for the development of national economy, specialized in transport

sector. We the lead the way in Karnataka to introduce the Department of Automobile Engineering to

impart sound automotive knowledge to the students with a passion towards Automobiles. We take

the honor in being recognized as a ‘research centre’ in Karnataka by VTU and Mysore University. In

addition to these regular programmes, this department is also actively involved in conducting Faculty

Development Programmes, Technical talks, Training programmes and technical visits to various

industries & regular industrial trainings for the benefit of students. The department has well qualified

and well experienced faculty members to meet the present day curriculum requirements both in

theory as well as practical aspects.

VISION To be a distinguished centre for imparting quality education in automobile engineering to develop

competent and socially responsible engineers and carryout research on continuous basis for the

betterment of the society.

MISSION AUM1: To give best learning experience through innovative teaching practices supported by

excellent laboratory infrastructure and exposure to recent trends in the automotive industry.

AUM2: Provide in depth knowledge in automobile engineering with equal emphasis on theoretical

and practical aspects and interdisciplinary problem solving skills.

AUM3: Inculcate societal responsibility and ethical values through personality development

programs.

AUM4: Focus on Industry-institute interaction, for better understanding of the state of the art

technologies, Promoting research and also to build the spirit of entrepreneurship.

Program Educational Objectives (PEOs) Program Educational Objectives (PEOs) are broad statements that describe the career and

professional accomplishments that the program is preparing the graduates to achieve. The PEOs for

the program describe accomplishments that graduates are expected to achieve within three to five

years after graduation,

PEO1: To prepare Graduates to pursue a successful career in automotive and allied industries and/or

to pursue higher education and/or to become entrepreneur.

PEO2: To develop expertise in the core area of automobile engineering such as design,

manufacturing, and servicing with a focus on research and innovation for the benefit of the

society.

PEO3: To enable graduates to apply interdisciplinary engineering knowledge to solve practical

automobile engineering problems.

PEO4: To prepare graduates to demonstrate professionalism, team work, communication skills,

ethical conduct, and societal responsibility and adapt to current trends by engaging in

lifelong learning.

Programme Outcomes (POs)

By the time of graduation, students will have:

1 Engineering knowledge: Apply the knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering

fundamentals, and an engineering specialization to the solution of complex engineering

problems.

2 Problem analysis: Identify, formulate, review research literature, and analyze complex

engineering problems reaching substantiated conclusions using first principles of mathematics,

natural sciences, and engineering sciences.

3 Design/development of solutions: Design solutions for complex engineering problems and

design system components or processes that meet the specified needs with appropriate

consideration for the public health and safety, and the cultural, societal, and environmental

considerations.

4 Conduct investigations of complex problems: Use research-based knowledge and research

methods including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data, and synthesis of

the information to provide valid conclusions.

5 Modern tool usage: Create, select, and apply appropriate techniques, resources, and modern

engineering and IT tools including prediction and modeling to complex engineering activities

with an understanding of the limitations.

6 The engineer and society: Apply reasoning informed by the contextual knowledge to assess

societal, health, safety, legal and cultural issues and the consequent responsibilities relevant to

the professional engineering practice.

7 Environment and sustainability: Understand the impact of the professional engineering

solutions in societal and environmental contexts, and demonstrate the knowledge of, and need

for sustainable development.

8 Ethics: Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and responsibilities and

norms of the engineering practice.

9 Individual and team work: Function effectively as an individual, and as a member or leader

in diverse teams, and in multidisciplinary settings.

10 Communication: Communicate effectively on complex engineering activities with the

engineering community and with society at large, such as, being able to comprehend and write

effective reports and design documentation, make effective presentations, and give and receive

clear instructions.

11 Project management and finance: Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the

engineering and management principles and apply these to one’s own work, as a member and

leader in a team, to manage projects and in multidisciplinary environments.

12 Life-long learning: Recognize the need for, and have the preparation and ability to engage in

independent and life-long learning in the broadest context of technological change.

Programme Specific Outcomes (PSOs) Specific skills enhanced in this programme can enable the Graduates to

PSO1. Apply the basic and advanced knowledge of automobile, manufacturing, materials and

thermal engineering to analyze and solve a realistic/practical problem.

PSO2. Design basic automotive systems and make use of advanced automotive systems to improve

the performance, safety, maintenance and management of automobiles.

PSO3. Use modern tools and carry out research in automotive domain for providing solutions to

automotive and societal issues.

PES COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING, MANDYA (Autonomous Institution affiliated to Visvesvaraya Technological University, Belagavi)

SCHEME OF TEACHING AND EXAMINATION

V SEMESTER B.E. AUTOMOBILE ENGINEERING

Sl.

No

Subject

Code Title of the Subject

Teaching

Dept.

Credit

Pattern

L : T : P:H

Total

Credits

Examination

Marks

CIE SEE Total

1 P15AU 51 Industrial Management and Entrepreneurship AUTO 4:0:0:4 4 50 50 100

2 P15AU 52 Design of Machines Elements-I AUTO 3:2:0:5 4 50 50 100

3 P15AU 53 Automotive Engines and Components AUTO 4:0:0:4 4 50 50 100

4 P15AU 54 Theory of Machines-II AUTO 3:2:0:5 4 50 50 100

5 P15AU 55 Foundation Elective AUTO 4:0:0:4 3 50 50 100

6 P15AU 56 Elective-I AUTO 4:0:0:4 3 50 50 100

7 P15AU L57 Engine and Components Lab AUTO 1:0:2:3 1.5 50 50 100

8 P15AU L58 Modelling and Analysis Lab AUTO 1:0:2:3 1.5 50 50 100

9 P15AU59 Industrial Visit & Interaction AUTO 0:0:2:2 1 50 - 50

10 P15AU510 Aptitude and Reasoning Development- Advance(ARDA) HS & M 2:0:0:2 1 50 50 100

Total 27 500 450 950

List of Electives

Foundation Elective Elective-1

Sl. No. Course Code Course Title Sl. No. Course Code Course Title

1 P15AU551 Auxiliary System of Automotive Engines 1 P15AU561 Automotive Fuel and Combustion

2 P15AU552 Manufacture of Automobile Components 2 P15AU562 CAD/CAM

3 P15AU553 Advanced Material Science 3 P15AU563 Non Traditional Machining

4 P15AU554 Mechtronics & Microprocessor 4 P15AU564 Gas turbine

VI SEMESTER B.E. AUTOMOBILE ENGINEERING

Sl.

No.

Subject

Code Title of the Subject

Teaching

Dept.

Credit

Pattern

L : T : P:H

Total

Credits

Examination

Marks

CIE SEE Total

1 P15AU 61 Automotive Chassis and Suspension AUTO 4:0:0:4 4 50 50 100

2 P15AU 62 Automotive Transmission AUTO 4:0:0:4 4 50 50 100

3 P15AU 63 Design of Machines Elements-II AUTO 3:2:0:5 4 50 50 100

4 P15AU 64 Mechanical Vibrations AUTO 3:2:0:5 4 50 50 100

5 P15AU 65 Elective II AUTO 4:0:0:4 3 50 50 100

6 P15AU 66 Elective III AUTO 4:0:0:4 3 50 50 100

7 P15AU L67 Automotive Chassis and Transmission Lab AUTO 1:0:2:3 1.5 50 50 100

8 P15AU L68 Automotive Electricals and Autotronics Lab AUTO 1:0:2:3 1.5 50 50 100

9 P15AU69 Mini Project AUTO 0:0:2:2 1 50 - 50

10 P15AU610 Aptitude and Reasoning Development- Expert(ARDE)

HS & M 2:0:0:2 1 50 50 100

Total 27 500 450 950

List of Electives Elective-II Elective-III

Sl. No. Course Code Course Title Sl. No. Course Code Course Title

1 P15AU651 Automotive Electrics and Autotron ics 1 P15AU661 Operations Research

2 P15AU652 Theory of Elasticity 2 P15AU662 Two and Three Wheeled Vehicles

3 P15AU653 Non destructive testing 3 P15AU663 Total Quality Management

4 P15AU654 Automotive Air Conditioning 4 P15AU664 Computer Integrated Manufacturing

Evaluation Scheme for Theory Subjects

Scheme Weightage Marks Event Break Up

CIE 50% 50 Test I Test II Quiz I Quiz II Assignment

35 35 5 5 10

SEE 50% 100 Questions to Set: 10 Questions to Answer: 5

Scheme of SEE Question Paper (100 Marks)

Duration: 3Hrs Marks: 100 Weightage: 50%

Each of the two questions set shall be so comprehensive as to cover the entire contents of the unit.

There will be direct choice between the two questions within each Unit

Total questions to be set are 10. All carry equal marks of 20

The number of subdivisions in each main question shall be limited to three only

Number of questions to be answered by students is 5

Evaluation Scheme for Practical Subjects

CIE SEE ( three hour duration of 50 Marks)

Assessment Weightage in Marks Sl. No. Marks allotment

TEST I 20 1 Procedure & Conduction 40 Marks

TEST II 20

Record 10 2 Viva 10Marks

Total 50 Total 50 Marks

DEPARTMENT OF AUTOMOBILE ENGINEERING

P E S College of Engineering, Mandya 571 401 (An Autonomous Institution Under VTU Belgaum)

[CBCS with OBE] P15 series Automobile Engineering. Syllabus of 241

FIFTH SEMESTER

Course Title: INDUSTRIAL MANAGEMENT AND ENTREPRENEURSHIP

Total Contact Hours: 52 CourseCode:P15AU51 L:T:P:H- 4:0:0:4 Credits:4

CIE marks: 50: SEE marks: 50 Duration of Exam: 3 Hrs.

Prerequisites:

Subject requires student to know about Basic Knowledge about management concepts and

Entrepreneurial knowledge.

COURSE LEARNING OBJECTIVES (CLO) :

This Course Aims to:

1. Explain fundamental understanding of management, nature scope, and functions of a manager

and development of management thought. Also explain planning and decision making processes.

2. Explain the organizational structure, departmentation, staffing and leading processes.

3. Describe the conceptual understanding of motivation and different control systems in

management.

4. Understanding of Entrepreneurships and Entrepreneurship development process.

5. Illustrate Small Scale Industries, various types of supporting agencies and financing available

for an entrepreneur.

6. Summarize the preparation of project report, need significance of report. Also to explain about

industrial ownership.

Relevance of the course:

Industrial Management and Entrepreneurship is a management course in BE (Automobile

engineering) program which Provide a fundamental understanding of management, Planning,

organizing, staffing, directing and controlling.. These are essential in Industries to get

managerial skills. The course also aims to provide basic understanding of Entrepreneurships and

to create awareness about various types of supporting agencies and financing available for an

entrepreneur and to impart strategies to be followed in managing and growing new venture. It

also helps in preparing project report and to know about Industrial ownership.

COURSE CONTENT

UNIT-I

MANAGEMENT: Introduction - Meaning - Nature And Characteristics Of Management, Scope

And Functional Areas Of Management, - Management As An Art Or Science, Art Or Profession,

Management & Administration - Roles Of Management, Levels Of Management, Development

Of Management Thought - Early Management Approaches - Modern Management Approaches.

PLANNING: Nature, Importance And Purpose Of Planning Process Objectives - Types Of

Plans (Meaning Only) - Decision Making - Importance Of Planning - Steps In Planning &

Planning Premises - Hierarchy Of Plans. 11 Hour

UNIT-II

ORGANISING AND STAFFING: Nature And Purpose Of Organization Principles Of

Organization - Types Of Organization – Departmentation-Committees - Centralization Vs

Decentralization Of Authority And Responsibility - Span Of Control- MBO And MBE (Meaning

‘Only) Nature And Importance Of Staffing - Process Of Selection &Recruitment (In Brief).

DIRECTING; Meaning And Nature Of Directing Leadership Styles, Motivation Theories,

Communication - Meaning And Importance - Coordination, Meaning And Importance And

Techniques Of Co Ordination. 10 Hours

UNIT-III

CONTROLLING: Meaning And Steps In Controlling - Essentials Of A Sound Control System




- Methods Of Establishing Control (In Brief)

ENTREPRENEUR: Meaning Of Entrepreneur; Evolution Of The Concept, Functions Of An

Entrepreneur, Types Of Entrepreneur, Entrepreneur – An Emerging Class. Concept Of

Entrepreneurship – Evolution Of Entrepreneurship, Development Of Entrepreneurship; Stages

In Entrepreneurial Process; Role Of Entrepreneurs In Economic Development;

Entrepreneurship In India; Barriers To Entrepreneurship. 10 Hours

UNIT-IV

SMALL SCALE INDUSTRY: Definition; Characteristics; Need And Rationale: Objectives;

Scope; Role Of SSI In Economic Development. Advantages Of SSI, Steps To Start An SSI -

Government Policy Towards SSI; Different Policies Of S.S.L; Government Support For S.S.L

During 5 Year Plans, Impact Of Liberalization, Privatization, Globalization On S.S.I., Effect Of

WTO/GATT Supporting Agencies Of Government For S.S.L, Meaning; Nature Of Support;

Objectives; Functions; Types Of Help; Ancillary Industry And Tiny Industry (Definition Only).

FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT: Evolution Of Financial Management, Financial Decisions In

Firm, Goals, Forms Of Business Organization, Risk- Return Tradeoff.

RISK AND REQUIRED RETURN: Risk And Return Relationship, Business Risk,

Financial Risk, And Risk In Portfolio Context, Expected Rate Of Return, Capital Asset Pricing

Model.

SELF STUDY: INSTITUTIONAL SUPPORT:

Different Schemes; TECKSOK; KIADB; KSSIDC; KSIMC; DIC

Single Window Agency: SISI; NSIC; SIDBI,KSFC. 10 Hours

UNIT-V

PREPARATION OF PROJECT: Meaning Of Project; Project Identification; Project

Selection; Project Report; Need And Significance Of Report; Contents; Formulation; Guidelines

By Planning Commission For Project Report; Network Analysis; Errors Of Project Report;

Project Appraisal. Identification Of. Business Opportunities: Market Feasibility Study;

Technical Feasibility Study; Financial Feasibility Study & Social Feasibility Study.

INDUSTRIAL OWNERSHIP; Definition And Meaning Of Partnership, Characteristics Of

Partnership, Kinds Of Partners, Partnership Agreement Or Partnership Deed, Registration Of

Partnership Firm, Rights, Duties And Liabilities Of Partners, Advantages And Disadvantages Of

Partnership, Sole Proprietorship, Features, Scope Advantages And Disadvantages Of Sole

Proprietorship. 11 Hours

TEXT BOOKS:

1. P.C. Tripathi, P.N. Reddy “Principles of Management” -; Tata McGraw Hill, 4th Edition,

2012

2. Vansant Desai “Dynamics of Entrepreneurial Development & Management” Himalaya

Publishing House 2009

3. Poornima M Charantimath “Small Business Enterprises”-- Pearson Education – 2006 (2 &

4)

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Robert Lusier - Thomson Management Fundamentals - Concepts, Application, Skill

Development 2015

2. S S Khanka, Entrepreneurship Development - - S Chand & Co, 2006

3. N.V.R.Naidu, T.KrishnaRao- Management and Entrepreneurship-, I.K.International

Publishing House Pvt.Ltd. 2010




COURSE OUTCOMES (COs) :

1. Demonstrate an ability to apply general management know-how in practical business

situations

2. Draw upon specialist know-how, deploying concepts and sources incisively and with

sensitivity

3. Demonstrate the ability to manage people, processes, and resources within a diverse

organization

4. Demonstrate the ability to identify and evaluate business opportunities and trends

5. Summarize the preparation of project report, significance of report.

UNIT WISE PLAN

UNIT-I

TOPIC LEARNING OBJECTIVES (TLO): At the end of this chapter student should be able to:

Define management and planning (L1).

Explain the functions of management (L2)

Explain the scope of management (L2).

List the nature and characteristics of management (L1).

Differentiate between administration and management (L2).

List and explain the roles and levels of management (L1).

Describe management as an art or science, art or profession (L3).

Discuss in brief the nature of management (L2).

Explain early management approaches (L2).

Explain the modern management approaches (L2).

Explain the steps involved in planning (L2).

Explain the importance and purpose of planning process (L2).

List and explain the objectives of planning (L1).

Explain briefly the types of planning (L2).

Describe the process of decision making (L2).

Explain the steps in decision making (L2).

Explain briefly hierarchy of plans (L2).

LESSON SCHEDULE

Class no. Portions Covered/hour

1. MANAGEMENT: Introduction - Meaning - nature and characteristics of Management,

2. Scope and functional areas of management,

3. Management as an art or science, art or profession, Management & Administration,

4. Roles of Management, Levels of Management,

5. Development of Management Thought-

6. Early management approaches - Modern management approaches

7. PLANNING: Nature, importance and purpose of planning process,

8. Objectives - Types of plans (Meaning only),

9. Decision making - Importance of planning,

10. Steps in planning & planning premises,

11 Hierarchy of plans, Revision.




UNIT-II

TOPIC LEARNING OBJECTIVES (TLO): At the end this chapter student should be able to:

Explain the nature and purpose of organization (L2).

Describe the principles of organization (L2).

List the different types of organizations (L1).

Explain the different types of organization charts (L2).

List the advantages and disadvantages of line and staff organization (L1).

Explain the principles of committees (L2).

Enumerate the merits Explain the nature and purpose of organization (L2).

Describe the principles of organization (L2).

List the different types of organizations (L1).

Explain the different types of organization charts (L2).

List the advantages and disadvantages of line and staff organization (L1).

Explain the principles of committees (L2).

Enumerate the merits and demerits of centralization and decentralization (L2).

Explain the process of delegation and difficulties in delegation (L2).

Explain span of control (L2).

List management by objectives (MBO) and management by exception (MBE) (L1).

Differentiate between MBO and MBE (L2).

Describe the nature and importance of staffing (L2).

Explain the techniques of selection (L2).

Explain meaning and nature of directing (L2).

Describe principles of leadership (L2).

Describe about Maslow’s theory of motivation (L2).

Define communication. Explain different systems of communication (L2).

Explain the importance of coordination (L2).

LESSON SCHEDULE


1. ORGANISING AND STAFFING: Nature and purpose of organization,

2. Principles of organization - Types of organization,

3. Departmentation-Committees,

4. Centralization Vs Decentralization of authority and responsibility,

5. Span of control- MBO and MBE (Meaning ‘only),

6. Nature and importance of Staffing - Process of Selection &Recruitment (in brief).

7. DIRECTING; Meaning and nature of directing Leadership styles,

8. Motivation Theories,

9. Communication - Meaning and importance,

10. Coordination, meaning and importance and Techniques of Co ordination.

UNIT-III


Define controlling (L1).

Describe the steps in controlling (L2).

List the essentials of sound controlling (L1).

Define entrepreneurship and explain its model (L1).

Explain the evolution of concept of entrepreneurship (L2).

List the qualities and characteristics of entrepreneur (L1).

Explain the functions of entrepreneur (L2).

List out the types of entrepreneur (L1).




Explain the meaning and role of intrapreneur (L2).

Differentiate between entrepreneur, intrapreneur and manager (L3).

Explain the concept of entrepreneurship (L2).

Describe about evolution of entrepreneurship (L2).

Explain the development of entrepreneurship (L2).

List and explain the various stages of entrepreneurship processes (L2).

Explain the role of entrepreneur in economic development (L2).

LESSON SCHEDULE


1 CONTROLLING: Meaning and steps in controlling,

2 Essentials of a sound control system,

3 Methods of establishing control (in brief),

4 ENTREPRENEUR: Meaning of Entrepreneur; Evolution of the Concept,

5 Functions of an Entrepreneur, Types of Entrepreneur,

6 Entrepreneur – an emerging class. Concept of Entrepreneurship,

7 Evolution of Entrepreneurship, Development of Entrepreneurship,

8 Stages in entrepreneurial process,

9 Role of entrepreneurs in Economic Development; Entrepreneurship in India,

10 Barriers to entrepreneurship, Revision.

UNIT-IV


Define Small scale Industry, Ancillary Industry and Tiny Industries (L1).

List and explain the characteristics of SSIs (L2).

Explain need and rationale of SSIs (L2)

Explain the Scope and objectives of SSIs (L2).

Explain the role of SSI in economic development (L2).

List the advantages of SSIs (L1).

Explain the steps to start SSIs (L2).

Explain various Government policies towards SSIs (L2).

Describe briefly Government support to SSIs during 5 year plans (L2).

Explain the Impact of Liberalization, Privatization and Globalization on SSIs (L2).

Explain the functions of WTO and its impact on trade (L2).

Describe about GATT and list their advantages (L3).

List the various supporting agencies of government to SSIs (L1).

Discuss the necessity if institutional support to the SSIs (L2).

Explain the role of SSIDC in developing the small-scale industries (L2).

Explain the roles of DICs, IDBI/SIDBI (L2).

Explain the role of KSFC (L2).

Explain the role and help extended by SISIs in developing SSIs (L2).

LESSON SCHEDULE

Class No. Portions Covered/hour

1. SMALL SCALE INDUSTRY: Definition; Characteristics; Need and rationale,

2. Objectives; Scope; role of SSI in Economic Development. Advantages of SSI,

3. Steps to start an SSI - Government policy towards SSI,

4. Different Policies of S.S.L; Government Support for S.S.I during 5 year plans,

5. Impact of Liberalization, Privatization, Globalization on S.S.I., Effect of

WTO/GATT,




6. Supporting Agencies of Government for S.S.I, Meaning; Nature of Support,

Objectives;

7. Functions; Types of Help; Ancillary Industry and Tiny Industry (Definition only).

8. Financial Management:Evolution of Financial Management, Financial Decisions in

firm,

9. Goals, Forms of business organization, Risk- Return Tradeoff.

10. RISK AND REQUIRED RETURN: Risk and return relationship, Business

risk,

11. Financial risk, and risk in portfolio context, expected rate of return, Capital asset

pricing model.

UNIT-V


Classify and define the project (L1).

Explain the Phase of project Identification with its sources (L2).

Describe about selection of project (L2).

Explain the need and significance of project report (L2).

Describe project formulation process (L3).

Explain the contents of project report (L2).

List the guidelines of Planning Commission for project report (L2).

Explain network analysis. What are various techniques used for network analysis (L2).

Explain PERT. What are its advantages and disadvantages (L2).

Explain CPM.What are its advantages and disadvantages (L2).

List and explain common errors in project report (L1).

Explain the process of project appraisal (L2).

Describe about market feasibility, financial feasibility, technical feasibility and social

feasibility studies (L3).

Explain the characteristics of partnership (L2).

List the advantages and disadvantages of partnership (L1).

Name and explain the various kinds of partnership (L2).

Explain the features of sole proprietorship (L2).

Enumerate the advantages and disadvantages sole proprietorship (L2).

LESSON SCHEDULE

Class No. Portions Covered/hour

1. PREPARATION OF PROJECT: Meaning of Project; Project Identification,

2. Project Selection; Project Report; Need and Significance of Report; Contents

3. formulation; Guidelines by Planning Commission for Project report; Network Analysis

4. Errors of Project Report; Project Appraisal. Identification of. Business Opportunities

5. Market Feasibility Study; Technical Feasibility Study

6. Financial Feasibility Study & Social Feasibility Study

7. INDUSTRIAL OWNERSHIP; Definition and meaning of Partnership

8. Characteristics of Partnership, Kinds of Partners, Partnership Agreement or Partnership

Deed

9. Registration of Partnership Firm, Rights, Duties and Liabilities of Partners

10. Advantages and Disadvantages of Partnership, Sole proprietorship, Features

11. Scope Advantages and Disadvantages of Sole Proprietorship.

REVIEW QUESTIONS:

UNIT-I

1. Define management and planning (L1).




2. Explain the functions of management (L2)

3. Explain the scope of management (L2).

4. List the nature and characteristics of management (L1).

5. Differentiate between administration and management (L2).

6. List and explain the roles and levels of management (L1).

7. Describe management as an art or science, art or profession (L3).

8. Discuss in brief the nature of management (L2).

9. Explain early management approaches (L2).

10. Explain the modern management approaches (L2).

11. Explain the steps involved in planning (L2).

12. Explain the importance and purpose of planning process (L2).

13. List and explain the objectives of planning (L1).

14. Explain briefly the types of planning (L2).

15. Describe the process of decision making (L2).

16. Explain the steps in decision making (L2).

17. Explain briefly hierarchy of plans (L2).

UNIT-II

1. Explain the nature and purpose of organization (L2).

2. Describe the principles of organization (L2).

3. List the different types of organizations (L1).

4. Explain the different types of organization charts (L2).

5. List the advantages and disadvantages of line and staff organization (L1).

6. Explain the principles of committees (L2).

7. Enumerate the merits and demerits of centralization and decentralization (L2).

8. Explain the process of delegation and difficulties in delegation (L2).

9. Explain span of control (L2).

10. List management by objectives (MBO) and management by exception (MBE) (L1).

11. Differentiate between MBO and MBE (L2).

12. Describe the nature and importance of staffing (L2).

13. Explain the techniques of selection (L2).

14. Explain meaning and nature of directing (L2).

15. Describe principles of leadership (L2).

16. Describe about Maslow’s theory of motivation (L2).

17. Define communication. Explain different systems of communication (L2).

18. Explain the importance of coordination (L2).

UNIT-III

1. Define controlling (L1).

2. Describe the steps in controlling (L2).

3. List the essentials of sound controlling (L1).

4. Define entrepreneurship and explain its model (L1).

5. Explain the evolution of concept of entrepreneurship (L2).

6. List the qualities and characteristics of entrepreneur (L1).

7. Explain the functions of entrepreneur (L2).

8. List out the types of entrepreneur (L1).

9. Explain the meaning and role of intrapreneur (L2).

10. Differentiate between entrepreneur, intrapreneur and manager (L3).

11. Explain the concept of entrepreneurship (L2).

12. Describe about evolution of entrepreneurship (L2).

13. Explain the development of entrepreneurship (L2).

14. List and explain the various stages of entrepreneurship processes (L2).

15. Explain the role of entrepreneur in economic development (L2).




UNIT-IV

1. Define Small scale Industry, Ancillary Industry and Tiny Industries (L1).

2. List and explain the characteristics of SSIs (L2).

3. Explain need and rationale of SSIs (L2)

4. Explain the Scope and objectives of SSIs (L2).

5. Explain the role of SSI in economic development (L2).

6. List the advantages of SSIs (L1).

7. Explain the steps to start SSIs (L2).

8. Explain various Government policies towards SSIs (L2).

9. Describe briefly Government support to SSIs during 5 year plans (L2).

10. Explain the Impact of Liberalization, Privatization and Globalization on SSIs (L2).

11. Explain the functions of WTO and its impact on trade (L2).

12. Describe about GATT and list their advantages (L3).

13. List the various supporting agencies of government to SSIs (L1).

14. Discuss the necessity if institutional support to the SSIs (L2).

15. Explain the role of SSIDC in developing the small-scale industries (L2).

16. Explain the roles of DICs, IDBI/SIDBI (L2).

17. Explain the role of KSFC (L2).

18. Explain the role and help extended by SISIs in developing SSIs (L2).

UNIT-V 1. Classify and define the project (L1).

2. Explain the Phase of project Identification with its sources (L2).

3. Describe about selection of project (L2).

4. Explain the need and significance of project report (L2).

5. Describe project formulation process (L3).

6. Explain the contents of project report (L2).

7. List the guidelines of Planning Commission for project report (L2).

8. Explain network analysis. What are various techniques used for network analysis (L2).

9. Explain PERT. What are its advantages and disadvantages (L2).

10. Explain CPM.What is its advantages and disadvantages (L2).

11. List and explain common errors in project report (L1).

12. Explain the process of project appraisal (L2).

13. Describe about market feasibility, financial feasibility, technical feasibility and social

feasibility studies (L3).

14. Explain the characteristics of partnership (L2).

15. List the advantages and disadvantages of partnership (L1).

16. Name and explain the various kinds of partnership (L2).

17. Explain the features of sole proprietorship (L2).

18. Enumerate the advantages and disadvantages sole proprietorship (L2).




Course Articulation Matrix

Mapping of Course Outcomes (CO) with Program Outcomes (POs) and Program

Specific Outcomes (PSOs)

Sl.

No. Course Outcome

Programme Outcomes

Programme

Specific

outcomes

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

1

Demonstrate an ability to apply general

management know-how in practical

business situations

3 2 -

- 1 -

- 3 - - 3 - -

2

Draw upon specialist know-how,

deploying concepts and sources

incisively and with sensitivity

3 2 - - - 1 - 3 2 3 - 1 3 - -

3

Demonstrate the ability to manage

people, processes, and resources within

a diverse organization

3 2 - - - 1 - 1 3 3 1 1 3 - -

4

Demonstrate the ability to identify and

evaluate business opportunities and

trends

3 2 - - - 1 - 2 2 3 2 2 3 - -

5 Summarize the preparation of project

report, significance of report. 3 2 - - - 1 - 2 2 2 2 3 3 - -




Model Question Paper

Industrial Management and Entrepreneurship-(P15AU51)

Answer any Five full questions selecting at least one full question from each

Unit

UNIT - I

1 a. In detail explain the controlling function of management. 6

b. Explain the system approach to management. 6

c. Explain briefly Henri Fayol’s principle of management. 8

2 a. Explain briefly about strategic planning and tactical planning processes. 6

b. Differentiate between single – use plans and standing plans. 6

c. Describe the steps involved in planning process. 8

UNIT - II

3 a. Explain the characteristics of an organization. 6

b. Explain the concept of Departmentalization with an example. 6

c. Describe the sources of Recruitment by citing their advantages and limitations. 8

4 a. Explain briefly about Herzberg’s two – factors theory of motivation. 6

b. Describe the communication process and the barriers to communication. 6

c. Explain in detail Autocratic, Democratic and Freerein leadership styles. 8

UNIT - III

5 a. Explain the following control techniques,

i) Financial statements and Ratio Analysis

ii) PERT and CPM

6

b. Describe briefly about Break – even Analysis. 6

c. Explain about different types of budgets and advantages of Prudgetary control 8

6 a. Explain the role of Entrepreneurs in Economic development. 6

b. List and describe various barriers to entrepreneurship. 6

c. Describe the stages of Entrepreneurial process. 8

UNIT - IV

7 a. Explain the Role of SSI in economic development. 6

b. Describe the steps to start an SSI. 6

c. Explain the features and objectives of small scale industries. 8

8 a. Explain briefly about KSFC, KIADB. 6

b. Describe about SIDBI. 6

c. Explain about SISI (Small Industgries Service Institutres) in detail. 8

UNIT -V

9 a. What do you mean by project and what are its features? 6

b. Explain about the analysis of technical and engineering aspects of a project. 6

c. Describe the key steps in Market and Demand analysis. 8

10 a. Explain the characteristics of Partnership. 6

b. Describe in detail about sole proprietorship. 6

c. Explain briefly about Registration of Partnership firm. 8

Contd…2




Course Title: DESIGN OF MACHINE ELEMENTS-I

Course Code: P15AU52 Semester: 5 L:T:P:H- 3:2:0:5 Credits:4

Contact period : Lecture: 52 Hrs., Exam 3 Hrs. Weightage : CIE:50%; SEE:50%

Prerequisites:

Subject requires student to know about the knowledge of the fundamentals of Engineering

Mathematics, Engg physics, Mechanics of Materials, Engineering Drawing, Workshop

Processes, Theory of Machines and Material Science

COURSE LEARNING OBJECTIVES (CLOS)

This Course aims to:

a) Define and explain various terms connected to the design of machine elements-I like

static strength, fatigue strength, Impact stresses, theories of failures, rigidity based

design, factor of safety, and stress concentration etc.

b) Demonstrate how engineering design make use of the principles learnt in science courses

and identify their practical applications.

c) Develop problem-solving skill in design of machine elements using appropriate

assumptions and correct methodology.

d) Consider environmental impact of the design and take measures to avoid environmental

deterioration.

e) Work on the given assignment and to get first hand information and also be able to

present and submit a brief report.


1. Get expertise in the selection of material for designing a particular machine element

2. Design machine element based on static and dynamic strengths.

3. Identify the type of joints required for a particular application and to design as per ASME

standards

COURSE CONTENT

UNIT –I

INTRODUCTION:

Basic design procedure, types of machine design, design consideration, codes and standards, stress –

strain diagrams. Design against static loading, modes of failure, factor of safety, design of simple

machine members subjected to static loading including eccentric load, limited to biaxial stresses

(normal, shear, bending, torsional, crushing/bearing), principal stresses.

THEORIES OF FAILURE - Maximum normal stress theory, Maximum shear stress theory,

Distortion energy theory.

IMPACT STRENGTH: Introduction, Impact stresses due to axial, bending and torsional loads,

effect of inertia. 10 Hrs

UNIT –II

DESIGN FOR FATIGUE STRENGTH: Stress concentration, Stress concentration factors,

Reduction of Stress concentration, fluctuating stresses, fatigue and endurance limit, S-N Diagram,

Low cycle & High cycle fatigue, notch sensitivity, endurance limit ,modifying factors; load, size

and surface factors, Stress concentration effects; design for infinite life, combined steady and

variable stress, Soderberg and Goodman relationship, stresses due to combined loading, cumulative

fatigue damage.

Case studies:

a) Bicycle Brake Lever Loading and failure Analysis

b) Hand-Operated Crimping-Tool Loading and failure Analysis

c) Automobile Scissors-Jack Loading and failure Analysis

d) Bicycle Brake Arm Loading and Analysis. 10 Hrs

UNIT –III

DESIGN OF COTTER JOINT, KNUCKLE JOINT AND COUPLINGS: Design of

Cotter and Knuckle joints , Design of keys, , flange coupling, Bush - Pin type coupling.




DESIGN OF SHAFTS: Transmission shaft, shaft design on strength and rigidity basis,

ASME code for shaft design, Design of Hollow shaft. 12 Hrs

UNIT –IV

RIVETED JOINTS: Types of riveted joints, failures of riveted joints, efficiency, and boiler

Joints, structural joints, eccentrically loaded riveted joints.

WELDED JOINTS: Types, Strength of butt and fillet joints, welds, eccentrically loaded

welded joints. 10 Hrs

UNIT – V

THREADED JOINTS: Introduction, basic terminology of screw threads, types of screw

threads, types of screw fastenings, designations of screw threads, Stresses in threaded

fasteners due to static loading, Effect of initial tension, threaded joints for cylinder covers,

design of eccentrically loaded bolted joints

POWER SCREWS: Introduction, Types of screw threads used for power screws, Design of

Power Screws, efficiency, self-locking and over hauling 10 Hrs

TEXT BOOKS:

1. T Krishna Rao, Design of Machine Elements –I, I K International Publishing house

Pvt.Ltd., New Delhi, 2013

2. V.B.Bhandari – Design of Machine Elements third edition, Tata McGraw Hill

Education Private Limited, New Delhi, 2016

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Hall, Holowenko, Laughlin (Schaum’s Outlines series), Machine Design, Adapted by

S.K. Somani, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi, Special Indian

Edition, 2008

2. Joseph E Shigley and Charles R. Mischke., Mechanical Engineering Design, McGraw

Hill International edition, 2003.

3. Robert.L.Norton, Machine Design , An integrated Approach, Pearson Education Asia,

2001

Design Data Hand Book:

1. K. Mahadevan and K.Balaveera Reddy,Design Data Hand Book by, CBS

Publication, 2013

Note: All the Case studies are only for CIE Assessment purpose only

COURSE OUTCOMES (COS)

At the end of the course student will be able to:

1. Explain basic design concept and Analyze the various modes of failure of machine

components under different static and impact load conditions and use appropriate

theories of failures to design machine components

2. Compute the dimensions of the machine components subjected to dynamic loads

3. Design shafts as per ASME standards and Design mechanical joints such as Cotter,

Knuckle joint and couplings

4. Design typical riveted joints and welded joints for boiler and structural applications

5. Select standard thread elements and design power screws for different applications

UNIT WISE PLAN

UNIT-I

TOPIC LEARNING OBJECTIVES (TLO):

At the end of the Unit-I student should be able to:

Define Machine Design. [L1]

Distinguish between different engineering materials & their properties, Codes &

Standards. [L2]

Identify the elements of the design process. [L1]




Use material properties data for strength, stiffness, and ductility in the analysis and

design of achine elements to insure safe operation. [L2]

Describe the basic procedure of Machine Design. [L1]

Define and explain factory of safety [L2]]

Design for static strength and evaluate design parameters such as deflection, stress &

strains. .[ L2]

Stress Analysis of bi-axial, tri-axial loading[L3]

Simple numerical problems involving the above.[ L3]

Evaluate loading and stress results using principal shear stress criterion. [L3]

Identify the stresses acting on a surface and find principal stresses.[L2]

State and explain Maximum Principal Stress Theory, Maximum Shear Stress Theory and

Distortion-Energy Theory. [L2]

Compare the theories of failure and suggest their usage [L2, L3]

Define Impact stresses. [L1]

Design machine elements for impact strength &compare with static strength. .[L3]

Solve the problems for impact type of loading of a machine component for a given data.

[L3]

LESSON SCHEDULE


1. Introduction to machine design, Basic design procedure, types of machine design, design

consideration,

2. Codes and standards, stress – strain diagrams.

3. Design against static loading, modes of failure, factor of safety,

4. design of simple machine members subjected to static loading including eccentric load,

5. Limited to biaxial stresses (normal, shear, bending, torsional, crushing/bearing), principal

stresses.

6. Theories of failures

7. Numerical on theories of failures

8. Numerical on theories of failures

9. Impact stresses due to axial, bending and torsional loads, effect of inertia

10. Problems on Impact loading

UNIT – II

TOPIC LEARNING OBJECTIVES (TLO) At the end of the Unit 2, student will be able to:

Know how to account for stress concentration in design of the machine parts [L2]

Evaluate stress concentration factor and hence calculate the maximum stresses induced in

the machine elements when subjected to various loading conditions[L3]

Use different methods of reducing stress concentration in machine components. [L3]

Distinguish between fatigue strength and static strength.[L1]

Define fluctuating, repeated and reversed stresses.[L1]

S-N Diagrams, endurance limit, endurance strength and modifying factors[L2]

Analyze and design a mechanical component for both steady and time-varying loads

(cyclic fatigue), and account for the presence of stress raisers, surface finish, component

size, type of load, environment and other factors [L4]

Calculate stresses and loads involved with fatigue effect [L3]

Create a Soderberg endurance failure line [L2]

Calculate the endurance limit of a material with appropriate corrections. [L2]

Differentiate Low and High cycle fatigue. [L2]

Define fatigue stress concentration factor, notch sensitivity, and notch sensitivity factor.

[L2]




Calculate the endurance limit of a material with appropriate corrections. [L2]

Fluctuating stresses, Goodman and Soderberg’s equations. [L3]

Stresses due to combined fatigue loading, cumulative fatigue damage. [L3]

LESSON SCHEDULE


1. Stress concentration, Stress concentration factors, Reduction of Stress concentration

2. fluctuating stresses, fatigue and endurance limit, S-N Diagram

3. Low cycle & High cycle fatigue, notch sensitivity, endurance limit ,modifying factors; load,

size and surface factors

4. Stress concentration effects; design for infinite life,

5. combined steady and variable stress, Soderberg and Goodman relationship,

6. stresses due to combined loading, cumulative fatigue damage

7. Numerical problems




UNIT – III:

TOPIC LEARNING OBJECTIVES (TLO) At the end of Unit-III student should be able to:

Define cotter and knuckle joints and their purpose in machine assembly. [L2]

Demonstrate the procedure for cotter and knuckle joint. [L3]

List different types of keys used in transmission of shaft. [L1]

Determine hub and shaft key dimensions. [L3]

Summarize the advantages and disadvantages of different types of keys. [L2]

Illustrate the requirements of coupling in a machine element. [L2]

Discuss different types of couplings and their applications[L2]

Design and Sketch rigid type and Bushed-Pin flexible Coupling for a given data. [L4]

List the advantages and disadvantages of bushed –pin flexible coupling. [L1]

List different types of the shafts with their applications [L1]

Design and Analyze transmission shafts subjected to torque, bending and axial loading.

[L4]

Use ASME code for shaft design [L2]

Differentiate hollow shaft and solid shaft with respect to strength and stiffness [L3]

LESSON SCHEDULE


1. Transmission Shafts, Shaft Design on Strength Basis, Shaft Design on Torsional

rigidity Basis

2. ASME Code for shaft design and numerical problems



5. Design of Hollow Shaft on Strength and Torsional rigidity basis


7. Keys, Sunk Key, Design of Square and flat keys.

8. Numerical Examples

9. Design of cotter joint

10. Design of Knuckle joint

11. Design of flange coupling and Bush-pin type coupling

12. Numerical Problems




UNIT – IV

TOPIC LEARNING OBJECTIVES (TLO)

At the end of Unit-IV student should be able to:

Demonstrate different types of riveted joints. [L1]

Discuss with aid of neat sketches, different failure modes of riveted joints. [L2]

Evaluate the efficiency of riveted joints[L3]

Design riveted joints for boilers as per IBR Act[L4]

Describe the concept of eccentrically loaded riveted joints. [L2]

Differentiate between parallel and transverse weld [L2]

Design lap and butt welded joints [L3]

Design the eccentrically loaded welded joints [L3]

List different types of Butt joint. [L1]

Write the expression for strength of transverse fillet weld in terms of permissible tensile

stress, leg of weld and length of welded joint. [L2]

Design, Welded Joint Subjected to Torsional moment, Welded Joint Subjected to Bending

moment and Welded Joints Subjected to fluctuating Forces. [L3]

LESSON SCHEDULE


1. Types of riveted joints, failures of riveted joints, efficiency


3. Boiler Joints and Numerical problems

4. Structural Joints and Numerical problems

5. Eccentrically loaded riveted joints.


7. Types of welded joints, Strength of butt and fillet joints welds


9. Eccentrically loaded welded joints


UNIT – V

TOPIC LEARNING OBJECTIVES (TLO) At the end of Unit-V student should be able to:

Describe the applications of threaded fasteners. [L1]

Explain the advantages & disadvantages of threaded screws. [L2]

Evaluate different standard screw joints available in literature. [L3]

Demonstrate the dimensions & designation of threaded screws. [L2]

Describe the function of power screws[L1]

Evaluate the design procedure of screw jack[L4]

Explain application, advantages and disadvantages of power screws. [L1]

Describe why square threads are preferred to V threads in power screws. [L2]

Explain what the condition for self locking in power screws. [L3]

Discuss application, advantages and disadvantages of recalculating ball screws. [L2]

Design the Screw jack for a given lift and load. [L4]

LESSON SCHEDULE

1. Introduction to threaded joints, basic terminology of screw threads, types of screw threads

and screw fastenings, designations of screw threads

2. Stresses in threaded fasteners due to static loading, , Effect of initial tension, Numerical

problems


4. Threaded joints for cylinder covers, design of eccentrically loaded bolted joints





6. Introduction to power screws, Types of screw threads used for power screws

7. Design of Power Screws, efficiency, self-locking and over hauling

8-10Numerical problems

REVIEW QUESTIONS

UNIT – 1

1. What are the steps in machine design process? [L2]

2. Distinguish between design synthesis and design analysis [L3]

3. What is standardization? [L2]

4. Draw the stress strain curve for mild steel and cast iron. Name the salient points. [L3]

5. Define Standardization. State the standards used in machine design. [L2]

6. Draw the stress strain diagrams for a ductile material and brittle material and show the

salient points on them. [L3]

7. What are the important mechanical properties of metals? Explain each of them briefly.[L2,

L3]

8. Design machine members subjected to axial tensile and compressive forces, bending

moments, and torsion. [L4]

9. Evaluate loading and stress results using maximum distortion energy criterion. [L3]

10. Evaluate loading and stress results using principal shear stress criterion. [L3]

11. Identify the stresses acting on a surface and find principal stresses.[L3]

12. Apply three basic modes of failure of mechanical components to solve the engineering

problems.[L3]

13. Define factor of safety. [L1]

14. Describe the necessary of using factor of safety. [L2]

15. State and explain Maximum Principal Stress Theory, Maximum Shear Stress Theory and

Distortion-Energy Theory. [L2]

16. A rod of circular section is to sustain a torsional moment of 300 kN-m and bending moment

of 200 kN-m. Selecting C45 steel (y = 353 MPa) and assuming factor of safety = 3,

determine the diameter of rod as per the following theories of failure. (i) Maximum shear

stress theory ii) Distortion energy theory[L3]

17. Derive an expression for stress induced in a rod due to the axial impact of a weight W

dropped from a height h on to a collar attached at the free end of the rod. What is the stress

due to suddenly applied load? [L3]

18. A 500N weight drops through a height of 25mm and impacts the center of 300mm long

simply supported square steel beam. If the maximum allowable bending stress is 90MPa,

find the dimensions of the beam and the maximum deflection. Neglect the inertia effects and

take E = 200GPa. [L3]

UNIT – 2

1. Compare the theories of failure and suggest their usage [L2, L3]

2. A plate of C45 steel is subjected to the following stresses, x=150 MPa, y=150 Mpa and

xy=50 Mpa. Find the factor of safety by Maximum Principal Stress Theory, Maximum Shear

Stress Theory, and Distortion-Energy Theory. [ L4]

3. Write the following theories of failure. When they are used? A) Maximum normal stress

theory, b) Maximum shear stress theory, c) Distortion energy theory. [L4]

4. What is stress concentration? Give two examples. Show how the stress concentration can be

minimized in these cases.[L2, L3]

5. A bolt is subjected to a direct tensile load of 20kN and a shear load of 15kN. Suggest a

suitable size of the bolt according to: a) Maximum normal stress theory, b) Maximum shear

stress theory, c) Distortion energy theory, if the yield stress in simple tension is 360MPa. A

factor of safety of 3 should be used. [ L4]

6. A cold drawn steel rod of circular cross-section is subjected to a variable bending moment of

565Nm to 1130Nm as the axial load varies from 4500N to 13500N The maximum bending

moment occurs at the same instant that the axial load is maximum. Determine the required




diameter of the rod for a factor of safety 2. Neglect any stress concentration and column

effect. Take u= 550MPa, y = 470MPa, endurance limit as 50% of the ultimate strength

and size, load and surface correction coefficients as 0.85, 1 and 0.85 respectively. [L5]

7. Explain briefly: i. Low cycle fatigue, ii. High cycle fatigue, iii. Endurance limit. [L3]

8. The work cycle of a mechanical component subjected to completely reversed bending

stresses consists of the following three elements: i. 300N/mm2 for 85 % of time, ii.

400N/mm2 for 12 % of time and iii. 500N/mm2 for 3 % of time. The material for the

component is 50C4 (ut=660N/mm2) and the corrected endurance strength of the component

is 250N/mm2. Determine the life of the component. [L3]

9. Derive the Soderberg relation. [L3]

10. Define fluctuating, repeated and reversed stresses [L1]

11. Define fatigue stress concentration factor, notch sensitivity, and notch sensitivity factor.

[L2]

12. A shaft of circular cross section of diameter 1.5d is stepped down to diameter ‘d’ with a fillet

produces an stress concentration factor [Kf] of 1.22. The shaft is subjected to torsion. The

material has a yield point stress as 336 MPa and endurance strength as 375 MPa. Determine

the size of the shaft required for a torque, which varies from 0 to 2.26 kN-m. Use FOS = 2.0.

Take B = C = 0.85, q = 0.9[L3]

13. A shaft is stepped from 1.5d to d with a fillet which produces a theoretical stress

concentration factor of 1.22 for the shaft in torsion. The material has an yield point in shear

as 336 MPa and endurance limit as 375 MPa. Determine the size of the shaft required for a

torque which varies from 0 to 2.26 kN-m. Use FOS = 2.0, Size Factor = 0.85, Surface finish

factor = 0.85 and q = 0.9[L3]

UNIT – 3

1. Enumerate the applications of cotter and knuckle joints[L2]

2. Design a cotter joint to connect two mild steel rods for a pull of 30kN. The maximum

permissible stresses are 55MPa in tension, 40MPain shear, and 70MPa in crushing. Draw a

neat sketch of the joint designed.[L4]

3. Design a Knuckle Joint for a rod of circular section to sustain a maximum pull of 70 kN.

The ultimate strength of the material of the rod against tearing is 420 MPa. The ultimate

strength and shearing strength of the pin material are 510 MPa and 396 MPa respectively.

Take FOS = 6[L4]

4. Discuss the design procedure for spigot and socket cotter joint[L2]

5. Describe the function of a coupling. Give at least 5 practical applications,[L2]

6. What are flexible couplings? List their applications.[L2,L3]

7. Design a cast iron rigid flange coupling for a steel shaft transmitting 15 kW of power at

200 rpm and having an allowable shear stress of 40 N/mm2. The working stress in the bolts

should not exceed 30 N/mm2. Assume that the crushing stress is twice the value of

shear stress. The maximum torque is 25% greater than the mean torque. [L4]

8. Design a rigid flange coupling to transmit a power of 40kW at a rated speed of

1000rpm.[L4]

9. Summarize the advantages and disadvantages of different types of keys. [L3]

10. A bush pin type flexible coupling has four pins of size M16 made of steel having

allowable shear stress of 60MPa. The outside diameter and length of rubber bush on the

pin are 38mm and 45mm respectively. The pins are located on a pitch circle of diameter

200mm. The allowable bearing pressure in the rubber bush is 1.0MPa. If the coupling

rotates 900rpm, calculate the power that can be transmitted. Check whether the size of pin

is acceptable for the power transmitted. [L4]

11. Design a flexible flanged coupling to transmit a power of 50kW at a rated speed of

500rpm. [L4]

12. List different types of the shafts with their applications [L1]

13. Derive an expression for power transmitted by a solid shaft[L3]




14. Compare the power transmitted by a solid shaft and a hollow shaft[L3]

15. Explain torsional rigidity & write the expression for the same.[L2,L3}

16. Explain the basis of ASME & BIS Code for shafting.[L2}

17. A shaft is supported on bearings A and B, 800mm between centers. A 200 straight tooth

spur gear having 600mm pitch diameter is located 20mm to the right of the left hand

bearing A and a 700mm diameter pulley is mounted 250mm towards the left of bearing B.

The gear is driven by a pinion with a downward tangential force while the pulley drives a

horizontal belt having 1800 angle of wrap. The pulley also serves as a flywheel and weighs

2000N. The belt is 150mm wide and 8mm thick and has a tension ratio of 3:1.The

allowable tensile stress in the belt material is 1.75N/mm2. Determine the necessary shaft

diameter if the allowable shear stress of the material is 42N/mm2. Assume Cm=2.0 and

Ct=1.5 [L4]

18. A steel shaft with y = 309.9 MPa, 1.5 m long between bearings carries a 1kN pulley at its

midpoint. The pulley is keyed to the shaft and receives 20kW power at 200 rpm. The belt

drive is horizontal and ratio of belt tensions is 3:1. The diameter of pulley is 600mm.

Calculate the necessary shaft diameter. Take Cm = 1.75; Ct = 1.25 and FOS = 2.0 Draw

Bending Moment diagrams.[L3]

19. A section of commercial shaft 2m long between bearings carries a 900 N pulley at its

midpoint. The shaft transmits 21kW at 300 rpm. The belt drive is horizontal. The sum of

tensions is 6kN. Find suitable diameter of shaft and angle of twist between the bearings.

Assume the allowable tensile stress for the material of the shaft to be 80 MPa and take G

= 80GPa.[L3]

20. Design a shaft to transmit power from an electric motor to a lathe head stock through a

pulley by means of a belt drive. The pulley weighs 200N and is located at 300 mm from

the center of the bearing. The diameter of the pulley is 200 mm and the maximum power

transmitted is 1kW at 120 rpm. The angle of lap of the belt is 180 and coefficient of

friction between the belt and the pulley is 0.3. The shock and fatigue factors may be taken

as 1.5 and 2.0 respectively. The allowable shear stress in the shaft may be taken as 35

N/mm2[L4]

21. Compare the weight, strength and stiffness of a hollow shaft of the same external diameter

as that of a solid shaft. The inside diameter of the hollow shaft being half the external

diameter. Both shafts have the same material and length. [L4]

UNIT – 4

1. Define riveted joint. Explain its necessity?[L1,L2]

2. Explain with aid of neat sketches the different failure modes of riveted joints.[L2]

3. Explain the procedure for design boiler joints.[L2]

4. What are eccentrically loaded riveted joints? .[L2]

5. Design a double riveted single cover butt joint with zigzag riveting to connect two plates

of 16mm thick. The allowable stresses for plates and rivets are 100 MPa in tension, 72

MPa in shear and 160 MPa in crushing[L4]

6. Design a double riveted double cover butt joint with unequal cover plates and zigzag

riveting to connect two plates of 25mm thick. Assume the following, t = 115 MPa, τ =

70 MPa and c = 140 MPa

7. Design a double riveted double strap butt joint for the longitudinal seam of a boiler of

diameter 1.3m with a stream pressure of 2.4MPa. The working stresses to be used are 77

MPa in tension, 54 MPa in shear and 120 MPa in crushing. Assume the joint efficiency

to be 81%.[L4}

8. What do you understand by the term welded joints? Bring out the differences between

riveted and welded joints.[L2,L3]

9. List out the advantages of welded joints over riveted joints[L2]

10. A plate of 80mm wide and 15mm thick is joined with another plate by a single transverse

weld and a double parallel weld. Determine the length of parallel fillet weld if the joint is




Fig 3

Fig 1 Fig 2

subjected to both static and fatigue loading. Take t=90 MPa; = 55 MPa as the

allowable stresses and stress concentration factor as 1.5 for transverse and 2.7 for parallel

weld. [L3]

11. Determine the weld size for a welded joint as shown in Fig 1. [L3]

12. List different types of Butt joint. [L2]

13. A Circular shaft, 50mm in diameter, is welded to the support by means of

circumferential fillet weld, as shown in Fig. 2. It is subjected to torsional moment of

2500 N-m. Determine the size of the weld, if the permissible shear stress in the weld is

limited to 140 MPa [L3]

UNIT – 5

1. What are the stresses in threaded fasteners?[L2]

2. Derive an expression for the maximum shear stress induced in threaded fasteners.[L3]

3. Explain the separation of a joint when it is subjected to tensile force.[L2]

4. Explain the effect of compressive load in bolt joints.[L2]

5. What are the different application of eccentric loading on bolted connection with respect to

the axis of the bolts and the direction of load?[L3}

6. Two members are connected by a bolt whose stiffness is equal to the bolted members. If the

initial tension in the bolt is 60kN [L3]

a) What is the external load that has to be applied to the bolt to cause separation of the bolted

members?

b) What is the resultant load for an external load of 70kN?

c) What is the resultant load for an external load of 150 kN?

7. A bolted assembly is subjected to an external force that varies from 0 to 10kN. The

combined stiffness of the parts, held together by the bolt, is three times the stiffness of the bolt.

The bolt is initially so tight that at 50% overload condition, the parts held together by the bolt

are just about to separate. The bolt is made of plain carbon steel 50C4 (ut=660 MPa and

(yt=460 MPa). The fatigue stress concentration factor is 2.2 and the expected reliability is

90%. The factor of safety is 2. Determine the size of the bolt with fine threads. [L3]

8. Explain the method of determining the size of the bolt when the bracket carries an eccentric

load perpendicular to the axis of the bolt. [L2]

9. Brackets are fixed on a steel column as shown in Fig 3 for supporting a travelling crane in a

workshop. The maximum load that comes on the bracket is 12kN acting vertically at a distance

of 400mm from the face of the column. The vertical face of the bracket is secured to the

column by four bolts in two rows (two in

each row) at a distance of 50mm from the

lower edge of the bracket. Determine the

size of the bolts if the permissible

value of the tensile stress for the bolt

material is 84N/mm2. Also, find the

cross section of the arm of the bracket,

which is rectangular. Assume depth of

the arm of the bracket b = 250mm.

[L3]




10. Explain application, advantages and disadvantages of power screws [L1]

11. Why square threads are preferred to V threads in power screws. [L2]

12. Show that the efficiency of self-locking screw is less than 50%. [L3]

13. What are the advantages and disadvantages of threaded joints over other fasteners? [L2]

14. A triple – threaded power screw is used in a screw jack, has a nominal diameter of 50 mm

and a pitch of 8 mm. The threads are square shape and the length of the nut is 48 mm. The

screw jack is used to lift a load of 7.5kN. The coefficient of friction at the threads is 0.12 and

the collar friction is negligible. Calculate: i) the principal shear stresses in the screw rod ii)

the transverse shear stresses in the screw and nuts iii) the unit bearing pressure for threads

and iv) state whether the screw is self locking [L5]




Sl.

No. Course Outcome

Programme Outcomes

Programme

Specific

outcomes

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

1

Explain basic design concept and

Analyze the various modes of failure of

machine components under different

static and impact load conditions and

use appropriate theories of failures to

design machine components

2 2 2 - - - 2 - - - - 2 3 3 -

2 Compute the dimensions of the machine

components subjected to dynamic loads 3 2 2 - - - 2 - - - - 2 3 3 -

3

Design shafts as per ASmE standards

and Design mechanical joints such as

Cotter, Knuckle joint and couplings

3 3 3 - - - 2 - - - - 2 3 3 -

4

Design typical riveted joints and welded

joints for boiler and structural

applications

3 3 3 - - - 2 - - - - 2 3 3 -

5

Select standard thread elements and

design power screws for different

applications

3 3 3 - - - 2 - - - - 2 3 3 -





Design of Machine Elements-I (P15AU52)

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- UNIT - I

1 a. Explain the Design procedure. 5

b. Differentiate between the normal stress and the shear stress. 3

c. A machine member 60 mm diameter is subjected to an axial tensile load of 18

kN, a transverse load of 3 kN and a turning moment of 1.2 kN as shown in Fig.

(1). Determine the max. principal and shear stress induced in the member.

12

2 a. Derive an expression for stress induced in a rod due to the axial impact of a

weight W dropped from a height ‘h’ on to a collar attached at the free end of the

rod. What is the stress due to suddenly applied Load?

8

b. A SAE 1045 steel rod of 80 mm diameter is subjected to a bending moment of 3

kN-m and torque T. Taking factor of safety as 2.5. Find the maximum value of

torque ‘T’ that can be carried safely by rod according to,

i) Maximum normal stress theory

ii) Maximum shear stress theory.

12

UNIT - II

3 a. What is stress concentration? What are the means of reducing stress

concentration? 6

b. A stepped shaft is subjected to a transverse load of 8 kN as shown in Fig. 2.

Determine the diameter of the shaft based on factor of safety of 2. 14

4 a. What is endurance limit? What are the factors that modify the endurance limit

approximation? 6

b. A round rod of diameter 1.2 d has semicircular groove of diameter 0.2 d. This

rod is to sustain a twisting moment that fluctuates between 2.5 kN-m and 1.5 kN-

m together with a bending moment that fluctuates between +2 kN-m and -1 kN-

m. Take y = 300 MPa, u = 450 MPa and f.o.s. = 2.5. Find suitable

diameter of rod.

14

5 a. What are different types of keys? Explain their applications. 6

b. Design a rigid flange coupling to transmit 18 kW at 1440 rpm. The allowable

shear stress for CI flange is 4 MPa. The shafts keys and bolts are made of

annealed steel having allowable shear stress of 93 MPa. Allowable crushing

stress for key = 186 MPa.

14

6 a. Compare hollow shaft with solid shaft for strength, stiffness and weight. 6

b. The hollow shaft is supported between bearings placed 1.2 m apart. A 600 mm

diameter pulley is mounted at a distance of 200 mm to the right of left hand

bearing and this drives a pulley directly below it with the help of a belt having

maximum tension of 2 kN. Another pulley of 400 mm diameter is placed 200

mm to the left of right bearing and is drives with the help of a motor and belt

which is placed at 45º to vertical and downward towards the observer. The angle

of contact for both pulleys is 180º and coefficient of friction is 0.25. Determine

the suitable diameter for hollow shaft having diameters ratio of 0.5. The

allowable tensile and shear stresses are 63 MPa and 42 MPa respectively and

assume heavy shocks.

14

UNIT - IV

7 a. Explain different modes of failure in riveted joints. 6

b. Design the main dimensions for longitudinal and circumferential joints for a

boiler whose inner diameter is 1.7 m and steam pressure of 2.058 MPa. The rivet

in double shear will have an effective resistance not greater than 87.5% over that

in shear.

14




8 a. Explain the design procedure for eccentrically loaded welded joint in bending. 8

b. Determine the load carrying capacity of a welded joint loaded as shown in Fig. 3.

The size of the weld is 12 mm and allowable shear stress in weld is 81 MPa. 12

UNIT - V

9 a. Derive an expression for the secondary shear in bolts in terms of applied load and

eccentricity of the load. 8

b. A M10 bolt connects two circular plates with outside to inside diameter ratio 2.0

and the inside diameter 1mm more than the diameter of the bolt. The thickness of

the plate is 20 mm and the material of the bolt and plate are same. The

external load on the joint is 8 kN. If the allowable stress in the bolt is not to

exceed 100 MPa, what is the initial tension to be applied to the bolt?

12

10 a. What is self locking and overhauling in power services. 6

b. A square threaded power screw has a normal diameter of 44 mm and a pitch of 7

mm with double threads. The load on the screws 6 kN and mean diameter of the

thrust washer is 50 mm. Coefficient of friction is 0.12 determine ;

i) Torque required to raise the load

ii) Torque required to lower the load

iii) Efficiency and

iv) Is the screw is of self locking type?

14

* * * *

Contd…3




Course Title: AUTOMOTIVE ENGINES AND COMPONENTS



Prerequisites: Subject requires student to know about

Basics of Engineering Mathematics and

Basics of I.C. Engines

Simple Numerical problems regarding determination of Engine performance

parameters.

COURSE LEARNING OBJECTIVES (CLOS):

The course aims to

1. Classify Heat engine and Analyze actual working principle of Heat engines.

2. Analyze engine block and its auxiliaries and Determine major dimensions of the same

3. Analyze Piston-rings-pin and Determine major dimensions of the same

4. Analyze Connecting rod and crank shaft and Determine major dimensions of the same

5. Analyze valve operating mechanism and Determine major dimensions of the same. Study

of engine components of state of the art technologies.


Automotive Engines & components is a foundation course in BE (Automobile Engineering)

program that helps for the understanding of the basic classifications and principles of

operation of IC Engines.

Further this course also helps to understand different Types, function, materials,

construction details, manufacturing, Troubles & Remedies and calculation of major

dimensions of the major components engine components

COURSE CONTENT

UNIT-I

INTRODUCTION

Historical development of automobiles, Heat Engines & their classification. Reciprocating IC

Engines - Basic Engine Components & Nomenclature, Principle of engine operation,

Comparison of SI & CI Engines, Classification of I C engines, applications of IC Engines

Four stroke engines - Principles of engine operation (SI & CI), Actual Valve timing -

mechanical and dynamic factors,

Two stroke engines - Principles of engine operation (SI & CI), Port timing diagrams. Types -

Three port engine, Separate pumps or blowers, Symmetrical & unsymmetrical timing, Cross

flow, loop flow & uniflow type Scavenging systems. Scavenging Process: – Pre blow down,

Blow down, Scavenging, Additional Charging. Theoretical Scavenging processes, Scavenging

parameters, Comparison of Different Scavenging Systems; port design, scavenging pumps.

Relative merits & demerits of petrol & diesel engines. Comparison of Two Stroke & Four Stroke

Engines. 12 Hrs.

ENGINE COMPONENTS (Units-II to V)

Types, function, materials, construction details, manufacturing, Troubles & Remedies and

Determination of major dimensions of the following engine components

UNIT-II

Cylinder Block, Cylinder heads, Gaskets, cylinder wear, water jacket, Cylinder liners, and

valve seats.




Crank Case – General form of crank case, oil sumps and cooling features, flywheel mountings,

Engine mountings, Front & Rear mountings.

Production of engine blocks

Manifolds and Mufflers - inlet and exhaust manifolds, mixture distribution, heating by exhaust

gas, dual manifolds, General Design of Manifolds, effect of firing order, Mufflers, general

design. 10 Hrs.

UNIT-III Piston - Piston Temperatures, piston slap, compensation for thermal expansion in pistons.

Piston Rings - forms of gap, stresses in piston rings, ring collapse, heat treatment, piston ring

selection, shape.

Piston pin - locking of piston pins, length of piston. 10 Hrs.

UNIT-IV

Connecting Rod

Length of rod, Cross section, Buckling, Drilled connecting rods, piston pin bearing, offset

connecting rods, effects of whipping, bearing materials, lubrication.

Crank Shaft

Balance weights, local balance, Crankshaft proportions, oil holes drilled in crank shafts,

balancing and torsional vibration analysis, vibration dampers, firing order, bearings, lubrication.

10 Hrs.

UNIT-V Valve and Valve MechanismAngle of seat, Operating Conditions, operating temperatures,

valve cooling, Sodium cooled valves, Valve rotators, valve seats, valve guides, , valve springs,

valve clearance, valve timing, OHV, OHC, dual valves, types of valve operating mechanisms.

Valve train component details, Camshaft-drives of cams, cam types, tappets,-automatic zero

clearance tappets, push rods, rocker arms & rocker Shaft. 10 Hrs.

Self Study - Study of systems (Unit 2-5) used in recent vehicles with advanced technologies

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Kirpal Singh ,Automobile Engineering Vol. II , Standard publications, New Delhi, 2014

2. R.B Gupta, Auto Design –Satyapraksh, New Delhi, 2000

3. Mathur & Sharma , A course in I.C. Engine - Dhanpat Rai & Sons, Delhi, 1999

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. P.M.Heldt , High Speed Engines -, Oxford & IBH New Delhi, 1965

2. J.B.Heywood , Fundamentals of I.C.Engines , McGraw Hill International Edition, 1988

3. P.C. Sharma & D.K. Aggarwal, Machine design - S.K Kataria & sons, Delhi, 2012

a) Course Outcomes(COs):

At the end of the course students are able to:

1. Classify Heat engine and Analyze actual working principle of Heat engines.

2. Analyze engine block and its auxiliaries and Determine major dimensions of the same

3. Analyze Piston-rings-pin and Determine major dimensions of the same

4. Analyze Connecting rod and crank shaft and Determine major dimensions of the same

5. Analyze valve operating mechanism and Determine major dimensions of the same. Study

of engine components of state of the art technologies.

UNIT WISE PLAN

UNIT-1


Describe Historical development of automobiles. (L2)

Define about Heat Engines & their classification.(L1)




Describe the Basic working principle Reciprocating IC Engines. (L2)

Classify IC Engines. (L2)

Describe the Basic Engine Components & their Nomenclature. (L2)

Compare SI & CI Engines. (L2)

Describe the applications of IC Engines. (L2)

Explain Principles of SI & CI Four Stroke engine operation. (L2)

Interpret Ideal & Actual Valve timing considering mechanical and dynamic factors. (L2)

Draw Ideal and Actual Valve timing diagrams for SI & CI Engines(L1)

Compare merits & demerits of petrol & diesel, two Stroke & Four Stroke engines. (L2)

Explain Principles of SI & CI Two Stroke engine operation. (L2)

Explain (SI & CI), Port timing diagrams. (L2)

Explain different Types of Two Stroke engines and scavenging pumps. (L2)

Explain Scavenging Process & parameters and Theoretical Scavenging processes.. (L2)

Compare Different Scavenging Systems. (L2)

Explain theoretical approach of port design. (L2)

Compare merits & demerits of petrol & diesel Two Stroke & Four Stroke Engines. (L2)

LESSON SCHEDULE

Class No. Portion covered per hour (An estimate)

(i) Historical development of automobiles,

(ii) Heat Engines & their classification, merits/demerits, application

(iii) Reciprocating IC Engines, Classification of I C engines, Basic Engine Components &

Nomenclature,

(iv) Principle of engine operation, Comparison of SI & CI Engines, , applications of IC

Engines

(v) Four stroke engines - Principles of engine operation (SI & CI), Ideal Valve timing

(vi) Actual Valve timing - mechanical and dynamic factors, Relative merits & demerits of

petrol & diesel engines.

(vii) Two stroke engines - Principles of engine operation (SI & CI),.

(viii) Types - Three port engine, Separate pumps or blowers, Symmetrical & unsymmetrical

timing, Cross flow, loop flow & uniflow type Scavenging systems.

(ix) Scavenging Process – Pre blow down, Blow down, Scavenging, Additional Charging.

(x) Theoretical Scavenging processes, Comparison of Different Scavenging Systems;

(xi) Scavenging parameters, port design, scavenging pumps.

(xii) Relative merits & demerits of petrol & diesel engines. Comparison of Two Stroke & Four

Stroke Engines. Port timing diagrams

REVIEW QUESTIONS:

UNIT-I

1. Write a note on Historical development of automobiles.

2. What are Heat Engines & How do you classify Heat Engines?

3. Sketch and explain the Basic working principle Reciprocating IC Engines.

4. How do you Classify IC Engines?

5. Describe about the Basic Engine Components & their Nomenclature.

6. How SI & CI Engines Compared?

7. What are the applications of IC Engines?

8. Sketch and Explain the Principles of working of SI Four Stroke engine.

9. Sketch and Explain the Principles of working of CI Four Stroke engine.

10. What is the difference between Ideal & Actual Valve timing considering mechanical and

dynamic factors?

11. Draw Valve timing diagram for the following details:

IVO at 100 Btdc and IVC at 200 Abdc: Spark Occurs at 150 BTDC:




EVO at 150 BbDC and EVC at 200 Atdc

What is the valve overlap period in above arrangement? And what is its significance? explain

12. Compare merits & demerits of petrol & diesel engines.

13. Compare two Stroke & Four Stroke engines.

14. Explain Principles of operation of SI & CI Two Stroke engines.

15. Explain Port timing diagrams for SI & CI. Two Stroke Engines.

16. Explain different Types of Two Stroke engines and scavenging pumps. (L2)

17. Explain Typical Scavenging Process in two stroke engines.

18. Explain Scavenging parameters.

19. Explain Theoretical Scavenging processes.

20. Compare Different Scavenging Systems.

21. Explain theoretical approach of port design in two stroke engines.

22. Compare merits & demerits of petrol & diesel Two Stroke & Four Stroke Engines.

23. Draw Port timing diagram for the following details:

IPO at 300 Bbdc and IPC at 400 Abdc: Spark Occurs at 150 BTDC

EPO at 400 BbDC and EPC at 300 Abdc

What is its significance of this type of Port Timing? Explain

UNIT - 2


At the end of this chapter student should be able to:

Explain the Functions, Types, constructional details of Cylinder Blocks, Cylinder liners,

Cylinder heads, Gaskets, Crank Case Manifolds, Mufflers. (L2)

Describe materials & manufacturing process of Cylinder Blocks Cylinder heads, Gaskets,

Crank Case Manifolds, Mufflers. (L2)

Discuss Troubles & Remedies of Cylinder Blocks Cylinder heads, Gaskets, Crank Case

Manifolds, Mufflers. (L2)

Calculate the major dimensions of Cylinder bore, Cylinder heads. (L3)

Explain cylinder wear, water jackets, valve seats….(L2)

Explain General form of Engine crank case, flywheel mountings, Engine mountings,

Front & Rear mountings. (L2)

Explain oil sumps and cooling features. (L2)

Describe Production of engine blocks. (L2)

Describe inlet and exhaust manifolds, mixture distribution, heating by exhaust gas, dual

manifolds and effect of firing order. (L2)

Explain General Design of Manifolds & Mufflers. (L2)

LESSON SCHEDULE


(i) Cylinder Block, Cylinder heads, Gaskets, cylinder wear, water jacket, Cylinder liners

(ii) Numerical

(iii) Numerical Practice

(iv) Crank Case – General form of crank case, oil sumps and cooling features,

(v) Flywheel mountings, Engine mountings, Front & Rear mountings.

(vi) Production of engine blocks

(vii) Manifolds and Mufflers - inlet and exhaust manifolds, mixture distribution, heating by

exhaust gas, dual manifolds,

(viii) General Design of Manifolds

(ix) Effect of firing order, Mufflers,

(x) General design of Mufflers.




REVIEW QUESTION

1. Sketch and Explain different types of Cylinder heads duly mentioning their merits and

demerits.

2. What are the reasons for cylinder wear? Explain with neat sketch

3. Sketch and explain different types of Cylinder liners

4. A vertical 4 stroke CI Engine has the following specifications: BP=4.5kW,

Speed=1200rpm, imep=0.35N/mm2, ηmech=0.80, Determine the dimensions of the

cylinder

5. Sketch and explain oil sumps with cooling features.

6. Sketch and explain different types of exhaust manifolds duly mentioning significance of

each one of them

7. What is Effect of firing order on arrangement of exhaust manifolds?

UNIT - 3



Explain the Functions, Types, constructional details of Piston, Piston Rings, Piston

Pin.(L2)

Describe materials & manufacturing process of Piston, Piston Rings, Piston Pin(L2)

Discuss Troubles & Remedies of Piston, Piston Rings, Piston Pin(L2)

Calculate the major dimensions of Piston, Piston Rings, Piston Pin(L3)

Interpret Piston Temperatures, piston slap, compensation for thermal expansion in

pistons. (L2)

Identify & Understand Piston Rings, forms of gap, stresses in piston rings, ring collapse,

heat treatment, piston ring selection & shape. (L1)

Identify & Understand Piston pin, locking of piston pins and length of piston. (L1)

LESSON SCHEDULE


(i) Piston - Types, function, materials, construction details, manufacturing,

(ii) Piston Rings, function, materials, construction details, manufacturing,

(iii) Forms of gap, stresses in piston rings, ring collapse, heat treatment, piston ring selection &

shape.

(iv) Piston Pin Types, function, materials, construction details, manufacturing, locking of

piston pins and length of piston

(v) Piston Temperatures, piston slap, compensation for thermal expansion in pistons,

(vi) Design considerations for calculation of piston crown thickness by strength and by heat

dissipation.

(vii) Determination of major dimensions of Piston, Piston Rings, Piston Pin by means of

Numerical calculations

(viii) Determination of major dimensions of Piston, Piston Rings, Piston Pin by means of


(ix) Determination of major dimensions of Piston, Piston Rings, Piston Pin by means of


(x) Numerical - Practice

REVIEW QUESTIONS

1. Explain the Functions, Types, constructional details of Piston, Piston Rings, Piston Pin.

2. Describe materials & manufacturing process of Piston, Piston Rings, Piston Pin.

3. Discuss Troubles & Remedies of Piston, Piston Rings, Piston Pin.

4. Interpret Piston Temperatures and piston slap.

5. What is Compensation for thermal expansion in pistons?




6. What are different forms of gap in Piston Rings

7. What are stresses in piston rings? Explain.

8. What is ring collapse? Explain.

9. How do you lock piston pins with Piston

10. How do You Calculate the major dimensions of Piston, Piston Rings, Piston Pin.

11. Design a cast iron piston for a 4-stroke single acting engine from the following data.

Cylinder bore dia = 100 mm (D), Stroke length = 120 mm (L), Gas pressure = 5 Mpa,

(p), BMEP = 0.5 MPa, Fuel consumption = 0.15 Kg / BP (W), Speed = 2200 rpm. (N)

UNIT - 4



Explain the Functions, Types, constructional details of Connecting Rod.(L2)

Describe materials & manufacturing process of Connecting Rod. (L2)

Discuss Troubles & Remedies of Connecting Rod. (L2)

Calculate the major dimensions of Connecting Rod. (L3)

Describe Length of rod, Cross section, Buckling of Connecting Rod, Drilled connecting

rods. (L2)

Describe piston pin bearing in Connecting Rod, offset connecting rods, effects of

whipping in Connecting Rod, bearing materials for Connecting Rod and lubrication in

Connecting Rod. (L2)

Explain the Functions, Types, constructional details of Crank Shaft.(L2)

Describe materials & manufacturing process of Crank Shaft. (L2)

Discuss Troubles & Remedies of Crank Shaft. (L2)

Calculate the major dimensions of Crank Shaft. (L3)

Describe Balance weights, local balance, Crankshaft proportions, oil holes drilled in

crank shafts.(L2)

Explain balancing and torsional vibration analysis, vibration dampers, firing order,

bearings, and Crank Shaft lubrication.(L2)

LESSON SCHEDULE


(i) Types, function, materials, construction details, manufacturing, Fastening of Conn Rod

Piston and Piston Pin

(ii) Length of rod, Cross section, Buckling, Drilled connecting rods, piston pin bearing, Offset

connecting rods, effects of whipping, Bearing materials, lubrication Troubles & Remedies

(iii) Determination of major dimensions based on Rankine Gardon Formulae Numerical

Problems

(iv) Numerical Problems – Practice

(v) Definition of Crank shaft, Types, Materials used, Manufacturing.

(vi) Bearing Pressures, Stresses, Balance Weights, Local Balance, Empirical Rules for

Crankshaft Dimensions, Six and Eight Cylinders, Oil holes in Crankshafts, Balancing

Crankshaft,

(vii) Analysis of Center Crank shaft, Crank at Dead Center, Crank at angle of maximum

Twisting Moment, Analysis of side Crank Shaft, Crank at Dead Center, Crank at angle of

maximum Twisting Moment,

(viii) Vibration dampers, firing order, bearings, lubrication.

(ix) Design Procedure, Design Calculations, Numerical

(x) Numerical Problems – Practice




REVIEW QUESTIONS

1. Explain the Functions, Types, constructional details of Connecting Rod.

2. Describe materials & manufacturing process of Connecting Rod.

3. What are the Troubles & Remedies of Connecting Rod?

4. Explain the procedure to Calculate the major dimensions of Connecting Rod.

5. Write a note on Length of rod, Cross section, Buckling of Connecting Rod.

6. What are Drilled connecting rods?

7. Describe piston pin bearing in Connecting Rod and offset connecting rods.

8. What is effects of whipping in Connecting Rod?

9. What are the bearing materials for Connecting Rod and briefly explain lubrication in

Connecting Rods.

10. Design a connecting rod for a petrol engine for the following data, Diameter of the piston

(d)= 110 mm, Length of the connecting rod(2L) = 325 mm, Stroke length (L) = 150 mm,

Speed (n) = 1500 rpm, Over speed = 2500 rpm, Compression ratio = 4 : 1, Maximum

explosion pressure = 2.5 MPa, weight of the reciprocating mass = 2kg

11. Design a connecting rod for four stroke petrol engine with the following data: Diameter of

piston = 88mm; Stroke 125mm; Weight of reciprocating parts 15.696N, Length of

connecting rod centre to centre=300mm;Speed = 2200 rpm with possible over speed of

3000, Compression ratio=6.8: 1, Probable maximum explosion pressure (assumed shortly

after dead centre, say when , =3°)=3.4335N/mm2

12. Explain the Functions, Types, constructional details of Crank Shaft.

13. What are the materials of Crank Shaft & Explain manufacturing process of Crank Shaft.

14. Discuss Troubles & Remedies of Crank Shaft.

15. Briefly explain, how to Calculate the major dimensions of Crank Shaft.

16. Write a note on Balance weights, local balance, Crankshaft proportions, and drilled oil holes

in crank shafts.

17. Explain balancing of crank shafts

18. How torsional vibration analysis is made on crank shafts

19. Sketch and explain vibration dampers

20. What do you mean firing order? What are factors on which firing order depend?

21. Write a note on bearings and Crank Shaft lubrication.

22. Design an overhung crank pin for an engine having the following particulars:

Cylinder diameter =300mm

Stroke =500mm

Maximum explosion pressure in the cylinder=1.8MPa

Engine Speed =200rpm

Permissible bending stress for pin =1000MPa

Permissible Bending stress =85MPa

23. A force of 120kN acts tangentially on the crank pin of an overhang crank. The axial

distance between the centre of the crankshaft journal and the crank pin is 400mm and the

crank is 500mm long. Determine

a) Diameter and length of the crankpin journal.

b) Diameter of the shaft journal

Given that: Safe bearing pressure:5MPa

Bending stress :65MPa

Principal stress in the shaft journal:65MPa

24. Design a plain carbon steel centre crankshaft for a single acting four stroke single cylinder

engine for the following data: Bore = 400 mm; Stroke = 600 mm; Engine speed = 200 rpm.;

Mean effective pressure = 0.5 N/mm2; Maximum combustion pressure = 2.5 M/mm2;

Weight of flywheel used a pulley = 50 kN; Total belt pull = 6.5 kN. When the crack has

turned through 350 from the top dead centre, the pressure on the piston is 1N/mm2 and the




torque on the crank is maximum. The ratio of the connecting rod length to the crank radius

is 5. Assume any other date required for the design.

25. Design a side or overhung crankshaft for a 250mm X 300 mm gas engine. The weight of the

flywheel is 30kN and the explosion pressure is 2.1 MPa. The gas pressure at the maximum

torque is 0.9 MPa, when the crank angle is 350 from I.D.C. The connecting rod is 4.5 times

the crank radius.

UNIT - 5



Explain the Functions, Types, constructional details of Valve & Valve Mechanism. (L2)

Describe materials & manufacturing process of Valve and Valve Mechanism. (L2)

Discuss Troubles & Remedies of Valve and Valve Mechanism. (L2)

Calculate the major dimensions of Valves and ports. (L3)

Explain valve seats….(L2)

Describe Valve & Valve operating Mechanism and Valve train component.(L2)

Explain Engine Camshafts, drives of cams, cam types, tappets….(L2)

LESSON SCHEDULE


(i) Valve and Valve Mechanism-Types, Angle of seat, Operating Conditions,

(ii) operating temperatures, valve cooling, Sodium cooled valves,Valve rotators, valve seats,

valve guides, valve springs, valve clearance, Valve timing,

(iii) OHV, OHC, dual valves, types of valve operating mechanisms, Valve train component

details,

(iv) Numerical Practice

(v) Camshaft,-drives of cams, cam types, tappets,-automatic zero clearance tappets, push

rods, rocker arms & rocker Shaft.

(vi) Case studies-Study of systems (Unit 2-5) used in recent vehicles with advanced

technologies

(vii) Case studies-Study of systems (Unit 2-5) used in recent vehicles with advanced

technologies

(viii) Case studies-Study of systems (Unit 2-5) used in recent vehicles with advanced

technologies

(ix) Case studies-Study of systems (Unit 2-5) used in recent vehicles with advanced

technologies

(x) Case studies-Study of systems (Unit 2-5) used in recent vehicles with advanced

technologies

REVIEW QUESTIONS

1. What is Sodium cooled valves? Explain with neat sketches

2. What is the difference between OHC and OHV? Explain

3. Determine the valve lift and valve dimensions of an engine from the following data:

Max. Gas pressure=5N/mm2, Cylinder bore diameter=80mm, Gas velocity=1500m/min,

Mean Piston speed=300m/min, Allowable Stress=42N/mm2, Valve seat angle=300.

4. What are different drives of cams? Explain with neat sketch.

5. What do you mean automatic zero clearance tappets? Explain

6. Explain with neat diagrams the construction of working of engine components of recent

vehicles with advanced technologies.







CO Statement Programme Outcomes

Programme

Specific

outcomes

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

1

Classify Heat engine and Analyze

actual working principle of Heat

engines.

3 3 - - - - 1 - - - - 2 3 - -

2

Analyze engine block and its

auxiliaries and Determine major

dimensions of the same

3 3 - - - - 1 - - - - 2 3 2 -

3

Analyze Piston-rings-pin and

Determine major dimensions of the

same

3 3 - - - - 1 - - - - 2 3 2 -

4

Analyze Connecting rod and crank

shaft and Determine major dimensions

of the same

3 3 - - - - 1 - - - - 2 3 2 -

5

Analyze valve operating mechanism

and Determine major dimensions of

the same. Study of engine components

of state of the art technologies.

3 3 - - 2 - 1 - - - - 2 3 2 -


Automotive Engines and Components (P15AU53)

Answer any Five Full questions selecting at least one full question from each

unit

Questions Marks CO’s Levels

Unit-1

1 a) Briefly Discuss about the classification of IC Engines based on

various considerations?

6 1 L1

1 b) Sketch a four stroke petrol engine valve timing diagram in

relation to pressure volume diagram. Explain the ACTUAL

intake & exhaust valve timing of a 4 stroke SI Engine, duly

mentioning MECHANICAL & DYNAMIC FACTORS

10 1 L2

1 c) Sketch a detailed valve timing diagram for a Four stroke SI engine

for the following details;

Inlet Valve opens about 100 before TDC;

Inlet Valve opens up to 600 after BDC;

Exhaust Valve opens about 550 before BDC;

Exhaust Valve opens up to 200 after TDC;

Ignition about 300 before TDC;

4 1 L3

2 a) How Two Stroke Engines are classified? With neat sketches, 10 1 L2




describe, Preblowdown, Blowdown, Scavenging & Additional

Charging, the four distinctive periods of scavenging in a Two

stroke engine

2 b) Along with sketch, compare different scavenging systems, along

with a reference of theoretical scavenging processes 6 1 L2

2 c) Sketch a detailed port timing diagram for a Two stroke SI engine

for the following details;

Exhaust Port Opens about 430 before BDC;

Exhaust Port Opens up to 350 after BDC;

Inlet Port Opens about 350 before BDC;

Inlet Port Opens up to 430 after BDC;

Ignition about 200 before TDC;

4 1 L3

Unit-2

3 a) Sketch & Explain, Cylinder wear due to abrasion, erosion and

corrosion. What do you mean by heat cracks in cylinder walls?

8 2 L2

3 b) Explain, with sketch any one type of exhaust muffler 6 2 L2

3c) A vertical four stroke CI engine has the following specifications;

Brake power =4.5kW, Speed =1200rpm,

Imep =0.35N/mm2, ηmech =0.80,

Determine the dimensions of the cylinder

6 2 L3

4 a) Sketch and Explain the following

i) Separate and integral cylinder heads

ii) Dry liner and wet liner

12 2 L2

4 b) Write a note on Production of Engine Blocks, duly mentioning

various operations involved. 8 2 L2

Unit-3 5 a) What are the Functions of piston, piston pin, piston rings

5 3 L2

5 b) Design & draw a cast iron piston for a single acting IC Engine

from the following data:

Diameter of cylinder Bore =250mm

Maximum explosion pressure =4.91N/mm2

Permissible stress for CI Engine =39.24N/mm2

Permissible stress for piston ring =98.1N/mm2

Radial wall pressure =0.04N/mm2

Permissible bearing pressure for pin =19.62N/mm2

Permissible bending stress in pin =63.77N/mm2

15 3 L3

6 a) What do you mean by piston slap and piston clearance? With

neat sketches explain two methods each for preventing the same. 12 3 L2

6 b) Sketch and explain about typical temperature distribution in

pistons. 8 3 L2

Unit-4

7 a) Briefly explain with neat sketches, different arrangements of

connecting piston & connecting rod.

6 4 L2

7 b) Design a connecting rod for four stroke petrol engine with the

following data:

Diameter of piston =88mm;

Stroke =125mm;

Weight of reciprocating parts =15.696N

14 4 L3




Length of connecting rod centre to centre =300mm;

R.P.M. =2200 with possible over speed of 3000

Compression ratio=6.8:1,

Probable maximum explosion pressure (assumed shortly after

dead centre, say when, =3°) = 3.4335N/mm2

Draw a neat dimensioned sketch of the complete connecting rod

designed. Assume any further data required for the design

8 a) Discuss the effect of following on deciding the optimum firing

order of an engine; (i) Engine vibration (ii) Engine cooling (iii)

development of back pressure

6 4 L2

8 b) Sketch and explain the construction and function of a vibration

damper 6 4 L2

8 c) A force of 117.720kN acts tangentially on the crankpin, of an

overhang crank. The axial distance between the centre of the

crank shaft journal & the crankpin is 400mm & the crank is

500mm long.Determine,

(i) diameter & length of the crankpin journal,

(ii) diameter of the shaft journal, from the following data:

Safe bearing pressure =5.91N/mm2

Bending stress =63.77N/mm2

Principal stress in the shaft journal =63.77N/mm2

8 4 L3

Unit-5

9 a) Classify Mechanisms with side camshaft and & Mechanisms

with overhead camshaft. Sketch and briefly explain any one in

each group.

6 5 L2

9 b) Explain, with sketch the different Cam shaft drives 6 5 L2

9 c) Determine the valve lift and valve dimensions of an engine from

the following data;

Max. gas pressure =5N/mm2,

Cylinder bore diameter =80mm,

Gas velocity =100m/min,

Mean piston speed =300m/min,

Allowable stress =42N/mm2,

Valve seat angle =300

Sketch the dimensioned sketch of the same.

8 5 L3

10 a) Why Morse test is not suitable for single cylinder engine?

Describe the method of finding friction power using Morse test.?. 6 5 L2

10 b) Schematically explain the use of the study of the heat balance of

an engine. 8 5 L2

10 c) A single cylinder engine running at 1800rpm develops a torque

of 8Nm. The indicated power of the engine is 1.8kW. find the

loss due to friction power as the percentage of indicated power.

6 5 L3




Course Title: THEORY OF MACHINES-II Course Code: P15AU54

Total Contact Hours: 52 L:T:P:H 3:2:0:5 Credits:4

CIE marks: 50: SEE marks: 50 Duration of Exam: 3 Hrs

Prerequisites:

Subject requires students to know about

Basics of Engineering Mathematics

Engineering Mechanics

Theory of Machine-I


This Course aims to

1. Explain equilibrium of forces and calculate static forces at various points in different types of

mechanism(L3,L2)

2. Identify, describe inertia force in a link and calculate fluctuation of energy in flywheel(L1,

L2,L3)

3. Explain method of balancing of rotating masses and to solve analytically and graphically to

balance the systems(L2,L3)

4. Explain method of balancing of reciprocating masses in internal combustion engine, V engine,

radial engine and to solve analytically and graphically to balance the systems(L2,L3)

5. Describe the various types of governors and to understand method of finding controlling

forceDescribe gyroscopic couple and to understand effect of gyroscopic couple(L1,L2)

Relevance of the Course:

Theory of Machine is a fundamental course in B.E (Mechanical and Automobile Engineering)

programme that helps in understanding various mechanisms and various forces transmitted from

one link to other.

COURSE CONTENT

UNIT – 1:

Static force Analysis: Equilibrium of two force, three force and four force members, Members

with two forces and couple, Free body diagrams, Static force analysis of single slider-crank

mechanism, Quick return motion mechanism, four link mechanism, rivets mechanism, effect of

sliding friction, friction in pin joints. 10 Hrs

UNIT – 2:

Dynamic/Inertia force Analysis: Introduction, D’Alembert’s principle, Inertia force, inertia

torque, dynamically equivalent systems, correction couple, line of action of inertia force in a link,

inertia force analysis (graphical) of a four bar mechanism, inertia force analysis (analytical) of

slider crank mechanism [(i) neglecting the mass of the connecting rod; (ii) considering the mass of

the connecting rod].

Flywheels: Introduction, Turning moment diagrams, Fluctuation of Energy and speed, energy

stored in a flywheel, determination of size of flywheels. 10 Hrs

UNIT – 3:

Balancing of rotating masses: Introduction, Static and dynamic balancing, balancing of single

revolving mass by balancing masses in same plane and in different planes, Balancing of several

masses revolving in the same plane, balancing of several masses revolving in different planes. 10

Hrs

UNIT – 4:




Balancing of reciprocating masses: Introduction, acceleration of the reciprocating mass of a slider

crank mechanism, primary balancing, secondary balancing, Inertia effect of crank and connecting

rod, balancing of single cylinder engine, balancing of multi cylinder-inline engine, balancing of

radial engines, balancing of V – engines. 10 Hrs

UNIT – 5:

Governors: Introduction, Types of governors; force analysis of Porter and Hartnell governors.

Controlling force, stability, condition for stability, sensitiveness, isochronisms, hunting, effort and

power of governor.

Gyroscopes: Introduction, Vectorial representation of angular motion, gyroscopic couple, effect of

gyroscopic couple on bearings, aircraft, ship, two wheelers and four wheelers. 12

Hrs

TEXT BOOKS:

1. V.P. Singh ,Theory of Machines:, Dhanpat Rai & Co., 2012

2. Rattan S.S., Theory of Machines: Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd., 2012

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Joseph E. Shigley, Theory Of Machines And Mechanism, Jr. Uicker John, McGraw- hill

publications., 2011

2. R L. Norton, Kinematics & Dynamics of Machinery, , Tata - McGraw Hill., 2010

3. R.S.Khurmi and J.K.Gupta, Theory of Machines, S.Chand and Co., 2011

4. P.L. Ballaney, Theory of Machines, Khanna Publishers.2011

Course Outcomes (Cos):

After learning all the units of the course, the student is able to

1. Analyze graphically the static forces acting in different links of simple planar

mechanisms.

2. Analyze inertia forces acting on different links of simple planar mechanisms. Design

suitable fly wheel for simple mechanical systems

3. Determine the magnitude and location of balancing masses for the rotating machines

4. Determine the magnitude and location of balancing masses for the reciprocating

machines.

5. Explain working principle of Governors and Gyroscopes and analyze the gyroscopic

stability of mechanical systems.




UNITWISE PLAN

UNIT-I:

TOPIC LEARNING OBJECTIVES

After learning the contents of Unit-1, the student is able to identify, explain and calculate

Various forces comes on mechanism

Condition for equilibrium of two force member, three force member, Four force member and

two force and a couple member

Free body diagram

Law of super position

Static force analysis in a mechanism

Effect of frictional force

Solve different mechanism for static force

LESSON SCHEDULE

No.of Hrs Portions to be covered

1. Introduction to various forces comes on to mechanism

2. Conditions for equilibrium, free body diagram, law of super position

3. Method of static force analysis

4. Static force analysis of four bar chain (with one and two forces)

5. Static force analysis of four bar chain (with forces and movements)

6. Static force analysis of single slider crank chain( with one and two forces)

7. Static force analysis of single slider crank chain (with forces and movements)

8. Static force analysis of quick return motion mechanism

9. Static force analysis by considering frictional force

10. Static force analysis by considering frictional force

UNIT-II

TOPIC LEARNING OBJECTIVES -

After learning the contents of Unit-II, the student is able to identify, explain and calculate

Dynamic forces comes on mechanism

D’Alembert’s principle

Inertia force

inertia torque

dynamically equivalent systems

correction couple

line of action of inertia force in a link

inertia force analysis (graphical) of a four bar mechanism

inertia force analysis (analytical) of slider crank mechanism

function of a fly wheel

turning movement diagram

Fluctuation of Energy and speed, energy stored in a flywheel

determination of size of flywheels

LESSON SCHEDULE

No.of Hrs Portions to be covered

1. Introduction, D’Alembert’s principle, inertia force, inertia torque

2. dynamically equivalent systems, line of fraction of inertia force

3. inertia force analysis (analytical) of slider crank mechanism

4. (i) neglecting the mass of the connecting rod; (ii) considering the mass of the connecting rod.





6. Function of a flywheel, turning movement diagram

7. Fluctuation of Energy and speed, energy stored in a flywheel

8. determination of size of flywheels

9. solving the numerical problems

10. solving the numerical problems

UNIT-III

TOPIC LEARNING OBJECTIVES After learning the contents of Unit-III, the student is able to identify, explain and calculate

Centrifugal force

Reasons for unbalanced forces in rotating members

Static balancing and dynamic balancing

Balancing of masses rotating in a same plane(analytical and graphical method)

Balancing of masses rotating in different planes (analytical and graphical method)

LESSON SCHEDULE

No. of Hrs

1. Introduction, Centrifugal force, reasons for unbalanced forces in rotating members

2. Static balancing and dynamic balancing

3. Method of Balancing of masses rotating in a same plane(analytical method)

4. Method of Balancing of masses rotating in a same plane(graphical method)

5. Method of Balancing of masses rotating in different planes (analytical method)

6. Method of Balancing of masses rotating in different planes (graphical method)

7. Solving numerical problems analytically

8. Practice of graphical method in drawing hall



UNIT-IV:

TOPIC LEARNING OBJECTIVES:

After learning the contents of Unit-IV, the student is able to identify, explain and calculate

Unbalanced forces in reciprocating masses

primary balancing and secondary balancing

partial balancing of Unbalanced forces in reciprocating masses

Unbalanced forces in single cylinder engine

Unbalanced forces in multi cylinder-inline engine

Method of balancing multi cylinder-inline engine

balancing of radial engines (reverse crank method)

balancing of V – engines

LESSON SCHEDULE

No of Hrs.

1. Introduction, acceleration of the reciprocating mass of a slider crank mechanism,

2. Partial balancing of reciprocating masses

3. Unbalanced forces in single cylinder engine

4. Unbalanced forces and movements in multi cylinder-inline engine

5. Method of balancing multi cylinder-inline engine

6. Practice of graphical Method of balancing multi cylinder-inline engine in drawing hall



9. balancing of radial engines (reverse crank method)

10. balancing of V – engines




UNIT-V

TOPIC LEARNING OBJECTIVES After learning the contents of Unit-V, the student is able to identify, explain and calculate

Function of a governor

Types of governor

Construction of Porter governor

Force analysis of Porter governor

Construction of Hartnell governors

Force analysis of Hartnell governor

Controlling force

Stability of governors

Sensitiveness, isochronisms, hunting, effort and power of governor.

Gyroscopic couple effect

Vectorial representation of angular motion

gyroscopic couple on bearings

Gyroscopic couple effect on aircraft, ship, two wheelers and four wheelers

LESSON SCHEDULE

1. Function of a governor, Types of governor

2. Construction of Porter governor, Force analysis of Porter governor

3. Construction of Hartnell governors, Force analysis of Hartnell governor

4. Controlling force and Stability of governors

5. Sensitiveness, isochronisms, hunting, effort and power of governor

6. Solving numerical problems

7. Solving numerical problems

8. Vectorial representation of angular motion

9. Gyroscopic couple effect

10. gyroscopic couple on bearings

11. Gyroscopic couple effect on aircraft, ship

12. Gyroscopic couple effect on two wheelers and four wheelers

REVIEW QUESTIONS

UNIT-I

1. What do you mean by applied and constraint forces? Explain.

2. What are conditions for a body to be in equilibrium under the action of two forces, three

forces and two forces and a torque?

3. What are free body diagrams of a mechanism? How are they helpful in finding the various

forces acting on the various members of the mechanism?

4. Define and explain the superposition theorem as applicable to a system of forces acting on a

mechanism.

5. What is the principle of virtual work? Explain.

6. How is the friction at the bearings and at sliding pairs of a mechanism is taken into account?

7. The dimensions of a four-link mechanism are: AB == 400 mm, BC == 600 rnm. CD == 500

mm, AD == 900 mm, and LDAB == 60°. AD is the fixed link. E is a point on link BC such

that BE == 400 mm and CE == 300 mm (BEC clockwise).

A force of 150 L4SO N acts on DC at a distance of 250 mm from D.

Another force of magnitude 100 L 180° N acts at point E. Find the required input torque on

link AB for static equilibrium of the mechanism. (4.6 N.m clockwise)

8. Determine the required input torque on the crank of a slider-crankmechanism for the static

equilibrium When the applied piston load is 1500 N. The lengths of the Figure 1




crank and the connecting rod are 40 rnm

and 100 mrn respectively and the crank has

turned through 45° from the inner-dead

centre.

9. For the mechanism shown in Fig. 1, find

the required input torque for the static

equilibrium. The lengths OA and AB are

250 rnm and

10. 650 rnrn respectively. F == 500 N. (68 N.m clockwise)

11. For the static equilibrium of the mechanism of Fig. 2, find the required input torque. The

dimensions are:

Fig.2

AB == 150 rnm, BC == AD == 500'mm, DC == 300 rnm, CE == 100 mm and EF == 450 rnm. (45.5

N.m clockWise)

12. two-cylinder engine shown in Fig. 3, is in static equilibrium. The dimensions are OA = OB =

50 mm, AC = BD = 250 mm, L.AOB = 90°. Determine the torque on the crank OAB. (106

N.m clockwise)

UNIT-II 1. Define ‘inertia force’ and ‘inertia torque’.

2. Draw and explain Klien’s construction for determining the velocity and acceleration of the piston

in a slider crank mechanism.

3. Explain Ritterhaus’s and Bennett’s constructions for determining the acceleration of the piston of

a reciprocating engine.

4. How are velocity and acceleration of the slider of a single slider crank chain determined

analytically?

5. Derive an expression for the inertia force due to reciprocating mass in reciprocating engine,

neglecting the mass of the connecting rod.

6. What is the difference between piston effort, crank effort and crank-pin effort?

7. Discuss the method of finding the crank effort in a reciprocating single acting, single cylinder

petrol engine.

Figure 2

Figure 1

Figure 2

Figure 3




8. The inertia of the connecting rod can be replaced by two masses concentrated at two points and

connected rigidly together. How to determine the two masses so that it is dynamically equivalent

to the connecting rod ? Show this.

9. Given acceleration image of a link. Explain how dynamical equivalent system can be used to

determine the direction of inertia force on it.

10. Describe the graphical and analytical method of finding the inertia torque on the crankshaft of a

horizontal reciprocating engine.

11. Derive an expression for the correction torque to be applied to a crankshaft if the connecting rod

of a reciprocating engine is replaced by two lumped masses at the piston pin and the crank pin

respectively.

12. The crank and connecting rod of a reciprocating engine are 150 mm and 600 mm respectively.

The crank makes an angle of 60° with the inner dead centre and revolves at a uniform speed of

300 r.p.m. Find, by Klein’s or Ritterhaus’s construction, 1. Velocity and acceleration of the piston,

2. Velocity and acceleration of the mid-point D of the connecting rod, and 3. Angular velocity and

angular acceleration of the connecting rod.

13. In a slider crank mechanism, the length of the crank and connecting rod are 100 mm and 400 mm

respectively. The crank rotates uniformly at 600 r.p.m. clockwise. When the crank has turned

through 45° from the inner dead centre, find, by analytical method : 1. Velocity and acceleration

of the slider, 2. Angular velocity and angular acceleration of the connecting rod. Check your result

by Klein’s or Bennett’s construction.

14. A petrol engine has a stroke of 120 mm and connecting rod is 3 times the crank length. The crank

rotates at 1500 r.p.m. in clockwise direction. Determine: 1. Velocity and acceleration of the

piston, and 2. Angular velocity and angular acceleration of the connecting rod, when the piston

had travelled one-fourth of its stroke from I.D.C.

15. The stroke of a steam engine is 600 mm and the length of connecting rod is 1.5 m. The crank

rotates at 180 r.p.m. Determine: 1. velocity and acceleration of the piston when crank has travelled

through an angle of 40° from inner dead centre, and 2. the position of the crank for zero

acceleration of the piston.

16. The following data refer to a steam engine : Diameter of piston = 240 mm; stroke = 600 mm;

length of connecting rod = 1.5 m; mass of reciprocating parts = 300 kg; speed = 125 r.p.m..

Determine the magnitude and direction of the inertia force on the crankshaft when the crank has

turned through 30° from inner dead centre.

17. A vertical petrol engine 150 mm diameter and 200 mm stroke has a connecting rod 350 mm long.

The mass of the piston is 1.6 kg and the engine speed is 1800 r.p.m. On the expansion stroke with

crank angle 30° from top dead centre, the gas pressure is 750 kN/m2. Determine the net thrust on

the piston.

18. A horizontal steam engine running at 240 r.p.m. has a bore of 300 mm and stroke 600 mm. The

connecting rod is 1.05 m long and the mass of reciprocating parts is 60 kg. When the crank is 60°

past its inner dead centre, the steam pressure on the cover side of the piston is 1.125 N/mm2 while

that on the crank side is 0.125 N/mm2. Neglecting the area of the piston rod, determine : 1. the

force in the piston rod ; and 2. the turning moment on the crankshaft.

19. A steam engine 200 mm bore and 300 mm stroke has a connecting rod 625 mm long. The mass of

the reciprocating parts is 15 kg and the speed is 250 r.p.m.When the crank is at 30° to the inner

dead centre and moving outwards, the difference in steam pressures is 840 kN/m2. If the crank pin

radius is 30 mm, determine: 1. the force on the crankshaft bearing; and 2. the torque acting on the

frame.

20. A vertical single cylinder engine has a cylinder diameter of 250 mm and a stroke of 450 mm. The

reciprocating parts have a mass of 180 kg. The connecting rod is 4 times the crank radius and

thespeed is 360 r.p.m. When the crank has turned through an angle of 45° from top dead centre,

the net pressure on the piston is 1.05 MN/m2. Calculate the effective turning moment on the

crankshaft for this position.

21. A horizontal, double acting steam engine has a stroke of 300 mm and runs at 240 r.p.m. The




cylinder diameter is 200 mm, connecting rod is 750 mm long and the mass of the reciprocating

parts is 70 kg. The steam is admitted at 600 kN/m2 for one-third of the stroke, after which

expansion takes place according to the hyperbolic law p.V = constant. The exhaust pressure is 20

kN/m2. Neglecting the effect of clearance and the diameter of the piston rod, find : 1. Thrust in

the connecting rod, and 2.Effective turning moment on the crankshaft when the crank has turned

through 120° from inner dead centre.

22. A horizontal steam engine running at 150 r.p.m. has a bore of 200 mm and a stroke of 400 mm.

The connecting rod is 1 m long and the reciprocating parts has a mass of 60 kg. When the crank

has turned through an angle of 30° from inner dead centre, steam pressure on the cover side is 0.6

N/mm2 while on the crankside is 0.1 N/mm2. Neglecting the area of the piston rod, determine: 1.

turning moment on the crankshaft, 2. acceleration of the flywheel, if the mean resistance torque is

600 N-m and the moment of inertia is 2.8 kg-m2. The ratio of the connecting rod length to crank

length for a vertical petrol engine is 4:1. The bore / stroke is 80/100 mm and mass of the

reciprocating parts is 1 kg. The gas pressure on the piston is 0.7N/mm2 when it has moved 10 mm

from T.D.C. on its power stroke. Determine the net load on the gudgeon pin. The engine runs at

1800 r.p.m. At what engine speed will this load be zero?

23. A petrol engine 90 mm in diameter and 120 mm stroke has a connecting rod of 240 mm length.

The piston has a mass of 1 kg and the speed is 1800 r.p.m. On the explosion stroke with the crank

at 30° from top dead centre, the gas pressure is 0.5 N/mm2. Find :1. the resultant load on the

gudgeon pin, 2. the thrust on the cylinder walls, and 3. the speed, above which other things

remaining same, the gudgeon pin load would be reserved in direction. Also calculate the crank

effort at the given position of the crank.

24. A single cylinder vertical engine has a bore of 300 mm, storke 360 mm and a connecting rod of

length 720 mm. The mass of the reciprocating parts is 130 kg. When the piston is at quarter stroke

from top dead centre and is moving downwards, the net pressure on it is 0.6 MPa. If the speed of

the engine is 250 r.p.m., calculate the turning moment on the crankshaft at the instant

corresponding to the position stated above.

25. A horizontal, single cylinder, single acting, otto cycle gas engine has a bore of 300 mm and a

stroke of 500 mm. The engine runs at 180 r.p.m. The ratio of compression is 5.5. The maximum

explosion pressure is 3.2 N/mm2 gauge and expansion follows the law p.V1.3 = constant. If the

mass of the piston is 150 kg and the connecting rod is 1.25 m long. Calculate the turning moment

on the crankshaft when the crank has turned through 60° from the inner dead centre. The

atmospheric pressure is 0.1 N/mm2.

26. A vertical single cylinder, diesel engine running at 300 r.p.m. has a cylinder diameter 250 mm and

stroke 400 mm. The mass of the reciprocating parts is 200 kg. The length of the connecting rod is

0.8 m. The ratio of compression is 14 and the pressure remains constant during injection of oil for

1/10th of stroke. If the index of the law of expansion and compression is 1.35, find the torque on

the crankshaft when it makes an angle of 60° with the top dead centre during the expansion stroke.

The suction pressure may be taken as 0.1 N/mm2.

27. A gas engine is coupled to a compressor, the two cylinders being horizontally opposed with the

pistons connected to a common crank pin. The stroke of each piston is 500 mm and the ratio of

the length of the connecting rod to the length of crank is 5. The cylinder diameters are 200 mm

and 250 mm and the masses of reciprocating parts are 130 kg and 150 kg respectively. When the

crank has moved through 60° from inner dead centre on the firing stroke, the pressure of gas on

the engine cylinder is 1 N/mm2 gauge and the pressure in the compressor cylinder is 0.1 N/mm2

gauge. If the crank moves with 200 r.p.m. and the flywheel of radius of gyration 1 m has a mass

of 1350 kg, determine the angular acceleration of the flywheel.

28. The length of a connecting rod of an engine is 500 mm measured between the centres and its mass

is 18 kg. The centre of gravity is 125 mm from the crank pin centre and the crank radius is 100

mm. Determine the dynamically equivalent system keeping one mass at the small end. The

frequency of oscillation of the rod, when suspended from the centre of the small end is 43

vibrations per minute.




29. A small connecting rod 220 mm long between centres has a mass of 2 kg and a moment of inertia

of 0.02 kg-m2 about its centre of gravity. The centre of gravity is located at a distance of 150 mm

from the small end centre. Determine the dynamically equivalent two mass system when one mass

is located at the small end centre. If the connecting rod is replaced by two masses located at the

two centres, find the correction couple that must be applied for complete dynamical equivalence

of the system when the angular acceleration of the connecting rod is 20 000 rad/s2 anticlockwise.

30. The connecting rod of a horizontal reciprocating engine is 400 mm and length of the stroke is 200

mm. The mass of the reciprocating parts is 125 kg and that the connecting rod is 100 kg. The

radius of gyration of the connecting rod about an axis through the centre of gravity is 120 mm and

the distance of centre of gravity of the connecting rod from big end centre is 160 mm. The engine

runs at 750 r.p.m. Determine the torque exerted on the crankshaft when the crank has turned 30°

from the inner dead centre.

31. If the crank has turned through 135° from the inner dead centre in the above question, find the

torque on the crankshaft.

32. Draw the turning moment diagram of a single cylinder double acting steam engine.

33. Explain precisely the uses of turning moment diagram of reciprocating engines.

34. Explain the turning moment diagram of a four stroke cycle internal combustion engine.

35. Discuss the turning moment diagram of a multicylinder engine.

36. Explain the terms ‘fluctuation of energy’ and ‘fluctuation of speed’ as applied to flywheels.

37. Define the terms ‘coefficient of fluctuation of energy’ and ‘coefficient of fluctuation of speed’, in

the case of flywheels.

38. An engine flywheel has a mass of 6.5 tonnes and the radius of gyration is 2 m. If the maximum

andminimum speeds are 120 r. p. m. and 118 r. p. m. respectively, find maximum fluctuation of

energy.

39. A vertical double acting steam engine develops 75 kW at 250 r.p.m. The maximum fluctuation of

energy is 30 per cent of the work done per stroke. The maximum and minimum speeds are not to

vary more than 1 per cent on either side of the mean speed. Find the mass of the flywheel

required, if the radius of gyration is 0.6 m.

40. In a turning moment diagram, the areas above and below the mean torque line taken in order are

4400, 1150, 1300 and 4550 mm2 respectively. The scales of the turning moment diagram are:

Turning moment, 1 mm = 100 N-m ; Crank angle, 1 mm = 1° Find the mass of the flywheel

required to keep the speed between 297 and 303 r.p.m., if the radius of gyration is 0.525 m.

41. The turning moment diagram for a multicylinder engine has been drawn to a scale of 1 mm =

4500 N-m vertically and 1 mm = 2.4° horizontally. The intercepted areas between output torque

curve and mean resistance line taken in order from one end are 342, 23, 245, 303, 115, 232, 227,

164 mm2, when the engine is running at 150 r.p.m. If the mass of the flywheel is 1000 kg and the

total fluctuation of speed does not exceed 3% of the mean speed, find the minimum value of the

radius of gyration.

42. An engine has three single-acting cylinders whose cranks are spaced at 120° to each other. The

turning moment diagram for each cylinder consists of a triangle having the following values:

Angle 0° 60° 180° 180° – 360°

Torque (N-m) 0 200 0 0

43. Find the mean torque and the moment of inertia of the flywheel to keep the speed within 180 ± 3

r.p.m.

44. The turning moment diagram for a four stroke gas engine may be assumed for simplicity to be

represented by four triangles, the areas of which from the line of zero pressure are as follows:

Expansion stroke = 3550 mm2; exhaust stroke = 500 mm2; suction stroke = 350 mm2; and

compression stroke = 1400 mm2. Each mm2 represents 3 N-m. Assuming the resisting moment to

be uniform, find the mass of the rim of a flywheel required to keep the mean speed 200 r.p.m.

within ± 2%. The mean radius of the rim may be taken as 0.75 m. Also determine the crank

positions for the maximum and minimum speeds.




45. A single cylinder, single acting, four stroke cycle gas engine develops 20 kW at 250 r.p.m. The

work done by the gases during the expansion stroke is 3 times the work done on the gases during

the compression stroke. The work done on the suction and exhaust strokes may be neglected. If

the flywheel has a mass of 1.5 tonnes and has a radius of gyration of 0.6m, find the cyclic

fluctuation of energy and the coefficient of fluctuation of speed.

46. A single cylinder double acting steam engine delivers 185 kW at 100 r.p.m. The maximum

fluctuation of energy per revolution is 15 per cent of the energy developed per revolution. The

speed variation is limited to 1 per cent either way from the mean. The mean diameter of the rim is

2.4 m. Find the mass and cross-sectional dimensions of the flywheel rim when width of rim is

twice the thickness. The density of flywheel material is 7200 kg/m3.

47. The turning moment diagram for the engine is drawn to the following scales: Turning moment, 1

mm = 1000 N-m and crank angle, 1 mm = 6°. The areas above and below the mean turning

moment line taken in order are : 530, 330, 380, 470, 180, 360, 350 and 280 mm2. The mean speed

of the engine is 150 r.p.m. and the total fluctuation of speed must not exceed 3.5% of mean speed.

Determine the diameter and mass of the flywheel rim, assuming that the total energy of the

flywheel to be 15/14 that of rim. The peripheral velocity of the flywheel is 15 m/s. Find also the

suitable cross-scetional area of the rim of the flywheel. Take density of the material of the rim as

7200 kg/m3.

48. A single cylinder internal combustion engine working on the four stroke cycle develops 75 kW at

360 r.p.m. The fluctuation of energy can be assumed to be 0.9 times the energy developed per

cycle. If the fluctuation of speed is not to exceed 1 per cent and the maximum centrifugal stress in

the flywheel is to be 5.5 MPa, estimate the mean diameter and the cross-sectional area of the rim.

The material of the rim has a density of 7.2 Mg/m3.

49. A cast iron flywheel used for a four stroke I.C. engine is developing 187.5 kW at 250 r.p.m. The

hoop stress developed in the flywheel is 5.2 MPa. The total fluctuation of speed is to be limited to

3% of the mean speed. If the work done during the power stroke is 1/3 times more than the

average workdone during the whole cycle, find: 1. mean diameter of the flywheel, 2. mass of the

flywheel and 3. cross-sectional dimensions of the rim when the width is twice the thickness. The

density of cast iron may be taken as 7220 kg/m3.

50. A certain machine tool does work intermittently. The machine is fitted with a flywheel of mass

200 kg and radius of gyration of 0.4 m. It runs at a speed of 400 r.p.m. between the operations.

The machine is driven continuously by a motor and each operation takes 8 seconds. When the

machine is doing its work, the speed drops from 400 to 250 r.p.m. Find 1. minimum power of the

motor, when there are 5 operations performed per minute, and 2. energy expanded in performing

each operation.

51. A constant torque 4 kW motor drives a riveting machine. A flywheel of mass 130 kg and radius of

gyration 0.5 m is fitted to the riveting machine. Each riveting operation takes 1 second and

requires 9000 N-m of energy. If the speed of the flywheel is 420 r.p.m. before riveting, find: 1. the

fall in speed of the flywheel after riveting; and 2. the number of rivets fitted per hour.

52. A machine has to carry out punching operation at the rate of 10 holes per minute. It does 6 kN-m

of work per mm2 of the sheared area in cutting 25 mm diameter holes in 20 mm thick plates. A

flywheel is fitted to the machine shaft which is driven by a constant torque. The fluctuation of

speed is between 180 and 200 r.p.m. The actual punching takes 1.5 seconds. The frictional losses

are equivalent to 1/6 of the work done during punching. Find: 1. Power required to drive the

punching machine, and 2. Mass of the flywheel, if the radius of gyration of the wheel is 0.5 m.

UNIT-III

1. Why is balancing of rotating parts necessary for high speed engines ?

2. Explain clearly the terms ‘static balancing’ and ‘dynamic balancing’. State the necessary

conditions to achieve them.

3. Discuss how a single revolving mass is balanced by two masses revolving in different planes

4. Explain the method of balancing of different masses revolving in the same plane.




5. How the different masses rotating in different planes are balanced?

6. Four masses A, B, C and D are attached to a shaft and revolve in the same plane. The masses are

12 kg, 10 kg, 18 kg and 15 kg respectively and their radii of rotations are 40 mm, 50 mm, 60 mm

and 30 mm. The angular position of the masses B, C and D are 60°, 135° and 270° from the mass

A. Find the magnitude and position of the balancing mass at a radius of 100 mm.

7. Four masses A, B, C and D revolve at equal radii and are equally spaced along a shaft. The mass

B is 7 kg and the radii of C and D make angles of 90° and 240° respectively with the radius of B.

Find the magnitude of the masses A, C and D and the angular position of A so that the system

may be completely balanced.

8. A rotating shaft carries four masses A, B, C and D which are radially attached to it. The mass

centers are 30 mm, 38 mm, 40 mm and 35 mm respectively from the axis of rotation. The masses

A, C and D are 7.5 kg, 5 kg and 4 kg respectively. The axial distances between the planes of

rotation of A and B is 400 mm and between B and C is 500 mm. The masses A and C are at right

angles to each other. Find for a complete balance, 1. The angles between the masses B and D from

mass A, 2. The axial distance between the planes of rotation of C and D, 3. The magnitude of

mass B.

9. A rotating shaft carries four unbalanced masses 18 kg, 14 kg, 16 kg and 12 kg at radii 50 mm, 60

mm, 70 mm and 60 mm respectively. The 2nd, 3rd and 4th masses revolve in planes 80 mm, 160

mm and 280 mm respectively measured from the plane of the first mass and are angularly located

at 60°, 135° and 270° respectively measured clockwise from the first mass looking from this mass

end of the shaft. The shaft is dynamically balanced by two masses, both located at 50 mm radii

and revolving in planes mid-way between those of 1st and 2nd masses and midway between those

of 3rd and 4th masses. Determine, graphically or otherwise, the magnitudes of the masses and

their respective angular positions.

10. A shaft carries five masses A, B, C, D and E which revolve at the same radius in planes which are

equidistant from one another. The magnitude of the masses in planes A, C and D are 50 kg, 40 kg

and 80 kg respectively. The angle between A and C is 90° and that between C and D is 135°.

Determine the magnitude of the masses in planes B and E and their positions to put the shaft in

complete rotating balance.

11. A shaft with 3 meters span between two bearings carries two masses of 10 kg and 20 kg acting at

the extremities of the arms 0.45 m and 0.6 m long respectively. The planes in which these masses

rotate are 1.2 m and 2.4 m respectively from the left end bearing supporting the shaft. The angle

between the arms is 60°. The speed of rotation of the shaft is 200 R.P.M. If the masses are

balanced by two counter-masses rotating with the shaft acting at radii of 0.3 m and placed at 0.3 m

from each bearing centres, estimate the magnitude of the two balance masses and their orientation

with respect to the X-axis, i.e. mass of 10 kg.

12. A, B, C and D are four masses carried by a rotating shaft at radii 100 mm, 150 mm, 150 mm and

200 mm respectively. The planes in which the masses rotate are spaced at 500 mm apart and the

magnitude of the masses B, C and D are 9 kg, 5 kg and 4 kg respectively. Find the required mass

A and the relative angular settings of the four masses so that the shaft shall be in complete

balance.

13. A 3.6 m long shaft carries three pulleys, two at its two ends and third at the mid-point. The two

end pulleys has mass of 79 kg and 40 kg and their centre of gravity are 3 mm and 5 mm

respectively from the axis of the shaft. The middle pulley mass is 50 kg and its centre of gravity is

8 mm from the shaft axis. The pulleys are so keyed to the shaft that the assembly is in static

balance. The shaft rotates at 300 r.p.m. in two bearings 2.4m apart with equal overhang on either

side. Determine: 1. the relative angular positions of the pulleys and 2. dynamic reactions at the

two bearings.




14. The camshaft of high speed pump consists of a parallel shaft 25 mm diameter and 480 mm long. It

carries three eccentrics, each

of diameter 60 mm and a

uniform thickness of 18 mm.

The assembly is symmetrical

as shown in Fig. and the

bearings are at A and B. The

angle between the eccentrics is

120° and the eccentricity of

each is 12.5 mm. The material

density is 7000 kg/m3, and the

speed of rotation is 1430 r.p.m. Find : 1. dynamic load on each bearing due to the out-of-balance

couple ; and 2. kinetic energy of the complete assembly

UNIT-IV

1. Write a short note on primary and secondary balancing.

2. Explain why only a part of the unbalanced force due to reciprocating masses is balanced by

revolving mass.

3. Derive the following expressions, for an uncoupled two cylinder locomotive engine: (a) Variation

is tractive force; (b) Swaying couple; and (c) Hammer blow.

4. What are in-line engines? How are they balanced? It is possible to balance them completely?

5. Explain the ‘direct and reverse crank’ method for determining unbalanced forces in radial engines.

6. Discuss the balancing of V-engines

7. A single cylinder horizontal engine runs at 120 r.p.m. The length of stroke is 400 mm. The mass

of the revolving parts assumed concentrated at the crank pin is 100 kg and mass of the

reciprocating parts is 150 kg. Determine the magnitude of the balancing mass required to be

placed opposite to the crank at a radius of 150mm which is equivalent to all the revolving and

2/3rd of the reciprocating masses. If the crank turns 30° from the inner dead centre, find the

magnitude of the unbalanced force due to the balancing mass.

8. A single cylinder engine runs at 250 r.p.m. and has a stroke of 180 mm. The reciprocating parts

has a mass of 120 kg and the revolving parts are equivalent to a mass of 70 kg at a radius of 90

mm. A mass is placed opposite to the crank at a radius of 150 mm to balance the whole of the

revolving mass and two-thirds of the reciprocating mass. Determine the magnitude of the

balancing mass and the resultant residual unbalance force when the crank has turned 30° from the

inner dead centre; neglect the obliquity of the connecting rod.

9. A two cylinder uncoupled locomotive has inside cylinders 0.6 m apart. The radius of each crank is

300 mm and is at right angles. The revolving mass per cylinder is 250 kg and the reciprocating

mass per cylinder is 300 kg. The whole of the revolving and two-third of the reciprocating masses

are to be balanced and the balanced masses are placed, in the planes of rotation of the driving

wheels, at a radius of 0.8 m. The driving wheels are 2 m in diameter and 1.5 m apart. If the speed

of the engine is 80 km. p.h. ; find hammer blow, maximum variation in tractive effort and

maximum swaying couple.

10. A two cylinder uncoupled locomotive with cranks at 90° has a crank radius of 325 mm. The

distance between the centres of driving wheels is 1.5 m. The pitch of cylinders is 0.6 m. The

diameter of treads of driving wheels is 1.8 m. The radius of centres of gravity of balance masses is

0.65 m. The pressure due to dead load on each wheel is 40 kN. The masses of reciprocating and

rotating parts per cylinder are 330 kg and 300 kg respectively. The speed of the locomotive is 60

km. p.h. find: 1. The balancing masses both in magnitude and position required to be placed is the

planes of driving wheels to balance whole of the revolving and two-third of the reciprocating

masses; 2. The swaying couple; 3.The variation is tractive force; 4. The maximum and minimum

pressure on rails; and 5. The maximum speed at which it is possible to run the locomotive, in

order that the wheels are not lifted from the rails.

11. Two locomotives are built with similar sets of reciprocating parts. One is an inside cylinder




engine with two cylinders with centre lines at 0.6 m apart. The other is an outside cylinder with

centre lines at 1.98 m apart. The distance between the driving wheel centers is 1.5 m in both the

cases. The inside cylinder locomotive runs at 0.8 times the speed of the outside cylinder

locomotive and the hammer blow of the inside cylinder locomotive is 1.2 times the hammer blow

of the outside cylinder locomotive. If the diameter of the driving wheel of the outside cylinder

locomotive is 1.98 m, calculate the diameter of the driving wheel of the inside cylinder

locomotive. Compare also the variation in the swaying couples of the two engines. Assume that

the same fraction of the reciprocating masses are balanced in both the cases.

12. An air compressor has four vertical cylinders 1, 2, 3 and 4 in line and the driving cranks at 90°

intervals reach their upper most positions in this order. The cranks are of 150 mm radius, the

connecting rods 500 mm long and the cylinder centre line 400 mm apart. The mass of the

reciprocating parts for each cylinder is 22.5 kg and the speed of rotation is 400 r.p.m. Show that

there is no out-of-balance primary or secondary forces and determines the corresponding couples,

indicating the positions of No. 1 crank for maximum values. The central plane of the machine

may be taken as reference plane.

13. A four cylinder engine has the two outer cranks at 120° to each other and their reciprocating

masses are each 400 kg. The distance between the planes of rotation of adjacent cranks are 400

mm, 700 mm, 700 mm and 500 mm. Find the reciprocating mass and the relative angular position

for each of the inner cranks, if the engine is to be in complete primary balance. Also find the

maximum unbalanced secondary force, if the length of each crank is 350 mm, the length of each

connecting rod 1.7 m and the engine speed 500 r.p.m.

14. The reciprocating masses of the first three cylinders of a four cylinder engine are 4.1, 6.2 and 7.4

tonnes respectively. The centre lines of the three cylinders are 5.2 m, 3.2 m and 1.2 m from the

fourth cylinder. If the cranks for all the cylinders are equal, determine the reciprocating mass of

the fourth cylinder and the angular position of the cranks such that the system is completely

balanced for the primary force and couple. If the cranks are 0.8 m long, the connecting rods 3.8 m,

and the speed of the engine 75 r.p.m. ; find the maximum unbalanced secondary force and the

crank angle at which it occurs.

15. In a four cylinder petrol engine equally spaced, the cranks, numbered from the front end are 1, 2,

3, and 4. The cranks 1 and 4 are in phase and 180° ahead of cranks 2 and 3. The reciprocating

mass of each cylinder is 1 kg. The cranks are 50 mm radius and the connecting rod 200 mm long.

What are the resultant unbalanced forces and couples, primary and secondary, when cranks 1 and

4 are on top dead centre position? The engine is rotating at 1500 r.p.m. in a clockwise direction

when viewed from the front. Take the reference plane midway between cylinder 2 and 3.

16. A four cylinder inline marine oil engine has cranks at angular displacement of 90°. The outer

cranks are 3 m apart and inner cranks are 1.2 m apart. The inner cranks are placed symmetrically

between the outer cranks. The length of each crank is 450 mm. If the engine runs at 90 r.p.m. and

the mass of reciprocating parts for each cylinder is 900 kg, find the firing order of the cylinders

for the best primary balancing force of reciprocating masses. Determine the maximum unbalanced

primary couple for the best arrangement.

17. In a four crank symmetrical engine, the reciprocating masses of the two outside cylinders A and D

are each 600 kg and those of the two inside cylinders B and C are each 900 kg. The distance

between the cylinder axes of A and D is 5.4 meters. Taking the reference line to bisect the angle

between the cranks A and D, and the reference plane to bisect the distance between the cylinder

axes of A and D, find the angles between the cranks and the distance between the cylinder axes of

B and C for complete balance except for secondary couples. Determine the maximum value of the

unbalanced secondary couple if the length of the crank is 425 mm, length of connecting rod 1.8 m

and speed is 150 r.p.m.

18. In a four cylinder inline engine, the cylinders are placed symmetrically along the longitudinal

axis, with a centre distance of 2.4 m between the outside cylinders and 0.6 m between the inside

cylinders. The cranks between the two inside cylinders are at 90° to each other and the mass of

reciprocating parts of each of these is 225 kg. All the four cranks are of 0.3 m radius. If the system




is to be completely balanced for the primary effects, determine 1. The mass of the reciprocating

parts of each of the outside cranks, and 2. The angular position of the outside cranks with

reference to the nearest inside cranks, measured in clockwise direction and draw an end view of

the four primary cranks marking these angles therein. With the above arrangement, evaluate the

secondary unbalanced effects completely, with reference to a plane through the centre line of

cylinder no. 1 and show by means of an end view the angular position of these with reference to

secondary crank no. 1. The engine is running at 180 r.p.m. and the length of each connecting rod

is 1.2 m.

19. A six-cylinder, single acting, two stroke Diesel engine is arranged with cranks at 60° for the firing

sequence 1-4-5-2-3-6. The cylinders, numbered 1 to 6 in succession are pitched 1.5 m apart,

except cylinders 3 and 4 which are 1.8 m apart. The reciprocating and revolving masses per line

are 2.2 tonnes and 1.6 tonnes respectively. The crank length is 375 mm, the connecting rod length

is 1.6 m, and the speed is 120 r.p.m. Determine the maximum and minimum values of the primary

couple due to the reciprocating and revolving parts. Also find the maximum secondary couple and

angular position relative to crank No. 1. Take the plane between the cylinders 3 and 4 as the

reference plane.

20. A three cylinder radial engine driven by a common crank has the cylinders spaced at 120°. The

stroke is 125 mm, length of the connecting rod 225 mm and the mass of the reciprocating parts per

cylinder 2 kg. Calculate the primary and secondary forces at crank shaft speed of 1200 r.p.m.

21. The pistons of a 60° twin V-engine has strokes of 120 mm. The connecting rods driving a

common crank has a length of 200 mm. The mass of the reciprocating parts per cylinder is 1 kg

and the speed of the crank shaft is 2500 r.p.m. Determine the magnitude of the primary and

secondary forces.

22. A twin cylinder V-engine has the cylinders set at an angle of 45°, with both pistons connected to

the single crank. The crank radius is 62.5 mm and the connecting rods are 275 mm long. The

reciprocating mass per line is 1.5 kg and the total rotating mass is equivalent to 2 kg at the crank

radius. A balance mass fitted opposite to the crank, is equivalent to 2.25 kg at a radius of 87.5

mm. Determine for an engine speed of 1800 r.p.m. ; the maximum and minimum values of the

primary and secondary forces due to the inertia of reciprocating and rotating masses.

UNIT-V:

1. What is the function of a governor? How does it differ from that of a flywheel?

2. State the different types of governors. What is the difference between centrifugal and inertia type

governors? Why is the former preferred to the latter?

3. Explain the term height of the governor. Derive an expression for the height in the case of a Watt

governor. What are the limitations of a Watt governor?

4. What are the effects of friction and of adding a central weight to the sleeve of a Watt governor?

5. Discuss the controlling force and stability of a governor and show that the stability of a governor

depends on the slope of the curve connecting the controlling force (FC) and radius of rotation (r)

and the value (FC /r).

6. What is stability of a governor? Sketch the controlling force versus radius diagrams for a stable,

unstable and isochronous governor. Derive the conditions for stability.

7. Explain clearly how would you determine from the controlling force curve whether a governor is

stable, unstable or isochronous. Show also how the effect of friction may be indicated on the

curve.

8. Define and explain the following terms relating to governors: 1. Stability, 2. Sensitiveness, 3.

Isochronism, and 4. Hunting.

9. Explain the terms and derive expressions for ‘effort’ and ‘power’ of a Porter governor.

10. Prove that the sensitiveness of a Proell governor is greater than that of a Porter governor.

11. Write short note on ‘coefficient of insensitiveness’ of governors.

12. The length of the upper arm of a Watt governor is 400 mm and its inclination to the vertical is

30°. Find the percentage increase in speed, if the balls rise by 20 mm.

13. A Porter governor has two balls each of mass 3 kg and a central load of mass 15 kg. The arms are




all 200 mm long, pivoted on the axis. If the maximum and minimum radii of rotation of the balls

are 160 mm and 120 mm respectively, find the range of speed.

14. In a Porter governor, the mass of the central load is 18 kg and the mass of each ball is 2 kg. The

top arms are 250 mm while the bottom arms are each 300 mm long. The friction of the sleeve is

14 N. If the top arms make 45° with the axis of rotation in the equilibrium position, find the range

of speed of the governor in that position.

15. A loaded governor of the Porter type has equal arms and links each 250 mm long. The mass of

each ball is 2 kg and the central mass is 12 kg. When the ball radius is 150 mm, the valve is fully

open and when the radius is 185 mm, the valve is closed. Find the maximum speed and the range

of speed. If the maximum speed is to be increased 20% by an addition of mass to the central load,

find what additional mass is required.

16. The arms of a Porter governor are 300 mm long. The upper arms are pivoted on the axis of

rotation and the lower arms are attached to the sleeve at a distance of 35 mm from the axis of

rotation. The load on the sleeve is 54 kg and the mass of each ball is 7 kg. Determine the

equilibrium speed when the radius of the balls is 225 mm. What will be the range of speed for this

position, if the frictional resistances to the motion of the sleeve are equivalent to a force of 30 N?

17. In a Porter governor, the upper and lower arms are each 250 mm long and are pivoted on the axis

of rotation. The mass of each rotating ball is 3 kg and the mass of the sleeve is 20 kg. The sleeve

is in its lowest position when the arms are inclined at 30° to the governor axis. The lift of the

sleeve is 36 mm. Find the force of friction at the sleeve, if the speed at the moment it rises from

the lowest position is equal to the speed at the moment it falls from the highest position. Also, find

the range of speed of the governor.

18. A Porter governor has links 150 mm long and is attached to pivots at a radial distance of 30 mm

from the vertical axis of the governor. The mass of each ball is 1.75 kg and the mass of the sleeve

is 25 kg. The governor sleeve begins to rise at 300 r.p.m. when the links are at 30° to the vertical.

Assuming the friction force to be constant, find the minimum and maximum speed of rotation

when the inclination of the links is 45° to the vertical.

19. A Proell governor has all the four arms of length 250 mm. The upper and lower ends of the arms

are pivoted on the axis of rotation of the governor. The extension arms of the lower links are each

100 mm long and parallel to the axis when the radius of the ball path is 150 mm. The mass of each

ball is 4.5 kg and the mass of the central load is 36 kg. Determine the equilibrium speed of the

governor.

20. A Proell governor has arms of 300 mm length. The upper arms are hinged on the axis of rotation,

whereas the lower arms are pivoted at a distance of 35 mm from the axis of rotation. The

extension of lower arms to which the balls are attached are 100 mm long. The mass of each ball is

8 kg and the mass on the sleeve is 60 kg. At the minimum radius of rotation of 200 mm, the

extensions are parallel to the governor axis. Determine the equilibrium speed of the governor for

the given configuration. What will be the equilibrium speed for the maximum radius of 250 mm?

21. A spring controlled governor of the Hartnell type with a central spring under compression has

balls each of mass 2 kg. The ball and sleeve arms of the bell crank levers are respectively 100 mm

and 60 mm long and are at right angles. In the lowest position of the governor sleeve, the radius of

rotation of the balls is 80 mm and the ball arms are parallel to the governor axis. Find the initial

load on the spring in order that the sleeve may begin to lift at 300 r.p.m. If the stiffness of the

spring is 30 kN/m, what is the equilibrium speed corresponding to a sleeve lift of 10 mm?

22. In a governor of the Hartnell type, the mass of each ball is 1.5 kg and the lengths of the vertical

and horizontal arms of the bell crank lever are 100 mm and 50 mm respectively. The fulcrum of

the bell crank lever is at a distance of 90 mm from the axis of rotation. The maximum and

minimum radii of rotation of balls are 120 mm and 80 mm and the corresponding equilibrium

speeds are 325 and 300 r.p.m. Find the stiffness of the spring and the equilibrium speed when the

radius of rotation is 100 mm.

23. A governor of the Hartnell type has equal balls of mass 3 kg, set initially at a radius of 200 mm.

The arms of the bell crank lever are 110 mm vertically and 150 mm horizontally. Find : 1. the




initial compressive force on the spring, if the speed for an initial ball radius of 200 mm is 240

r.p.m. ; and 2. the stiffness of the spring required to permit a sleeve movement of 4 mm on a

fluctuation of 7.5 per cent in the engine speed.

24. A spring controlled governor of the Hartnell type has the following data : Mass of the ball = 1.8

kg ; Mass of the sleeve = 6 kg ; Ball and sleeve arms of the bell crank lever = 150 mm and 120

mm respectively. The equilibrium speed and radius of rotation for the lowest position of the

sleeve are 400 r.p.m. and 150 mm respectively. The sleeve lift is 10 mm and the change in speed

for full sleeve lift is 5%. During an overhaul, the spring was compressed 2 mm more than the

correct compression for the initial setting. Determine the stiffness of the spring and the new

equilibrium speed for the lowest position of the sleeve.

25. A spring controlled governor of the Hartnell type has two rotating balls of mass 1.35 kg each. The

ball arm is 75 mm and the sleeve arm is 62.5 mm. In the mid position of the sleeve, the sleeve arm

is horizontal and the balls rotate in a circle of 100 mm radius. The total sleeve movement is 30

mm. Due to maladjustment of the spring, it is found that the equilibrium speed at the topmost

position of the sleeve is 420 r.p.m. and that corresponding to the lowest position is 435 r.p.m.

Determine : 1. stiffness and initial compression of the spring, and 2. the required initial

compression of the spring to give an equilibrium speed at the topmost position which is 12 r.p.m.

more than at the lowest position. Neglect the moment due to mass of the balls.

26. A Hartnell governor has two rotating balls, of mass 2.7 kg each. The ball radius is 125 mm in the

mean position when the ball arms are vertical and the speed is 150 r.p.m. with the sleeve rising.

The length of the ball arms is 140 mm and the length of the sleeve arms 90 mm. The stiffness of

the spring is 7 kN/m and the total sleeve movement is 12 mm from the mean position. Allowing

for a constant friction force of 14 N acting at the sleeve, determine the speed range of the

governor in the lowest and highest sleeve positions. Neglect the obliquity of the ball arms.

27. The spring controlled governor of the Hartung type has two rotating masses each of 2.5 kg and the

limits of their radius of rotation are 100 mm and 125 mm. The each mass is directly controlled by

a spring attached to it and to the inner casing of the governor as shown in Fig 18.26 (a). The

stiffness of the spring is 8 kN/m and the force on each spring, when the masses are in their mid-

position, is 320 N. In addition, there is an equivalent constant inward radial force of 80 N acting

on each revolving mass in order to allow for the dead weight of the mechanism. Neglecting

friction, find the range of speed of the governor.

28. In a spring controlled governor of the Hartung type, the lengths of the horizontal and vertical arms

of the bell crank levers are 100 mm and 80 mm respectively. The fulcrum of the bell crank lever is

at a distance of 120 mm from the axis of the governor. The each revolving mass is 9 kg. The

stiffness of the spring is 25 kN/m. If the length of each spring is 120 mm when the radius of

rotation is 70 mm and the equilibrium speed is 360 r.p.m., find the free length of the spring. If the

radius of rotation increases to 120 mm, what will be the corresponding percentage increase in

speed ? [Hint. Free length of the spring = Length of the

spring + compression of the spring]

29. The following particulars refer to a Wilson-Hartnell

governor : Mass of each ball = 4 kg ; minimum radius =

80 mm ; maximum radius = 90 mm ; minimum speed =

240 r.p.m.; maximum speed = 252 r.p.m.; length of the

Ball arm of each bell crank lever = 80 mm; length of

sleeve arm of each bell crank lever = 60 mm; combined

stiffness of the two ball springs = 750 N/m. Find the

required stiffness of the auxiliary spring, if the lever is

pivoted at the mid-point.

30. A spring loaded governor of the Wilson-Hartnell type is shown in Fig. Two balls each of mass 4

kg are connected across by two springs A. The stiffness of each spring is 750 N/m and a free

length of 100 mm. The length of ball arm of each bell crank lever is 80 mm and that of sleeve arm

is 60 mm. The lever is pivoted at its mid-point. The speed of the governor is 240 r.p.m. in its mean




position and the radius of rotation of the ball is 80 mm. If the lift of the sleeve is 7.5 mm for an

increase of speed of 5%, find the required stiffness of the auxiliary spring B.

31. A Porter governor has all four arms 200 mm long. The upper arms are pivoted on the axis of

rotation and the lower arms are attached to a sleeve at a distance of 25 mm from the axis. Each

ball has a mass of 2 kg and the mass of the load on the sleeve is 20 kg. If the radius of rotation of

the balls at a speed of 250 r.p.m. is 100 mm, find the speed of the governor after the sleeve has

lifted 50 mm. Also determine the effort and power of the governor.

32. A Porter governor has arms 250 mm each and four rotating flyballs of mass 0.8 kg each. The

sleeve movement is restricted to ± 20 mm from the height when the mean speed is 100 r.p.m.

Calculate the central dead load and sensitivity of the governor neglecting friction when the flyball

exerts a centrifugal force of 9.81 N. Determine also the effort and power of the governor for 1

percent speed change.

33. The upper arms of a Porter governor are pivoted on the axis of rotation and the lower arms are

pivoted to the sleeve at a distance of 30 mm from the axis of rotation. The length of each arm is

300 mm and the mass of each ball is 6 kg. If the equilibrium speed is 200 r.p.m. when the radius

of rotation is 200 mm, find the required mass on the sleeve. If the friction is equivalent to a force

of 40 N at the sleeve, find the coefficient of insensitiveness at 200 mm radius.

34. In a spring controlled governor, the radial force acting on the balls was 4500 N when the centre of

balls was 200 mm from the axis and 7500 N when at 300 mm. Assuming that the force varies

directly as the radius, find the radius of the ball path when the governor runs at 270 r.p.m. Also

find what alteration in spring load is required in order to make the governor isochronous and the

speed at which it would then run. The mass of each ball is 30 kg.

35. Write a short note on gyroscope.

36. What do you understand by gyroscopic couple ? Derive a formula for its magnitude.

37. Explain the application of gyroscopic principles to aircrafts.

38. Describe the gyroscopic effect on sea going vessels.

39. Explain the effect of the gyroscopic couple on the reaction of the four wheels of a vehicle

negotiating a curve.

40. Discuss the effect of the gyroscopic couple on a two wheeled vehicle when taking a turn.

41. What will be the effect of the gyroscopic couple on a disc fixed at a certain angle to a rotating

shaft ?

42. A flywheel of mass 10 kg and radius of gyration 200 mm is spinning about its axis, which is

horizontal and is suspended at a point distant 150 mm from the plane of rotation of the flywheel.

Determine the angular velocity of precession of the flywheel. The spin speed of flywheel is 900

r.p.m.

43. A horizontal axle AB, 1 m long, is pivoted at the mid point C. It carries a weight of 20 N at A and

a wheel weighing 50 N at B. The wheel is made to spin at a speed of 600 r.p.m in a clockwise

direction looking from its front. Assuming that the weight of the flywheel is uniformly distributed

around the rim whose mean diameter is 0.6 m, calculate the angular velocity of precession of the

system around the vertical axis through C.

44. An aeroplane runs at 600 km / h. The rotor of the engine weighs 4000 N with radius of gyration of

1 metre. The speed of rotor is 3000 r.p.m. in anticlockwise direction when seen from rear side of

the aeroplane. If the plane takes a loop upwards in a curve of 100 metres radius, find : 1.

gyroscopic couple developed; and 2. effect of reaction gyroscopic couple developed on the body

of aeroplane.

45. An aeroplane makes a complete half circle of 50 metres radius, towards left, when flying at 200

km per hour. The rotary engine and the propeller of the plane has a mass of 400 kg with a radius

of gyration of 300 mm. The engine runs at 2400 r.p.m. clockwise, when viewed from the rear.

Find the gyroscopic couple on the aircraft and state its effect on it. What will be the effect, if the

aeroplane turns to its right instead of to the left ?

46. Each paddle wheel of a steamer have a mass of 1600 kg and a radius of gyration of 1.2 m. The

steamer turns to port in a circle of 160 m radius at 24 km / h, the speed of the paddles being 90




r.p.m. Find the magnitude and effect of the gyroscopic couple acting on the steamer.

47. The rotor of the turbine of a yacht makes 1200 r.p.m. clockwise when viewed from stern. The

rotor has a mass of 750 kg and its radius of gyration is 250 mm. Find the maximum gyroscopic

couple transmitted to the hull (body of the yacht) when yacht pitches with maximum angular

velocity of 1 rad /s. What is the effect of this couple ?

48. The rotor of a turbine installed in a boat with its axis along the longitudinal axis of the boat makes

1500 r.p.m. clockwise when viewed from the stern. The rotor has a mass of 750 kg and a radius of

gyration of 300 mm. If at an instant, the boat pitches in the longitudinal vertical plane so that the

bow rises from the horizontal plane with an angular velocity of 1 rad /s, determine the torque

acting on the boat and the direction in which it tends to turn the boat at the instant.

49. The mass of a turbine rotor of a ship is 8 tonnes and has a radius of gyration 0.6 m. It rotates at

1800 r.p.m. clockwise when looking from the stern. Determine the gyroscopic effects in the

following cases: 1. if the ship travelling at 100 km / h strees to the left in a curve of 75 m radius,

2. if the ship is pitching and the bow is descending with maximum velocity. The pitching is

simple harmonic, the periodic time being 20 seconds and the total angular movement between the

extreme positions is 10°, and 3. If the ship is rolling and at a certain instant has an angular

velocity of 0.03 rad/s clockwise when looking from stern. In each case, explain clearly how you

determine the direction in which the ship tends to move as a result of the gyroscopic action.

50. The turbine rotor of a ship has a mass of 20 tonnes and a radius of gyration of 0.75 m. Its speed is

2000 r.p.m. The ship pitches 6° above and below the horizontal position. One complete oscillation

takes 18 seconds and the motion is simple harmonic. Calculate : 1. the maximum couple tending

to shear the holding down bolts of the turbine, 2. the maximum angular acceleration of the ship

during pitching, and 3. the direction in which the bow will tend to turn while rising, if the rotation

of the rotor is clockwise when looking from rear.

51. A motor car takes a bend of 30 m radius at a speed of 60 km / hr. Determine the magnitudes of

gyroscopic and centrifugal couples acting on the vehicle and state the effect that each of these has

on the road reactions to the road wheels. Assume that : Each road wheel has a moment of inertia

of 3 kg-m2 and an effective road radius of 0.4 m. The rotating parts of the engine and

transmission are equivalent to a flywheel of mass 75 kg with a radius of gyration of 100 mm. The

engine turns in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front. The back-axle ratio is 4 : 1, the

drive through the gear box being direct. The gyroscopic effects of the half shafts at the back axle

are to be ignored. The car has a mass of 1200 kg and its centre of gravity is 0.6 m above the road

wheel. The turn is in a right hand direction. If the turn has been in a left hand direction, all other

details being unaltered, which answers, if any, need modification.

52. A rail car has a total mass of 4 tonnes. There are two axles, each of which together with its wheels

and gearing has a total moment of inertia of 30 kg-m2. The centre distance between the two

wheels on an axle is 1.5 metres and each wheel is of 375 mm radius. Each axle is driven by a

motor, the speed ratio between the two being 1 : 3. Each motor with its gear has a moment of

inertia of 15 kg-m2 and runs in a direction opposite to that of its axle. The centre of gravity of the

car is 1.05 m above the rails. Determine the limiting speed for this car, when it rounding a curve

of 240 metres radius such that no wheel leaves the rail. Consider the centrifugal and gyroscopic

effects completely. Assume that no cant is provided for outer rail.

53. A racing car weighs 20 kN. It has a wheel base of 2 m, track width 1 m and height of C.G. 300

mm above the ground level and lies midway between the front and rear axle. The engine flywheel

rotates at 3000 r.p.m. clockwise when viewed from the front. The moment of inertia of the

flywheel is 4 kg-m2 and moment of inertia of each wheel is 3 kg-m2. Find the reactions between

the wheels and the ground when the car takes a curve of 15 m radius towards right at 30 km / h,

taking into consideration the gyroscopic and the centrifugal effects. Each wheel radius is 400 mm.

54. A four wheel trolley car of total mass 2000 kg running on rails of 1 m gauge, rounds a curve of 25

m radius at 40 km / h. The track is banked at 10°. The wheels have an external diameter of 0.6 m

and each pair of an axle has a mass of 200 kg. The radius of gyration for each pair is 250 mm. The

height of C.G. of the car above the wheel base is 0.95 m. Allowing for centrifugal force and




Sl.

No. Course Outcome

Programme Outcomes

Programme

Specific

outcomes

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

1

Analyze graphically the static forces

acting in different links of simple planar

mechanisms.

3 3 2 - - - 2 - - - - 2 2 2 -

2

Analyze inertia forces acting on

different links of simple planar

mechanisms. Design suitable fly wheel

for simple mechanical systems

2 2 2 - - - 2 - - - - 2 2 2 2

3 Determine the magnitude and location

of balancing masses for the rotating 3 2 2 - - - 2 - - - - 2 3 2 2

gyroscopic couple action, determine the pressure on each rail.

55. A 2.2 tonne racing car has a wheel base of 2.4 m and a track of 1.4 m from the rear axle. The

equivalent mass of engine parts is 140 kg with radius of gyration of 150 mm. The back axle ratio

is 5. The engine shaft and flywheel rotate clockwise when viewed from the front. Each wheel has

a diameter of 0.8 m and a moment of inertia of 0.7 kg-m2. Determine the load distribution on the

wheels when the car is rounding a curve of 100 m radius at a speed of 72 km / h to the left.

56. A disc has a mass of 30 kg and a radius of gyration about its axis of symmetry 125 mm while its

radius of gyration about a diameter of the disc at right angles to the axis of symmetry is 75 mm.

The disc is pressed on to the shaft but due to incorrect boring, the angle between the axis of

symmetry and the actual axis of rotation is 0.25°, though both these axes pass through the centre

of gravity of the disc. Assuming that the shaft is rigid and is carried between bearings 200 mm

apart, determine the bearing forces due to the misalignment at a speed of 5000 r.p.m.

57. A wheel of a locomotive, travelling on a level track at 90 km / h, falls in a spot hole 10 mm deep

and rises again in a total time of 0.8 seconds. The displacement of the wheel takes place with

simple harmonic motion. The wheel has a diameter of 3 m and the distance between the wheel

centres is 1.75 m. The wheel pair with axle has a moment of inertia of 500 kg-m2. Determine the

magnitude and the effect of gyrocouple produced in this case.

58. Each road wheel of a motor cycle has a mass moment of inertia of 1.5 kg-m2. The rotating parts

of the engine of the motor cycle have a mass moment of inertia of 0.25 kg-m2. The speed of the

engine is 5 times the speed of the wheels and is in the same sense. The mass of the motor cycle

with its rider is 250kg and its centre of gravity is 0.6 m above the ground level. Find the angle of

heel if the cycle is travelling at 50 km / h and is taking a turn of 30 m radius. The wheel diameter

is 0.6 m.

59. A racing motor cyclist travels at 140 km/h round a curve of 120 m radius measured horizontally.

The cycle and rider have mass of 150 kg and their centre of gravity lies at 0.7 m above the ground

levelwhen the motor cycle is vertical. Each wheel is 0.6 m in diameter and has moment of inertia

about itsaxis of rotation 1.5 kg-m2. The engine has rotating parts whose moment of inertia about

their axis of rotation is 0.25 kg-m2 and it rotates at five times the wheel speed in the same

direction. Find : 1. The correct angle of banking of the track so that there is no tendency to side

slip, and 2. the correct angle of inclination of the cycle and rider to the vertical. [Hint. In

calculating the angle of banking of the track, neglect the effect of gyroscopic couple]


Mapping of Course Outcomes (CO) with Program Outcomes (POs) and Program Specific

Outcomes (PSOs)




Sl.

No. Course Outcome

Programme Outcomes

Programme

Specific

outcomes

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

machines

4

Determine the magnitude and location

of balancing masses for the

reciprocating machines.

3 2 2 - - - 2 - - - - 2 3 2 2

5

Explain working principle of Governors

and Gyroscopes and analyze the

gyroscopic stability of mechanical

systems.

2 2 2 - - - 2 - - - - 2 3 2 1





Theory of Machines-II (P15AU54)

Note: i) Answer any FIVE full questions, selecting atleast ONE full question from each unit.

ii) Graphical solutions must be done on drawing sheet only.

iii) Missing data, if any, may be suitably assumed and stated.

UNIT - I

1 a. Explain with force vector diagrams, the conditions for equilibrium of three-force and four –

force system. 5

b. A slider crank mechanism is as shown in figure. The value of applied force on the slider 4 is

3000 N. Determine the forces on the various links and also calculate the driving torque T2.

15

2. A four-bar mechanism is shown. Calculate the required value of T2 and various forces on

links for equilibrium of the system.

20

UNIT - II

3. The connecting rod of a vertical reciprocating engine is 2 m long between centres and it

weighs 250 kg. The mass centre is 800 mm from the big end bearing. When suspended as a

pendulum from the gudgen pin axis, it makes 8 complete oscillations in 22 seconds. Calculate

the radius of gyration of the rod about an axis through its mass centre. The crank is 400 mm

long and rotates at 200 rpm. When the crank has turned through 40º from the top dead centre

and the piston is moving downwards, analytically find the inertial torque exerted on the

crankshaft.

20

4 a. Explain the need of flywheel with examples. 4

b. Turning moment curve for one revolution of a multi cylinder engine above and below the line

of mean resisting torque are given by -0.32, +4.06, -2.71, +3.29, -3.16, +2.32, -3.74, +2.71

and - 2.45 cm2. The vertical and horizontal scales are 1cm = 60000 kg-cm and 1 cm = 24ºC

respectively. The fluctuation of speed is limited to 1.5 percent of speed which is 250 rpm.

The hoop stress in rim material is limited to 56 kg/cm2. Neglecting the effect of boss and

arms, determine suitable diameter and cross – section of flywheel rim. Density of rim material

is 0.072 kg/cm3. Assume width of rim equal to four times its thickness.

16

UNIT - III

Contd…2




5. Three masses 12 kg, 10 kg and 8 kg are revolving at radii 7 cm, 6 cm and 8 cm in three

parallel planes A, B and C respectively on a shaft. Planes B and C are at a distance of 0.25 m

from A on either side of A (B is on the left side). The three masses are placed in such a way

that they are statically balanced. Find the unbalanced couple in a plane midway between A

and B if the shaft revolves at 1000 rpm.

20

6. A shaft rotates in two bearings A and B 1.8 m apart and project 0.45 m beyond A and B. At

the extreme ends of the shaft art attached two pulleys of masses 20 kg and 48 kg, their centre

of mass being respectively 12.5 mm and 15.5 mm from the axis of the shaft. In the middle of

the bearings is attached a third pulley of mass 56 kg with its centre of gravity 15.5 mm from

the axis of the shaft. If the pulleys are arranged so as to obtain static balance. Determine;

a) Relative angular position of the pulley.

b) Dynamic force produced on the bearings when the speed of the shaft is 300 rpm.

20

UNIT - IV

7. A four crank engine has two outer cranks set at 120º to each other, and their reciprocating

masses are 100 kg. The distances between the planes of rotation of adjacent cranks (from left

side) are 450 mm, 750 mm and 450 mm. If the engine is to be in complete primary balance,

find the reciprocating mass and the relative angular position of inner cranks, if the length of

each crank is 300 mm, length of each connecting rod is 1.2 m and the speed of rotation is

240 rpm. What is the maximum secondary unbalanced force?

20

8. The pistons of a 60º V engine have a stroke of 1.2 m. The two connecting rods operate on a

common crank pin and each is 0.2 m. If the mass of the reciprocating parts is 1 kg per

cylinder and the crank shaft speed is 25000 rpm. Determine the maximum value of primary

and secondary forces. Use direct and reverse crank method.

20

UNIT - V

9. What are the types of Governors? How is a governor different from a flywheel? 5

b. Each arm of a porter governor is 200 mm long and is provided on the axis of the governor.

The radii of rotation at the minimum and maximum speeds are 120 mm and 160 mm

respectively. The mass of the sleeve is 24 kg and each revolving mass is 4 kg. The range of

speed of the governor assuming that ; i) There is no friction, ii) The friction at the sleeve is

18 N.

15

10 a. Discuss the effect of gyroscopic couple on an airplane when it takes i) Left turn with engine

rotating CCW when viewed from rear. ii) Right turn with engine rotating CCW when viewed

from nose of the airplane. Make use suitable diagram to support your answer.

6

b. A ship is propelled by a turbine rotor of mass 500 kg and has a speed of 2400 rpm. The rotor

has a radius of gyration of 0.5 m and rotates in clockwise direction when viewed from stern.

Find the gyroscopic effects in;

i) The ship runs at a speed of 15 knots. It steers to the left in a curve 60 m radius.

ii) The ship pitches 5º from the horizontal position with the time period of 20 s of simple

harmonic motion.

iii) The ship rolls with angular velocity of 0.04 rad/s clock wise when viewed from stern.

Also calculate the maximum acceleration during pitching.

Note : 1 knot = 1.88 kM/Hr.

14

* * * *




Course Title: AUXILIARY SYSTEMS OF AUTOMOTIVE ENGINES



Prerequisites: Subject requires student to know about

Students must have the back ground knowledge of different types of drives like belt

drives, chain drives, gear drives and rope drives.

COURSE LEARNING OBJECTIVES (CLO): At the end of the course the student should be able to

a) Analyze the mixture requirement for different operating conditions

b) Explain Constructional and working principles of different types of carburetors

c) Design a carburetor

d) Distinguish between petrol injection and carburetor

e) Differentiate between petrol injection and diesel injection system

f) Explain the constructional and principle of operation of different types diesel injection

systems

g) Design considerations for diesel injection system

h) Explain the necessity and working of governors in injection system

i) Explain the purpose and advantages of supercharging and turbo charging

j) Distinguish between types and advantages of different types of cooling and lubrication

systems.

k) Calculate the quantity of water required for cooling

l) Modifications required in engine for supercharging

m) Distinguish between Lubricants, lubricating systems, Lubrication of piston rings, bearings,

oil consumption

Relevance of the course: Auxiliary Systems of Automotive Engines is a course deals with the different ways through

which the fuel is supplied to engines and also deals with purpose and different method of

cooling, lubrication and super charging and turbo charging and it is hoped that through this

programme student will gain sufficient knowledge to make them employable in automotive

industries carburetor and fuel injection system manufacturing industries

COURSE CONTENT

UNIT-I Petrol Engine Fuel supply system : – Carburettor, principle, properties of A/F mixtures,

mixture requirements – steady state and transient, law of mixture preparation in simple

carburettor, complete carburettor, types and different makes of carburettors, fuel feed systems,

fuel pumps, filters, design of carburettors, Petrol injection – Disadvantages of carburettor,

advantages of petrol injection, different types, theory of mixture control, representative types of

petrol injection ,principles-construction & performance ( Bosch K-jetronic fuel injection

system), high pressure fuel injector 10Hours

UUNNIITT––IIII

DDiieesseell eennggiinnee FFuueell ssuuppppllyy ssyysstteemm:: –– CClleeaanniinngg ssyysstteemmss,, ttrraannssffeerr ppuummppss,, iinnjjeeccttiioonn ppuummppss ((jjeerrkk ppuummpp,,

ddiissttrriibbuuttoorr ttyyppee aanndd CCRRDDII ssyysstteemm,, EEDDCC ssyysstteemm)),, iinnjjeeccttoorrss ((mmeecchhaanniiccaall aanndd eelleeccttrroonniicc ttyyppee)) aanndd

nnoozzzzlleess.. FFaaccttoorrss iinnfflluueenncciinngg tthhee ffuueell sspprraayy aattoommiizzaattiioonn,, ppeenneettrraattiioonn aanndd ddiissppeerrssiioonn ooff ddiieesseell,, rraattee

aanndd dduurraattiioonn ooff iinnjjeeccttiioonn,, iinnjjeeccttiioonn llaagg,, pprreessssuurree wwaavveess iinn ffuueell lliinneess.. 10 Hours




UUNNIITT –– IIIIII

CCoooolliinngg ssyysstteemm –– NNeecceessssiittyy,, vvaarriiaattiioonn ooff ggaass tteemmppeerraattuurree,, AArreeaass ooff hheeaatt ffllooww,, hheeaatt ttrraannssffeerr,,

ppiissttoonn aanndd ccyylliinnddeerr tteemmppeerraattuurree,, HHeeaatt rreejjeecctteedd ttoo ccoooollaanntt,, qquuaannttiittyy ooff wwaatteerr rreeqquuiirreedd,, ccoooolliinngg

ssyysstteemmss,, aaiirr ccoooolliinngg,, wwaatteerr ccoooolliinngg,, aanndd tthheerrmmooddyynnaammiiccss ooff ffoorrcceedd cciirrccuullaattiioonn,, eevvaappoorraattiivvee

ccoooolliinngg aanndd pprreessssuurree ccoooolliinngg.. rreeggeenneerraattiivvee ccoooolliinngg,, ccoommppaarriissoonn ooff aaiirr aanndd wwaatteerr ccoooolliinngg,,

aannttiiffrreeeezzee ssoolluuttiioonn HHeeaavvyy dduuttyy ccoooolliinngg ssyysstteemm,, ,,ffuunnddaammeennttaallss ooff rraaddiiaattoorr ddeessiiggnn,, tthheerrmmoossttaattss,,

ccoooolliinngg ffaann -- ppoowweerr rreeqquuiirreemmeenntt,, eelleeccttrriicc mmoottoorr ddrriivveenn tthheerrmmoo sswwiittcchh ccoonnttrroolllleedd ffaann,, aauuttoommaattiicc

rraaddiiaattoorr sshhuutttteerr ccoonnttrrooll 11 Hours

UUNNIITT –– IIVV

LLuubbrriiccaattiioonn ssyysstteemm –– PPrriinncciipplleess ooff lluubbrriiccaattiioonn,, mmeecchhaanniissmm ooff lluubbrriiccaattiioonn,, eellaassttoo hhyyddrrooddyynnaammiicc

lluubbrriiccaattiioonn jjoouurrnnaall bbeeaarriinngg lluubbrriiccaattiioonn,, ffuunnccttiioonnss ooff tthhee lluubbrriiccaattiinngg ssyysstteemmss,, pprrooppeerrttiieess aanndd

ccllaassssiiffiiccaattiioonn ooff lluubbrriiccaattiinngg ooiillss,, ooiill aaddddiittiivveess,, lluubbrriiccaattiinngg ssyysstteemmss (( ssppllaasshh,, pprreessssuurree ffeeeedd

lluubbrriiccaattiioonn,, ddrryy ssuummpp aanndd wweett ssuummpp lluubbrriiccaattiioonn ssyysstteemmss )),, ooiill ffiilltteerrss ((cceennttrriiffuuggaall ooiill ffiilltteerrss)),,

ppuummppss,, ccrraannkkccaassee vveennttiillaattiioonn –– ttyyppeess

GGoovveerrnnoorrss –– ttyyppeess,, ccoonnssttrruuccttiioonnaall ffeeaattuurreess aanndd ooppeerraattiioonn ((mmaaxxiimmuumm ssppeeeedd ggoovveerrnnoorrss,,

mmiinniimmuumm-- mmaaxxiimmuumm ssppeeeedd ggoovveerrnnoorrss aanndd vvaarriiaabbllee ssppeeeedd ggoovveerrnnoorrss 10Hours

UNIT - V

SSuuppeerrcchhaarrggiinngg aanndd TTuurrbboo cchhaarrggiinngg:: PPuurrppoossee,, ttyyppeess ooff ssuuppeerrcchhaarrggeerrss,, TThheerrmmooddyynnaammiicc ccyyccllee,,

eeffffeeccttss ooff ssuuppeerrcchhaarrggiinngg,, lliimmiittss ooff ssuuppeerr cchhaarrggiinngg ffoorr ppeettrrooll aanndd ddiieesseell eennggiinneess.. MMooddiiffiiccaattiioonnss ooff

aann eennggiinnee ffoorr ssuuppeerrcchhaarrggiinngg..

TTuurrbboocchhaarrggiinngg :: MMeetthhooddss ooff ttuurrbboocchhaarrggiinngg ((ccoonnssttaanntt pprreessssuurree,, ppuullssee aanndd ppuullssee ccoonnvveerrtteerr)) ttwwoo

ssttaaggee ttuurrbboocchhaarrggiinngg mmiilllleerr ttuurrbboocchhaarrggiinngg aanndd hhyyppeerrbbaarr ttuurrbboocchhaarrggiinngg.. DDuuaall ssttaaggee ssccrroollll aarreeaa

ttuurrbboocchhaarrggeedd eennggiinnee ssyysstteemm aanndd vvaarriiaabbllee ssccrroollll aarreeaa ttuurrbboocchhaarrggeedd eennggiinnee ssyysstteemm.. 10 Hours

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Heinz Heisler, Advanced engine technology, Butterworth Heinemann, 2002

2. Mathur,M.L., and Sharma,R.P., “A Course in Internal Combustion Engines”, Dhanpat

Rai Publications (P) Ltd., 2015.

3. Kirpal Singh, “Automobile Engineering Vol I & II ”, Standard Pub, New Delhi, 2012,

2014

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Domkundwar, V.M, A Course in Internal Combustion Engines, Dhanpat Rai and Co.,

2016.

2. Ganeshan, V, Internal Combustion Engines, Tata McGraw-Hill Book Co., 2014.

3. Duffy Smith, Auto Fuel Systems, The Good Heart Willcox Company Inc., Publishers,

1987.

4. Edward F, Obert, Internal Combustion Engines and Air Pollution, Intext Education

Publishers, 1980.

5. William kimberly , Gasoline- Engine Management, published by Robert bosch

GmbH,2002

6. William kimberly , Diesel- Engine Management , published by Robert bosch

GmbH,2004


At the end of the course the student should be able to:

1. Identify the different methods of fuel supply systems in SI engine , construction, working

and their advantages, disadvantages

2. Identify and elaborate different ways of fuel supply systems in CI engines and their

working

3. Design different cooling systems used in IC engines and their working principles




4. Identify appropriate lubrication system for IC engines and ignition systems for SI engines

and explain their working principles

5. Understand the basic principles of supercharging and turbo charging and design

modifications of an engine for supercharging and turbo charging

UNIT WISE PLAN

UNIT-I



Explain the different ways of fuel supply to SI engines. (L2)

Explain the mixture requirement for different operating conditions.(L2)

Explain Constructional and working principles of different types of carburetors. (L3)

Design a carburetor. (L6)

Distinguish between petrol injection and carburetor. (L4)

Explain different injection systems. (L2)

Explain the constructional and principle of operation of BOSCH K-Jetronic injection

system. (L3)

LESSON SCHEDULE 1. Carburetor principle, properties of a/f mixtures

2. Mixture requirements – steady state and transient, l

3. Law of mixture preparation in simple carburetor, complete carburetor,

4. Types and different makes of carburetors solex carburetor

5. Carter carburetor and s.u. carburetor

6. Fuel feed systems, fuel pumps, filters,

7. Design of carburetors,

8. Petrol injection – disadvantages of carburetion, advantages of petrol injection

9. Different types petrol injection theory of mixture control

10.Bosch -k jetronics injection system

11.Fuel injection

UNIT-II


Explain the constructional and working principle of inline injection and distributor

injection systems.(L3)

Explain the constructional, necessity and working principle of different governors.(L3)

Explain the constructional and working principle of different feed pumps. (L3)

Analyze the effect of rate of injection ,duration and pressure of injection .(L4)

LESSON SCHEDULE 1. 1.Filters and fuel feed pumps

2. 2.Function and necessity of fuel injection pump

3. 3.Types of fuel injection pumps , inline fuel injection pump

4. 4.Distributor type of fuel injection pump

5. 5.CRDI fuel injection system

6. 6.CRDI fuel injection pumps

7. 7.Ratio of piston displacement to fuel charge volume, delivery characteristics, injection lag,

pressure waves in fuel lines

8. 8.Fuel pumps governors – types, constructional features and operation ( two hrs)

9. 9.Fuel injection and spray characteristics – factors affecting these parameters




UNIT-III



Explain the necessity of cooling in IC engines. (L2)

Compare the air and water cooling system advantages and disadvantages. (L2)

Calculate the quantity of water required for cooling. (L3)

Explain the advantages of pressurized water cooling system. (L2)

Distinguish between different types of radiators. (L4)

List the different antifreeze solutions. (L1)

Purpose of thermostat in cooling system. (L2)

Explain the heavy duty cooling and automatic radiator shutter control

LESSON SCHEDULE 1. Necessity, variation of gas temperature, Areas of heat flow, heat transfer, piston and

cylinder temperature,

2. Heat rejected to coolant, quantity of water required

2. Cooling systems, air cooling, water cooling, thermodynamics of forced circulation,

3. Thermostats, pressurized water cooling, regenerative cooling,

4. Comparison of air and water cooling, radiators – types ( two hrs )

55.. Cooling fan - power requirement, antifreeze solution

66.. HHeeaavvyy dduuttyy ccoooolliinngg ssyysstteemm,,

77.. ,,ffuunnddaammeennttaallss ooff rraaddiiaattoorr ddeessiiggnn,,

88.. tthheerrmmoossttaattss,, ccoooolliinngg ffaann --

99.. ppoowweerr rreeqquuiirreemmeenntt,,eelleeccttrriicc mmoottoorr ddrriivveenn tthheerrmmoosswwiittcchh ccoonnttrroolllleedd ffaann,,

10. aauuttoommaattiicc rraaddiiaattoorr sshhuutttteerr ccoonnttrrooll

UNIT-IV


1. Explain the necessity of lubrication in IC engines. .(L2)

2. Explain the functions of lubrication system. .(L2)

3. Explain the properties of lubricants. .(L2)

4. Explain the principle of lubrication. .(L2)

5.Explain the necessity and function of different types of governors. (L3)

LESSON SCHEDULE 1.Principles of lubrication, bearing lubrication,

2.Functions of the lubricating systems properties and classification of lubricating oils

3.Oil additives, lubricating systems,

4. Oil filters, pumps,

5. Crankcase ventilation – types

6. Purpose and function of governors

7. Constructional features of different types of governors

UNIT-V



Explain the necessity of supercharging and turbo charging.(L2)

Explain the limitations of supercharging. (L3)

Explain the modifications required in SI and CI engines. (L3)

Explain the different methods of supercharging and turbo charging. (L2)




LESSON SCHEDULE 1. Supercharging and Turbo charging: Purpose, Thermodynamic cycle ( two hrs )

2. Effect on performance,

3. Limits of super charging for petrol and diesel e engines.

3. Modifications of an engine for super charging

4. Methods of super charging ( three hrs )

5. Super charging and turbo charging of two stroke and four stroke engines

REVIEW QUESTIONS 1. Discuss the mixture requirements for maximum power and minimum specific fuel

consumption

2. Discuss mixture requirement for steady and transient condition

3. Explain the basic working principle of a simple carburettor

4. Explain briefly the different systems used in complete carburettor

5. Sketch and explain the working of solex carburetor

6. Sketch and explain the working of carter carburettor

7. Sketch and explain the working of SU carburettor

8. Sketch and explain the A C mechanical and S.U electrical pump

9. Discuss the different types of fuel filters used in petrol engine

10. Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of carburettor and petrol injection systems

11. Differentiate between direct injection ,indirect injection ,continuous and intermittent

injection

12. What are the limitations of petrol injection system

13. With schematic diagram explain the working of K-jetronic fuel injection system

14. Sketch and explain the working of air flow sensor and warm-up regulator used in K-jetronic

injection system

15. Discuss the requirements of an ideal injection

16. Sketch and explain the jerk type of fuel injection system

17. Sketch and explain the distributor type of fuel injection system

18. With schematic diagram explain the working of common rail fuel injection system

19. Sketch and explain the high pressure pump used in CRDI system

20. Sketch and explain the fuel injector used in CRDI system

21. Differentiate between the injector used in jerk type pump and CRDI system

22. Discuss the factors influencing the fuel spray atomization

23. Explain the terms rate of injection ,duration of injection and injection lag

24. Explain the variation of gas temperature during engine cycle

25. What is the necessity of cooling of an engine and also discuss the temperature profile across

the cylinder barrel wall

26. What are the two main types of cooling systems? Where these systems are used?

27. Sketch and explain the thermostat with disc valve radiator and bypass flow control

28. Sketch and explain the forced circulation cooling system. What are its merits and demerits ?

29. Discuss the different types of radiator matrices commonly used . What are their relative

advantages and disadvantages?

30. Why does the diesel engine need a governor? What are the different types of governors?

31. Sketch and explain the working of minimum-maximum speed governor

32. Sketch and explain the working of variable speed governor

33. Sketch and explain the working of pneumatic governor

34. Differentiate between maximum, minimum-maximum and variable speed governors

35. Explain the various mechanism of lubrication and their functions.

36. Differentiate between lubrication in parallel surfaces and journal bearings

37. Explain and compare the wet sump and dry sump lubrication systems

38. What are the various desired properties of a lubricant and explain how additives help to

achieve the desired properties.




39. Discuss the requirements of an ignition system, spark energy and duration

40. With a neat sketch explain the battery ignition system

41. Explain TCI ignition system with a sketch

42. Explain CDI ignition system with sketch

43. Why spark advance is required? With sketch any one of spark advance mechanism

44. Draw a neat sketch of a spark plug explain its various parts.

45. What are the factors that affect the power output of an engine? Explain how supercharging

helps to improve the power output.

46. Briefly explain the working of following

47. centrifugal supercharger b) roots supercharger

48. Mention the effect of supercharging on engine performance.

49. What are the limitations of supercharging in an IC engine? Differentiate between

supercharging and turbo charging

50. Differentiate between constant pressure and pulse turbo charging

51. Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of pulse turbo charging

52. Sketch and explain the hyper bar turbo charging

53. Sketch and explain the dual stage scroll area turbocharged engine system

54. Sketch and explain dual stage turbo charging and its advantages




Sl.

No. Course Outcome

Programme Outcomes

Programme

Specific

outcomes

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

1

Identify the different methods of fuel

supply systems in SI engine ,

construction,working and their

advantages, disadvantages

3 2 1 - - 2 2 - - - - 2 3 3 1

2

Identify and elaborate different ways of

fuel supply systems in CI engines and

their working

3 2 1 - - 2 2 - - - - 2 3 3 1

3

Design different cooling systems used

in IC engines and their working

principles

3 2 1 - - 2 2 - - - - 2 3 3 1

4

Identify appropriate lubrication system

for IC engines and ignition systems for

SI engines and explain their working

principles

3 2 1 - - 2 2 - - - - 2 3 3 1

5

Understand the basic principles of

supercharging and turbocharging and

design modifications of an engine for

supercharging and turbocharging

2 2 1 - - 2 2 - - - - 2 3 2 1




Model Question Paper Course Title: AUXILIARY SYSTEMS OF AUTOMOTIVE ENGINES (P15AU551)

Note: Answer FIVE full questions, selecting ONE full question from each unit.

UNIT - I

1 a. 1. a. Define carburetion. Explain transient mixture requirements. 8

b. With a neat sketch explain the working SU carburetor. 12

2 a. Explain a typical petrol injection system. List out the advantages and disadvantages of

petrol injection in SI engines. 10

b. Sketch and explain “The K – JETRONIC Petrol Injection” system. 10

UNIT - II

3 a. Mention the principles of a good diesel injection system. 10

b. Compare: Unit pump system and distributor system of diesel injection. 10

4 a. Sketch and explain the common rail diesel injection system and list the merits and

demerits of it. 12

b. Write a short note on :

i) Fuel spray atomization ii) Injection lag. 8

UNIT - III

5 a. Compare the merits and demerits of air cooling and water cooling system. 8

b. Explain with a sketch the pressurized cooling system. 12

6 a. What is governor? Explain the need for a governor and list out different types of

governors. 10

b. Explain the construction and working of a pneumatic governor. Mention its merits. 10

UNIT - IV

7 a. Explain the splash system of wet sump lubrication system, with a neat sketch. 12

b. Describe positive crank case ventilation system with a sketch. 8

8 a. With a neat sketch, explain the battery coil ignition system. 8

b. Compare the battery coil ignition system and magneto ignition system. 6

c. Write a short note on spark plugs. 6

UNIT - V

9 a. Explain the concept of ‘supercharging’ with the help of a thermodynamic cycle. 10

b. What are the supercharging limits of SI and CI engines? 10

10 a. Explain pulse-turbo charging. List the merits and demerits. 10

b. Describe two stage turbo charging. Enlist merits and demerits. 10




Prerequisites:

Basics of Automobile Engineering, Manufacturing Process and Production Technology.


This course aims to

1. Learn the various production processes of engine & engine components.

2. Explain the manufacturing of clutch, gear box and propeller shaft components.

3. Describe about the production of axles, springs, steering system and others.

4. Summarize about the manufacture of engine components using ceramic matrix composites

and advanced machining process.


The subject manufacture of automotive components is an elective course in BE (automobile

engineering) program that helps to understanding the manufacturing process of various

automobile components.

Further this course aims at developing and understanding the production of automotive

components and the latest manufacturing methods & developments in automotive field.

COURSE CONTENT

UNIT-I

Manufacturing of engine & engine components:

Casting of engine block – conventional and expandable pattern, machining of engine blocks in

machining center. Preparation of casting for cylinder heads, forging of crankshaft, connecting

rod and gudgeon pins, machining and heat treatment, casting of piston by gravity casting,

squeeze casting, machining and finishing, upset forging of valves, heat treatment and surface

improvement, cylinder liners and piston ring manufacturing. 10hrs

UNIT-II

Manufacture of clutch and gear box components:

Manufacturing friction plates using conventional blanking and fine blanking. Manufacture of

composite friction lining, composite molding of phenol formaldehyde lining. Casting of gear box

casting, gear hobbing, shaping powder metallurgy, orbital forming of spur, helical, and bevel

gears, hypoid gears, heat treatment and finishing.

Manufacture of propeller shaft:

Continuous casting of propeller shaft, extrusion of propeller shaft, extrusion of dies, heat

treatment and surface hardening of propeller shaft, composite propeller shaft manufacturing.

11hrs

UNIT-III

Manufacture of axles and springs:

Forging of front and rear axles, casting of rear axle casing, leaf spring manufacturing, composite

leaf springs, wrap forming of coil springs, other springs advanced, steering systems.

Miscellaneous:

Wheels, brakes, tyre and tube manufacturing, painting, painting booth, coach work. 10hrs

UNIT-IV

Manufacture of body panels:Introduction, thermoforming and hydro forming, press forming,

welding of body panels, resistance welding and other welding processes.

Manufacture of automotive plastic components:

Course title: Manufacture of Automobile Components

Course code: P15AU552 Semester: V L – T – P -H: 2 –2 - 0 -4 Credits:3

Contact period-lecturer: 52hrs,: Exam:3 hrs Weightage:CIE:50%; SEE:50%




Introduction, principle of injection molding, injection molding of instrument panel, molding of

bumpers, tooling and tooling requirements, hand layup process for making composite panels,

manufacture of metal/polymer/metal panels. 10hrs

UNIT-V

Manufacture of engine components using ceramic matrix composites: Introduction, ceramic matrix piston rings, chemical vapour deposition, physical vapour

deposition, cryogenic grinding of powders, sol-gel processing, advanced machine processes

using rpt, cnc, etc.

Advanced machining process:

Machining concepts using NC, generation of numerical control codes using pro-e and ideas

package, interfacing the CNC machine and manufacturing package. Introduction to rapid

prototyping using fused deposition, laser sintering. 11hrs

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Heldt P.M. “High Speed Combustion Engines”, Oxford IBH Publishing Co.

2. Philip F., Steward & Jairo Munuz, “Manufacturing processes and systems,” John wiley &

sons.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Kalpakjian. “Manufacturing and engineering technology”, addison wesloy, publishing

company.

2. Degarmo E.P., “Materials and process in manufacturing”, Macmillan publishing co.,

COURSE OUTCOMES


1. Explain the various manufacturing processes of Automotive Engine components.

2. Explain the manufacturing Process of clutch, gear box and propeller shaft.

3. Describe the manufacturing process of automotive axles, springs, steering system

4. Illustrate various methods of manufacturing the automobile vehicle body panels and

plastic components

5. Analyze the application of Ceramic matrix Composite (CmC) Technology to produce

Engine components and explain the advance machining and manufacturing packages

UNIT WISE PLAN

UNIT-1


After learning the contents of Unit-I, the student is able to,

Learn and explain about

Casting of engine block – conventional and expandable pattern, machining of engine blocks in

machining center. Preparation of casting for cylinder heads, forging of crankshaft, connecting

rod and gudgeon pins, machining and heat treatment, casting of piston by gravity casting,

squeeze casting, machining and finishing, upset forging of valves, heat treatment and surface

improvement, cylinder liners and piston ring manufacturing.

LESSON SCHEDULE

1. Casting of engine block – conventional and expandable pattern,

2. Machining of engine blocks in machining center,

3. Preparation of casting for cylinder heads,

4. Forging of crankshaft,

5. Forging of connecting rod and gudgeon pins,

6. Machining and heat treatment,




7. Casting of piston by gravity casting and squeeze casting,

8. Machining and finishing, upset forging of valves,

9. Heat treatment and surface improvement,

10. Cylinder liners and piston ring manufacturing.

UNIT-II


After learning the contents of Unit-II, the student is able to,

Learn and describe about

Manufacturing friction plates using conventional blanking and fine blanking. Manufacture of

composite friction lining, composite molding of phenol formaldehyde lining. Casting of gear box

casting, gear hobbing,

Shaping powder metallurgy, orbital forming of spur, helical, and bevel gears, hypoid gears, heat

treatment and finishing.

Explain about

Continuous casting of propeller shaft, extrusion of propeller shaft, extrusion of dies, heat

treatment and surface hardening of propeller shaft, composite propeller shaft manufacturing.

LESSON SCHEDULE

1. Manufacturing friction plates using conventional blanking and fine blanking,

2. Manufacture of composite friction lining, composite molding of phenol formaldehyde

lining,

3. Casting of gear box, gear hobbing,

4. Shaping powder metallurgy, orbital forming of spur gear,

5. Orbital forming of helical, and bevel gears,

6. Orbital forming of hypoid gears, heat treatment and finishing

7. Continuous casting of propeller shaft,

8. Extrusion of propeller shaft,

9. Extrusion of dies,

10. Heat treatment and surface hardening of propeller shaft, Composite propeller shaft

manufacturing

UNIT-III


After learning the contents of Unit-III, the student is able to,


Forging of front and rear axles, casting of rear axle casing, leaf spring manufacturing, composite

leaf springs, wrap forming of coil springs, other advanced springs, steering systems.

Explain about

Production of wheels, brakes, tyre and tube manufacturing, painting, painting booth, coach work.

LESSON SCHEDULE

1. Forging of front and rear axles,

2. Casting of rear axle casing,

3. Leaf spring manufacturing, composite leaf springs,

4. Wrap forming of coil springs,

5. Other advanced springs,

6. Steering systems,

7. Production of wheels, brakes,

8. Tyre and tube manufacturing,

9. Painting, painting booth,

10. Coach work.




UNIT-IV


After learning the contents of Unit-IV, the student is able to,

Explain about

Introduction, thermoforming and hydro forming, press forming, welding of body panels,

resistance welding and other welding processes.

Introduction, principle of injection molding, injection molding of instrument panel, molding of

bumpers, tooling and tooling requirements, hand layup process for making composite panels,

manufacture of metal/polymer/metal panels.

LESSON SCHEDULE 1. Introduction, thermoforming and hydro forming,

2. Press forming, welding of body panels,

3. Resistance welding and other welding processes.

4. Introduction, principle of injection molding,

5. Injection molding of instrument panel,

6. Molding of bumpers, tooling and tooling requirements,

7. Hand layup process,

8. Hand layup process for making composite panels,

9. Manufacture of metal/polymer/metal panels,

10. Revision.

UNIT-V


After learning the contents of Unit-V, the student is able to,


Ceramic matrix piston rings, chemical vapor deposition, physical vapor deposition, cryogenic

grinding of powders, sol-gel processing, advanced machine processes using rpt, CNC, etc.

Explain about

Machining concepts using NC, generation of numerical control codes using pro-e and ideas

package, interfacing the CNC machine and manufacturing package. Introduction to rapid

prototyping using fused deposition, laser sintering.

LESSON SCHEDULE

1. Introduction, ceramic matrix piston rings,

2. Chemical vapor deposition,

3. Physical vapor deposition,

4. Cryogenic grinding of powders,

5. Sol-gel processing,

6. Advanced machine processes using rpt, CNC, etc.

7. Machining concepts using NC,

8. Generation of numerical control codes using pro-e and ideas package,

9. Interfacing the CNC machine and manufacturing package.

10. Introduction to rapid prototyping using fused deposition,

11. Laser sintering and revision.

REVIEW QUESTIONS

1. Explain briefly the casting of an engine block.

2. Describe the machining operations of engine blocks in machining center.

3. Explain the preparation of castings for cylinder heads.

4. Describe forging of a crankshaft.

5. Explain the forging of connecting rod and gudgeon pins.

6. Describe casting of piston by gravity casting and squeeze casting.

7. Explain the upset forging of valves.

8. Write a note on heat treatment, machining and finishing.




9. Describe the production of cylinder liners.

10. Explain how the piston rings are manufactured.

11. Describe with sketch manufacturing of friction plates using fine blanking.

12. Explain the production of friction plates for a clutch with a flow chart.

13. Describe the casting of gear box.

14. Explain the process for making gears.

15. Describe gear hobbing with suitable sketch.

16. What is orbital forming? Compare the advantages of orbital forming over warm forging

process.

17. Explain briefly the continuous casting of propeller shaft.

18. Write a note on extrusion of propeller shaft and extrusion of dies.

19. Describe briefly the heat treatment of propeller shaft.

20. Explain the production of composite propeller shaft.

21. Explain the technology for forging of axles.

22. Describe the manufacturing process for leaf springs.

23. Explain the concept for wrap forming of coil springs.

24. Sketch and explain casting of rear axle casing.

25. Explain the latest advances in automotive springs.

26. Describe steering system production process.

27. How to produce wheels? Explain.

28. Explain the major steps in tyre manufacturing.

29. Describe paint production technology.

30. Explain various parts of automotive coach works.

31. Sketch and explain hydro forming.

32. Describe briefly the process of press forming.

33. Explain the concept of resistance welding.

34. Sketch and explain spot welding and projection welding for body panels.

35. Sketch and explain seam welding and butt welding for body panels.

36. Explain the principle of injection molding.

37. Explain with a neat sketch various stages in injection molding mold.

38. Define tooling. Explain various tooling requirements.

39. Explain hand layup process for making composite panels.

40. Describe briefly the production of metal panels.

41. Explain the manufacture of ceramic matrix piston rings.

42. Write a note on chemical vapor deposition and physical vapor deposition.

43. Describe cryogenic grinding of powders.

44. Explain the sol-gel processing.

45. .write a note on advanced machine processes using rpt, CNC

46. Describe the machining concepts using NC.

47. Explain generation of numerical control codes using pro-e and ideas package.

48. Write about interfacing the CNC machine and manufacturing package.

49. Explain briefly advanced machine process using rpt, CNC.

50. Write a note on laser sintering.







Sl.

No. Course Outcome

Programme Outcomes

Programme

Specific

outcomes

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

1 Explain the various manufacturing processes of

Automotive Engine components. 3 2 - - - - - - - - - - 3 - -

2 Explain the manufacturing Process of clutch,

gear box and propeller shaft. 3 2 - - - - - - - - - - 3 - -

3 Describe the manufacturing process of

automotive axles, springs, steering system 3 2 - - - - - - - - - - 3 - -

4

Illustrate various methods of manufacturing the

automobile vehicle body panels and plastic

components

3 2 - - - - - - - - - - 3 - -

5

Analyze the application of Ceramic matrix

Composite (CmC) Technology to produce

Engine components and explain the advance

machining and manufacturing packages

3 2 - - - - - - - - - - 3 - -




Prerequisites: Knowledge of Material Science and Metallurgy (P15ME32).

Course Learning objective: The objective of the course is to enable the students to understand

the fundamentals of materials science and engineering and get an exposure to some of the

advanced materials processing technologies.

COURSE CONTENT

UNIT – I

Structural features of Materials: Introduction, Atomic bonding, primary interatomic bonds,

ionic bonding, covalent bonding, metallic bonding, secondary bonding or van der waals bonding,

bonding forces and energies, density computations-metals, density computations-ceramics,

polymorphic forms of carbon, crystallographic directions, crystallographic planes, atomic

arrangements, close-packed crystal structures, Bragg’s law, single crystals, polycrystalline

materials, anisotropy, noncrystalline solids. Impurities in solids, impurities in metals, solid

solutions, specification of composition. 10 hrs

UNIT – II

Structure-Property relationship: Introduction, dislocations, edge dislocation, screw

dislocation, mixed dislocations, burgers vector, interfacial defects, external surfaces, grain

boundaries, twin boundaries, grain size. dislocation density, slip systems, Deformation

mechanisms for metals, elastic deformation, plastic deformation, influence of dislocation on

plastic deformation, plastic deformation of polycrystalline metals, mechanisms of strengthening

in metals, strengthening by grain size reduction, solid-solution strengthening, strain hardening,

recovery, recrystallization and grain growth, recrystallization temperature. Time-Temperature-

Transformation (T-T-T) of Iron-Carbon alloys, precipitation hardening, solution heat treating,

precipitation heat treating, mechanism of precipitation hardening. 10 hrs

UNIT – III

Polymer Structures: Introduction, hydrocarbon molecules, polymer molecules, chemistry of

polymer molecules, molecular shape, molecular structure, linear polymers, branched polymers,

cross-linked polymers, network polymers, thermoplastic and thermosetting polymers,

copolymers, polymer crystallinity, polymer crystals, types of polymers-plastics and elastomers.

Mechanical behaviour of polymers: stress-strain behaviour, macroscopic deformation, tear

strength and hardness of polymers, mechanisms of deformation of polymers, mechanism of

elastic deformation, mechanism of plastic deformation, deformation of elastomers,

vulcanization. 10 hrs

UNIT – IV

Composite Materials: Introduction, classification, matrix and reinforcement materials,

properties, rule of mixtures, longitudinal strength and modulus (isostrain model), transverse

strength and modulus (isostress model), Numericals, applications of composites. Processing of

PMCs - hand lay-up process, filament winding process. Processing of MMCs-Stir casting,

squeeze casting,

Powder metallurgy technique: Blending of powder, Powder Compaction, Sintering. 12 hrs

UNIT – V

Nano technology: Concept of Nanotechnology, Nanomaterials, preparation of Nanomaterials:

plasma arcing, CVD, sol-gel method, electrode deposition, ball milling, New forms of carbon,

types of nanotubes, properties of nanotubes, applications of nanotechnology. 10 hrs

Text books

1 William D. Callister, Jr., “Fundamentals of Materials Science and Engineering,” John

Wiley & Sons, Inc , 5th Edition , 2001, ISBN: 9780471395515.

Course title: Advanced Materials Science

Course code: P15AU553 Semester: V L – T – P -H: 4:0:0:4 Credits:3





2 William F Smith, Javad Hashemi, Ravi Prakash, “Materials Science and Engineering,”

Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company, Ned Delhi , 5th edition, ISBN: 9781259062759.

3 Mick Wilson, Kamali kannangara, Geoff Smith, Michelle Simmons, Burkhard Raguse,

“Nano Technology- Basic science and Emerging Technology,” Chapman and

Hall/CRC, 1st edition, 2002, ISBN: 978-1584883395.

References 1 V.S.R Murthy, A. K. Jena, K.P.Gupta, G.S.Murthy, “Structure and Properties of

Engineering Materials,” Tata McGraw Hill, .

2 Er. Rakesh Rathi, “ Nanotechnology,” S. Chand and Company, 2010, ISBN: 978-

8121930826.

Course Outcomes At the end of the course the students should be able to:

1. Explain the structural characteristics of materials.

2. Analyze the structure – property relationship of materials.

3. Explain the structural and mechanical characteristics of polymer materials.

4. Explain the characteristics and processing techniques of composite materials.

5. Explain the characteristics and processing techniques of nano-materials.


UNIT I

By the end of the topic, student will be able to

1 Explain primary, secondary bonding and bonding forces and energies.

2 Analyze crystallographic directions, crystallographic planes and atomic arrangements.

3 Explain close-packed crystal structures and Bragg’s law.

4 Recognize single and polycrystalline materials, anisotropy, noncrystalline

solids, Impurities in solids and metals.

UNIT II


1 Recognize dislocations, burgers vector, interfacial defects and external surfaces.

2 Analyze grain boundaries, grain size. dislocation density and slip systems.

3 Explain Deformation mechanisms for metals and mechanisms of strengthening in

metals.

4 Draw Temperature-Transformation (T-T-T) of Iron-Carbon alloys.

UNIT III


1 Explain hydrocarbon and polymer molecules, chemistry of polymer molecules,

molecular shape, and molecular structure.

2 Explain thermoplastic, thermosetting polymers, copolymers, polymer crystallinity,

polymer crystals, types of polymers-plastics and elastomers.

3 Analyze Mechanical behaviour of polymers, mechanisms of deformation of polymers.

UNIT IV


1 Explain classification, matrix and reinforcement materials, properties, rule of mixtures

and applications of composites.

2 Determine longitudinal and transverse strength, and modulus (isostrain and isostress

model).

3 Explain Processing of PMCs, Processing of MMCs and Powder metallurgy technique.

UNIT V 1 Explain Concept of Nanotechnology, Nanomaterials and preparation of

Nanomaterials.

2 Explain New forms of carbon, types of Nanotubes and properties of Nanotubes.

3 Recognize applications of Nanotechnology.




REVIEW QUESTIONS

1 Briefly discuss i) Braggs law, ii) Impurities in solids and iii) crystallographic directions.

2 Explain covalent bond and secondary bond.

3 Explain the different atomic bonding mechanism with example.

4 Briefly discuss interfacial defects, dislocation density and burgers vector.

5 Describe and illustrate the edge and screw dislocations.

6 Briefly discuss i) plastic deformation, ii) Strain hardening, iii) precipitation hardening &

iv) grain boundary.

7 Clearly explain the construction of TTT diagram.

8 Explain strengthening in metals by grain size reduction and solid solution.

9 Explain the mechanism of elastic and plastic deformation in polymers.

10 Briefly discuss the chemistry of polymer molecule.

11 Discuss the thermoplastic and thermosetting polymers.

12 Explain hydrocarbon molecules, polymer molecules and molecular structure.

13 List the types of polymer and explain the mechanical behaviour of polymer.

14 Define composite material, classify and explain the composite material based on

reinforcement.

15 What is rule of mixture? Derive an expression for Modulus of composite under iso-

strain condition.

16 Sketch and explain squeeze casting process and list application of composite.

17 Explain sintering and compaction of powder.

18 Explain with neat sketch filament winding method of manufacturing PMC.

19 Write a brief note on Nanomaterials and list the properties of Nano-tubes.

20 Sketch and explain production of Nano powders by sol-gel and ball milling

21 Write a brief note on carbon Nanotubes.

22 Sketch and explain production of Nano powders by plasma arcing.

23 Mention the importance of Nano technology in various engineering application.

Lesson Plan

UNIT I

1 Introduction to Atomic bonding, primary interatomic bonds and ionic bonding.

2 Covalent bonding, metallic bonding and secondary bonding or van der waals bonding.

3 Bonding forces and energies, density computations-metals and density computations-

ceramics.

4 Crystallographic directions and crystallographic planes.

5 Polymorphic forms of carbon and atomic arrangements.

6 Close-packed crystal structures and Bragg’s law.

7 Single crystals, polycrystalline materials and anisotropy.

8 Noncrystalline solids and Impurities in solids.

9 Impurities in metals and solid solutions.

10 Specification of composition.

UNIT II

1 Introduction to dislocations, edge dislocation, screw dislocation and mixed

dislocations.

2 Burgers vector, interfacial defects, external surfaces and grain boundaries.

3 Twin boundaries. Grain size. dislocation density and slip systems.

4 Deformation mechanisms for metals, Elastic deformation and plastic deformation.

5 Influence of dislocation on plastic deformation and Plastic deformation of

polycrystalline metals.

6 Mechanisms of strengthening in metals and strengthening by grain size reduction and

Solid-solution strengthening.




7 Recrystallization temperature and Time-Temperature-Transformation (T-T-T) of Iron-

Carbon alloys.

8 Strain hardening, recovery, recrystallization and grain growth.

9 Precipitation hardening and solution heat treating.

10 Precipitation heat treating and mechanism of precipitation hardening.

UNIT III

1 Introduction to hydrocarbon molecules, polymer molecules and chemistry of polymer

molecules.

2 Molecular shape, molecular structure, linear polymers and branched polymers.

3 Cross-linked polymers, network polymers and thermoplastic.

4 Thermosetting polymers, copolymers, polymer crystallinity and polymer crystals.

5 Types of polymers-plastics and elastomers.

6 Introduction to Mechanical behaviour of polymers and stress-strain behavior.

7 Macroscopic deformation and tear strength.

8 Hardness of polymers and mechanisms of deformation of polymers.

9 Mechanism of elastic deformation and mechanism of plastic deformation.

10 Deformation of elastomers and vulcanization.

UNIT IV

1 Introduction to Composite Materials and classification.

2 Matrix and reinforcement materials and properties.

3 Rule of mixtures, longitudinal strength and modulus (isostrain model).

4 Transverse strength and modulus (isostress model).

5 Numerical Problems.

6 Numerical Problems.

7 Applications of composites.

8 Processing of PMCs - hand lay-up process and filament winding process.

9 Processing of MMCs-Stir casting.

10 Processing of MMCs -Squeeze casting.

11 Powder metallurgy technique: Blending of powder, Powder Compaction,

12 Sintering.

UNIT V

1 Introduction to Nano technology.

2 Concept of Nanotechnology.

3 Nanomaterials and preparation of Nanomaterials.

4 plasma arcing and CVD.

5 Sol-gel method and electrode deposition.

6 Ball milling .

7 New forms of carbon.

8 Types of Nanotubes.

9 Properties of Nanotubes.

10 Applications of Nanotechnology.




11




Sl.

No. Course Outcomes

Program Outcomes (POs) PSOs

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

1 Explain the structural

characteristics of materials. 2 2

2

2

2

Analyze the structural –

property relationship of

materials.

3 3 3 3

2

2 2

3

Explain the structural

characteristics of polymer

materials.

2 2 2 2

2

2 2

4

Explain the characteristics

and processing techniques

of composite materials.

3 3 3 2

2

2 2

5

Explain the characteristics

and processing techniques

of nano-materials.

2

2 3

2

2 2




Model question paper

Advance Material Science(P15AU553)

Note: i) Answer any FIVE full questions, selecting at least ONE full question from each unit.

Unit-1

1) a) Briefly discuss i) Braggs law, ii) Impurities in solids and iii) crystallographic directions.

12

b) Explain covalent bond and secondary bond. 08

2) a) Explain the different atomic bonding mechanism with example. 11

b) Briefly discuss interfacial defects, dislocation density and burgers vector. 09

Unit-II 3) a) Describe and illustrate the edge and screw dislocations. 08

b) Briefly discuss i) plastic deformation, ii) Strain hardening, iii) precipitation hardening &

iv) grain boundary. 12

4) a) Clearly explain the construction of TTT diagram. 10

b) Explain strengthening in metals by grain size reduction and solid solution. 10

Unit-III 5) a) Briefly discuss the chemistry of polymer molecule. 04

b) Discuss the thermoplastic and thermosetting polymers. 08

c) Explain the mechanism of elastic and plastic deformation in polymers. 08

6) a) Explain hydrocarbon molecules , polymer molecules and molecular structure . 12

b) List the types of polymer and ex-plain the mechanical behaviour of polymer. 08

Unit-IV

7) a) Define composite material, classify and explain the composite material based on

reinforcement. 10

b) What is rule of mixture? Derive an expression for Modulus of composite under iso-strain

condition. 10

8) a) Sketch and explain squeeze casting process and list application of composite. 10

9) b) Explain sintering and compaction of powder. 04

c) Explain with neat sketch filament winding method of manufacturing PMC. 06

Unit-V 10) a) Write a brief note on Nanomaterialsand list the properties of nano-tubes. 10

b) Sketch and explain production of Nano powders by sol-gel and ball milling. 10

11) a) Write a brief note on carbon nanotubes. 04

b) Sketch and explain production of Nano powders by plasma arcing. 06

c) Mention the importance of nano technology in various engineering application. 10




Prerequisites: The students should have acquired the knowledge of Electronic Devices and

Communication (P15EC15/25) and Basic Electrical Engineering (P15EE15/25).

Course objective: The course aims at enabling the students to understand the basic concepts of

Mechatronics, Mechatronic products and their applications, Different Electrical and Mechanical

actuation systems, Signal condition process, Basic concepts of Microprocessor and data

representation using different number systems.

COURSE CONTENT

UNIT – I

INTRODUCTION: Introduction to Mechtronics systems, measurement systems, control

systems, Open & Closed loop control systems, basic elements of closed loop control system,

Microprocessor based controllers such as automatic camera and engine management system,

classification of sensors, light sensors, Tactile sensors, inputting data by switches, their merits

and demerits, Hall – effect sensors, eddy-current Proximity sensors, selection of sensors.

10 hrs

UNIT – II

ELECTRICAL ACTUATION SYSTEMS: Electrical systems, Mechanical switches, relays,

solid state switches, diodes, thyristors and triacs, bipolar transistors, MOSFETS, solenoids, DC

motors, permanent magnet DC motors with field coils, brushless permanent magnet DC motors,

AC motors, stepper motors and their merits and demerits. 10 hrs

UNIT – III

SIGNAL CONDITIONING: Introduction to signal conditioning, signal conditioning process,

operational amplifiers, inverting and non- inverting operational amplifiers, protection, filtering,

wheat stone bridge, Digital signals, ADC, DAC, Multiplexers, Data Acquisition system, pulsed

modulation. 10 hrs

UNIT – IV

INTRODUCTION TO MICROPROCESSOR: Evolution of Microprocessor, Organization of

Microcontroller, instructions, machine and mnemonics codes, machine and assembly language

programming, High level language programming, organization of INTEL 8085 microprocessor,

Data and Address busses, registers in the 8085, instruction set of 8085, instruction types, CPU of

Microprocessors, the fetch operation, execute cycle, memory read / write cycle, timing diagram,

HALT and HOLD states. 10 hrs

UNIT – V

MICROPROCESSOR DATA REPRESENTATION: Positional number system, binary

number system, octal number system, decimal number system, Hexadecimal number system,

conversion from one number system to another, negative number representation, representation

of floating point numbers, accuracy and range in floating point numbers, Binary Arithmetic:

addition and subtraction of binary integers, overflow and underflow, logic gates, AND, OR,

NOT, NAND, NOR and EXCLUSIVE – OR gate. 12 hrs

Text books

1 W. Bolton, “Mechatronics,” 2nd edition, Addison Wesely Longman,

Inc.(Pearson Education, Essex, England), 1999, ISBN: 0-582-35705-5.

2 A P Mathur , “Introduction to microprocessor,” 3rd edition, Tata McGraw-Hill

Publishing Co. Ltd., 1989 & reprint in 2006, ISBN: 0-07-460222-5.

3 R S Ganokar, “Microprocessor Architecture, programming and applications with

8085/8085A,” 6th edition, Wiley Eastern Publication, 1993, ISBN: 978-0852262979.

Course title: Mechtronics and Microprocessor

Course code: P15AU554 Semester: V L – T – P -H: 4:0:0:4 Credits:3





References

1 Malvino, “Digital computer Electronics,” McGraw Hill Education, 3rd edition, 2001,

ISBN: 978-0074622353.

2 Mechatronics & Microprocessors: K P Ramachandran, G K Vijaya Raghava, M S Bala

sundaram, Wiley precise India, 1st Edition, 18th May 2009, ISBN: 978-8126519859.

COURSE OUTCOMES

At the end of the course the students should be able to:

1. Identify Mechatronics system, measurement systems, Open & Closed loop control

systems and different types of sensors.

2. Understand Electrical systems, Mechanical switches, relays, solid state switches, diodes,

thyristors and triacs, bipolar transistors, MOSFETS, solenoids and distinguish DC

motors, permanent magnet DC motors with field coils, brushless permanent magnet DC

motors, AC motors, stepper motors and their merits and demerits.

3. Analyse signal conditioning process, protection, filtering, Multiplexers, Data Acquisition

system.

4. Evaluate Organization of Microprocessor, instructions, machine and mnemonics codes,

machine and assembly language programming, High level language programming.

5. Generate Decimal number system, Hexadecimal number system, conversion from one

number system to another, negative number representation.


UNIT - I


1 Define Mechatronics systems.

2 Define Open & Closed loop control systems.

3 Explain Basic elements of closed loop control system

4 Determine Microprocessor - based controllers & different types of sensors.

UNIT - II


1 Define Different types of Actuation systems.

2 Explain Mechanical switches, relays, solid state switches, diodes

3 Determine different types of motors

4 Judge merits and demerits of different motors

UNIT - III


1 Identify signal conditioning process.

2 Formulate inverting and non- inverting operational amplifiers.

3 Determine different types of signals.

4 Analyse ADC DAC.

UNIT - IV


1 Explain Evolution of Microprocessor, Organization of Microprocessor.

2 Formulate organization of INTEL 8085

3 Determine Data and Address busses, registers in the 8085.

4 Discuss instruction set of 8085, instruction types

5 Describe CPU of Microprocessors, the fetch operation, execute cycle, HALT and HOLD

states.

UNIT - V 1 Define Positional number system.




2 Formulate different number systems.

3 Describe accuracy and range in floating point numbers.

4 Identify logic gates demonstrate AND, OR, NOT, NAND, NOR and EXCLUSIVE –

OR gate, Boolean algebra.

REVIEW QUESTIONS

1 Define generalized measurement system.

2 Sketch and explain basic elements of closed loop control system.

3 List different types of light sensors, explain photodiode.

4 Sketch and explain Hall-effect sensor.

5 Explain mechanical switched.

6 Sketch and explain brushless permanent magnet DC motors.

7 Explain signal conditioning process.

8 Derive and expression to find total voltage gain in non- inverting operational amplifiers.

9 Explain Data Acquisition system.

10 Sketch and explain different types of filters.

11 Explain Evolution of Microprocessor.

12 Differentiate machine, assembly and High level language programming.

13 Explain instruction set of 8085.

14 Explain different laws in Boolean algebra

LESSON PLAN

UNIT – 1

1 Introduction to Mechatronics systems

2 Measurement systems, control systems,

3 Open & Closed loop control systems

4 Basic elements of closed loop control system

5 Microprocessor - based controllers such as automatic camera

6 Engine management system

7 Classification of sensors, light sensors

8 Tactile sensors, inputting data by switches their merits and demerits.

9 Hall – effect sensors

10 Selection of sensors.

UNIT - II

1 Electrical systems, Mechanical switches.

2 Relays, solid state switches.

3 Diodes, thyristors and triacs

4 Bipolar transistors, MOSFETS

5 Solenoids, DC motors

6 Permanent magnet DC motors with field coils

7 Brushless permanent magnet DC motors.

8 AC motors

9 MOSFETS

10 Stepper motors and their merits and demerits

UNIT - III

1 Introduction to signal conditioning, signal conditioning process

2 Operational amplifiers

3 Inverting Operational amplifiers

4 Non-Inverting Operational amplifiers

5 Protection, filtering.

6 Wheat stone bridge, Digital signals.

7 ADC




8 DAC

9 Multiplexers, Data Acquisition system.

10 Pulsed modulation.

UNIT-IV

1 Evolution of Microprocessor.

2 Organization of Microprocessor, instructions.

3 Machine and mnemonics codes, machine, assembly language programming and High

level language programming.

4 Organization of INTEL 8085.

5 Organization of INTEL 8085.

6 Data and Address busses, registers in the 8085.

7 Instruction set of 8085.

8 Instruction types, CPU of Microprocessors.

9 The fetch operation, execute cycle.

10 HALT and HOLD states.

UNIT-V

1 Positional number system, binary number system

2 Octal number system, decimal number system

3 Hexadecimal number system, conversion from one number system to another

4 Problems

5 Problems

6 Negative number representation, representation of floating point numbers

7 Accuracy and range in floating point numbers,

8 Binary Arithmetic, addition, subtraction of binary integers.

9 Overflow and underflow

10 Logic gates, AND, OR, NOT, NAND.

11 NOR and EXCLUSIVE – OR gate

12 Boolean algebra.






Outcomes (PSOs)

Sl.

No. Course Outcomes


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

1

Identify Mechtronics system,

measurement systems, Open & Closed

loop control systems and different

types of sensors.

3 2 1

2 2

2

Understand Electrical systems,

Mechanical switches, relays, solid state

switches, diodes, thyristors and triacs,

bipolar transistors, MOSFETS,

solenoids and distinguish DC motors,

permanent magnet DC motors with

field coils, brushless permanent magnet

DC motors, AC motors, stepper motors

and their merits and demerits.

3 1 1

1 2

3

Analyse signal conditioning process,

protection, filtering, Multiplexers, Data

Acquisition system.

3 3 2

2 2

4

Evaluate Organization of

Microprocessor, instructions, machine

and mnemonics codes, machine and

assembly language programming, High

level language programming.

3 3 2

2 2

5

Generate Decimal number system,

Hexadecimal number system,

conversion from one number system to

another, negative number

representation.

3 2 2

2 2





Mechtronics and Microprocessor (P15AU554)


01 Unit – 1

a. Define mechatronics, with a neat block diagram explain measurement system.

b. Explain open and closed loop control systems with their advantages and

disadvantages.

10

10

02 a. Explain basic elements of a closed loop control system with a block diagram.

b. Explain principle and working of Hall- Effect sensor with an example.

10

10

03 Unit – 2

a. Write a short note on 1] Diodes 2] Bipolar transistor

b. Explain principle and working of brushless permanent magnet DC motor

10

10

04 a. Explain commonly used specifications for stepper motor.

b. Explain principle and working of variable reluctance stepper motor.

10

10

05 Unit – 3

a. Explain with a neat circuit diagram successive approximation ADC.

b. Derive an expression for total voltage gain in the circuit for Non - inverting

operational

amplifier.

10

10

06 a. Explain with a block diagram working principle of DAQ Board.

b. Write a short notes on

i)Multiplexers

ii) Filters

10

10

07 Unit – 4

a. Explain evolution of microprocessor.

b. Explain machine, assembly and high level language programming.

08

12

08 a. With a neat block diagram explain organization of INTEL 8085 microprocessor.

b. Explain instruction set of 8085

12

08

09

Unit – 5

a. Write a circuit symbol and truth table for AND, NOT and OR Gates.

b. perform arithmetic operations as mentioned binary

1] Addition 1110 with 0110

2] Subtract 0011 in 1010

12

08

10 a. Convert one number system to other as given. 1] 10101010 to decimal 2] 3A5B to

decimal

3] 10101001 to octal 4] 456 octal to hexadecimal 5] 110010100 to hexadecimal

b. Write a circuit symbol and truth table for NAND, NOR and EXCLUSIVE – OR

Gates

10

10




Prerequisites:

subject requires students know about:

Different types of fuels used in IC engines and cycles of operations.

Working principle of two stroke, four stroke, SI & CI engines

Course Title: AUTOMOTIVE FUELS AND COMBUSTION

Course Code: P15AU561 Semester: V L – T – P -H: 4-0-0-4 Credits:3

Contact Period-Lecturer: 52Hrs,: Exam:3 Hrs Weightage:CIE:50%; SEE:50%


1. Explain about available energy sources for internal combustion engines and properties of

different fuels

2. Discuss the significance of distillation curves & refining process.

3. Determine the A/F ratio for complete combustion.

4. Explain combustion process in SI&CI engines and types of SI &CI combustion chamber.

5. Design consideration for SI & CI combustion chamber.

6. Differentiate between multi fuel& duel fuel engines Discuss the performance

characteristics of multi fuel & duel fuel engines.

7. Discuss the recent developments in the field of IC engines.


Automotive fuels and combustion course deals with understand the properties of IC engine fuels &

their ratio system. Requirements for combustion, A/F ratio calculation. To understand &study the

different cycles and to derive the relations MEP & efficiency to study the SI&CI engine combustion

process &to understand the detonation & knocking process in SI&CI engines to learn about

combustion chamber used discuss the same recent developments in the field of ICE like construction

& working of duel & multi fuel, VCR, MCF, miller cycle engine, free piston engine etc

COURSE CONTENT

UNIT-I Cycle Analysis & Energy Sources : Cycle Analysis: Air standard cycles, Otto, Diesel, Dual,

comparison of fuel air and actual cycles, simple problems on the above topics. Exhaustible sources

- crude oil, Natural gas, Inexhaustible sources - Solar energy, Wind power, Tidal Power, Geo-

thermal power. Energy from Bio-gas, Synthetic fuels – Fuel Cells, Hydrogen- only a brief

introduction. Biofuels, Alcohols, CNG, LPG. 10 Hrs

UNIT-II

Fuels: Origin of petroleum, its chemistry, Refining of petroleum: Fractional distillation, Cracking,

Reforming process, Thermal reforming, polymerization, alkylation, and isomerisation. Properties of

fuels, diesel index, carbon residue and ash content determination. low sulphur diesels, Fuels for SI

engines, Knock rating of SI engine fuels, octane number requirement, diesel fuels, Non petroleum




fuels, Additives, Fuels for gas turbine and jet engines. 10Hrs

UNIT-III

Combustion in S.I Engines: Introduction, ignition limits, homogeneous mixture formation, Initiation

of combustion, stages of combustion flame velocities, effect of variables on flame propagation,

normal and abnormal combustion, knocking combustion, pre-ignition, knock and engine variables,

detonation, effects of engine variables on combustion, control of detonation, Types,features and

design consideration of combustion chambers.

Combustion in C.I. Engines : Introduction, mixture requirements, Various stages of combustion,

vaporization of fuel droplets and spray formation, air motion, swirl, squish, tumble flow, velocities,

delay period correlations, diesel knock and engine variables, types, features and design

considerations of combustion chambers. 12Hrs

UNIT-IV

Dual fuel and Multi fuel Engines: Introduction, construction and working of dual fuel and multi

fuel engines, Combustion in dual fuel engines, Factor affecting combustion. Main types of gaseous

fuels, Supercharge knock control & Performance of diesel fuel engines. Characteristics of multi fuel

engines, Modification of fuel system, suitability of various engines as multi fuel unit, performance

characteristics of multi fuel engines. 10Hrs

UNIT-V

Recent developments in IC Engines: Introduction, Stratified charge engine, methods of Stratified

charge engine, lean burn engines, VCR engines, Advantages and disadvantages of VCR engines ,

Multi Cycle Engines (MCE), CFR engine, Miller Cycle Engines, HCCI engines, & free piston

engines. 10 Hrs

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Mathur & Sharma, I.C. Engines, Dhanpat Rai publications, New Delhi, 2013

2. S S Thipse, Internal combustion engine, JAICO publishing house, Mumbai,2012

REFERENCE BOOKS: 1. V Ganesan, Internal Combustion Engines, Tata McGraw Hill, 2005.

2. John B.Heywood, Internal Combustion Engine Fundamentals, McGraw Hill Book, 1998

3. Obert, E.F., Internal Combustion Engine and Air Pollution, International Text Book Publishers,

1983.

4. Ram lingam, K.K., Internal Combustion Engines, SCITECH PUBLICATIONS (INDIA) Pvt.

Ltd., 2014.

COURSE OUTCOMES

1. Explain available energy sources for IC.Engines & discuss their advantages and

limitation; Explain refining process of petroleum and their by-products and their

properties

2. Determine A/F ratio for any given fuel & Rating of SI and CI Engine fuels

3. Analyze the combustion phenomena of SI & CI Engine.

4. Explain the constructional and working principle of multi and dual fuel Engine and their

advantages and limitation

5. Explain recent developments in the field of IC.Engines.

UNIT WISE PLAN

UNIT-I:





After learning all the units of Unit-1, the student is able to

Explain different energy sources available

Explain the production process of petrol & diesel

Discuss the properties of automotive fuels

Explain how fuel properties can be determine

LESSON SCHEDULE

Class – portions covered / hour (an estimate)

1. Cycle Analysis Air standard cycle, Analyze different thermodynamics cycle

2. Otto,diesel and dual cycle

3. Comparision of otto,dieseland dual cycle,

4. Simple problems on otto,diesel and dual cycle

5. Exhaustible sources - crude oil, Natural gas,

6. Inexhaustible sources - Solar energy,

7. Wind power, Tidal Power, Geo-thermal power

8. Biofuels and alcohols

9. Energy from Bio-gas,

10. Synthetic fuels – Fuel Cells, Hydrogen- only a brief introduction.

UNIT-II



Write combustion equation

Determine the minimum quantity of air required for complete combustion of different fuels.

Analyze the different gas constituents and exhaust using gas chromatograph, etc.,

LESSON SCHEDULE

Class – portions covered / hour(an estimate)

1. Origin of petroleum, and its chemistry,

2. Refining of petroleum:

3. Fractional distillation, Cracking,

4. Reforming process,Thermal reforming,

5. polymerization, alkylation, and isomerisation

6. Properties of fuel ,diesel index, 7. carbon residue and ash content determination.

8. Low sulphur Diesel, Fuels for SI Engine, Knock rating and octane number requirements 9. Diesel fuels ,Non petroleum fuels 10. Fuels for gas turbines and jets

UNIT-III



Explain stages of combustion in SI engine

Explain the normal & abnormal combustion

Explain knocking and pre ignition and effect of different variables on the same.

Design consideration of combustion chamber

Explain stage of combustion in CI engine

Explain different air movements in diesel engines




Design consideration of combustion chambers

LESSON SCHEDULE


1. Introduction, ignition limits, homogeneous mixture formation, Initiation of combustion,

2. Stages of combustion flame velocities,

3. Effect of variables on flame propagation,

4. normal and abnormal combustion, knocking combustion, pre-ignition,

5. knock and engine variables, detonation, effects of engine variables on combustion,

6. Control of detonation, features and

7. Design consideration of combustion chambers.

8. Introduction, mixture requirements, Various stages of combustion,

9. vaporization of fuel droplets and spray formation, air motion, swirl, squish, tumble flow,

velocities,

10. Delay period correlations, diesel knock and engine variables,

11. Features and design considerations of combustion chambers,

12. Different types of combustion chambers , heat release correlations

UNIT-IV



Differentiate between dual fuel & multi fuel engines

Explain combustion in dual fuel & multi fuel engines

Explain characteristics of multi fuel engines

Explain modification of engines for dual fuel & multi fuel operations

LESSON SCHEDULE


1. Introduction, construction and working of dual fuel engine

2. construction and working of multi fuel engine

3. Combustion in dual fuel engines,

4. Factor affecting combustion.

5. Main types of gaseous fuels,

6. Supercharge knock control & Performance of diesel fuel engines.

7. Characteristics of multi fuel engines,

8. Modification of fuel system,

9. suitability of various engines as multi fuel unit,

10. performance characteristics of multi fuel engines

UNIT-V



Explain construction & working of stratified charged engine

Explain purpose and advantages of VCR and free piston engine

Explain the lean burn engine and their advantages

LESSON SCHEDULE





1. Introduction, Stratified charge engine,

2. methods of Stratified charge engine,

3. Lean burn engines,

4. VCR engines,Advantages and Disadvantages.

5. Multi Cycle Engines (MCE),

6. CFR engine, BICERI piston,

7. Miller Cycle Engines,

8. SAAB SVC engines,

9. HCCI engines,

10. Constructional details,Working,Advantages and disadvantages of free piston engines

REVIEW QUESTIONS

UNIT I

1. What are the exhaustible &in exhaustible energy sources

2. What are the primary and secondary energy sources

3. Discuss briefly the possibilities of utilizing the following methods of power generation

Solar energy .Magneto hydrodynamics , fuel cells.

4. Explain briefly (a)wind energy,(b)tidal power,(c)geothermal power.

5. What are the advantages and disadvantages of following (a) bio gas (b) synthetic fuels

(c) hydrogen.

6. What are the types of fuel cells and explain.

UNIT II

1) Explain and derive an expression for thermal efficiency of otto cycle

2) Explain and derive an expression for thermal efficiency of diesel cycle.

3) Explain the concept of duel cycle.

4) Differenciate between otto &diesel cycle.

5) Describe the stratified charge engine.

6) Describe the brayton cycle in details.

7) Sketch and explain briefly about gas chromatograph.

8) What are the properties of fuels?

9) How SI engine fuels are rated?

10) How CI engines fuels are rated?

11) What is octane& cetane no how is it found

12) Discuss the basic requirements of a diesel fuel

13) Discuss the use of LPG as SI engine fuel

14) Explain (a)ALCOHOL (b) Gaseous fuel (c) Hydrogen (d)CNG (e) LPG

15) Describe the method of producing hydrogen

16) What are properties of A/F mixtures.

UNIT III

1) Discuss &explain homogeneous mixture formation

2) What are the harmful effects of detonation

3) Discuss the effects of engine variables on flame propagation.

4) What are the requirements of a good combustion chamber

5) What are factors which affect detonation in SI engines?

6) What are the features & design considerations of combustion chambers




7) What are the stages in SI engine combustion?

8) Write the difference between normal & abnormal combustion.

9) What are the methods to control of knocking in SI engines

10) Explain the effect of engine variables on knocking.

11) Briefly explain detonation & knocking.

12) Briefly explain the factors affecting of ignition lag

13) What are the advantages &disadvantages of the CI engine compare to the SI engine?

14) Explain the stages of combustion in a CI engine.

15) What is meant by delay period? Describe them.

16) What is the importance of delay period? Should the delay period be zero?

17) Discuss the variables affecting the delay period

18) Explain the phenomenon of diesel knock? Compare with SI engine

19) What are the factors to increase detonation in SI engines tend to reduce knock in CI engines

20) How do the injection timing & the fuel quality affect the engine knock?

21) What are three methods of generating swirl in CI engine combustion chamber

22) How CI engine combustion chamber are classified? What types of swirl is used in this

chamber

23) Discuss the advantages &disadvantages of induction swirl

24) Show with sketches how compression swirl is created?

25) Explain the factors &design considerations of combustion chambers

UNIT IV

1) What is a dual fuel engines? Where this types of engines find application?

2) Describe with a sketch of dual fuel engine &comment on its performance

3) How dual fuel operation can be achieved?

4) What is a multi fuel engine? Where this type of engine finds applications

5) What are the various ways of achieving multi fuel operations

6) Discuss the performance of multi fuel engines on variable fuels

7) Explain the advantages and disadvantages of dual fuel engines

8) Explain the advantages and disadvantages of multi fuel engines

9) What are the factors affecting on combustion in a dual fuel engine

10) What are the characteristics of multi fuel engines

11) Describe the modification of fuel system in multi fuel engine

12) Explain the supercharged &knock control in dual fuel engines.

UNIT V

1) What is stratified charge engine? Explain briefly

2) What are the important methods of charge stratification?

3) What are the advantages of burning leaner overall fuel air mixtures?

4) Describe the methods of stratifications

5) Explain with neat sketch multi cycle engine (MCE)

6) Explain with neat sketch CFR engine

7) Explain with neat sketch SVC engine

8) Explain the advantages of VCR engine

9) Describe the functions of HCCI engines

10) What is free piston engines? Explain its function

11) Explain the miller cycle engine &free piston engine.





Mapping of Course Outcomes (CO) with Program Outcomes (POs) and Program Specific Outcomes

(PSOs)

Sl.

No. Course Outcome

Programme Outcomes

Programme

Specific

outcomes

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

1

Explain available energy sources for

I.C.Engine & discuss their advantages and

limitation; Explain refining process of

petroleum and their by-products and their

properties

2 2 - - 1 1 - - - - 1 2 2 2

2 Determine A/F ratio for any given fuel &

Rating of SI and CI Engine fuels 3 - 2 - - 1 1 - - - - 1 3 2 2

3 Analyze the combustion phenomena of SI

& CI Engine. 3 - 2 - - 1 1 - - - - 1 3 2 2

4

Explain the constructional and working

principle of multifuel Engine and their


2 - 2 - - 1 1 - - - - 1 2 2 2

5 Explain recent developments in I.C.Engines 2 - 2 - - 1 1 - - - - 1 2 2 2




Course Title: CAD/CAM



Prerequisites: The students should have acquired the knowledge of Computer Concept & C

Programming (P15CS13/23) and Manufacturing Process-II (P15ME46)

Course objective: The course aims at enabling the students to understand the hardware and

basics of CAD, also programming of CNC machines.

COURSE CONTENT

UNIT – I

Introduction: Role of computers in design and manufacturing, Product cycle in conventional

and computerized manufacturing environment, introduction to CAD and CAM, advantages and

limitations of CAD/CAM. Latest display systems, Input devices and Output devices. 10 hrs

UNIT – II

Computer Graphics and Geometric Modeling Techniques: Software configuration of a

graphics system, functions of graphics software. Graphic primitives, 2-D transformation,

homogeneous transformation, concatenation, problems on transformations, Geometric modeling

wire frame, surface & solid modeling. Drawing interchange files DXF, IGES and STEP,

representation of curves and surfaces, cubic splines, Bezier curves, B-splines and Nurbs, Bicubic

polynomial surface patches, Bezier bicubic surface patches, cubic B-spline surfaces. 11 hrs

UNIT – III

Numerical Control (NC) and CNC Machine Tools: Basic components of NC Systems , NC

procedure, co-ordinate system, open loop & closed loop system (position controlled NC), NC

motion control system, application of NC, Advantage & limitations of NC. Features of CNC,

CNC machining centers, CNC turning centers, high speed machining. 10 hrs

UNIT – IV

CNC Hardware Basics and CNC Tooling: Structure of CNC machine tools, spindles, drives,

actuation systems, feedback devices, Axes-standards. Cutting tool materials, Tool representation,

Milling tooling system, Tool presetting, ATC, work/job holding devices. 10 hrs

UNIT – V

CNC Programming: Part program fundamentals, ISO Codes, simple programming exercises in

drilling including canned cycle, turning and milling using ISO codes. 11 hrs

TEXT BOOKS

1 P.N. Rao, “Principles and application of CAD/CAM,” Tata McGraw Hill, 3rd edition,

26th May 2010,

2 Groover, “CAD/CAM”, Tata McGraw Hill, 1st edition 2003

REFERENCES 1 S.E. Goodman, S.T.Headetniemi “Introduction to the Design and Analysis of

Algorithms”, McGraw Hill Book Company, 1977

2 Newman and Sproull, “Principles of interactive Computer Graphics”, Tata McGraw

Hill, 28th Nov 2007

3 Chno-Hwachang, Michel.A.Melkanoff, “NC Machine programming and software

Design”, Prentice Hall, 1988.

4 Pressman RS and Williams JE, “Numerical Control and CAM”, Johnwiley Publication,

2000.

5 Steven Harrington, “Computer Graphics”, McGraw Hill Book Co., 1st July 2014




6 Ibrahim Zeid, “CAD-CAM,” Tat McGraw Hill, 2nd edition, 25th June 2009,

COURSE OUTCOMES


1. Describe in-put and out-put devices used in CAD.

2. Apply modeling techniques to solve problems on transformations.

3. Discuss the basic components of NC system and the different NC motion control

systems.

4. Identify CNC machine components.

5. Develop CNC part program for different operations and use it for the production of parts.

TOPIC LEARNING OBJECTIVES (UNIT WISE)

UNIT - I


1 Define CAD/CAM

2 List role of computers in design and manufacturing.

3 Explain latest display system types.

4 Demonstrate different input and output devices.

UNIT - II


1 Identify software configuration of graphic system. L4

2 Illustrate transformations of 2D graphics primitives. L3

3 Compare different drawing interchange files. L4

4 Discuss representation of curves and surfaces. L2

UNIT - III


1 Discuss components of nc systems. L2

2 Differentiate between different coordinate system, motion control system and

feedback system. L4

3 Compare cnc machine centes and cnc turning centres. L4

UNIT - IV


1 Explain structure of cnc machine tools. L2

2 Discuss cutting tool materials. L2

3 Describe tooling system. L1

4 Explain work holding devices. L2

UNIT - V

1 Explain part programming fundamentals. L2

2 Prepare part programming for turning. L5

3 Prepare part programming for drilling. L5

4 Prepare part programming for milling. L5

REVIEW QUESTIONS

1 Explain role of computers in product cycle.

2 Describe input/output devices used in CAD.

3 Describe the functions of graphics software.

4 A line (2, 5) and (5, 8) is rotated by an angle of 450.determine rotated line.

5 Explain configuration of DXF.




6 Sketch and explain cubic splines and B-splines.

7 Discuss NC procedure.

8 Differentiate coordinate system and motion control system.

9 Compare turning centre and machining centre.

10 Describe work holding devices.

11 Explain the principles of tool presetting.

12 Write a part program for drilling operations.

13 Write a part program for turning operations.

14 Write a part program for milling operations.

LESSON PLAN

UNIT – I

1 Introduction and hardware for cad

2 Role of computers in design and manufacturing,

3 Product cycle in conventional and computerized manufacturing environment,

4 Introduction to CAD and CAM

5 Advantages and limitations of CAD/CAM

6 Display Units CRT, DVST, DBR.

7 Raster scan their image generation techniques

8 Input devices Mouse, Joystick, Digitizer, Tablet, & Etc

9 Latest display system types.

10 Output devices pen plotters, laser printer, color laser printer, Electrostatic printer.

UNIT - II

1 Computer graphics and geometric modeling techniques,

2 Software configuration of a graphics system, functions of graphics software

3 Graphic primitives, 2-D transformation,

4 Homogeneous transformation.

5 Geometric modeling wire frame, surface & solid modeling.

6 Introduction Drawing interchange files DXF, IGES and STEP.

7 Representation of curves and surfaces,

8 Cubic splines, Bezier curves,

9 B-splines and nurbs.

10 Bicubic polynomial surface patches, Bezier bicubic surface patches

11 Cubic B-spline surfaces.

UNIT - III

1 Introduction to Numerical control (NC) and Basic components of NC

2 Explanation of NC procedure.

3 NC co-ordinate system

4 Open loop & closed loop system (position controlled NC).

5 NC motion control system.

6 Application of NC, Advantage & limitations of NC.

7 Functions of CNC.

8 CNC machining centers.

9 CNC turning centers,

10 High speed CNC machine tools.

UNIT - IV

1 CNC hardware basics

2 Introduction to CNC tooling.

3 Structure of CNC machine tools, spindle design, drives.

4 Actuation systems, feedback devices, Axes-standards.

5 Cutting tool materials and parameters.




6 Explanation of Tool representation.

7 Explain Milling tooling system.

8 Introduction and explain Tool presetting.

9 Explanation of ATC.

10 Work holding devices.

UNIT - V

1 Introduction to CNC programming.

2 Part program fundamentals.

3 ISO Codes and standards.

4 Simple programming exercises in drilling.

5 Simple programming exercises in canned cycle

6 Turning and milling using ISO codes.

7 Simple programs on turning.

8 Simple programs on turning.

9 Simple programs on milling.

10 Simple programs on milling.

11 Simple programs on milling



Outcomes (PSOs)

SL.

No. Course Outcomes


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

1 Describe in-put and out-put

devices used in CAD. 3 1 1

1

2

Apply modelling techniques

to solve problems on

transformations.

3 3 1

1

1

3

Discuss the basic

components of NC system

and the different NC motion

control systems.

3 2 1

1 1

4 Identify CNC machine

components. 3 2 2

2 2

5

Develop CNC part program

for different operations. and

use it for the production of

parts

3 3 2

3

2 2




MODEL QUESTION PAPER

CAD/CAM (P15AU562)


Unit-I

1 a. With the help of a block diagram explain product cycle in computerized

manufacturing

environment.

b. Explain the role of computers in design process.

10

10

2 a. With a neat sketch explain CRT screen and the techniques to generate image on

CRT.

b. Explain the working principle of the following with neat sketches:

i) Digitizer ii) flat bed plotter iii) laser printer

10

10

Unit-II

3 a. Explain the different functions of graphics package.

b. A triangle is defined in a 2 dimensional ICG system by its vertices (0,2) & (0,3)and

(1,2). Perform the following transformations on this triangle.

i) translate triangle in space by 2 units in x direction and 5 units in the y direction

ii) scale the original triangle by a factor 1.5

iii) rotate the original triangle by 450(CCW) about the origin.

10

10

4 a. What is geometric modelling? Explain the features of wireframe modeling ,surface

modeling and solid modelling.

b. Describe Beizier curve, B splines and NURBS.

10

10

Unit-III

5 a. With a neat sketch explain NC motion control systems.

b. Explain the advantages and limitations of NC.

10

10

6 a. With a neat sketch, explain vertical machining centre.

b. Explain any two types of CNC turning centre.

c. Explain the advantages and applications of high speed machining.

07

08

06

Unit-IV

7 a. write a note on automated tool charger

b. Explain tool change procedure using double gripper with sketches

10

10

8 a. Explain the tool presetting with respect to CNC

b. Explain work holding devices with neat sketches

10

10

Unit-V

9

a. With block diagram, explain the steps involved in the CNC part programming.

b. prepare the manual part program for the following

10

10




10 a. Explain various formats used in NC part program.

b. write the manual NC part program in ISO to drill holes in the part shown in fig

select the target point to be at 30, 30,50mm from left corner of the part suitably

assume other missing data . also write the meaning of each NC block

10

10




Prerequisites:

The course enables to understand the need for Non-Traditional Machining processes. It also

highlights various Non-conventional machining processes.

COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course the students should be able to:

1. Discuss the difference between conventional and non conventional machining process.

2. Characterize the USM and AJM with the effect of parameters and process

characteristics.

3. Explain the working principle ECM and CHM with the effect of parameters and process

characteristics.

4. Discuss about the working principle of EDM with the effect of parameters and process

characteristics

5. Describe the working principle PAM and LBM with the effect of parameters and process

characteristics.


The course enables to understand the need for nontraditional machining processes. It also

highlights various Non-conventional machining processes.

COURSE CONTENT

UNIT -I

Introduction to Mechanical Process: Need for nontraditional machining processes, Process

selection- classification on-comparative study of different processes, comparison between

conventional and Non-conventional machining process selection. Ultrasonic Machining-

Definition-Mechanism of metal removal- elements of the process-Tool feed mechanism, theories

of mechanics of causing effect of parameter, application 10 hrs

UNIT -II

Abrasive Jet Machining and Thermal Metal Removal Processes: Principles — parameters

of the process applications-advantages and disadvantages. Electric discharge machining-

Principle of operation — mechanism of metal removal basic EDM circuitry-spark erosion

generators — Analysis of relaxation type of circuit-material removal rate in relaxation circuits

— critical resistance parameters in Ro Circuit-Die electric fluids-Electrodes for spark erosion-

surface finish, applications, pollution and safety issues. 10 hrs

UNIT -III

Electro chemical and Chemical Processes and machining: Electro Chemical machining

(ECM) Classification of ECM process-Principle of ECM-Chemistry of the ECM process-

parameters of the process-determination of the metal removal rate —dynamics of ECM process-

Hydrodynamics of ECM process-polarization-Tool Design-advantages and disadvantages-

applications. Electro Chemical grinding-Electro Chemical holding. Electrochemical deburring.

Introduction-fundamental principle types of chemical machining Maskants - Etchenes-

Advantages and disadvantages-applications, environmental issues. 11 hrs

UNIT -IV

Laser Beam Machining and Ion Beam Machining Introduction-principles of generation of

lasers, Equipment and Machining Procedure-Types of Lasers-Process characteristics-advantages

Course Title: Non Traditional Machining






and limitations- applications. Introduction-Mechanism of metal removal and associated

equipment-process characteristics applications, safety issues.

High Velocity forming processes: Introduction-development of specific process-selection-

comparison of conventional and high velocity forming methods-Types of high velocity forming

methods-explosion forming process-electro hydraulics forming-magnetic pulse forming. 11 hrs

UNIT -V

Plasma arc Machining and Electron beam machining: Introduction-Plasma-Generation of

Plasma and equipment — Mechanism of metals removal, PAN parameters-process

characteristics — type of torches, applications. Thermal & Non thermal type-Process

characteristics —applications, safety issues. 10 hrs

TEXT BOOKS:

1M PANDEY AND SHAH, Modern machining process:, TATA McGraw-Hill, 2000

REFERENCES: 1 Hindustan Machine Tools, “Production Technology,” Tata McGraw Hill. 2001.

2 P.K.Mishra, “Non-Conventional Machining,” The Institution of Engineers (India) Test

book series, Narosa Publishing House, 2007.

UNIT WISE PLAN

UNIT- I

TOPIC LEARNING OBJECTIVES (TLO): (L1,L2,L3)


Explain need for nontraditional machining processes.

Distinguish b/w conventional and non conventional machining processes.

Describe mechanism of USM.

List the applications of USM.

UNIT II

TOPIC LEARNING OBJECTIVES (TLO): (L1,L2,L3): By the end of the topic, student will be able to

Explain principles of abrasive jet machining.

Discuss advantages and disadvantages of AJM.

Explain electric discharge machining.

Describe mechanism of EDM.

LESSON SCHEDULE

1Introduction to Abrasive Jet Machining and Principles.

2 Parameters of the process.

3Applications-advantages and disadvantages.

4Electric discharge machining-Principle of operation

5Mechanism of metal removal basic EDM circuitry.

6Spark erosion generators.

7Analysis of relaxation type of circuit-material removal rate in relaxation circuits.

8Critical resistance parameters in Ro Circuit-Die electric fluids.

9Electrodes for spark erosion- surface finish.

10Applications.

UNIT- III

TOPIC LEARNING OBJECTIVES (TLO): (L1,L2,L3)





Classify ECM process.

Explain principle of ECM.

Describe electro chemical grinding.

LESSON SCHEDULE

1Introduction to Electro Chemical machining (ECM) -—. Electro Chemical grinding

2Classification of ECM process-Principle of ECM

3Chemistry of the ECM process- parameters of the process.

4Determination of the metal removal rate in ECM.

5Dynamics of ECM process

6Hydrodynamics of ECM process-polarization-Tool Design

7advantages and disadvantages-applications

8Electro Chemical holding and Electrochemical deburring.

9Introduction-fundamental principle of electrochemical

10Types of chemical machining Maskants - Etchenes

11Advantages and disadvantages-applications

UNIT IV

TOPIC LEARNING OBJECTIVES (TLO): (L1,L2,L3) By the end of the topic, student will be able to

Explain laser beam machining process.

Discuss types of lasers.

Describe mechanism of IBM.

Explain types of high velocity forming processes.

Explain plasma arc machining process.

Discuss parameters of PAN.

Describe types of electron beam machining.

List applications of EBM.

UNIT V

LESSON SCHEDULE

1 Introduction to Plasma arc Machining.

2 Generation of Plasma and equipment.

3 Mechanism of metals removal rate in plasma.

4 PAN parameters in plasma.

5 Process characteristics

6 Type of torches.

7 Introduction to electron beam machining.

8 Thermal & Non thermal type process and comparison

9 Process characteristics.

10 Applications

REVIEW QUESTIONS

1 Differentiate traditional and nontraditional machining processes.

2 Explain ultrasonic machining process along sketch.

3 Discuss the parameters used in AJM.

4 Describe at least three typical engineering applications of AJM.

5 Describe the chemistry involved in the ECM process.

6 Distinguish between chemical machining process and electrochemical machining

process.




7 Explain laser beam machining process.

8 Discuss mechanism of metal removal rate in IBM.

9 Explain PAM parameters.

10 Explain generation and control of electron beam in EBM.



Outcomes (PSOs) for 2013 scheme


Programme

Specific

outcomes

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

1 Discuss the difference between

conventional and non conventional

machining process.

3 3 1 - 1 1 1 - - - - 2 3 2 1

2 Characterize the USM and AJM with

the effect of parameters and process

characteristics.

3 3 1 - 1 1 1 - - - - 2 3 2 1

3 Explain the working principle ECM

and CHM with the effect of parameters

and process characteristics.

3 3 1 - 1 1 1 - - - - 2 3 2 1

4 Discuss about the working principle of

EDM with the effect of parameters and

process characteristics

3 3 1 - 1 1 1 - - - - 2 3 2 1

5 Describe the working principle PAM

and LBM with the effect of parameters

and process characteristics.

3 3 1 - 1 1 1 - - - - 2 3 2 1





Non Traditional Machining(P15AU563)


ii) Missing data, if any, may be suitably assumed.

Unit – 1 01a. Briefly explain the classification of non traditional process. 10

b. Explain the effect of Amplitude and frequency of vibration, abrasive grain size and

Static load on the rate of metal removal and surface roughness obtainable in USM.10

02a. Differentiate traditional and non traditional machining process. 10

b. with neat sketch explain working of USM process 10

Unit – 2 03 a. Explain with schematic diagram of the AJM process. 10

b. Explain relaxation circuits used in EDM process. 10

04 a. With the help of a neat sketch explain the mechanism of metal removal in EDM. 10

b. List and explain any four parameters that influence abrasive jet machining. 10

Unit – 3 05 a. Explain principal used in chemical machining. What are the factors to be considere in

the selection of etchants? 10

b. List the limitations of ECM 04

c. What are the functions of electrolyte? Mention any two electrolyte used in ECM. 06

06 a. With a neat sketch explain electrochemical grinding and electrochemical honing

process. 10

b. List out advantages, disadvantages and applications of CHM 10

Unit – 4 07a. List out the Advantages, Disadvantages And Applications Of LBM 10

b. With neat sketch explain magnetic pulse forming process. 10

08a. Explain the working principle of Laser Beam Machining. 10

b. Differentiate conventional and high velocity forming methods 10

Unit – 5 09 a. With a neat sketch explain the plasma arc machining process 10

b. Write a short note on Process Parameters Of EBM 10

10 a. With neat sketch explain Electron Beam Machining process 10

b. Write a note on safety precaution to be considered while using PAM process. 04

c. Mention any two advantages, disadvantages and application of PAM process 06




Prerequisites: Basics of Thermodynamics and Fluid Mechanics

COURSE OBJECTIVE: The objectives of the course are to develop the students ability to

understand the thermodynamics of each component, the linked system performance of all

components in the Gas turbine engine and performance trends for each component which

include compressors, burners, turbines regenerator.

Course Learning Objectives (CLOs)

The Course aims to:-

1. Analyze and predict the cycle performance of gas turbine engines.

2. Solve the problem for aircraft propulsion systems, in particular gas turbine engines.

3. Analyze and predict the performance of compressors, turbines, and combustion system.

4. Apply the dimensionless parameters involving different variables in predicting the

performance of a gas turbine power plant.

5. Understand the environmental aspects of gas turbines.

COURSE CONTENT

UNIT -I

Ideal plant cycles: Introduction, Carnot cycle, Stirling cycle with regenerator, Ericsson cycle,

Joule air cycle, Brayton cycle with regenerator, complex cycles, The closed cycle, Operating

media other than air,

Performance of actual gas turbine cycle: Efficiency of compressor and turbine, Pressure or

flow losses, Heat exchanger effectiveness, Effect of varying mass flow, Loss due to incomplete

combustion, Mechanical loss, Effect of variable specific heat, Calculation of fuel consumption

and cycle efficiency, Poly tropic efficiency, Performance of actual cycle, Jet propulsion,

Specific thrust of the turbo-jet engine, Thermal efficiency of turbo jet engine, Propulsive

efficiency, Effect of forward speed, Effect of altitude, Numerical examples. 10 Hrs

UNIT- II

Centrifugal compressors: Components, Method of operation, Theory of operation, Ideal energy

transfer. Actual energy transfer- Slip, Analytical method of finding slip factor, Power input

factor, Pressure coefficient, Compressor efficiency. Inlet or inducer section- when the entrance is

axial, sizing of inducer section, Pre whirl. Impeller passage- Effect of impeller blade shape on

performance, The impeller channel. The compressor diffuser, Losses in centrifugal compressor,

Compressor characteristic, Surging and choking

Axial flow compressor: Introduction, Description, Performance analysis. Momentum or

filament analysis –Special velocity diagram, Symmetric stage, Non-symmetric axial inflow,

Non-symmetric axial out flow, Actual energy transfer. Airfoil analysis - One dimensional ideal

incompressible flow, Two dimensional flows with friction. Blading efficiency – Losses in terms

of air angles and drag coefficient. Coefficient of performance- flow coefficient, Pressure

coefficient, Work coefficient. Blade loading, Cascade characteristic, Blade angles, Reynolds and

Mach number effects. Three dimensional flow analysis- Radial equilibrium theory, free vortex

blades, Constant reaction blades, Forced vortex or solid rotation blades, the general design.

Three dimensional blade losses, Compressor stall and surge, overall performance, Compressor

characteristics. Numerical examples 12Hrs

Course Title: Gas Turbine

Course Code: P15AU564 Semester: VII L – T – P -H: 4 – 0 - 0-4 Credits:3

Contact Period-Lecturer: 52Hrs,: Exam:3 Hrs Weightage:CIE:50%; SEE:50%




UNIT -III

Combustion systems: Introduction, Combustion mechanism, Pressure losses, Combustion

intensity, Combustion efficiency, Requirement of Combustion chamber, Shape of the

combustion chamber, Stabilizing or primary zone, Dilution and mixing, Combustion chamber

arrangements, Fuel injection system

Regenerator: Introduction, Types of regenerator, Heat transfer in direct type exchangers-

Exchanger heat transfer effectiveness, Number of exchanger heat transfer units, Capacity ratio,

Relation between NTU and Stanton number, Relations between NTU and effectiveness(no

derivation), Effect of flow arrangement, Effect of Cmin/Cmax<1 for regenerator, Log mean rate

equation compared to effectiveness –NTU approach. Rotary heat exchanger- Effect of Mateix

speed, Effect of longitudinal conduction, Core pressure drop. Some economics approach of heat

exchanger design. Numerical examples 10 Hrs

UNIT-IV

Axial flow gas turbines: Introduction, Turbine and nozzle efficiencies. Degree of reaction-

Impulse turbine, Ideal impulse turbine, Impulse turbine with loss, Blade speed ratio, Velocity

ratio and torque, Velocity compounded turbine. The reaction turbine- Reheat factor, Blade speed

ratio for reaction turbine. Comparison of turbine types, Forces on blade, Cascade analysis, Three

dimensional flow analysis – The free vortex blades, Constant angle nozzle stage. Turbine flow

passage- Impulse blading, Reaction blading. Turbine characteristics 10 Hrs

UNIT -V

Performance of Gas turbine power plant: Non dimensional representation of compressor and

turbine performance, Performance characteristics of compressor and turbines compressors,

Matching of compressor and turbine in a self driving system, Equilibrium running of simple jet

and propeller turbine engines, Simple jet unit, nozzle characteristic, Effect of adding a

propelling nozzle to the compressor turbine combination, Variation of thrust with forward speed

and rpm, Variation of specific fuel consumption with forward speed and rpm, Discussion on the

equilibrium running diagram ,Propeller turbine engines(turboprop), Combined turbines.

Environmental consideration: Air pollution, Aircraft emission standards, Stationary engine

emission standards, NOx formation, NOx reduction in stationary engines, Noise, Noise

standards, Noise reduction. 10 Hrs

TEXT BOOKS

1. P.R. Khajuria.and S. P. Dubey, Gas Turbines and Propulsive System, Dhanpat Rai

Publication, 2012

2. V Ganeshan, Gas Turbines MCgraw –Hill Publication, 3rd Edition, 2010,

REFERENCES 1. H. I. H Saravanamutt, GFC Rogers, H Cohen, Gas Turbine Theory, Pearson Education,

5th Edition, 2001

2. S. M. Yahya, Turbines Compressor and Fans, , Tata MCgraw-Hill Publication, 4th

Edition , 29 October 2010

COURSE OUTCOMES


1. Analyze and predict the cycle performance of gas turbine engines.

2. Solve the problem for aircraft propulsion systems, in particular gas turbine engines.

3. Analyze and predict the performance of compressors, turbines, and combustion system.

4. Apply the dimensionless parameters involving different variables in predicting the

performance of a gas turbine power plant.

5. Understand the environmental aspects of gas turbines.




UNIT WISE PLAN

UNIT I



1. Explain the ideal Plant cycles, such as, Carnot cycle, Stirling cycle with regenerator,

Ericsson cycle, Joule air cycle, Brayton cycle with regenerator.

2. Estimate efficiency and work done for ideal Plant cycles, such as, Carnot cycle,

Stirling cycle with regenerator, Ericsson cycle, Joule air cycle, Brayton cycle with

regenerator.

3. Analyze the effect of variable mass flow and specific heat on the performance of

actual gas cycles

4. Estimate specific thrust, thermal efficiency and propulsive efficiency of turbojet

engine

5. Analyze the effect of the forward speed and the altitude on turbo jet engine

LESSON SCHEDULE

1. Introduction, Carnot cycle, Stirling cycle with regenerator, Ericsson cycle Joule air

cycle.

2. Brayton cycle with regenerator, complex cycles, The closed cycle, Operating media

other than air.

3. Efficiency of compressor and turbine, Pressure or flow losses, Heat exchanger

effectiveness, Effect of varying mass flow

4. Loss due to incomplete combustion, Mechanical loss, Effect of variable specific heat,

Calculation of fuel consumption and cycle efficiency,

5. Poly tropic efficiency, Performance of actual cycle

6. Jet propulsion, Specific thrust of the turbo-jet engine, Thermal efficiency of turbo jet

engine,

7. Propulsive efficiency, Effect of forward speed, Effect of altitude,

8. Numerical examples.

9. Numerical examples.

10. Numerical examples

UNIT II


By the end of the topic,student will be able to

1. Explain the components and operation of centrifugal compressor.

2. Understand slip and determine the slip factor, power input factor, pressure coefficient

and compressor efficiency of a centrifugal compressor.

3. Explain the losses in compressor and explain the surging and choking

4. Explain the arrangement and operation of an axial flow compressor

5. Analyze the performance of axial flow compressor

6. Explain the performance coefficients such as flow coefficient, pressure coefficient and

work coefficient

LESSON SCHEDULE

1. Components, Method of operation, Theory of operation, Ideal energy transfer.

2. Actual energy transfer- Slip, Analytical method of finding slip factor, Power input

factor, Pressure coefficient, Compressor efficiency

3. Inlet or inducer section- when the entrance is axial, sizing of inducer section, Pre whirl.

Impeller passage- Effect of impeller blade shape on performance.

4. The impeller channel. The compressor diffuser Losses in centrifugal compressor,

Compressor characteristic, Surging and choking.




5. Axial flow compressor Introduction, Description, Performance analysis. Momentum or

filament analysis Special velocity diagram, Symmetric stage

6. Non-symmetric axial inflow, Non-symmetric axial out flow, Actual energy transfer.

Airfoil analysis - One dimensional ideal incompressible flow, two dimensional flow with

friction.

7. Blading efficiency – Losses in terms of air angles and drag coefficient. Coefficient of

performance- flow coefficient, Pressure coefficient, Work coefficient

8. Blade loading, Cascade characteristic, Blade angles, Reynolds and Mach number

effects.

9. Three dimensional flow analysis- Radial equilibrium theory, free vortex blades,

Constant reaction blades, Forced vortex or solid rotation blades, The general design.

Three dimensional blade losses

10. Compressor stall and surge, overall performance, Compressor characteristics.

Numerical examples



UNIT III



1. Explain the combustion mechanism and pressure losses in gas turbine combuster

2. Explain requirements and shape of the combustion chamber

3. Explain various combustion chamber arrangements.

4. Explain the fuel injection system

5. Analyze Heat transfer mechanism in direct type of heat exchangers

LESSON SCHEDULE

1. Combustion systems Introduction, Combustion mechanism, Pressure losses

2. Combustion intensity, Combustion efficiency, Requirement of Combustion chamber,

Shape of the combustion chamber

3. Stabilizing or primary zone, Dilution and mixing, Combustion chamber arrangements

4. Fuel injection system The regenerator Introduction, Types of regenerator, Heat

transfer in direct type exchangers- Exchanger heat transfer effectiveness, Number of

exchanger heat transfer units

5. Capacity ratio, Relation between NTU and Stanton number, Relations between NTU

and effectiveness(no derivation)

6. Effect of flow arrangement, Effect of Cmin/Cmax<1 for regenerator, Log mean rate

equation compared to effectiveness –NTU approach.

7. Rotary heat exchanger- Effect of Mateix speed, Effect of longitudinal conduction

8. Core pressure drop. Some economics approach of heat exchanger design. Numerical

examples



UNIT IV



1. Analyze the nozzle efficiencies

2. Analyze the degree of reaction, blade speed ratio for impulse turbines and also analyze

the velocity compounded turbine

3. Analyze the blade speed for a reaction turbine

4. Distinguish between Curtis stage, Rateau stage and Reaction stage

5. Analyze the forces acting on the turbine blades




LESSON SCHEDULE

1. Axial flow gas turbines Introduction, Turbine and nozzle efficiencies. Degree of

reaction- Impulse turbine

2. Ideal impulse turbine, Impulse turbine with loss, Blade speed ratio, Velocity ratio and

torque

3. Velocity compounded turbine. The reaction turbine- Reheat factor

4. Blade speed ratio for reaction turbine. Comparison of turbine types

5. Forces on blade, Cascade analysis

6. Three dimensional flow analysis The free vortex blades

7. Constant angle nozzle stage. Turbine flow passage-

8. Impulse blading, Reaction blading. Turbine characteristics



UNIT V

TOPIC LEARNING OBJECTIVES By the end of the topic, student will be able to

1. Demonstrate the non-dimensional representation of compressor and turbine

performance.

2. Demonstrate the matching of compressor and turbine in a simple self driving system

3. Explain the effect of adding a propelling nozzle to compressor turbine combination

4. Explain the clean air standards established by the Environmental protection

agency(EPA)

5. Explain the mechanism of formation and reduction of Nox in gas turbines

6. Identify the various noise sources from gas turbine engines and Explain the methods

of reducing the noise

LESSON SCHEDULE

1. Performance of Gas turbine power plant Non dimensional representation of

compressor and turbine performance

2. Performance characteristics of compressor and turbines compressors

3. Matching of compressor and turbine in a self driving system

4. Equilibrium running of simple jet and propeller turbine engines, Simple jet unit, nozzle

characteristic

5. Effect of adding a propelling nozzle to the compressor turbine combination, Variation

of thrust with forward speed and rpm

6. Variation of specific fuel consumption with forward speed and rpm, Discussion on the

equilibrium running diagram, Propeller turbine engines(turboprop),

7. Combined turbines. Torque characteristics of gas turbine plant Environmental

consideration Air pollution

8. Aircraft emission standards, Stationary engine emission standards

9. Nox formation, nox reduction in stationary engines

10. Noise, Noise standards, Noise reduction.

REVIEW QUESTIONS

1. Explain the following air cycles

2. Ericssion cycle b)Joule air cycle c)Brayton cycle with regenerator

3. Explain the following: a) Pressure or flow losses, b) effect of loss due to incomplete

combustion, c) Mechanical losses d) Effect of Variable specific heat

4. A Turbojet engine inducts 45 kg of air per second and propels an aircraft with a

uniform flight speed of 880 km/hr. The isentropic enthalpy change for the nozzle is 180




kj/kg, and its velocity coefficient is 0.96. The fuel air ratio is 0.012, the combustion

efficiency is 0.95 and lower heating value of the fuel is 44000kj/kg. Calculate a)the

thermal efficiency of the engine b) the fuel flow rate in kg/hr and TSFC, c) the

propulsion power. D) the thrust power e) The propulsive efficiency and f) the overall

efficiency.

5. Develop an expression for the slip factor

6. With a neat diagram Describe the axial flow compressor

7. Develop an expression for the static pressure rise in the rotor of an axial flow

compressor

8. Design an axial flow compressor for the following conditions:

9. Mass flow rate 20 kg/s, Pressure ratio 4, Static temperature at the inlet 288K, Static

pressure at the inlet 1 atm, mean blade diameter 40 co, Axial velocity 130 m/s, and

Degree of reaction 50% at all radii

10. Explain the combustion mechanism in gas turbine combustor

11. What are the basic requirements of the gas turbine combustion chamber




Sl.

No. Course Outcome

Programme Outcomes

Programme

Specific

outcomes

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

1 Analyze and predict the cycle

performance of gas turbine engines. 2 2 2

2

2

2

Solve the problem for aircraft

propulsion systems, in particular gas

turbine engines.

2 2 2

2

2

3

Analyze and predict the performance

of compressors, turbines, and

combustion system.

2 2 2

2

2

4

Apply the dimensionless parameters

involving different variables in

predicting the performance of a gas

turbine power plant.

2 2 2

2

2

5 Understand the environmental aspects

of gas turbines. 2 2 2 2 2 2




Course Title: Engines and Components Lab

Course Code: P15AUL57 Semester: V L:T:P:H- 1:0:2:3 Credits:1.5


Prerequisites:

Subject requires student to know about

Basic of Heat Engines and their classification

Components of IC Engines.

Classification of IC Engines.

Basics working Principle of Different Types IC Engines

Course Outcomes (CO’s):

At the end of the course the student should be able to,

1. Identify the function & application of various hand tools used in automotive

workshop/laboratory.

2. Examine various Troubles encountered with engine components and measures to

overcome the same.

3. Take part in dismantle & assemble of engines and Inspect engine components for wear

and tear and damage

4. Analyze the condition of the engines by Conducting compression test, vacuum test on

engines

5. Examine performance of engine

Relevance of the Course

This is a core laboratory course in BE (automobile engineering) program that helps for the

understanding of the basic classifications and principles of operation of IC Engines.

Further this course also helps to understand, in practical classes by dismantling the engine

Types, function, materials, construction details, manufacturing, Troubles & Remedies

through physical inspection. Also calculation of Power, SFC, and Speed etc. of engine is

carried out in the laboratory.

COURSE CONTENT

1. Study of hand tools- sketching, materials used and their applications. lhr

2. Trouble shooting charts for all engine components. lhr

3. Specifications of given engines and component standard dimensions. lhr

4. Dismantling & assembling of engines.

[Note: Procedure of dismantling & assembly; identify the major components, noting their

functions & materials used. Measurement & comparison of major components dimension with

standard specifications. Inspection for wear and tear, crack and breakdown] and run the same

a) Two stroke SI engine lhr

b) Four stroke SI engine

i) Enfield and hero Honda engine 1hr

c) Four stroke multi cylinder SI engine

i) Four cylinder engine 1hr

ii) Three cylinder MPFI maruti engine 1hr

d) four stroke multi cylinder CI engine




i) Six cylinder tata and ashok Leyland engine 2hr

5. Conducting compression test, vacuum test on diesel and petrol engines. 1hr

6. Study (Dismantling & assembly): Different carburetors, fuel injection pumps, injectors, fuel

tanks, fuel filters, fuel pumps, turbo-chargers, cooling systems and lubricating systems.

Identify location of above components in a vehicle and note their functions along with the

brand names. 3 hr

EVALUATION SCHEME

CIE Scheme

Assessment Weightage in Marks

TEST 1 20

TEST 2 20

RECORD 10

Total 50

SEE Scheme

Semester End Examination (SEE) is a practical examination of three hours duration of 50

marks.

Sl.

No. Marks allotment

1

Procedure

and

Conduction

ONE Question from Chapter 1, 2, 3 10Marks

ONE Question from Chapter4 20Marks

ONE Question from Chapter5,6 10Marks

2 Viva 10 Marks

Total Marks 50 Marks

WEEK WISE PLAN

Week-1:

1. Study of hand tools- sketching, materials used and their

applications.

2. Trouble shooting charts for all engine components.

Planned Hours:3 hrs

Topic Learning Outcomes (TLO’s):

At the end of this lab, student should be able to:

a) Sketch and define about function & application of various hand tools

used in automotive workshop/laboratory.

b) Review about various Troubles encountered with engine components

and to overcome the same.

Week-2

1. Specifications of given engines and component standard

Planned Hours:

3 hrs




dimensions.


At the end this lab, student should be able to:

a) Know and Compare Specifications of given engines and components standard

dimensions

Week-3 and Week-8:

1. Dismantling & assembling of engines.

[Note: Procedure of dismantling & assembly; identify the major

components, noting their functions & materials used.

Measurement & comparison of major components dimension with

standard specifications. Inspection for wear and tear, crack and

breakdown] and run the same

a) two stroke SI engine 3hr

b) four stroke SI engine

i)Enfield and hero Honda engine 3hr

c) Four stroke multi cylinder SI engine

i)Four cylinder engine 3hr

ii)Three cylinder MPFI maruti engine 3hr

d) four stroke multi cylinder CI engine

i) Six cylinder tata and ashok Leyland engine 6hr

Planned Hours: 18 hrs



a) Practice to, dismantle & assemble engines,

b) Identify the major components of engines, Know the functions &

materials used.

c) Compare major engine components dimension with standard

specifications.

d) Inspect engine components for wear and tear and damage

e) Assess the working condition of the engines.

Week6 and Week 9:

1. Conducting compression test, vacuum test on diesel and petrol

engines.

Planned Hours:

3 hrs



a) Assess the condition of the engines by Conducting compression test,

vacuum test on diesel and petrol engines.

Week-10 and Week 12:

Study (Dismantling & assembly): Different carburetors, fuel

injection pumps, injectors, fuel tanks, fuel filters, fuel pumps,

turbo-chargers, cooling systems and lubricating systems.

Planned Hours: 9hrs




Identify location of above components in a vehicle and note

their functions along with the brand names.



a) Know about Fuel systems, cooling systems, lubrication systems and

turbo-chargers used in engines.





Programme

Specific

outcomes

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

1

Identify the function & application of

various hand tools used in automotive

workshop/laboratory.

3 3 - - 1 2 1 2 - - - 2 3 1 1

2

Examine various Troubles

encountered with engine components

and measures to overcome the same.

2 2 - - 1 2 1 2 - - - 2 3 1 1

3

Take part in dismantle & assemble of

engines and Inspect engine

components for wear and tear and

damage

2 2 - - 1 2 1 2 - - - 2 3 1 1

4

Analyze the condition of the engines

by Conducting compression test,

vacuum test on engines

3 3 - 2 1 2 1 2 - - - 2 3 1 1

5 Examine performance of engine 3 3 - 2 2 2 1 2 - - - 2 3 1 1




Course Title: Modelling and Analysis lab

Course Code: P15AUL58 Semester: V L:T:P:H -1:0:2:3 Credits:1.5

Contact Period-Lecturer: 39Hrs,: Exam: 3Hrs Weightage:CIE:50%; SEE:50%

Prerequisites:


knowledge of Engineering Mechanics, Mechanics of materials

Basic knowledge of Computational Engineering Drawing

Basic knowledge of Computational Machine Drawing ( Modelling )

Basic knowledge of Finite Element Analysis

Basic knowledge of CAD/CAM

Basic knowledge of Production Technology (Machining Processes)

knowledge of Heat and Mass Transfer ,Mechanical Vibrations

Course Outcomes (CO):


1. Analyze Static Analysis of Bars, Trusses, Beams, Rectangular Plates

2. Analyze thermal and fluid flow in a component

3. Analyze the Dynamic Analysis of bars and beams

4. Analyze, Simulation of Turning and milling operations

5. Analyze, Turning and milling operations Using CNC part programming


The Modeling and Analysis Laboratory is a foundation course in BE (Automobile

Engineering) program that builds the program design and implementation competence in

student by learning through Computation about various Modeling, Analysis, Simulation and

Part programming exercises.

The course aims at developing and understanding of Computational exercises pertaining to

static, dynamic analysis and simulations of turning and milling operations using respective

software.

COURSE CONTENT

PART-A

I. FINATE ELEMENT ANALYSIS (Ansys / Nastran / Patran etc.)

Study of FEA packages, Modelling, Static and Dynamic analysis

1) STATIC ANALYSIS Planned Hours: 21 hrs

a) Bars subjected to axial loads for Constant cross section, Tapered cross section and

stepped bars

b) Trusses – Simple trusses

c) Beams – Cantilever and simply supported beams subjected to point load, UDL, UVL

and moments

d) Analysis of Rectangular Plates (with and without holes) subjected to axial and bending

loads.

e) Thermal analysis – 2D problems (thermal and heat transfer) with conduction and

convection boundary conditions

f) Fluid flow analysis – simple 2D problems Verification of Results of conventional

problems

2) DYNAMIC ANALYSIS Planned Hours: 9 hrs

a) Harmonic analysis of bars and beams

b) Natural frequency and modal analysis (Eigen values and Eigen vectors) of beams




PART-B

II SIMULATION AND PART PROGRAMMING (simple exercises) Planned Hours: 9 hrs

a. Simulation of Turning and Milling operations (Master cam/ Solid cam/ Edge cam etc.)

b. CNC part programming - Turning and Milling operations (G and M codes)

C. valuation Scheme

CIE Scheme

Assessment Weightage in Marks

TEST 1 20

TEST 2 20

RECORD & Attendance 10

Total 50

SEE Scheme

Semester End Examination (SEE) is a practical examination of three hours duration of 50 marks.

Sl. No. Marks allotment

1 Procedure and Conduction ONE Question from Part A 25 Marks

ONE Question from Part B 15 Marks

2 Viva 10 Marks

Total Marks 50 Marks

UNIT WISE PLAN AND SCHEDULE

PART-A

1. STATIC ANALYSIS

a) Bars subjected to axial loads for Constant cross section, Tapered cross section and stepped

bars Planned Hours: 3 hrs

Topic Learning Outcomes (TLO’s): At the end this lab, student should be able to:

Interpret, Solve and Static Analysis of Bars subjected to axial loads for Constant cross section,

Tapered cross section and stepped bars

b) Trusses – Simple trusses Planned Hours: 3 hrs

Topic Learning Outcomes (TLO’s): At the end this lab, student should be able to

Interpret, Solve and Static Analysis of Trusses – Simple trusses

c) Beams – Cantilever and simply supported beams subjected to point load, UDL, UVL and

moments Planned Hours: 6 hrs


Interpret, Solve and Static Analysis of Beams Cantilever and simply supported beams

subjected to point load, UDL, UVL and moments

d) Analysis of Rectangular Plates (with and without holes) subjected to axial and bending loads.

Topic Learning Outcomes (TLO’s): Planned Hours: 3 hrs




At the end this lab, student should be able to

Interpret, Solve and Static Analysis of Rectangular Plates (with and without holes) subjected to

axial and bending loads.

e) Thermal analysis – 2D problems (thermal and heat transfer) with conduction and

convection boundary conditions Planned Hours: 3 hrs



Interpret, Solve and Thermal analysis – 2D problems (thermal and heat transfer) with

conduction and convection boundary conditions.

f) Fluid flow analysis – simple 2D problems Verification of Results of conventional problems

Topic Learning Outcomes (TLO’s): Planned Hours: 3 hrs


Interpret, Solve and Fluid flow analysis– simple 2D problems Verification of Results of

conventional problems.

2 DYNAMIC ANALYSIS a) Harmonic analysis of bars and beams Planned Hours: 3 hrs



Interpret, Solve and Harmonic Analysis of bars and beams


Planned Hours: 6 hrs



Interpret Solve natural frequency and modal analysis (Eigen values and Eigen vectors) of

beams.

PART-B

II SIMULATION AND PART PROGRAMMING a). Simulation of Turning and Milling operations (Master cam/ Solid cam/ Edge cam etc.)

Planned

Hours: 3 hrs



Analyze, Simulation of Turning and Milling operations


Planned

Hours: 6 hrs



Analyze, Turning and Milling operations Using CNC part programming




Review Questions and / Questions for viva

1. What are Sign conventions in ansys software?

2. What is Type of displacements?

3. What are the different approximate solution methods?

4. What do you mean by continuum?

5. Define term node?

6. Define term element?

7. What is convergence? What is p-convergence? What is h convergence?

8. What are higher order elements? Give example for higher order elements.

9. What do you mean by compatible elements?

10. What is geometric invariance?

11. Why do we use Pascal’s triangle in FEA?

12. What are the steps involved in FEA?

13. What is stiffness matrix?

14. How to obtain stiffness matrix?

15. What are the properties of stiffness matrix?

16. What is displacement function?

17. How to identify order of elements?

18. Mention different types of elements.

19. Mention some application of FEA.

20. What is connectivity?

21. What are the methods to improve problem solution?

22. Define symmetry in matrix.

23. What is plane stress?

24. What is plane strain?

25. Compare FEA with solid mechanics.

26. What are the packages available for FEA?

27. Define potential energy.

28. Define minimum potential energy.

29. Write potential energy equation for cantilever beam.

30. Mention 2 different methods to approach the model of physical system.

31. What is local coordinate?

32. What is global coordinate?

33. What is shape function?

34. What are two general natural coordinate?

35. Mention the range of natural coordinate.

36. Number of shape function in CST

37. Number of shape function in quadrilateral.

38. Explain one point formula and explain two point formulas.

39. Why we are using polynomial equation in FEA?

40. Mention two schemes to represent band width?

41. What are forces involved in work potential?

42. What are anisotropic elements?

43. What are isotropic elements?

44. What are the 2 different approaches to study elasticity?

45. List the properties of shape functions.

46. Define truss.

47. What is weighted residual methods?

48. Different methods to solve weighed residual problem.

49. Explain the principle of virtual work.




50. Mention some advantages of FEA over solid mechanics.

51. Define Young’s Modulus and Poisson’s Ratio.

52. Mention different types of elastic constants.

53. Which is the most accepted form of numerical integration in FEM?

54. List the different approaches to derive integral equation.

55. What are the different types of errors in FEA?

56. Define Beam & Its types.

57. Define Conduction, Convection and radiation.

58. Define Heat flux, Heat flow & Heat generation

59. Define adiabatic surfaces.

60. Define Density, film coefficient.

61. Define Thermal gradient & Thermal conductivity.

62. Define Specific heat.

63. Define Dynamic Analysis and its types

64. Define Modal & Harmonic Analysis with its application.

65. What is ANSYS?

66. Mention the nine steps used in ANSYS

67. In how many methods ANSYS can be used?

68. How files are organized in ANSYS?

69. What are the different types of coordinate systems?

70. What is trusses element?

Course Articulation Matrix Mapping of Course Outcomes (CO) with Program Outcomes (POs) and Program Specific

Outcomes (PSOs)

CO Statement

Programme Outcomes

Programme

Specific

outcomes

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

1 Analyze Static Analysis of Bars,

Trusses, Beams, Rectangular Plates 3 3 2 2 3 2 - - 2 - 2 2 3 2 3

2 Analyze thermal and fluid flow in a

component 3 3 - 2 3 2 - - 1 - - 2 3 2 3

3 Analyze the Dynamic Analysis of bars

and beams 3 3 - 2 3 2 - - 1 - - 2 3 2 3

4 Analyze, Simulation of Turning and

milling operations 3 3 - 2 3 2 - - 1 - - 2 3 2 3

5

Analyze, Turning and milling

operations Using CNC part

programming

3 3 - 2 3 2 - - 1 - - 2 3 2 3




Course Title : Industrial Visit & Interaction

Course Code : P15HU59 Semester : 5 L : T : P : H : 0 : 0 : 2 :2

Contact Period: Lecture: 32 Hr, Exam: 3 Hr Weightage: CIE:50;% SEE:50%

Guidelines proposed for the conduction and evaluation of the Industry Interaction and Mini

Projects (One credit courses) are as follows-

1. Industry Interaction:

a) To provide minimum of two activities, such as Industry/Field visit, Technical

talk/Seminar during V semesters.

b) Two faculty members shall be assigned as Coordinators for arranging and monitoring

the industry related activities.

c) Student shall submit a write up on the activities attended/held during the semester,

(minimum of 10 A4 pages).

d) The Internal Assessment marks (CIE) shall be based on the evaluation as per the

guidelines at the end of the semester by a committee consisting of Head of the concerned

department, two senior teachers of the department, one of them may be the internal guide.

Course Title : Aptitude and Reasoning Development - Advanced (ARDA)

Course Code : P15HU510 Semester : 5 L : T : P : H : 0 : 0 : 2 :2

Contact Period: Lecture: 32 Hr, Exam: 3 Hr Weightage: CIE:50;% SEE:50%

Prerequisites: Vocabulary builder, Concept of Percentage.


This course aims to, 1. Describe the importance of reading with comprehension.

2. Explain seven dimensions approach to better reading skills.

3. Explain the purpose, plan and the ways to identify specific details in a paragraph for better

comprehension.

4. Formulate easier ways to solve problems of averages.

5. Explain the Application of the technique of alligation while solving weighted average and

mixture problems.

6. Describe the concepts of profit, loss, discount, Marked price.

7. Explain the application of percentage in our daily life.

8. Discover different ways to identify the progressions and to compare between AP< GP and

HP.

9. Explain the basic concepts in calculating simple interest and compound interest.

10. Differentiate between simple interest and compound interest and describes the importance

of compound interest and its behaviour.

COURSE CONTENT

UNIT – I

Reading Comprehension:

Introduction: Read more and more, The process of writing and its relevance to the process of

writing, how reading skills are important for aspects other than the reading comprehension

questions, the daily reading scheme.




Seven dimension approach to better reading skills:

Developing the ability of understanding vocabulary in context, Ability to identify and

understand main ideas, Ability to predict and identify supporting details, Understanding the use

of transition and idea organization patterns, Inferences, Identifying purpose and tone,

Recognizing and evaluating arguments and their common structures.

Theory of reading comprehension :

Solving RC passages is an exact science, tackling RC on the basis of evaluation of support, All

passages have a topic, purpose and a plan, Other things to pick up while reading the passage–

The tonality and other software related the author’s viewpoint in the passage, specific details and

their use in the passage, Types of questions asked in reading comprehension passage. 10 hrs

UNIT – II

Averages and Alligations mixtures:

Average: relevance of average, meaning of average, properties of average, deviation method,

concept of weighted average. Alligation method: situation where allegation technique, general

representation of alligations, the straight line approach, application of weighted average and

alligation method in problems involving mixtures. Application of alligation on situation other

than mixtures problems. 6 Hrs

UNIT – III

Profit and Loss: percentage change, original 100 concept effect of percentage increase or

decrease in number, effect of successive percentage change, amount of change, comparison of

two numbers through percentage and ratio, return to original concept, net percentage change to

keep product fixed. Definition of basic terms— cost price, selling price, profit percentage,

discount and marked price, solving problems using n/d method, techniques to tackle from

standard set of problems, the concept of mark up. Concept of partnership and problems

involving partnership 6 Hrs

UNIT IV

Progression:

Arithmetic Progression: sum of given number of terms in an A.P., arithmetic mean, to insert a

given number of arithmetic means between two given quantities, nth term of an A.P., finding

common difference of an A.P. given 2 terms of an A.P., types of A.P.s– increasing A.P.s and

decreasing A.P. s

Geometric: to find, the geometric mean between two given quantities, to insert a given number

of geometric means between two given quantities, sum of a number of terms in a G.P. Types of

G.P.s— increasing G. P. s type one and two , decreasing G. P. s type one and two.

Harmonic Progression: to find the harmonic mean between two given quantities , theorems

related with progressions, solved examples sample company questions 6 Hrs

UNIT- V

Simple Interest and Compound Interest

Concept of time value of money, Terminology pertaining to interest, Relation among Principal,

Time, Rate percent per annum and total interest. Compound interest, Depreciation of value,

Population, Application of interest in D.I.– The difference between simple annual growth rate

and compound annual growth rate. 4 Hrs

Reference books:

1. Trachtenberg speed system of basic mathematics, published by Rupa publications.

2. AbhijithGuha “CAT Mathematics”published by PHI learning private limited.

3. Dr. R. S Agarwal “Quantitative aptitude” published by S.Chand private limited.

4. Dr. R. S Agarwal , “ Verbal reasoning”published by S. Chand private limited.




5. Arun Sharma “ Quantitative aptitude” for CAT by, published by McGraw Hill publication.

Course Outcomes (CO)

After learning all the units of the course, the student is able to:

1. Apply the approach of seven dimension to better reading skills. L2

2. Solve the questions under reading comprehension confidently with higher accuracy than

random reading. L4

3. Apply the technique of alligation for effective problem solving. L2

4. Interpret the requirement of different methods of calculating average and apply the right

method at right scenario. L4

5. Effectively solve problems of profit and loss and problems related to discount, simple interest

and compound interest. L5

6. Formulate the equations for summation and other functions for all the kinds of progressions–

AP, GP and HP. L1

T L O

After learning all the topics of UNIT – I, the student is able to 1. Explain the importance of reading skills. L1

2. Interpret the importance of vocabulary in solving Reading comprehension questions. L4

3. Identify the main idea and supporting details in the paragraph. L2

4. Identify purpose and tone of the author.L2

5. Interpret the use of transition and idea organization pattern. L4

6. Recognize and evaluate arguments and their common structures. L1

7. Solve RC questions methodologically.L5

8. Classify types of questions asked in the RC passages. L2

9. Apply flow chart or mind map to solve RC questions. L4

After learning all the topics of UNIT – II, the student is able to 1. Analyze the properties of average and apply them in the right scenarios.L5

2. Apply the mean deviation method in certain set of questions. L2

3. Distinguish between the usage of simple average and weighted average.L1

4. Apply weighted average concept and formula to solve the problems of mixtures.L2

5. Compare the weighted average method with the alligation method and understand their

strengths and limitations. L4

6. Apply the technique of alligation to solve problems in very less duration of time. L2

7. Understand the concept of homogeneity and other properties of mixtures. L4

8. Apply the basic properties of mixtures while solving the problems under the concept of

removal and replacement. L2

9. Extend the application of alligation technique to solve the problems of other topics such as

Profit and loss, time speed and distance, ratio and comparison etc. L6

After learning all the topics of UNIT – III, the student is able to 1. Define the meaning of basic terms such as Profit, loss, Profit percentage, Loss percentage. L1

2. Understand the meaning of Discount, Discount percentage, Marked price and mark up

percentage and explain them. L4

3. Describe the importance of percentage in this chapter and combine the concepts of percentage

to simplify the methodology of solving. L4

4. Apply n/d technique the solve the problems efficiently. L2

5. Apply the percentage fraction table for simplification.L2




6. Extend the application of n/d technique in other areas of aptitude where concept of product

constancy is involved. L2

7. Solve the problems involving discount and discount percentage.L5

8. Formulate the mark up concept and apply it for better problem solving. L4

9. Apply the knowledge of Profit and loss, discount, discount percentage in day-to-day life.L2

10. Understand the factors to be considered during partnership and solve the solve the problems

under partnership. L4

After learning all the topics of UNIT – IV, the student is able to

1. Interpret the series of numbers in Arithmetic, Geometric and Harmonic Progression. L1

2. Summarize the basic concepts of progressions, i.e., arithmetic mean, nth term of a

progression. L6

3. Predict the missing terms of the given progression. L5

4. Compare AM, HM and GM. L4

5. Compute the sum or product of n terms in the given progression. L4

6. Differentiate between increasing and decreasing progression and solve application based

problems accordingly. L1

7. Understand the theorems governing progressions. L4

8. Identify the similarity and difference between AP, HP and GP. L1

9. Analyze application problems involving combination of concepts of AP, HP and GP or all the

three. L5

10. Create own problems based on creative progressive patterns and it’s combinations. L6

11. Solve problems based on average speed using concept of HP and AP. L6

After learning all the topics of UNIT – V, the student is able to 1. Recognize the concept of money and time, their relation and interdependency with respect to

banking. L1

2. Outline the meaning of Principal, Time, Rate of Interest and Interest earned, and also their

relation with one another. L1

3. Interpret the importance of CI in day to day life. L3

4. Illustrate the concept of Interest earned. L2

5. Distinguish between the types of interests.ie, Simple and Compound Interests.L4

6. Understand the difference between Simple and Compound annual growth.L4

7. Compute problems based on Simple Interests, Compound Interests and combination of

both.L4

8. Solve application problems based on depreciation value, population of a city etc. L2

9. Apply various concepts of Percentages, Ratio, Algebra, HCF and LCM to solve application

based problems. L2

10. Construct own questions involving multiple concepts ranging different difficult levels. L5

11. Solve MCQs faster by application of shortcut methods of Vedic Mathematics to find squares,

cubes and roots. L5




*****

Course Articulation Matrix (CAM)

Course Outcome (CO)

Program Outcome

(ABET/NBA-(3a-k))

PO

1

PO

2

P

O3

PO

4

PO

5

P

O

6

PO

7

PO

8

P

O

9

P

O

10

PO

11

PO

12

PS

O1

PS

O2

Apply the approach of seven

dimension to better reading skills. L2 - - - - - - - - 2 - - - - -

Solve the questions under reading

comprehension confidently with

higher accuracy than random reading.

L4 - - - - - - 2 - 2 - - - - -

Apply the technique of alligation for

effective problem solving. L2 3 - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Interpret the requirement of different

methods of calculating average and

apply the right method at right

scenario.

L4 2 - - - - - - - 2 - - - - -

Effectively solve problems of profit

and loss and problems related to

discount, simple interest and

compound interest.

L5 3 - - - - - - - 2 - - - - -

1 – Low, 2 – Moderate and 3 – High




Course Title: AUTOMOTIVE CHASIS AND SUSPENSION



Prerequisites:


Basics of Engineering Mathematics and

Engineering mechanics

Basics of Automobile

COURSE OUTCOMES (COS):

At the end of the course the student should be able to

1. Identify different chassis layouts and frames and Analyze for Performance of

Automobiles and suitability of frames. L1-L4

2. Analyze Front Axles and Steering Systems and its auxiliaries and Determine major

dimensions of the same L1-L4

3. Analyze Propeller Shaft, Differential and Rear Axles and its auxiliaries and Determine

major dimensions of the same L1-L4

4. Analyze Braking system and Determine major dimensions of the same. L1-L4

5. Analyze Suspension system and Wheels &Tyres. Also determine major dimensions of

the Suspension system. L1-L4

Relevance of the course

Automotive chassis and suspension is a foundation course in BE (automobile engineering)

program that helps for the understanding, types of automobiles, the basic principles of

operation of chassis and suspension components of automobiles.

Further this course also helps to understand different types, function, materials,

construction details, troubles and remedies and calculation of major dimensions of the

major chassis and suspension components of automobiles

COURSE CONTENT

UNIT- I

Introduction - General consideration relating to chassis layout, types of automobiles, power

plant location, layout of an automobile with reference to power plant, Power for propulsion,

Road, wind & Grade resistance, Traction and Tractive effort, Relation between Engine and

Vehicle speed, Road performance curves, acceleration, gradability and Draw bar pull,

calculation of equivalent weight, gear for maximum acceleration, weight distribution, stability of

a vehicle on a slope, Calculation of maximum acceleration, Maximum tractive effort and

reactions, Dynamics of a vehicle on a banked track, Stability of a vehicle taking a turn,

Numerical problems.

Frames - Types of frames, general form and dimensions, materials, frame stresses, frame

sections, cross members, proportions of channel sections, constructional details, loading points,

sub frames, passenger car frames, X member type frame, Box section type frame, testing of

frames, bending and torsion test, effect of brake application of frame stresses, truck frames,

defects, Numerical problems. 12 Hrs

UNIT- II

Front Axle Axle parts and materials, loads and stresses, centre sections, section near steering

head, spring pads, front axle loads, steering heads, factors of wheel alignment, wheel balancing,

centre point steering, correct steering angle. Steering Systems steering mechanisms, cornering




force, self righting torque, under steer and over steer, Steering linkages, steering gears, special

steering columns, power steering, trouble shooting, Numerical problems. 10 Hrs

UNIT-III

Propeller shafts: - Construction and types of propeller shafts, whirling of propeller shaft,

universal joints, analysis of Hooke’s joint- ratio of shafts velocities, maximum and minimum

speeds of driven shaft, condition for equal speeds of thee driving and driven shafts, angular

acceleration of the driven shaft, maximum fluctuation of speed, double Hooke’s joint, Numerical

problems. Final drive- construction details, types. Differential: - Principle, types of differential

gears, conventional and non-slip differentials, backlash, differential lock, inter-axle differential,

transaxle types. Rear axle: - Torque reaction, driving thrust, Hotchkiss drive, torque tube drive,

construction of rear axle shaft supporting- fully floating and semi floating arrangements axle

housings, trouble shooting, numerical problems. 10 Hrs

UNIT-IV

Brakes - Necessity, stopping distance and time, brake efficiency, weight transfer, brake shoe

theory, determination of braking torque, classification of brakes, types, construction, function,

operation, braking systems - mechanical, hydraulic, disc, drum, details of hydraulic system,

mechanical system and components, types of master and wheel cylinders, bleeding of brakes,

brake drums, brake linings, brake fluid, factors influencing operation of brakes such as operating

temperature, lining, brake clearance, pedal pressure, linkages etc, Numerical problems. Brake

compensation, Parking and emergency brakes, hill holder, automatic adjustment, servo brakes,

Power brakes-Air brakes, wagner air brake, vacuum brakes and electric brakes and components

brake valve, unloaded valve, diaphragm, air-hydraulic brakes, vacuum boosted hydraulic brakes,

trouble shooting, Numerical problems. 10 Hrs

UNIT-V

Suspension - Objects, basic considerations, Types of suspension springs, construction ,

operation and materials, leaf springs, coil springs, torsion bar, rubber springs, plastic springs, air

bellows or pneumatic suspension, hydraulic suspension, constructional details of telescopic

shock absorbers, independent suspension, front wheel independent suspension, rear wheel

independent suspension, types, stabilizer, trouble shooting, Numerical problems.

Wheels and Tyres - Types of wheels, construction, structure and function, wheel dimensions,

structure and function of tyres, static and dynamic properties of pneumatic tyres, types of tyres,

materials, tyre section and designation, factors affecting tyre life, quick change wheels, special

wheels, trouble shooting,

Self Study - Study of systems used in recent vehicles with advanced technologies 10 Hrs

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Heldt.P.M.- “Automotive Chassis”- Chilton Co., Literary Licensing, LLC, 2012

2. N.K. Giri, “ Automotive Mechanics”,8th Edition , Khanna Publications, New

Delhi,2013

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Kirpal Singh “Automobile Engineering” Vol. I, 12th edition, Standard publications,

New Delhi, 2012

2. K.K.Ramalingam - “Automobile Engineering” – Scitech Publication, Chennai – 2011

3. Joseph I Heintner , “Automotive mechanics” 2nd edition, Affiliated East West Press,

New Delhi/Madras,2013

4. William H. Crouse, “Automotive Mechanics” Tata Mc Graw Hill Publication, New

Delhi, 2007

http://www.flipkart.com/automobile-mechanics-english-8th/p/itmduzqebdexhpz4?pid=9788174092168&srno=b_1&ref=0d8591f8-3773-48ff-8aea-935df6d660a7




UNIT WISE PLAN

UNIT-I

TOPIC LEARNING OBJECTIVES (TLO): (L1, L2, L3)

At the end of this chapter student should be able to Identify and Explain and/ solve about

Components of an automobile, The basic structure

Conventional construction

Car body styles,

Transport vehicles

Classification of automobiles,

Automobiles and Chassis requirements.

Different Chassis layouts and power transmissions

Different power plant locations

Power for propulsion, Road, wind & Grade resistance,

Traction and Tractive effort,

Relation between Engine and Vehicle speed,

Road performance curves, acceleration, gradability and Draw bar pull,

Calculation of equivalent weight, gear for maximum acceleration,

weight distribution,

stability of a vehicle on a slope,

Calculation of maximum acceleration, Maximum tractive effort and reactions,

Dynamics of a vehicle on a banked track,

Stability of a vehicle taking a turn, Numerical problems.

Automobile frames, constructional details and proportions

Functions of the frame, Frame construction

Loads on the frame

Materials for frame,

frame stresses, effect of brake application,

loading points and sub frames

Frameless construction

Passenger car frames and truck frames

Testing of frames,

defects in frames

solve numerical on suitability of frame

LESSON SCHEDULE

Class -Portions covered /Hour (an estimate)

I. Introduction and Components of an automobile, The basic structure, Conventional

construction. Classification of automobiles and chassis based on various considerations

Car body styles, Transport vehicles, Vehicle dimensions, Requirements of automobiles

and Chassis, Chassis layouts - 2×4, 4×4

II. Power plant location, merits and demerits of various types

III. Power for propulsion, Road, wind & Grade resistance,

IV. Traction and Tractive effort, Relation between Engine and Vehicle speed,

V. Road performance curves, acceleration, gradability and Draw bar pull,

VI. Calculation of equivalent weight, gear for maximum acceleration,

VII. weight distribution, stability of a vehicle on a slope,




VIII. Calculation of maximum acceleration, Maximum tractive effort and reactions,

IX. Dynamics of a vehicle on a banked track, Stability of a vehicle taking a turn,

X. Numerical problems.

XI. Automobile frames, constructional details and proportions, Functions of the frame,

Frame construction, Loads on the frame, Materials for frame

XII. Frame stresses, effect of brake application, loading points and sub frames

XIII. Passenger car frames and truck frames, Testing of frames, defects of frames

XIV. solve numerical on suitability of frame.

REVIEW QUESTIONS

1. What are the main components of an automobile? Describe all of them briefly.

2. Discuss the functions of the transmission system in automobiles.

3. Compare the merits and demerits of the frameless construction with those of the

conventional framed construction.

4. Draw schematic diagrams showing the layout of the transmission system of a rear wheel

driven car and also of a four wheel drive vehicle.

5. Describe various component-layouts for automobiles and discuss the advantages and

disadvantages of each.

6. How do you classify automobiles? Explain in detail giving examples.

7. Discuss various styles of car bodies giving examples.

8. Name important transport vehicles and describe the salient features of each.

9. Name major components of an automobile.

10. State the advantages of frameless construction. What are its disadvantages?

11. Name a few layouts of automobile components. What advantages are there in case of front

wheel drive? What is the main advantage of the four wheel drive vehicle?

12. State various considerations on the basis of which automobiles are classified.

13. Give typical examples of cars with (a) rear wheel drive (b) front wheel drive.

14. What are the salient features of a (a) saloon car (b) coupe (c) estate car (d) van (e)

articulated vehicle? Name a few types of transport vehicles.

15. What are different types of frames? What do you mean by Sub frames? Sketch and explain

X member type and Box type passenger car frames.

16. With necessary sketch, Derive expressions for stability of a vehicle on a slope.

17. Derive expressions for Power for propulsion, Road, wind & Grade resistance,

18. Derive expressions for Traction and Tractive effort,

19. Derive expressions for Relation between Engine and Vehicle speed,

20. Derive expressions for Road performance curves, acceleration, gradability and Draw bar

pull,

21. Derive expressions for Calculation of equivalent weight, gear for maximum acceleration,

22. Derive expressions for weight distribution,

23. Derive expressions for stability of a vehicle on a slope,

24. Derive expressions for Calculation of maximum acceleration, Maximum tractive effort and

reactions,

25. Derive expressions for Dynamics of a vehicle on a banked track,

26. Derive expressions for Stability of a vehicle taking a turn, Numerical problems.

27. Derive the expressions for weight distribution in case of three wheeled and four wheeled

vehicles.

28. Sketch and explain the testing of automotive frames for Linear and Angular Deflections?

29. A vehicle of total weight 49050Nis held at rest on slope of 100. It has a wheel base of 2.25m

and its centre of gravity is 1.0m in front of the rear axle and 1.5m above the ground level.

What are the normal reactions at the wheels?




Assume that sliding does not occur first, what will be the angle of slope so that the

vehicle will overturn?

Assuming all the wheels are to be braked, what will be the angle of the slope so that the

vehicle will begin to slide if the coefficient of adhesion between the tyre and the ground

is to be 0.35?

30. Explain briefly the various types of chassis construction with the help of suitable diagrams.

Make a list of various components mounted on the chassis.

31. Write a brief note on sub-frames.

32. How do you check the alignment of chassis frame? Explain clearly.

33. What are the functions of a frame? Name three types of chassis construction.

34. Name various components mounted on the chassis frame. 4 What are the loads coming on a

chassis frame? What is the effect of weight of vehicle and passengers on the frame side

members?

35. What type of stresses are produced in the side members while cornering?

36. Why are the side members of a frame upswept at two places?

37. Why is the frame narrow at the front?

38. Which section has maximum resistance to (i) bending (ii) torsion? 10. What are the

materials used for chassis frames and body?

UNIT WISE PLAN

UNIT – II


At the end of this chapter student should be able to Identify, Explain and/ Solve about

Front axle.

Axle parts and materials, loads and stresses, centre sections, section near steering head, spring

pads, front axle loads, steering heads,

Factors of wheel alignment,

Factors pertaining to wheels

Steering geometry,

Camber, King Pin inclination (Steering Axis Inclination), Combined angle and, Castor, Toe-

in in Toe-out Scrub radius, centre point steering,

Correct steering angle,

steering mechanisms. Ackermann Mechanism, Davis Mechanism

Cornering force, Self-righting torque, Understeer and oversteer.

Steering systems, steering linkages

Steering linkage for vehicle with rigid axle front suspension

Steering linkage for vehicle with independent front suspension ..

Steering gears

Worm and wheel steering gear, Cam and double roller steering gear, Worm and nut steering

gear, Recirculating ball type steering gear, Rack and pinion steering gear, Steering ratio,

Reversibility

Special steering columns

Energy absorbing steering column, Tilt wheel steering column, Tilt and telescopic steering

columns, Steering column with anti-theft lock .

Power steering

Four wheel steering

Steering adjustments, Adjustment of steering geometry, Adjustment of steering gear,

checking of wheel alignment and steering geometry.




Trouble shooting

Numerical problems,

LESSON SCHEDULE


I. Front axle - Axle parts and materials, loads and stresses, centre sections, section near

steering head, spring pads, front axle loads, steering heads,

II. Factors of wheel alignment-Factors pertaining to wheels, Steering geometry, Camber, King

Pin inclination (Steering Axis Inclination), Combined angle and, Castor, Toe-in in Toe-out

Scrub radius, centre point steering, Cornering force, Self-righting torque, Under steer and

oversteer

III. Correct steering angle, steering mechanisms. Ackermann Mechanism, Davis Mechanism

IV. Numerical problems,

V. Steering systems, steering linkages, Steering linkage for vehicle with rigid axle front

suspension, Steering linkage for vehicle with independent front suspension

VI. Steering gears, Worm and wheel steering gear, Cam and double roller steering gear, Worm

and nut steering gear, Recirculating ball type steering gear, Rack and pinion steering gear,

Steering ratio, Reversibility

VII. Special steering columns, Energy absorbing steering column, Tilt wheel steering column,

Tilt and telescopic steering columns, Steering column with anti-theft lock.

VIII. Power steering

IX. Steering adjustments, Adjustment of steering geometry, Adjustment of steering gear,

Checking of wheel alignment and steering geometry, Trouble shooting

X. And IX)Numerical problems,

REVIEW QUESTIONS

1. Sketch front axle of a car and show how it is connected with the stub axle.

2. Discuss various factors of wheel alignment.

3. Explain the terms: camber, castor, steering axis inclination and toe-in. What are the effects

of each on the steering characteristics of a vehicle?

4. What is perfect steering? Derive expression for the basic condition for a perfect steering

mechanism. Discuss in detail the Ackermann steering mechanism.

5. Define cornering force. What is the effect of slip angle, inflation pressure and tyre load on

the cornering force? What is self-righting torque?

6. What do you understand from the terms: over steer, under steer, cornering power and slip

angle?

7. Discuss a steering linkage for a vehicle with independent suspension.

8. What do you understand by backlash in steering gears? Sketch any one steering gear and

explain the constructional features provided to adjust backlash.

9. Sketch a recirculating ball type steering gear and explain its working.

10. Describe in detail the rack and pinion type manual steering gear by means of a simple

sketch and discuss its advantages.

11. Discuss various types of special steering columns for safety and ease of operation.

12. Explain the necessity of power steering in an automobile. Sketch any power steering

system and explain its working.

13. Discuss in detail various adjustments in the steering geometry and the steering gear.

14. Describe in details the equipment to check wheel alignment and steering geometry.

15. Discuss any type of computerized wheel alignment equipment, describing various steps for

inspection of vehicle before proceeding with wheel alignment.




17. Explain the probable causes of various steering troubles and suggest suitable remedies. A

car with a wheelbase 2.45 m has pivoted centres 1.1m. The track distance between tyre

centre lines is 1.2 m. If the angle of lock is 30° and tyre width 100 mm determine the

minimum radius of the outer turning circle.

18. A motor car has a wheel base of 2.743 m and pivot centres 1.065 m apart. The front and

rear wheel track is 1.217 m. Calculate the correct angle of outside lock and turning circle

radius of the outer front and inner rear wheels when the angle of inside lock is 40°.

19. A car using rack and pinion type steering gear has steering wheel of 300 mm diameter and

pinion with 5 teeth of 10 mm pitch. Determine the effort required by each hand at the

steering wheel to overcome a load of 600 N at the rack

20. State the requirements of a steering system.

21. What is the material used for front axle? How is it manufactured?

22. Why for a front axle do we have I-section in the middle and elliptical section at the ends?

23. What is a stub axle? What is the function of king pin? What is steering axis?

24. What do you understand from wheel alignment'? What is thrust angle? What is ‘tracking’?

25. State factors of wheel alignment.

26. What happens to vehicle steering if the road wheels are not balanced?

27. Name important angles of steering geometry.

28. Define camber, SAI and castor. What is scrub radius?

29. Name the steering geometry parameter to give road feel to the driver.

30. What should be the approximate amount of the following in a car: camber, kingpin

inclination, included angle, castor and toe- in?

31. If the kingpin and the wheel centre lines meet below the ground, will the wheels try to toe-

in?

32. What is centre point steering?

33. Define perfect steering.

34. What is 'lock* position in steering?

35. Define 'turning circle'. State its approximate value for any (i) car (ii) bus.

36. What is 'toe-out on turns'?

37. Why is it easier to steer a vehicle in reverse than in forward?

38. What is slip angle? Define cornering force and cornering power.

39. What is self-righting torque, pneumatic trail, castor trail? Define 'under steer' and 'over

steer'.

40. What is the purpose of ball joints in the steering linkage?

41. What is the function of steering gear? Name any three types of steering gears.

42. What is the function of balls in the recirculating ball type steering gear?

43. Why are the teeth on the nut in the recirculating ball type steering gear made tapered?

44. Which is the most popular steering gear for cars?

45. State the advantages of a rack and pinion type steering gear.

46. Why the pinion is usually placed tilted to rack in the rack and pinion type steering gear?

47. What purpose does a tilt wheel column serve?

48. What is the purpose of a telescopic steering column?

49. What is power steering? Name two basic types of power steering.

50. What are the main components of integral power steering system?

51. What is the purpose served by a variable steering ratio steering gear?

52. Out of the camber and the castor, which is measured first and why?

53. Which angle out of the camber and the castor is adjusted first? Why?

54. Name the various gauges used for the checking of wheel alignment.

55. What do you mean by the terms 'wander' and •shimmy' in steering? How are they caused?

56. What does the term 'dynamic balance' mean? What is 'wheel tramp' in case of steering?




UNIT WISE PLAN

UNIT –III



Propeller shaft

Construction and types of propeller shafts, whirling of propeller shaft,

Universal joints, analysis of Hooke’s joint- ratio of shafts velocities, maximum and minimum

speeds of driven shaft, condition for equal speeds of thee driving and driven shafts, angular

acceleration of the driven shaft, maximum fluctuation of speed,

Double Hooke’s joint,

Numerical problems

Propeller shaft trouble shooting.

Final drive, Construction details, types.

Differential

Principle, types of differential gears, conventional and non-slip differentials, backlash,

differential lock, inter-axle differential, transaxle types

Rear axle, Torque reaction, driving thrust,

Rear axle drives-Hotchkiss drive, torque tube drive,

Construction of rear axle shaft supporting- fully floating and semi floating Three quarter

floating axle arrangements, axle housings,

Trouble shooting

Numerical problems

LESSON SCHEDULE

Class -Portions covered /Hour (an estimate) I. Propeller shaft- Construction and types of propeller shafts, whirling of propeller

shaft,

II. Universal joints, analysis of Hooke’s joint- ratio of shafts velocities, maximum and

minimum speeds of driven shaft, condition for equal speeds of thee driving and

driven shafts, angular acceleration of the driven shaft, maximum fluctuation of speed,

III. Double Hooke’s joint, Numerical problems, Propeller shaft trouble shooting .

IV. Final drive, Construction details, types.

V. Differential-Principle, types of differential gears, conventional and non-slip

differentials, backlash, differential lock, inter-axle differential, transaxle types

VI. Rear axle, Torque reaction, driving thrust,

VII. Rear axle drives-Hotchkiss drive, torque tube drive,

VIII. Construction of rear axle shaft supporting- fully floating and semi floating Three

quarter floating axle arrangements, axle housings,

IX. and X)Trouble shooting, Numerical problems

REVIEW QUESTIONS

1. Explain with the help of a neat sketch the construction of a propeller shaft.

2. Describe in detail various universal joints used in automobiles.

3. What is a constant velocity joint? Explain in brief the principle of working of any such joint.

State also the situations which necessitate the use of these joints.

4. Derive expressions for the following in a Hooke's joint:

5. (i) Velocity ratio (ii) Angular acceleration of the driven shaft.




6. Compare the various types of gearings used for the final drive. Discuss the advantages and

disadvantages of each such type. Describe in particular, the types of vehicles in which each

of these gearings is used.

7. Explain the necessity of a differential in an automobile. Discuss in detail the construction

and operation of the differential.

8. Describe the operation of an non-slip or limited-slip differential explaining clearly the

situations necessitating the use of such a differential.

9. Sketch general arrangement of a live rear axle and identity various loads that it has to

withstand.

10. Describe clearly the constructional details and operation of various rear axle drives.

Illustrate your answer with neat and simple sketches.

11. Discuss in detail different methods of supporting live rear axle shafts. Describe also the

advantages and disadvantages of each.

12. Distinguish between "semi-floating" and "fully-floating" rear axles with the aid of suitable

sketches and explain their relative merits and demerits.

13. Write an explanatory note on types of rear axle casing.

14. Discuss the common sources of trouble in the propeller shaft and the rear axle. Describe the

appropriate remedies in each case.

20. Two shafts, whose axes are inclined at 20°, are connected by means of a Hooke's joint. The

driving shaft rotates uniformly at 5000 r.p.m. What are the maximum and the minimum

velocities of the driven shaft?

15. Two shafts are connected by means of a Hooke's joint. The driving shaft rotates at a uniform

speed of 1000 r.p.m., whereas a fluctuation of ± 100 r.p.m. is allowed in the speed of the

driven shaft. What is the maximum permissible angle between the shafts?

16. The angle between the axes of two horizontal shafts connected by a Hooke's joint is 20°.

The driving shaft speed is uniform and is 200 r.p.m. A flywheel of weight 1kN and radius of

gyration 200 mm is attached to the driven shaft. If a steady torque of 1000 Nm resists

rotation of the driven shaft determine (i) the torque required at the driving shaft when it has

turned through an angle of 45° from the initial position and (ii) the maximum angular

acceleration of the driven shaft.

17. How is the length of propeller shaft varied automatically? What is material used for

propeller shaft?

18. Define the whirling of shafts. What is critical whirling speed?

19. Which type of propeller shaft is used in case of Ashok Leyland vehicles?

20. What is the advantage of a two-piece propeller shaft?

21. What is the function of Hooke's joint?

22. Why is it desirable to have small operating angle between shafts in case of Hooke's joint?

23. What is the need for a constant velocity universal joint when the cheaper Hooke's joint is

available?

24. What is a plunging type joint? Name two basic types of constant velocity joints.

25. How is the drive from propeller shaft turned at right angles?

26. What is ‘hypoid'? What is the advantage of hypoid gear over the straight bevel type?

27. What is the effect of 'offset* in hypoid gears?

28. State the materials used for the pinion and the crown wheel.

29. Why do we use multi-start worms for final drive?

30. Which type of final drive is used most commonly?

31. Why do we have a differential in automobile, when we don't have one in a rickshaw?

32. How will be the torque divided between the wheels when the differential is operating on

turns so that the wheels are rotating at different speeds?

33. Does the non-driving axle also require differential? Why?




34. What rotates the differential pinion shaft?

35. What rotates the differential cage? What is a non-slip or limited-slip differential?

36. What are the various loads acting on the rear axles?

37. What is torque reaction'? What is a 'radius rod"? What is a 'pan hard rod'?

38. How many universal joints are used with a torque tube derive? How many on a Hotchkiss

drive? Why?

39. Which member takes the torque reaction in Hotchkiss drive? How?

40. What loads are carried by the axle shaft in case of semi- floating axle?

41. Which loads are withstood by the axle shaft in case of a three-quarter floating axle? How are

the other loads taken up?

42. What loads does the axle shaft carry in fully-floating axle?

43. What carries the weight of the vehicle in the "full-floating" type of rear axle?

44. Which type of rear axle is best suited for cheap, light vehicles?

45. Which type of rear axle is best suited for heavy vehicles? What is a banjo type axle casing?

46. What is a Salisbury type axle casing?

47. In case of a hammering noise from the rear axle, what may be the possible reason?

UNIT WISE PLAN

UNIT – IV



Principle, Braking requirements, Brake efficiency and stopping distances, fading of brakes.

Wheel skidding

Weight transfer.-Derivation, Numerical

Types of brakes-Purpose,. Location, Construction, Method of actuation, Extra braking effort.

Drum brakes-Construction and types, Factors influencing braking effect, Theoretical analysis

Disc brakes, Construction, Constructional features, Comparison of disc and drum types

Mechanical brakes-Brake shoe operation, Linkage, Brake compensation, Girling mechanical

brake, Construction and working. Brake Compensation.

Hydraulic brakes-Layout and components, Two shoe leading brake, Brake shoe adjusters,

Automatic brake adjusters, , Bleeding of hydraulic brakes, Advantages of hydraulic system, I

Brake fluid

Electric brakes, Servo brake systems-Servo mechanism, Mechanical servo mechanism, Disc

brake with servo action, Vacuum servo brakes, Bendix Hydromax brakes Engine exhaust

brakes

Airbrakes-Layout, Unloader valve, Reservoir, Brake valve, Hand control valve, Brake

chamber, Slack adjuster, Wagner air brake, Advantages of air brake

Hand brake, Hill holding device

Brake drums, Brake shoes, Brake linings-Types, Attachment of brake linings, Disc brake

pads

Antilock Brake Systems (ABS). .

Inspection of brake system, Adjustment of brakes, Replacing brake lining, Servicing disc

brakes

Brake maintenance, Braking system trouble shooting, Numercals

LESSON SCHEDULE

Class -Portions covered /Hour (an estimate) I. Principle, Braking requirements, Brake efficiency and stopping distances, Fading of

brakes. Wheel skidding




II. Weight transfer.-Derivation, Numerical

III. Types of brakes-Purpose,. Location, Construction, Method of actuation, Extra braking

effort. Drum brakes-Construction and types, Factors influencing braking effect,

Theoretical analysis

IV. Disc brakes, Construction, Constructional features, Comparison of disc and drum types.

Mechanical brakes-Brake shoe operation, Linkage, Brake compensation, Girling

mechanical brake, Construction and working. Brake Compensation.

V. Hydraulic brakes-Layout and components, Two shoe leading brake, Brake shoe

adjusters, Automatic brake adjusters, , Bleeding of hydraulic brakes, Advantages of

hydraulic system, I Brake fluid

VI. Electric brakes, Servo brake systems-Servo mechanism, Mechanical servo mechanism,

Disc brake with servo action. Vacuum servo brakes. Bendix Hydromax brakes. Engine

exhaust brakes

VII. Airbrakes-Layout, Unloader valve, Reservoir, Brake valve, Hand control valve, Brake

chamber, Slack adjuster, Wagner air brake, Advatages of air brake

VIII. Hand brake, Hill holding device, Brake drums, Brake shoes, Brake linings-Types,

Attachment of brake linings, Disc brake pads

IX. Antilock Brake Systems (ABS).

X. Inspection of brake system, Adjustment of brakes, Replacing brake lining, Servicing disc

brakes. Brake maintenance, Braking system trouble shooting

XI. Numerical.

REVIEW QUESTIONS

1. Explain clearly the requirements of automobile brakes.

2. Explain transfer of weight during application. Discuss how it affects wheel skidding.

3. Explain how the wheel skidding is caused and describe the principles of various techniques

employed to prevent skidding. Discuss various factors influencing braking effect.

4. Discuss the classification of brakes from different considerations.

5. Briefly describe construction and working of disc brakes. Compare them with the

conventional drum type brakes.

6. Discuss the design considerations regarding the discs and the friction pads of disc brakes.

7. Describe any type of mechanical brake with the help of neat sketches.

8. Explain in detail how the compensation is achieved in case of mechanical brakes.

9. Draw a simple diagram to show the layout of a hydraulically operated four wheel brake

system and explain its working in detail.

10. With the aid of a diagram explain the function of the main parts of the master cylinder.

11. Draw a neat sketch showing the linkage to operate brake master cylinder and describe the

same.

12. Explain the function of a brake shoe adjuster. Describe in detail the construction and

working of (i) wheel cylinder ratchet type (ii) double toothed cam type shoe adjuster.

13. Describe with the help of neat diagrams how automatic adjustment in case of both drum

and disc types of brakes is done.

14. Make a simple sketch showing hydraulically-operated two-shoe-leading brake assembly

and describe its operation. Compare the same with the trailing shoe type.

15. Write a note on 'tandem master cylinder'.

16. What are the advantages of using split brake systems? Discuss any split systems used for

light and medium duty vehicles.

17. Discuss thoroughly the procedure for bleeding of hydraulic brakes.

18. Discuss briefly Lucas - Girling wheel slide protection system.




19. What are the essential characteristics required of a good braking fluid? Give complete

details.

20. Discuss in detail the braking system employed in case of Maruti 800 cars. Explain in

particular the function and working of a proportioning valve.

21. A car whose wheel base is equal to five times the height of its centre of gravity above the

ground is moving on a horizontal road when brakes are applied. If the coefficient of

limiting friction between the car tyres and the road is 0.5, determine the percentage of

weight transferred from the rear to the front axle, or. braking.

22. The wheelbase of a vehicle travelling on a wet road sloping upwards at angle 6 = sin" 0.1,

is 5 m. Its centre of gravity is 2 m ahead of the rear axle and 750 mm above the road. The

coefficient of adhesion between the vehicle tyres and the road is 0.3. The vehicle employs

brakes on all the four wheels. Determine :

23. Ratio of braking forces on front and rear wheels if skidding is to be avoided.

24. Stopping distance for the vehicle travelling at a speed of 45 km/hour when the engine is

stopped and the brakes are applied.

25. The wheelbase of a vehicle of weight 20 kN is 5.0 m and its centre of gravity is 1.0 m

above the ground. When the vehicle is standing the front axle shared 7 KN, while the rest

of the weight is carried by the rear axle. Determine the load on each axle when brakes are

applied just to the point of skidding; the retardation achieved is 5.0 m/sec, IRf = 9.04 kN

26. A car using drum brakes has wheel cylinder pistons of 50 mm diameter at the front and 25

mm diameter at the back. The master cylinder piston is of 40 mm diameter. The leverage

of brake pedal linkage is 4. If the driver applies a force of 100 N at the pedal, calculate

braking force on each axle. Determine also the distance through which the pedal should be

pressed so as to move the wheel cylinder pistons through 1 mm.

27. What is the principle of automotive brakes?

28. What do the brakes do to the energy as they stop a moving car? What is a service brake?

29. What are 'primary' and 'secondary' brakes? What is the basis of defining brake efficiency?

30. What are the approximate brake efficiency values in the case of cars and heavy vehicles?

31. What should be the minimum stopping distance for a car running at 80 km ph?

32. Why do we not use brakes with more than 80% efficiency in automobiles?

33. What is the usual percentage of total braking effort provided at the front wheels and why?

34. What is 'fading' of brakes? What is 'transfer of weight' in brakes? What is its effect?

35. On what factors does the force of adhesion between the road wheels and the road depend?

36. How does skidding take place? What is locking of wheel during braking?

37. Enumerate different considerations for classifying the automotive brakes.

38. Out of the transmission and the wheel brakes, which are better and why?

39. What are different methods of brake actuation?

40. What is the difference between 'power-assisted' and 'power-operated' brakes?

41. Name important components of a drum brake. What is a leading shoe?

42. What is a two-shoe-leading brake? What are its advantages and disadvantages?

43. Which type of the brakes out of the following, are used in Hindustan Ambassador "cars :

(i) Two shoe leading (ii) Two shoe trailing (iii) One shoe leading and the other trailing.

44. What is the effect of floating the brake expander, instead of fixing it on the back plate?

45. How does floating of the brake shoe anchor influence the braking effect?

46. What is the advantage of a two-shoe trailing brake?

47. Name the factors that influence braking performance.

48. Name important components of a disc brake.

49. What is the advantage of a swinging caliper type disc brake?

50. Name two latest materials for brake discs.




51. How much is approximately the saving in weight by using disc brake instead of drum

brake?

52. Out of the disc and the drum brakes, which have better anti-fade characteristics?

53. Why is there greater consistency of braking effect in case of disc brakes compared with the

drum brakes?

54. What is 'brake compensation'? Name the simplest type of brake compensator.

55. Approximately how much residual pressure is maintained in hydraulic brakes and why?

56. What are the functions of (i) intake port (ii) by-pass port in a master cylinder?

57. Why do we not fill the master cylinder completely with the brake fluid?

58. What was the need to develop such a complicated master cylinder? Why could a simple

barrel with piston not do?

59. Why drum type hydraulic brakes are so designed that there should be residual pressure in

the brake lines even when the brakes are in the released position ?

60. Do we maintain the residual pressure in case of disc brakes also? Why?

61. When do we have to pump the brake pedal quickly?

62. What is the purpose of a brake shoe adjuster? Name any two brake shoe adjusters.

63. Do we have brake shoe adjuster in case of disc brakes also? Why?

64. What is a split hydraulic brake system? What is the function of a pressure differential

valve?

65. Why do you use proportioning valve in brakes?

66. What is the function of a metering valve in the braking system? What is a combination

valve?

67. What are the advantages of hydraulic brakes over mechanical brakes?

68. Why can't water be used as brake fluid? State the main requirements of brake fluid.

69. What would be the result if a petroleum oil is used as brake fluid?

70. What should be the approximate minimum boiling point of a good braking fluid?

71. What are the main constituents of brake fluid?

72. When does the necessity of bleeding the brakes arise ?

73. Write a brief note on electric brakes. How are these compared to the mechanical and

hydraulic brakes?

74. What do you understand from the term 'Servo action' in brakes? How is it achieved?

Explain clearly how the servo action is provided in case of disc brakes?

75. How is the vacuum from the engine inlet manifold utilized to actuate the vehicle brakes?

Explain fully with diagrams.

76. Draw the layout of Mastervac power-assisted brakes. Explain the construction and

working of main components of this system.

77. Show by means of a simplified diagram, the layout of 'Bendix Hydromax' brakes. Use

clear sketches to explain the working of a hydromax booster.

78. Make a schematic diagram to show the engine exhaust brake and discuss its working.

79. Draw a schematic diagram showing the layout of complete air pressure system of brakes

and explain the working of its main units in detail.

80. Explain in detail the construction and operation of a brake chamber, an unloader valve and

a brake valve.

81. Discuss clearly how the air brakes are adjusted with the help of a slack adjuster.

82. Discuss briefly: (a) Hand brake (parking brake) (b) Hill holding device

83. Make simple sketches showing various arrangements to provide for alternative foot brake

or hand brake operation with the same brake shoes and explain those arrangements in

detail.

84. Draw the layout of Tata fail safe parking brake and discuss the same in detaiL

85. Write detailed notes on the construction of brake drums and brake shoes.




86. Explain in detail the necessity and principle of working of an antilock brake system.

Describe its main components and discuss various types of such systems in use.

87. Explain in detail the procedure for the inspection of automotive brakes. Mention the

precautions to be observed.

88. Explain clearly the minor and major brake adjustments and how the same are carried out.

89. Discuss in detail how you will proceed to replace the worn out brake lining.

90. Write a brief note on brake maintenance.

91. Discuss : (a) Emergency Brake Assist (b) Dynamic Braking system (c) Brake By Wire

92. Discuss how various defects are caused in the braking system of automobiles. Suggest also

suitable remedies.

93. What is a servo brake? What is suspended vacuum servo system?

94. What is the function of booster in the Hydromax brakes?

95. Name major components of a compressed air brake system.

96. What is function of unloader valve? Where is it located?

97. What is the function of an air brake valve?

98. What is the extra merit of a dual air brake valve compared to a single diaphragm type?

99. What is the function of air brake chamber? What is the spring brake chamber?

100. What is a slack adjuster? What is its function?

101. On which wheels in a car are the parking brakes generally provided?

102. What are the requirements of a good brake drum? Why are the brake drums usually

finned?

103. Which material is generally used for brake drums? Why?

104. State the advantages of integral wheel-brake drum.

105. Upto what temperature the fade does not occur in case of moulded brake lining?

106. What are the advantages of using synthetic resin adhesives for attaching brake linings as

compared to the conventional rivetting?

107. In which type of vehicles it is generally preferred to use adhesives for brake lining?

108. What is an ABS? What is 'pressure modulation' with reference to ABS?

109. State the effect of (a) front wheels locking, (b) rear wheels locking.

110. List main parts of an ABS.

111. What is the function of lateral acceleration sensor?

112. Differentiate between functions of one-channel and two-channel systems.

113. Differentiate between functions of three-channel and four-channel systems.

114. Name the various common forms of brake drum wear.

115. How do you adjust the brake shoes? What is major, minor brake adjustment?

116. Approximately what minimum amount of free pedal pay is allowed in case of car brakes?

117. What is the function of Emergency Brake Assist’? What is a dynamic braking system?

118. What is 'brake by wire’? State its two advantages.

119. What happens when the oil leaks into the brake drum and wets the shoe linings?

120. How will it affect the braking performance if the bypass port in the master cylinder is

blocked?

121. Out of petrol and alcohol, which should be used for cleaning the brake master cylinder and

why?

122. Why are the brakes overheated sometimes?

123. What happens if the rivets attaching the brake lining to the shoe are not chamfered?

124. If only the brake on one of the four brake drums is incorrectly adjusted, how does it affect

braking performance?

125. What is the effect of the dust accumulating in the brake drum?

126. Name any three firms manufacturing automotive brakes.




UNIT WISE PLAN

UNIT – V TOPIC LEARNING OBJECTIVES (TLO): (L1, L2, L3)


suspension - Objects of suspension, Basic requirements, Function of suspension springs

Types of suspension springs-Leaf springs- Construction, Types, Helper springs, Material,

Tapered leaf springs, Fiber composite leaf springs, Coil springs, Torsion bars, Rubber springs

Shock absorbers (Dampers)-Introduction, Telescopic type shock absorber, Lever arm type

shock absorber, Shock absorber ratio, electronically controlled shock absorbers.

Independent suspension, Introduction, Front wheel (dead axle) independent suspension, Rear

wheel (live axle) independent suspension

Stabilizer or anti-roll device, Interconnected suspension systems

Air suspension, Hydrolastic suspension, Hydragas interconnected suspension system

Suspension system trouble shooting, Numerical problems

Wheels and tyres- Types of wheels.-Disc wheel, Wire wheel, Light alloy cast or forged wheel

Wheel dimensions

Tyre - Desirable tyre properties.

Types of tyres- Conventional tubed tyre, Tubeless tyre.

Carcass types.-Comparison of radial-and bias-ply tyres .

Tyre materials, Considerations in tread design

Tyre section, Tyre designations.

Tyre wear indicators, Factors affecting tyre life, Precautions regarding the tyres

Flat running tyres.

Wheel and tyre trouble shooting.

Self Study - Study of systems used in recent vehicles with advanced technologies

LESSON SCHEDULE

Class -Portions covered /Hour (an estimate) I. suspension - Objects of suspension, Basic requirements, Function of suspension springs,

Types of suspension springs-Leaf springs- Construction, Types, Helper springs, Material,

Tapered leaf springs, Fiber composite leaf springs, Coil springs, Torsion bars, Rubber

springs

II. Shock absorbers (Dampers)-Introduction, Telescopic type shock absorber, Lever arm

type shock absorber, Shock absorber ratio, electronically controlled shock absorbers.

III. Independent suspension, Introduction, Front wheel (dead axle) independent suspension,

Rear wheel (live axle) independent suspension

IV. Stabilizer or anti-roll device, Interconnected suspension systems

V. Air suspension, Hydrolastic suspension, Hydragas interconnected suspension system

VI. Suspension system trouble shootingNumerical problems

VII. Wheels and tyres- Types of wheels.-Disc wheel, Wire wheel, Light alloy cast or forged

wheel, Wheel dimensions

VIII. Tyre - Desirable tyre properties, Types of tyres- Conventional tubed tyre, Tubeless tyre.

Carcass types.-Comparison of radial-and bias-ply tyres, Tyre materials, Considerations in

tread design

IX. Tyre section, Tyre designations, Tyre wear indicators, Factors affecting tyre life,

Precautions regarding the tyres, Flat running tyres, Wheel and tyre trouble shooting.

X. Self Study - Study of systems used in recent vehicles with advanced technologie




REVIEW QUESTIONS

1. Write notes on (a) Leaf Springs (b) Helper Springs (c) Tapered leaf springs (d) Torsion bar

2. Explain in detail the function and construction of a leaf spring and show how it is mounted

on rear and front. Illustrate your answer with simple sketches.

3. What are the different types of rubber springs? Briefly explain each.

4. Differentiate clearly between the functions of a spring and a shock absorber. Explain the

construction and working of a telescopic type of shock absorber with the help of a neat

diagram.

5. What is the purpose of independent suspension? Explain various methods to achieve the

same in front and rear axles of cars. Describe its advantages and disadvantages also, if any,

compared to the conventional rigid axle suspension.

6. What is the function of an anti-roll device in vehicles? Explain clearly how it performs the

same in actual practice.

7. Explain briefly the action of air springs. Draw the schematic diagram showing the layout of

an air suspension system and describe the same.

8. What is an interconnected suspension system? Discuss the main constructional features of

any such system and also its working.

9. Discuss in detail: (a) Fiber composite leaf springs. (b) Electronically controlled shock

absorbers,

(c) Hydraulic Suspension. (d) Daimler-Benz Suspension

(e) Hydragas interconnected suspension system. (f) Delphi Magneride

5. Discuss the causes of the common troubles experienced in the suspension system of an

automobile and suggest appropriate remedies in each case.

10. What are the objectives of suspension? What do you understand by pitching and rolling?

11. What is brake dip? What is unsprung weight? Why is the unsprung weight kept as low as

possible?

12. What is the function of a spring? How does a spring absorb vertical loading?

13. How is the side thrust countered in a vehicle? What is the function of a shackle with a leaf

spring?

14. What is the material used for leaf springs? What is the effect of moisture on the leaf

springs?

15. If the spring leaves are not lubricated, what may be the result?

16. They say, laminated leaf springs are self-damping. How?

17. What is the purpose served by phosphate paint in leaf springs?

18. What forces are supported by a leaf spring? What are helper springs?

19. State the advantages and disadvantages of a torsion bar, a coil spring and a tapered leaf

spring

20. What is a torsion bar? What material is used for making a torsion bar?

21. What are the advantages of rubber suspension? State the advantages of a plastic suspension.

22. What is the function of a shock absorber? How is aeration caused in a shock absorber?

23. What is the effect of aeration in the shock absorber?

24. What is the function of a gas-charged shock absorber?

25. What is an inflatable shock absorber? What is shock absorber ratio?

26. How is the variation in shock absorber damping achieved?

27. What are the advantages of independent suspension over the rigid axle suspension?

28. State the disadvantages of independent suspension. What is wishbone type suspension?

29. Which type of independent suspension is mostly used for front drive vehicles?

30. What are the advantages of MacPherson strut suspension?

31. What is a de Dion axle? State the advantages of an air suspension.

32. What is the function of an anti-roll device? What is an interconnected suspension system?




33. A typical coil suspension spring has 10 effective coils of a mean diameter 125mm and made

out of wires of diameter 15mm. The spring is designed to carry a maximum static load of

3531.6N. Calculate the shear stress and the deflection under the above loading. If a

maximum shear stress of 637650kPa is allowable in the material, then what is the possible

clearance in the spring? Take the value of G = 73575 x 103kPa.

34. Describe the requirements of an automobile wheel. Explain with the help of a suitable

sketch the construction of the disc type wheel. Compare the same with the wire type wheel.

35. Discuss with the help of simple sketches, the construction of various types of disc wheels.

36. What is a light alloy? Discuss the merits and demerits of light alloy automobile wheels.

37. State various functions performed by automobile tyre. Discuss the properties expected in the

same.

38. Draw cross-section of an automobile tyre and show on it various constructional features.

39. Describe in detail constructional features of the tubed and the tubeless tyres for automotive

use. Discuss also their relative merits and demerits.

40. Discuss different tyre-carcass types and the materials used for them. Compare the radial-and

bias-ply type carcass tyres.

41. Explain various considerations for the design of tyre treads.

42. Discuss in detail various factors affecting tyre life. How is a tyre manufactured? Explain

briefly.

43. What is a 'Denovo'? Describe clearly its various components and state limitations, if any.

44. Write a detailed account of various types of flat-running tyres.

45. Discuss various types of troubles in connection with automobile wheels and tyres.

46. State the functions of a car wheel. Name three types of automobile wheels.

47. What are the advantages of a disc wheel? What is a reversible wheel? What is a divided

wheel?

48. Define 'offset' with reference to automobile wheels. What are inset, zeroset and outset

wheels?

49. Are well type wheels also used for heavier vehicles? What is the purpose of 'well' in the

wheel rim?

50. Why is there a small taper on the sides of a wheel rim?

51. How is the vehicle weight supported in case of a wire wheel?

52. What are the advantages of a wire wheel? Why can't you use wire wheel to mount a tubeless

tyre?

53. Name different materials for automobiles wheels. What are the functions of an automobile

tyre?

54. Name the light alloys commonly used for automobile wheels.

55. State the advantages of (i) magnesium alloy (ii) aluminium alloy wheels.

56. What is a composite wheel? How do you specify a car wheel?

57. State various desirable properties of an automobile tyre. What is 'ply rating' of a tyre?

58. Should the tyre sidewalls be rigid or flexible? Why?

59. Should the tyre tread be hard or soft? How is a tyre bead formed?

60. What is the purpose of tyre tread sipes ? What is the function of a tyre bead?

61. What is static unbalance? What is dynamic unbalance? How is the wheel wobble caused?

62. What is a tyre carcass? Name different types of tyres based upon the carcass design.

63. Why are the cords of tyre plies not woven like warp and weft of ordinary cloth?

64. What is the function of a breaker belt? State the requirements of material for breaker belts.

65. How does a radial-ply tyre contributes to saving of fuel?

66. Why does a radial ply-tyre give comfortable ride at high speeds and a cross-ply tyre at low

speeds?

67. Why are the steering characteristics of radial ply tyres better than those of cross ply tyres?




68. What is the reason for higher braking efficiency on wet roads in case of radial ply tyres?

69. State the commonly used materials for (i) ply-cords (ii) stabilizer belts (iii) beads (iv) tread.

70. State the factors on which road-grip of a tyre depends.

71. What is 'aspect ratio' of a tyre? What is the advantage of low aspect ratio in automobile

tyres?

72. How do you designate a tyre? State various factors affecting tyre life.

73. Should the tyre inflation pressure be checked while it is hot or cold?

74. How does over inflation increase tendency for concussion break?

75. How does a tyre wear in case of (i) overinflation (ii) underinflation?

76. What is the effect of bleeding the tyre? How does heat affect the tyre life.

77. List various irregularities in the vehicle maintenance which lead to deterioration of tyre life.

78. What is the basic advantage of a Dunlop 'Danovo' tyre?

79. Draw the tyre rotation sequence for a (i) car (ii) truck.

80. State reasons for the following tyre defects:(a) Concussion break (b) Rim bruise (c)

Sidewall scuffing (d) Tread cracking (e) Ply separation (/) Uneven wear.



Outcomes (PSOs)

Sl.

No. Course Outcome

Programme Outcomes

Programme

Specific

outcomes

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

1

Identify different chassis layouts and frames and

Analyze for Performance of Automobiles and

suitability of frames.

3 3 - - - 1 1 - - - - 2 3 2 -

2

Analyse Front Axles and Steering Systems and

its auxiliaries and Determine major dimensions

of the same

3 3 - - - 1 1 - - - - 2 3 2 -

3

Analyse Propeller Shaft, Differential and Rear

Axles and its auxiliaries and Determine major

dimensions of the same

3 3 - - - 1 1 - - - - 2 3 2 -

4 Analyse Braking system and Determine major

dimensions of the same. 3 3 - - - 1 1 - - - - 2 3 2 -

5

Analyse Suspension system and Wheels &

Tyres. Also Determine major dimensions of the

Suspension system.

3 3 - - - 1 1 - - - - 2 3 2 -




AUTOMOTIVE CHASSIS AND SUSPENSION (P15AU61)

Time: 3 Hrs MODEL QUESTION PAPER Max. Marks100

Note: Answer the following Five Full questions selecting at least one question from each unit.

Missing data, if any shall be assumed suitably. Use of design data hand book is permitted Draw

neat Pencil sketches wherever necessary.

Questions Marks CO’s Levels

Unit-1

1 c) Explain, with simple diagrams, different chassis layouts with

respect to power plant location duly mentioning their merits and

demerits.

12 1 L2

1 d) Derive expressions for stability of automobile on slope, when the

vehicle is about to overturn and when the vehicle is about to slide

down the slope.

8 1 L2,L3

2 c) Explain, with neat sketches, X-member type and Box-section

type car frames. What is their significance? 8 1 L2

2 d) Explain, with neat sketches, how bending and torsion tests are

conducted on frames. What is the inference of these tests?12

marks

12 1 L2

Unit-2

3 c) With necessary diagrams, explain combined angle, Scrub

radius (-ve, +ve and zero). What are their effects?

7 2 L2

3 d) With neat sketch, explain Ackermann steering gear mechanism.

Derive expression for the same. 8 2 L2,L3

3 e) The front wheel of a car has pivot centres 1.1m apart. The length

of each steering arm is 150mm, while the track rod is 1m length.

Calculate the wheel base for perfect rolling of the car wheels

when the inner wheel stub axle is at 550 to the rear centre line.

5 2 L2,L3

4 a) Explain, with simple sketches, the construction and principle

of working of the advanced technologies adopted for the

automobile steering systems

8 2 L2

4 b) Explain with sketches, the working principle of any one type of

power steering. 12 2 L2

Unit-3

5 b) With neat sketches, of analysis of hooke’s joint, derive

expressions for shaft velocities.

8 3 L2,L3

5 c) Explain, with nest sketch, the principle of working of a

differential. 6 3 L2

5 d) Two shafts A and B, whose axes are intersecting but inclined

to each other at 150 are connected by means of a hooke’s joint. A

flywheel of weight 180kN and radius of gyration 80mm is fitted to

shaft B. if the shaft A rotates at uniform speed of 2000rpm, what is

the maximum torque in B?

6 3 L2,L3

6 c) Explain with sketches, the working principle of Hotchkiss

drive and Torque tube drive. 12 3 L2

6 d) Explain, with simple sketches, the construction and principle

of working of the advanced technologies adopted for the

automobile Differential

8 3 L2

Unit-4 8 4 L2,L3




7 b) Explain transfer of weight during brake application. Further

derive expression for reaction at front and rear wheels in case of

brakes applies to front wheels, brakes applies to rear wheels and

brakes applies to all wheels.

7 c) Explain, with neat sketch, the construction and working of

vacuum servo brakes and Exhaust brakes. 12 4 L2

8 c) Sketch and Derive expressions for determining Braking Torque.

08 marks 8 4 L2,L3

8 d) The brake drums of an automobile are of 380 mm diameter. The

shoes are anchored together 150 mm away from the brake drum

centre. The free ends of the two shoes are pushed apart with a

force of 320 N which may be considered acting at a distance of

320 mm from the anchor. Assume that the normal pressure on the

brake shoes acts at right angles to the line joining the anchor with

the brake drum centre and the resultant frictional force acts at a

distance of 200 mm from the brake drum centre. Take coefficient

of friction between the shoes and the drum as 0.5. Calculate the

braking torque provided by each shoe.

6 4 L2,L3

8 e) Explain, with simple sketches, the construction and principle of

working of the advanced technologies adopted for the automobile

Brakes

6 4 L2

Unit-5

10 a) Describe tyre properties. Explain with neat sketch the

construction of conventional and tubeless tyres.

8 5 L2

9 c) Compare radial and bias ply tyres with respect to road contact,

rolling resistance, tyre print, cornering force, self righting torque,

and tyre distortion during cornering. Draw necessary diagrams.

12 5 L2

10 d) Explain basic considerations of suspension system. 4 5 L2

10 e) Explain, with neat sketches, telescopic type shock absorber. 8 5 L2

10 f) A typical coil suspension spring has 10 effective coils of a

mean diameter 125mm and made out of wires of diameter 15mm.

The spring is designed to carry a maximum static load of

3531.6N. Calculate the shear stress and the deflection under the

above loading. If a maximum shear stress of 637650kPa is

allowable in the material, then what is the possible clearance in

the spring? Take the value of G = 73575 x 103kPa.

8 5 L2,L3




Course Title: AUTOMOTIVE TRANSMISSION



Prerequisites: Subject requires student to know about the back ground knowledge of different types of

drives like belt drives, chain drives, gear drives and rope drives.

COURSE LEARNING OBJECTIVES (CLO): At the end of the course the student should be able to

a) Explain the need for transmission

b) Distinguish between positive and non positive drives

c) Explain the Constructional and working principles of different types of clutches

d) Design a clutch for any vehicle

e) Explain the constructional and working principle of different types of fluid flywheel, torque

converter and one way clutches

f) Explain the constructional and working principle of different types of gear box

g) Determine the gear ratio, speed of vehicle and number of teeth on driving and driven gears

h) Explain the constructional and principle of operation of different types epicyclic gear box i)

Calculating gear ratio for epicyclic gear box

j) Explain the necessity and advantages of automatic transmission

k) Explain the constructional and principle of operation of different types of automatic

transmissions and hydraulic control.

l) Distinguish between the terms phase and stage used in torque converter

Relevance of the course Automotive transmission is a course deals with the different ways through which the power is

transmitted from engine to driving wheels and design of above systems and it is hoped that

through this programme student will gain sufficient knowledge to make them employable in

automotive industries

COURSE CONTENT

UNIT – I

CLUTCH :Necessity of clutch in an automobile, different types of clutches, friction clutches

namely Single plate clutch, multi plate clutch, cone clutch, centrifugal clutch, electromagnetic

clutch, hydraulic clutches, Clutch - adjustment, Clutch troubles and their causes, requirements of a

clutch , Clutch materials, clutch lining ,Vacuum operated clutch, Numerical problems. 11 hrs

UNIT-II

Fluid Coupling , One way clutches& torque converters: Constructional details of various types,

percentage slip, one way clutches (Over running clutch) like sprag clutch, ball and roller one way

clutches, necessity and field of application, working fluid requirements, fluid coupling

characteristics,

Torque converters, comparison between fluid coupling and torque converters, single stage , two

stage and three stage torque converter, 3 and 4 phase torque converters , performance

characteristics, slip, principles of torque multiplication . 10 hrs

UNIT-III

Gear box : Various Resistances to Motion of the Automobile, Traction, tractive effort, The need for

transmission, Necessity of gear box, Calculation of gear ratios , Performance characteristics in

different gears , Desirable ratios of 3speed & 4 speed gear boxes, Constructional details of , Sliding-




mesh gear box , Constant-mesh gear box, synchromesh gear box, five speed and reverse single stage

synchromesh gear box with integral final drive, auxiliary transmissions, compound transmissions

,dual- clutch transmission, continuously variable transmission, numerical problems. 11 hrs

UNIT-IV

Epicyclic Transmission : Principle of operation, types of planetary transmission (dual and

compound planetary assemblies), Calculation of gear ratio in different speeds, Wilson planetary

transmission, Ford-T model gear box , Pre selective mechanism, Vacuum control, pneumatic

control, hydraulic control in the planetary gear system , Over drives. 10 hrs

UNIT-V

Automatic transmission : Automatic transmission - Principle, general description and Working of

representative types like Borge-warner, 4-speed and 6-speed automatic transmission longitudinally

mounted four speed automatic transmission, hydramatic transmission, the fundamentals of a

hydraulic control system, basic four speed hydraulic control system. 10 hrs

TEXT BOOKS:

1. N.K Giri, ‘Automotive Mechanics’, Khanna Publication, New Delhi, 2014

2. Heinz Heisler Advanced vehicle technology , 2002

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Crouse W.H. “Automotive transmissions and power trains”, McGraw Hill Co. 5th edn,

1976

2. Newton K and Steeds. W. “Motor Vehicle”, Butter Worth’s & Co., Publishers Ltd, 1997

3. Kirpal Singh, “Automobile Engineering –. Vol.1, Standard Pub. 2012

4. G.B.S.Narang “Automobile Engineering”, Khanna publication, New Delhi

5. Joseph I Heitner, “Automotive mechanics ”, Affiliated East West Press, NewDelhi,

2014

Course outcomes:

At the end of course the student will be able to

1. Design and select clutch for different automotive vehicles and discuss working of different

types of clutches

2. Discuss different types of fluid flywheel and torque converters

3. Determine gear ratios and explain the different types of gear boxes for different vehicles

requirements

4. Discuss and determine gear ratios of different epicyclic gear boxes and their working

5. Explain the different automatic transmission systems used in automotive vehicles and their





UNIT WISE PLAN

UNIT-1



Explain the requirements of clutch. (L2)

Derive an expressions for mean effective radius for cone clutch, single plate clutch

and multi plate clutch. (L5)

Explain the Constructional and working principles of different types of clutch. (L3)

Design a clutch for any vehicles. (L6)

LESSON SCHEDULE 1. Necessity of clutch in an automobile

2. Different types of clutches and friction clutches namely Single plate clutch

3. Multi plate clutch and cone clutch

4. Centrifugal clutch and electromagnetic clutch

5.Hydraulic clutches , Clutch - adjustment, Clutch troubles and their causes,

6.Requirements of a clutch and Clutch materials

7. Clutch lining and Vacuum operated clutch

8.Numerical problems ( 3 hours )

UNIT-II


1. Differentiate between fluid flywheel and torque converter. (L4)

2. Explain the constructional and working principle of different types of fluid flywheel, one

way clutches and torque converters. (L3)

3. Principle of torque multiplication in torque converter. (L2)

4. Distinguish between the terms phase and stage used in torque converter. (L4)

LESSON SCHEDULE

1. Constructional details of fluid flywheel, percentage slip

2. One way clutches (Over running clutch) like sprag clutch, ball and roller one way

clutches

3.Necessity and field of application, working fluid requirements, fluid coupling characteristics

4. Introduction to torque converters, comparisons between fluid coupling and torque

converters

5. Different methods used to improve the torque converter efficiency

6. Single stage torque converters

7. Two stage torque converters

8.Three stage torque converter,

9. 3 and 4 phase torque converters performance characteristics

10. Slip, principles of torque multiplication.

UNIT-III


Analyzing the graphs to know the necessity of gear box. (L4)

Distinguish between traction and tractive effort. (L4)

Explain the constructional and working principle of different types of gear

boxes used in automobile. (L3)




Determine the gear ratio, speed of vehicle and number of teeth on driving and

driven gears. (L5)

LESSON SCHEDULE 1.Various Resistances to Motion of the Automobile, Traction, tractive effort

2.The need for transmissions, Necessity of gear box

3.Calculation of gear ratios for vehicles, Performance characteristics in different gears

4.Desirable ratios of 3speed & 4speed gear boxes

5.Constructional details of , Sliding-mesh gear box, Constant-mesh gear box,

6.Synchromesh gear box ( single stage and double stage )

7.Splitter and range change gear boxes

8.Dual- clutch transmission, continuously variable transmission,

9.Numerical problems ( 2 hours )

UNIT-IV


Explain the principle and advantages of epicyclic transmission. (L2)

Determine the speed ratio of epicyclic gear trains. (L5)

Explain the constructional and working principle of different types of epicyclic gear

boxes like Wilson and ford-T model. (L3)

Explain the vacuum, pneumatic and hydraulic control system used in planetary gear

box. (L3)

Calculate the gear ratios in epicyclic gear box. (L3)

LESSON SCHEDULE 1.Principle of operation, types of planetary transmission (dual and compound planetary

assemblies)

2.Calculation of gear ratio in different speeds ( 2 hours )

3.Wilson planetary transmission

4.Ford-T model gear box

5.Pre selective mechanism

6.Vacuum control

7.Pneumatic control

8.Hydraulic control in the planetary gear system

9.Over drives

UNIT-V



Distinguish between manual and automatic transmission. (L4)

Explain the advantages of automatic transmission. (L2)

Explain the constructional and working principle of different types of automatic

transmissions.(L3)

Explain the fundamentals of a hydraulic control system. (L2)

LESSON SCHEDULE 1 Automatic transmission – Principle

2 General description and Working of representative types like Borge-warner

3 Transaxle three speed automatic transmissions

4 Four-speed and six speed automatic transmission

5 Hydramatic transmission

6 Longitudinally mounted four speed automatic transmission




7 The fundamentals of a hydraulic control systemBasic four speed hydraulic control system.

REVIEW QUESTIONS: 1. Discuss various factors affecting the torque transmission in a clutch

2. Explain the working of a single plate clutch with help of a simple diagram

3. Derive expressions for effective mean radius and torque transmitted in case of a

single plate clutch assuming different conditions

4. What are the centrifugal devices? Describe semi-centrifugal and centrifugal clutches

5. compare hydraulic , mechanical , electrical and vacuum methods of operating

clutches

6. Describe briefly an electromagnetic clutch. Discuss the merits and demerits

7. What are the essentials properties, required of a clutch facing material? Explain how

these are met with in common materials

8. Discuss in detail the constructional features of a clutch plate? Explain briefly the

function of each major component of the clutch plate.

9. Explain in detail various causes of clutch troubles. How can these be remedied?

10. Explain by means of a neat sketch the construction of a fluid flywheel and describe

clearly the principle of torque transmission in the same

11. Determine the size of the clutch plate suitable for a car employing a single plate type

of friction clutch and developing 37.5 KW at 4200 rpm . The inside diameter of the

clutch plate is 0.6 times its outside diameter and is to be ensured that even after a

loss of 30 % of the engine torque due to wear of the clutch facing., the clutch does

not slip. The intensity of pressure on the facing is mot to exceed 70 KPA. Assume

= 0.3

12. Explain briefly the necessity of a transmission in a vehicle.

13. Sketch and explain the construction and working of constant mesh gear box

14. Discuss the purpose of double declutching and its procedure in constant mesh gear

box

15. Sketch and explain the working of a synchro mesh gearbox . What are its merits and

demerits compared to sliding and constant mesh gear box ?

16. Sketch and explain the interlocking mechanism to ensure only one gear can engaged

at a time

17. Explain with neat sketch the working of transfer box

18. With schematic diagram explain the eight speed constant mesh gear box with two

speed rear mounted range change

19. Explain the common troubles encountered in gear boxes and suggest suitable

remedies

20. Differentiate between auxiliary and compound transmissions

21. Sketch and explain the transverse continuously variable transmission


23. Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of fluid flywheel

24. Explain the principle of torque transmission in fluid flywheel

25. Sketch and explain the sprag and roller type of one way clutch

26. Differentiate between the fluid flywheel and torque converters

27. Sketch and explain the construction and working of single stage torque converter

28. Discuss the performance characteristics of a torque converter and also explain the

any one of the arrangement for improving the overall transmission efficiency

29. Differentiate between the terms stage and phase used in torque converter

30. Sketch and explain the two stage torque converter




31. Sketch and explain the three stage torque converter

32. Sketch and explain the three phase single stage torque converter

33. Discuss briefly the principle of torque multiplication in torque converter

34. Sketch a simple epicyclic gear set and explain how six different speeds are obtained

35. Sketch and explain the two speed epicyclic gear box

36. Sketch and explain the construction and working of wilson gear box

37. Sketch and explain the construction and working of ford T-model gear box

38. Discuss the vacuum, pneumatic and hydraulic control mechanism in planetary gear

system

39. Explain the working of overdrive unit with sketch


41. Differentiate between the manual and automatic transmission

42. With schematic diagram explain the working of borge-warner automatic

transmissions

43. With schematic diagram explain the longitudinally mounted four speed automatic

transmissions

44. Explain the principle of a hydraulically controlled gearshift mechanism

45. With schematic diagram explain the working of four speed hydraulic control system

46. With sketch explain the working of hydramatic transmission



Outcomes (PSOs)

Sl.

No. Course Outcome

Programme Outcomes

Programme

Specific

outcomes

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

1

Design and select clutch for different

automotive vehicles and discuss

working of different types of clutches

3 3 - - - 1 - - - - 1 3 3 1

2 Discuss different types of fluid flywheel

and torque converters 3 2 - - - 1 - - - - 1 3 2 1

3

Determine gear ratios and explain the

different types of gear boxes for

different vehicles requirements

3 2 2 - - 1 - - - - - 1 3 2 1

4

Discuss and determine gear ratios of

different epicyclic gear boxes and their

working

3 2 2 - - 1 - - - - - 1 3 2 1

5

Explain the different automatic

transmission systems used in automotive

vehicles and their advantages and

limitation

3 2 1 - - 1 - - - - - 1 3 2 1




Prerequisites: Students should have the basic knowledge of Strength of materials, codes & Standards,

selection of materials & factor of safety, workshop processes, Theory of Machines, Material

Science and Fundamentals of Mechanical Engineering Design.

COURSE LEARNING OBJECTIVES (CLOs)

At the end of the course the student should be able to

1. Describe the basic types of curved beams and springs

2. Analyze the stresses in the critical section of a curved beam.

3. Emphasize on the conditions for safe operating speeds of an engine using springs for its

operations of valves.

4. Illustrate the design procedure to arrive at the proper specifications of

springs/gears/clutches

5. Select suitable size, module & type of gears for a required velocity ratio.

6. Calculate the dimensions and suggest suitable materials for any application.

7. Define the terminology of gears and springs.

8. Demonstrate the suitability of a type and class of lubricant for a specific applicat


4. Yield expertise in understanding the difference between curved and straight beams

5. Design orientation towards the selection of proper type of gear drive based on the speed

and space constraints.

6. Design spring for pitch, free length, spring rate, wire size, etc

7. Oriented towards making the students to identify the machine elements in their vehicles,

machines, etc. and to innovate or improvise the design.

COURSE CONTENT

UNIT-I

Curved beams: Difference between curved beam and straight beam, stresses in curved beams,

assumptions for stress calculations in curved beams, derivation for stresses in curved beams,

Stresses in curved beams of standard cross sections used in crane hook, punching

presses & clamps, closed rings and chain links.

Springs: Introduction, types of springs, terminology, stresses and deflection in helical coil

springs of circular and non-circular cross sections, springs under fluctuating loads, concentric

springs. Leaf Springs, stresses in leaf springs, equalized stresses, length of spring leaves.

12 hrs Case Study: a) Design of a Spring for a automotive engines,

b) Design of Leaf springs of an Automobile

UNIT-II

Spur & helical gears: Introduction, spur gears, standard proportions of gear systems, stresses in

gear tooth, Lewis equation and form factor, design for strength, dynamic load and wear load.

Helical Gears: definitions, formative number of teeth, design based on strength, dynamic and

wear loads. 10 hrs

Case Study: a) Design of spur gears for a Compressor Drive Train

b) Design of helical gears for a Automobile Gear Box

Course Title: DESIGN OF MACHINE ELEMENTS -II






UNIT-III

Bevel and worm gears: Bevel Gears: terminology, formative number of teeth, design based on strength, dynamic and

wear loads.

Worm Gears: terminology, design based on strength, dynamic, wear loads and efficiency of

worm gear drives.

Case Study:-Design of Bevel Gears of an Automobile differential 10hrs

UNIT-IV

Clutches & Brakes:

Design of clutches: single plate, multi plate and cone clutches.

Design of brakes: Block and Band brakes: self locking of brakes: Heat generation &

heat dissipation in brakes. 10hrs

UNIT-V

BEARINGS: Sliding Contact Bearings: Introduction, principle of hydro dynamic lubrication, assumptions in

hydrodynamic lubrication, bearing characteristic number and modulus, Sommerfeld number,

coefficient of friction, power loss, heat Generated and heat dissipated, bearing materials,

lubricants and properties, design of journal bearing and thrust bearing.

Ball and Roller contact Bearings: Introduction, Advantages and disadvantages, types of ball

and rolling contact bearings, designation, static & dynamic capacity, Equivalent load,

selection of suitable bearings based on rated life.

Case Study: Design of Hydrodynamic Bearings for a Cam Test Fixture 10hrs

TEXT BOOKS

1. V.B. Bhandari, Design of Machine Elements:, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company

Ltd., New Delhi, 2016

2. T Krishna Rao, Design of Machine Elements –II, I K International Publishing house

Pvt.Ltd., New Delhi, 2013

REFERENCES 1. Hall, Holowenko, “Machine Design” Laughlin (Schaum’s Outlines series) Adapted

by S.K. Somani, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi, Special

Indian Edition, 2008.

2. Robert.L.Norton, “Machine Design”, An integrated Approach, Pearson Education

Asia, 2001

3. Joseph E Shigley and Charles R. Mischke., “Mechanical Engineering Design”,

McGraw Hill International edition, 2003.

DESIGN DATA HAND BOOK:

1. K.Mahadevan and K.Balaveera Reddy “Design Data Hand Book”by, CBS

Publication, 2013

Note: All the Case studies are only for CIE Assessment purpose only


At the end of the course student will be able to: 1. Analyze the stresses in the critical section of a curved beam and design springs for

different applications

2. Design Spur and helical and gears

3. Design Bevel and worm gears

4. Design clutches and brakes, with an understanding of safety issues related to brakes




5. Select lubricants and design sliding contact bearings, select rolling contact bearings for

different applications

UNIT WISE PLAN

UNIT-I:


At the end of Unit -1 student should be able to:

Distinguish between straight beams & curved beams[L1]

Calculate the stresses in the critical sections of a curved beam.[L3]

Identify the right type of section for a specific application.[L2]

Explain the terminology and notations used in design of springs.[L2]

Suggest suitable material & the type of spring for a specific application.[L3]

Use the design equations and obtain the parameters of a spring such as pitch, wire

diameter, coil diameter, stiffness, etc.[L3]

Check for critical frequency of spring and avoid surge in springs.[L3]

Determine the cross section of a leaf spring & the equalized stress in the leaves by

nipping of pre stressing.[L3]

LESSON SCHEDULE

1. Introduction Curved beams: Difference between curved beam and straight beam, stresses

in curved beams, assumptions for stress calculations in curved beams, derivation for

stresses in curved beams,

2. Numerical problems on Stresses in curved beams of standard cross sections used in

crane hook,

3. Numerical problems on Stresses in curved beams of punching presses

4. Numerical problems on Stresses in curved beams of clamps,

5. Numerical problems on Stresses in closed rings and chain links.

6. Introduction to springs, types of springs, terminology, stresses and deflection in helical

coil springs of circular section



9. stresses and deflection in non-circular cross sections and fluctuating loads


11. Leaf Springs, stresses in leaf springs, equalized stresses, length of spring leaves.


UNIT-II



Classify gears according to their geometry, relative position of shaft axes, profile of

teeth, Velocity, etc.[L2]

Define the terminology of gears[L1]

Identify the weaker of the gear pair and design the drive selecting proper materials &

tooth system.[L3]

Check the design for dynamic & wear considerations[L4]

Recommend suitable hardness for the satisfactory working of the gears.[L3]

Describe the helical gear parameters and their importance.[L2]

Obtain the virtual number of teeth based on helix angle.[L2]

Design single & double helical (Herringbone) gears for a given speed reduction.[L4}

Calculate the dynamic & wear load accounting for tooth errors & fatigue load[L3]




Obtain complete specifications of the helical gear drive such as normal & transverse

module, surface hardness, number of teeth, center distance, etc.[L3]

LESSON SCHEDULE 1. Introduction to spur gears, standard proportions of gear systems, stresses in gear tooth

2. Lewis equation and form factor, design for strength, dynamic load and wear load.

3 to 5 Numerical problems

6. Introduction to Helical gears, definitions, formative number of teeth,

7. Design based on strength, dynamic and wear loads


UNIT-III



Describe the bevel gear parameters and their importance.[L2]

Obtain the formative number of teeth based on semi cone angle.[L3]

Design acute angled, obtuse angled & right angled bevel gears for a given speed

reduction.[L4]

Show that, in Bevel gears, the equivalent number of teeth is always greater than the

actual number of teeth, therefore a given pair of bevel gears will have a larger contact

ratio and hence they will run more smoothly than a pair of spur gears with the same

number of teeth. [L3]

Design the bevel gear drive to transmit higher power, with comparatively smaller

overall dimensions of the driving system which can be constructed with minimum

possible manufacturing cost, runs reasonably free of noise and vibration and which

requires little maintenance besides indefinite life considering strength and wear. [L4]

Calculate the dynamic & wear load accounting for tooth errors & fatigue loads[L3]

Obtain complete specifications of the worm gear drive such as normal & transverse

module, surface hardness, number of teeth, center distance, etc.[L3]

To check the thermal balance and efficiency of the drive (Self locking).[L3]

LESSON SCHEDULE

1. Introduction to Bevel Gears, terminology, formative number of teeth

2. Design based on strength, dynamic and wear loads.


7. Introduction to worm Gears, terminology, design based on strength, dynamic, wear

loads and efficiency of worm gear drives


UNIT-IV



1. Define the clutch as a mechanical device, which is used to connect or disconnect the

source of power from the remaining parts of the power transmission system at the will of

the operator. [L1]

2. Discuss that in case of new clutch, the intensity of pressure is approximately uniform, but

in an old clutch the uniform wear theory is more approximate [L2]

3. Develop the relationship between axial force, torque, mean radius and stress for friction

drives [L3]

4. Show that the uniform pressure theory gives a higher friction torque than the uniform

wear theory [L3]




5. Calculate dimensions and number of discs for a multiple disc clutch for a given speed

and power requirement. [L3]

6. Design Single, Multi-plate, Cone, and Centrifugal clutches for a given parameters.[L4]

7. Describe brake as a frictional device whose primary function is to control the motion of a

machine or a machine member. In doing so, it is called upon to bring to rest a body,

which is in motion, or to slow it down or to hold it in state of rest or of uniform motion

against the action of external forces or couples [L1]

8. Integrate the mechanical concepts necessary to complete a preliminary design of a

Mechanical Brake. [L2]

9. Calculate whether the brake is self-energizing or self-locking and conclude that for a

proper operation of the brake, it should be self-energizing and not be self-locking. [L3]

10. Design Block, Internal Expanding and Disk Brakes for a given parameters.[L4]

LESSON SCHEDULE

1. Design of single plate clutch


3. Design of Multiple plate clutch


5. Design of Cone clutch


7. Design of Block and Band Brakes

8. Self locking of Brakes, Heat generation and heat dissipation in brakes



UNIT-V



Identify types, uses, and characteristics of sliding contact bearings [L1]

Sketch the mechanism of pressure distribution in a hydrodynamic bearing[L2]

Distinguish between boundary, thin film & fluid film lubrication.[L2]

Select the suitable type of lubricant & bearing materials for a given application.[L3]

Determine the coefficient of viscous friction, the heat generated & dissipated.[L3]

Analyze the life of an antifriction bearing in millions of revolutions based on the type of

service and the loads acting on the shaft.[L5]

Select a suitable type of bearing from the manufacturer's catalogue which has the

desired static & dynamic capacities.[L4]

Define the Terminology of Rolling Contact Bearing[L1]

Describe that the starting friction in ball and roller bearings is lower than that in an

equivalent journal bearing in which metal to metal rubbing takes place at the time of

starting.[L2]

Design and specify commercially available rolling contact bearings for shafts

considering both radial and thrust loads [L4]

LESSON SCHEDULE

1. Introduction, principle of hydro dynamic lubrication, assumptions in hydrodynamic

lubrication

2. Bearing characteristic number and modulus, Sommerfeld number, coefficient of friction,

power loss, heat Generated and heat dissipated

3. Bearing materials, lubricants and properties, design of journal bearing and thrust bearing.



6. Introduction to Ball and Roller contact Bearings,




7. Designation, static & dynamic capacity,

8. Equivalent load, selection of suitable bearings based on rated life.



REVIEW QUESTIONS

UNIT-1 1. Distinguish clearly between a straight beam and a curved beam.[L1]

2. With usual notations, derive expressions for stresses in extreme fibers of a curved

beam.[L3]

3. A crane hook of trapezoidal crossection (1/2) x (90+40) is subjected to a load of 10 KN

passing through the center of curvature of the hook. The inner radius 1s 100 mm.

Determine the total stress at the inner fiber.[L4]

4. A chain link made up of 30 mm diameter steel rod has inner radius of curvature 30

mm. The straight side of the link is 50 mm long. Determine the maximum tensile,

compressive & shear stress induced in the link while lifting a load of 9 KN.[L4]

5. Derive an expression for shear stress induced & deflection in a helical spring subjected to

an axial load.[L2]

6. Write a note on (i) Wahl's stress factor (ii) Surge in helical springs[L1]

7. What is resilience of a spring? Give the energy equations when (i) the kinetic energy of a

moving body (ii) the potential energy of a freely falling body is absorbed as

resilience.[L2]

8. Design a helical compression spring for a safety valve. The valve must blow off at a

pressure of 1.2 Mpa& should lift by 3 mm for 5% increase in pressure. The valve

diameter is 60 mm. The maximum allowable shear stress is 400 MN/m2& the modulus of

rigidity is 82.7 GPa. Take spring index as 8.[L4]

9. A railway wagon weighing 40 KN and moving with a speed of 10 Kmph has to be

stopped by four buffer springs in which the maximum compression allowed is 200 mm.

Find the number of turns in each spring of mean diameter 150 mm. The diameter of the

spring wire is 25 mm. Take G=82.7 Gpa[L4]

10. A locomotive spring has an over all length of 1100 mm and sustain a load of 75 KN at its

centre. The spring has 3 full length leaves and 15 graduated leaves with a central band

100 mm wide. All the leaves are to be stressed to 0.4 Gpa when fully loaded. The ratio of

total spring depth to width is 2. Determine (i) Width & thickness of leaves (ii) nip or

clearance to be provided (iii) Load exerted on the band by the clip bolt after assembly.

Take E=206.8 Gpa[L4]

UNIT-II

1. Give the classification of gears [L1]

2. Define (i) Module (ii) Pressure angle (iii) Face with (iv) Circular pitch w.r.t gears [L2]

3. Derive the Lewis equation for beam strength of a spur gear tooth. State the assumptions

made[L3]

4. Write a note on gear tooth failures[L3]

5. Compare the various tooth systems in use and give their relative merits & demerits[L3]

6. What are the desirable properties of gear materials?[L4]

7. Design a pair of spur gears to transmit 9KW at 2000 rpm of cast steel (untreated) pinion.

The gear is made of high grade Cast iron (heat treated) and is to rotate at 500 rpm. The

pinion has 20 teeth of 141/2o involute form.[L5]

8. A compressor running at 400 rpm is driven by a 25 KW, 1200 rpm motor through a pair

of 141/2o involute spur gear. The centre distance is around 400 mm. The pinion is made

of forged steel of static allowable 190 MN/m2 and 350 BHN. Gear is to be made of cast




steel of allowable stress 180 MN/m2 and 300 BHN. Design the gear for safe continuous

operation. Check the gear for endurance, wear& dynamic strength. .[L5]

9. Derive an expression for the virtual number of teeth on a helical gear.[l3]

10. What are herringbone gears? What is their advantage?[L2]

11. How the Lewis equation for beam strength is modified in case of a helical gear?[L3]

12. Design a pair of helical gears to transmit 12 KW at 1200 rpm of forged steel pinion.

Velocity ratio required is 3:1. The gear is made of high grade CI. Not less than 21 teeth

are to be used on either gear. The teeth are 200 stub involute form. Helix angle should not

be greater than 260.[L5]

13. Design a pair of helical gears to transmit 9 KW at 1500 rpm of the pinion. Gear is to

rotate at 500 rpm and the center distance between the gears is 240 mm. The pinion is

made of cast steel (untreated) and the gear is made of high grade CI (heat treated). The

helix angle is 22.50. The teeth are 200 FDI form.[L5]

UNIT-III

22. For a bevel gears, define the following: a) Pitch angle b) Face angle c) Root angle d)

Back cone distance, and e) Crown height. [L1]

23. Derive an expression for the formative number of teeth in bevel gears.[L3]

24. With a neat sketch, explain the following terms w.r.t a bevel gear (i) Cone angle (ii) Back

cone radius (iii) Miter gears [L3]

25. Design a pair of bevel gears to transmit 12kw at 300rpm. Of the gear and 1470 rpm of

the pinion. The angle between the shaft axes is 900. The pinion has 20 teeth and the

material for gears is cast steel c-30 untreated. Take service factor as 1.25 and check the

gears for wear and dynamic load.[L5]

26. A cast steel (Untreated) pinion having 24 teeth transmits a power of 9 KW through a high

grade CI (heat treated) gear at a velocity ratio 3. Pinion rotates at 720 rpm. The angle

between the shaft axes is 600.The teeth are 141/20 system. Design the gears completely.

[L5]

27. Explain self locking w.r.t worm gear drives.[L2]

28. Write a note on heat generation & dissipation in a worm gear drive[L3]

UNIT-IV

1. What is clutch? Name the different types of clutches and give one example under each

category [L1]

2. What factors should be considered in designing in designing friction clutch? [L3]

3. Explain uniform wear & uniform pressure theories of friction materials. Mention the

application of each theory

4. What is equivalent coefficient of friction? When it is used?

5. Write a note on the friction materials used for clutches & brakes.

6. A cone clutch is to be designed to transmit 8 kW at 1,000 r.p.m. Assuming the normal

pressure between the contact surfaces not to exceed 0.09 N/mm.2, coefficient of friction

between contact surfaces as 0.2 and cone angle to be 240, design the main dimensions of

the clutch. Calculate the axial force to engage the clutch. Take the width of face = ½

mean radius. [L5]

7. Explain self locking of brakes and the necessary conditions for self locking.

8. Discuss the design procedure for simple band brakes.

9. In a band and block brake, the band is lined with 14 blocks each of which subtends on

angle of 150 at the drum centre. One end of the band is attached to the fulcrum of the

brake lever and other to a pin 125 mm. from the fulcrum. If the torque applied to the

drum is to be 30 N-m., what minimum effort must be applied to the brake lever at a pin

750 mm. from the fulcrum? Assume the coefficient of friction as 0.25.[L6]




UNIT-V

1. Enumerate the factors that form and maintain thick oil film in hydrodynamic journal

bearing. [L1]

2. Explain wedge film and squeeze film journal bearings. [L2]

3. Explain with sketches theory of hydrodynamic lubrication. [L3]

4. Explain the following terms as applied to journal bearings:

a. Bearing Characteristic number and b) Bearing modulus. [L2]

5. With usual notations derive the Petroff's equation for coefficient of friction in a lightly

loaded journal bearing. State clearly all the assumptions made. [L2,L3]

6. Design a journal bearing for the main bearing of a steam turbine to support a radial load

of 10 KN on shaft operating at a speed of 1000 rpm. Assume the bearing to be well

ventilated.[L5]

7. A full journal bearing 90mm diameter and 150mm long has a radial load of 2MPa per

unit projected area. Shaft speed is 500 rpm. The bearing is operating with SAE20 oil at

50oC. The specific gravity of the oil at the operating temperature is 0.985. Calculate the

following:

i) The minimum film thickness.

ii)Heat loss due to friction

iii)Whether artificial cooling is necessary? [L4]

8. Discuss the relationship between the bearing modulus & coefficient of friction. What is

the condition for thick film lubrication?[L3]

9. Define the following terms w.r.t antifriction bearings. (i) Rating life (ii) Static capacity

(iii) Dynamic capacity (iv) Equivalent load[L2]

10. Select a deep groove SKF ball bearing for a shaft 50 mm diameter subjected to an axial

thrust of 2500 N & a radial load of 4000N. The bearing has to last for at least 7000 hrs.

The speed of the shaft is 3000 rpm. Assume the inner ring as stationary.[L4]

11. Write a note on the design of partial journal bearings.[L2]

12. What are rolling contact bearings? Explain with sketches. Discuss their advantages over

sliding contact bearings.[L1]

13. Enumerate the merits and demerits of antifriction bearings. [L2]

14. A 60mm shaft is supported between two bearings 400 mm apart and carries a bevel gear

of 200 mm pitch diameter, at 150 mm from left end. The gear produces a radial load of

10 kN and a thrust load of 3000 N, when rotating at 500 rpm. Select a proper type of ball

bearing to be used on each of shaft. Desired life is 2 years at 50 hours/week [L3]




COURSE ARTICULATION MATRIX


Outcomes (PSOs)

Sl.

No. Course Outcome

Programme Outcomes

Programme

Specific

outcomes

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

1

Analyze the stresses in the critical

section of a curved beam and design

springs for different applications

3 3

- 2

- - - - - - 3 3 2

2 Design Spur and helical and gears 3 3 3 - 2

- - - - - - 3 3 2

3 Design Bevel and worm gears 3 3 3 - 2

- - - - - - 3 3 2

4

Design clutches and brakes, with an

understanding of safety issues related to

brakes

3 3 3 - 2

- - - - - - 3 3 2

5

Select lubricants and design sliding

contact bearings, select rolling contact

bearings for different applications

3 3 3 - 2

- - - - - - 3 3 -




Course Title: MECHANICAL VIBRATION



Prerequisites:

Subject requires students to know about

Basics of engineering mathematics

Basic physics

COURSE LEARNING OBJECTIVES (CLO):

The course aims to:

1 Formulate mathematical models of single degree of freedom, free, undamped and

damped vibrating systems and determine their natural frequencies. Formulate

mathematical models for damped free vibratory systems.(L5,L6)

2 Determine the response of simple single degree of freedom systems subjected to

forced vibration.(L5)

3 Explain the working principle of vibration measuring instruments. Determine the

whirling speed of shafts. Compute harmonics of general forcing functions using

Fourier series.(L2,L5,L6)

4 Formulate mathematical models and Solve vibration problems related to Two

degrees of freedom. Determine influence coefficients. (L3,L5,L6)

5 Solve multi degree of freedom systems using Rayleigh and Dunkerley, Stodola,

Holzer and Matrix iteration methods. (L3).


Mechanical Vibrations is a foundation course in B.E Automobile engineering program that helps

in understanding vibrations of various components in machines, vibrations due to unbalanced

forces in a machine.

Further this course also helps in understanding, solving numerically various systems vibrating

with multi degrees of freedom and method of damping the system.

COURSE CONTENT

UNIT – I

Undamped Free Vibrations: Introduction, basic concepts of vibration, Simple harmonic

motion, types of vibration, elements of vibrating system, Single degree of freedom systems,

determination of natural frequency using Newton’s law and energy methods. Damped Free

Vibrations: Introduction, types of damping, free vibrations with viscous damping, under-

damped, over-damped and critically-damped systems, logarithmic decrement. 12 hrs

UNIT – II

Forced Vibrations: Introduction, forced vibration with constant harmonic excitation,

steady state vibrations, forced vibration with rotating and reciprocating unbalance. Vibration

isolation, force transmissibility. Forced vibrations due to excitation of the support: Absolute

motion and relative motion. 10hrs

UNIT – III

Vibration measuring instruments: Vibrometer, velocity pick-up and accelerometer.

Whirling of Shafts: Introduction, critical speed of a light shaft having a single disc without

damping, critical speed of a light shaft having a single disc with damping.

Fourier Series and Harmonic Analysis: Analytical methods and numerical methods.




08 hrs

UNIT – IV

Two Degrees of Freedom Systems: Introduction, undamped systems, principle and normal

modes of vibration, co-ordinate coupling, generalized and principal co-ordinates, free

vibration in terms of initial conditions, combined rectilinear and angular modes, undamped

dynamic vibration absorber (No numerical on vibration absorber). Influence coefficients,

Maxwell’s reciprocal theorem. 10 hrs

UNIT – V

Multi Degree Freedom Systems: Introduction, determination of natural frequencies,

Rayleigh’s method, Dunkerley’s method, Stodola’s method, Holzer’s method. orthogonality

principle, matrix iteration method. 12 hrs

TEXT BOOKS:

1 G.K. Grover, Nem Chand & brothers ,Mechanical vibrations:, Roorkee.

2 V.P. Singh, Mechanical Vibrations Dhanpat Rai & Company Pvt. Ltd.

REFERENCES:

1 S.S. Rao, Mechanical Vibrations Pearson Education Inc, 4th Edition, 2003.

2 S. Graham Kelly, Schaum’s Outline Series, Mechanical Vibrations Tata McGraw

Hill, Special Indian edition, 2007.

3 J.S. Rao & K. Gupta, Theory & Practice of Mechanical vibrations New Age

International Publications, New Delhi, 2001.

4 Leonanrd Meirovitch, Elements of Vibrations Analysis Tata McGraw Hill, Special

Indian edition, 2007.

5 Austin H Church, John Wiley & Sons. Mechanical Vibrations

COURSE OUTCOMES

1. Formulate mathematical models of single degree of freedom damped and

undamped free vibratory systems and determine their natural frequencies.

2. Analyze the response of simple single degree of freedom systems subjected to

forced vibration.

3. Explain the working principle of vibration measuring instruments. Determine

the whirling speed of shafts and harmonics of general forcing functions using

Fourier series.

4. Formulate mathematical models and determine natural frequencies and

corresponding mode shapes of two degrees of freedom systems.

5. Use numerical methods to solve multi degree of freedom systems for their

natural frequencies and mode shapes.

UNIT WISE PLAN

UNIT -1



1 Classify the vibratory systems.




2

Formulate the governing differential equations of motion for the single degree of

freedom undamped-free vibrating systems using Newton’s second law or Energy

methods and Express their natural frequencies.

3 Sketch an equivalent spring-mass vibratory system for a single dof system having

multi masses and springs.

4 Formulate governing differential equations of motion to the single dof damped-free

vibratory systems and Express their solutions.

5

Use logarithmic decrement curve to Estimate the actual damping present in the

vibratory system.

LESSON SCHEDULE


1 Introduction to mechanical vibration causes of vibration, effects of vibration,

basic concepts of vibration, Simple harmonic motion, types of vibration.

2

Elements of vibrating system, definition of the terms: periodic motion, time

period, frequency, amplitude, natural frequency, resonance, damping and degree

of freedom, etc.

3 Single degree of freedom systems, determination of natural frequency using

Newton’s law and energy methods.

4 Numerical problems on determination of natural frequency/time period of single

dof systems.


dof systems.


dof systems.

7 Introduction to damped free vibration, types of damping, derivation of

governing differential equation of motion of spring-mass-damper system.

8 Solution of governing differential equation of under damped, critical damped

and over damped systems.

9 Logarithmic decrement and Derivation of expressions for the logarithmic

decrement.

10 Numerical problems.



UNIT II:

Topic Learning Objectives :


1 Formulate the expression for transient and steady state vibration of a system

subjected to harmonic excitation or excitation due to unbalanced force.

2 Determine force and motion transmissibility of vibratory system.

3 Estimate the spring stiffness and damping coefficients to minimize force and/or

motion transmissibility of the system.

4

Estimate the frequency ratios to minimize steady state amplitude of vibration and/or

force and motion transmissibility of the system.

LESSON SCHEDULE





1 Introduction to forced vibration, Derivation of expression for equation of

motion of a spring-mass-damper subjected to harmonic excitation.

2 Magnification factor and its variation with frequency ratio, Phase angle and its

variation with frequency.

3 Derivation of expression for steady state amplitude of spring-mass-damped

system subjected to rotating and reciprocating unbalance.

4 Vibration isolation-force and motion isolation, derivation of expression for force

transmissibility.

5 Derivation of expression for force transmissibility.

6 Derivation of expression for motion transmissibility- absolute and relative

motion.

7 Numerical problems




UNIT III:



1 Explain the working principle of vibrometer, velocity pick up and accelerometer.

2 Determine whirling speed of shaft and its maximum deflection under whirling or

operating speeds.

3 Estimate dynamic force transmitted from the vibrating shaft to bearings.

4 Estimate maximum and minimum bending stress developed in the shaft due to its

deflection.

Compute harmonics of general forcing functions using Fourier series.

LESSON SCHEDULE


1 Introduction to vibration measuring instruments, Seismic instrument, working

principles of vibrometer and accelerometer.



4

Introduction to whirling of shafts, critical speed of a light shaft having a single

disc without damping, critical speed of a light shaft having a single disc with

damping.



7 Introduction to Fourier series and Harmonic analysis.

8 Examples on representation of periodic motion into harmonic series.

UNIT-IV

TOPIC LEARNING OBJECTIVES : By the end of the topic, student will be able to

1 Formulate governing differential equations of motion for Two degree of freedom

systems.

2 Solve governing differential equations of motion of free vibration of two dof systems

in terms of initial conditions and Express their equation of motion.




3

Estimate natural frequencies and corresponding mode shapes of two degree of

freedom systems having rectilinear and angular modes as well as combined

rectilinear and angular modes.

4 Design undamped vibration absorber.

5 Determine influence coefficients of mechanical systems.

LESSON SCHEDULE


1 Introduction to Two degree of freedom system, generalized and principal co-

ordinates, principle and normal modes of vibration, coordinate coupling.

2 Determination of natural frequencies and mode shape for spring-mass system.

3 Derivation of equation of motion of undamped-free vibration of two dof

system in terms of initial conditions.

4 Determination of natural frequencies and mode shape for double pendulum

and string problems.

5 Natural frequencies of a system having combined rectilinear and angular

modes.

6 Introduction to undamped vibration absorber.

7 Example problems on determination of natural frequencies and mode shapes.

8 Example problems on determination of natural frequencies and mode shapes.

9 Introduction to influence coefficients, Maxwell’s reciprocal theorem.

10 Example problems on determination of influence coefficients.

UNIT V:

TOPIC LEARNING OBJECTIVES : By the end of the topic, student will be able to

1 Estimate fundamental natural frequency of multi degree freedom systems using

Rayleigh’s, Dunkerley’s and stodola’s numerical methods.

2 Estimate all natural frequencies and corresponding mode shapes of multi degree

freedom systems using Holzer’s numerical method.

3 Formulate equation of motion using influence coefficients and Estimate natural

frequencies of multi degree freedom systems from matrix iteration method.

LESSON SCHEDULE


1 Introduction to multi-degree of freedom systems, Numerical methods in the

determination of natural frequencies of multi-dof systems, Rayleigh’s method.

2 Dunkerley’s method, Example problems on determination of fundamental natural

frequency using Rayleigh’s and Dunkerley’s methods.

3 Introduction to Stodola’s method, an example problem on determination of

fundamental natural frequency using Stodola’s method.

4 Example problems on determination of fundamental natural frequency using

Stodola’s method.

5 Introduction to Holzer’s method, an example problem on determination of natural

frequencies using Holzer’s method.

6 Example problem on determination of natural frequencies using Holzer’s method.






9 Introduction to orthogonality principle, formation of equation of motion in terms of

influence coefficients, Matrix iteration method.

10 Example problem on determination of natural frequencies using matrix iteration

method.


method.


method.

REVIEW QUESTIONS

1 Define the following:

(a) Free vibrations (b) Forced vibration (c) Damped vibration

(d) Degrees of freedom (e) Critical damping (f) Coulomb damping

(g) Viscous damping (h) Solid damping (i) Logarithmic damping

(j) Natural frequency (k) Damped natural frequency

2 Distinguish between the followings:

(i) Natural frequency and damped natural frequency

(ii) Free and forced vibrations (iii) Damped and undamped vibrations.

3 What are the different methods used to determine the expressions for natural

frequency of a spring-mass system? Explain them.

4 Determine the natural frequency of the system shown in Fig. 1 using (i) Newton’s

second law method (ii) Energy method.

Fig. 1

5 A 20 kg mass is resting on a spring of 750 N/m and dash pot of 50 N-sec/m. If a

velocity of 2 m/sec is applied to the mass at rest position, what will be its

displacement at the end of 1 sec.

6 Derive an expression for the logarithmic decrement.

7 A body of mass 70 kg is suspended from a spring which deflects 2 cm under the

load. It is subjected to a damping effect adjusted to a value 0.23 times that required

for critical damping. Find the natural frequency of the undamped and damped

vibrations and ratio of successive amplitudes for damped vibrations.

8 A vibrating system is defined by the following parameters:

3 , 100 / , 3 sec/m kg k N m C N m .

Determine,

(i) the damping factor (ii) the natural frequency of damped vibration (iii)

logarithmic decrement (iv) the ratio of two consecutive amplitudes and (v) the

number of cycles after which the original amplitude is reduced to 20 percent.

9 The mass M of a machine is mounted on an elastic foundation modelled as a spring

of stiffness k in parallel with a viscous damper of damping coefficient C. The

x m

M

R

2K




machine is subjected to a harmonic excitation of sinoF t . Derive the differential

equation governing the machine’s displacement and Express its steady-state

amplitude.

10 An electric motor is supported on a spring and a dashpot. The spring has the

stiffness 6.4 N/mm and the dashpot offers resistance of 500 N at velocity of 250

mm/sec. The unbalanced mass of 0.5 kg rotates at 50 mm radius and the total mass

of vibratory system is 20 kg. The motor runs at 400 rpm. Determine (a) damping

factor (b) amplitude of vibration and phase angle (c) force exerted by the spring

and dashpot on the motor.

11 Explain the principles of operation of vibrometer and accelerometer.

12 The static deflection of the vibrometer mass is 20 mm. The instrument when

attached to a machine vibrating with a frequency of 125 cpm records a relative

amplitude of 0.3mm. find out for the machine, (i) Amplitude of vibration.

(ii) Maximum velocity of vibration and

(iii) Maximum acceleration.

13 A rotor of mass 14 kg is mounted at mid point of a steel shaft of 25 mm diameter

supported between two bearings which are 40 cm apart. The rotor has an unbalance

of 0.25 kg-cm. If the rotor runs at 6000 rpm, determine: (1) critical speed of the

shaft (2) The maximum and minimum stress developed in the shaft (3) the dynamic

load transmitted on each bearing. Take E= 210 Gpa and density of shaft material

ccgm /8 .

14 Define the following (i) Generalized and principle coordinates (ii) Principla mode

and normal mode of vibrations.

15 Determine the natural frequencies and the corresponding modes of vibration of the

system shown in Fig. 2. The string is stretched with a large tension T. Also draw

the mode shapes.

Fig. 2

16 With the derivation of necessary expressions, explain the principle of vibration

absorber.

17 Determine the influence coefficients of the triple pendulum shown in Fig.3.

18 Determine the fundamental natural frequency of transverse vibration of the system

shown in Fig. 4 using Rayleigh’s method and verify it using Dunkerley’s method.

Take 4 28 10EI Nm .

m 2m l l l

Fig. 3

2x 3x

k3

k

k

2m 2m m

1100 Kgm

250 Kgm

180 mm 120 mm

Fig. 4




19 Determine the natural frequencies of the system shown in Fig. 3. Use Holzer’s

method

20 Using matrix iteration method, determine first two natural frequencies of the

system shown in Fig. 3



Outcomes (PSOs)

Sl.

No. Course Outcome

Programme Outcomes

Programme

Specific

outcomes

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

1

Formulate mathematical models of

single degree of freedom damped and

undamped free vibratory systems and

determine their natural frequencies.

3 3 2 - - - - - - - - - 3 1 1

2

Analyze the response of simple single

degree of freedom systems subjected to

forced vibration.

3 3 3 - - - - - - - - - 3 2 1

3

Explain the working principle of

vibration measuring instruments.

Determine the whirling speed of shafts

and harmonics of general forcing

functions using Fourier series.

3 2 3 - - - - - - - - - 2 2 1

4

Formulate mathematical models and

determine natural frequencies and

corresponding mode shapes of two

degrees of freedom systems.

3 3 3 - - - - - - - - - 2 2 1

5

Use numerical methods to solve multi

degree of freedom systems for their

natural frequencies and mode shapes.

3 1 1 - - - - - - - - - 2 2 1




Course Title: AUTOMOTIVE ELECTRICS AND ELECTRONICS



Prerequisites:


Basics of electrical Engineering

Basics of electronic science

Basics of electrical and electronic circuits

Basics of electromagnetic principles Basics of Automobile

Basic working principles of generator, alternator and electric motors

COURSE LEARNING OBJECTIVES (CLO):

This Course aims to

i. Explain electrical systems and different accessories used in automotive vehicles (L2)

ii. Explain the construction and working Principle of different types of batteries used in

automotive vehicles. (L2)

iii. Explain the construction, working Principle and distinguish the generator, alternator

starting motors and starting drives. (L2, L4)

iv. Sketch and explain different types of ignition system used in Automotive Vehicles and

comparison .(L3,L4)

v. Identify, describe about microelectronics and controllers, Basic principles of

semiconductors technology.(L1,L2)

vi. Identify, Classification and Applications of senses. (L1, L3)


Automotive electrical and Autotronics is a fundamental course in B.E (automobile engineering)

program that helps to understand vehicle electrical system, construction and testing of a battery,

working of ignition system.

Further this course also helps to understand application of electronic system in automobile and

microcontroller based controlling system.

COURSE CONTENT

UNIT-I

Vehicle Electricals System: History Vehicle Electricals System, electrical power supply in

conventional Vehicle Electricals System, Future electrical system, dimensions of wire, plug- in

connections, circuit diagrams and symbols.

Starter Batteries:

Battery design, method of operation, battery construction, substitute batteries, special cases,

electrically powered vehicles, Battery systems. Principle of lead acid cells, Construction of

battery, voltmeter, effect of temperature on electrolyte, its specific gravity, capacity and

efficiency, methods of charging, defects and remedies of batteries, different types of batteries

and their principles like alkaline, lithium and zinc air etc., 10 Hrs




UNIT-II

Charging and Starting Systems: Generation of electrical energy in the motor vehicle, Basic Principles, Alternator versions ,

voltage regulator versions, over voltage protection, cooling and noise, power losses,

characteristics curves, alternator operations in the vehicles.

Starter motors: development of starting systems, starting the internal combustion engine,

starter motor design, design variations, technology of electrical starting systems, and types of

drives.

Development and production of Alternators and Starter motors: quality management,

development and production. 12 Hrs

UNIT-III

Automotive Lighting Technology:

Introduction, Technical demands, legal frame work, development of lighting technology,

physical principles, front and rear lighting system(components), interior lighting system,

instrument clusters, display types, special purpose lamps, diagram of typical wiring system,

Principle of automobile illumination, head lamp mounting and construction, sealed beam

auxiliary lightings, horn, windscreen-wipers, windshield and head lamp cleaning systems.

10Hrs

UNIT-IV

Automotive Micro Electronics and Micro Control:

Overview, Definition and classification, working principle,Demands on Electronic Systems,

History of Development, Basic Principals of Semi conductor Technology, Electronic

Components, Manufacturing of Semi Conductor Components and Circuits

08 hrs

UNIT V

Automotive Sensor:

Introduction, Basics, position sensors(Travel/ angle ), Measuring Principles, Application and examples

Throttle valve sensor, Fuel Level Sensor Accelerator Pedal sensors Steering wheel angle sensors, axle

sensor, Ultra sonic sensors, sensor plate potentiometer, half differential short circuiting ring sensors.

Speed and RPM sensors:

Measured Variables and Measuring Principals Application and examples :-Relative RPM and speed

Measurement, Inductive Engine speed sensors, wheel speed sensors, gear box RPM sensors, Nozzle

holder with needle motion sensors, Absolute rotating speed measurement, radar sensor, rotational speed

sensor and incremental angle of rotation sensor, Hall effect face sensor. 12 hrs

TTEEXXTT BBOOOOKKSS:: 11.. RRoobbeerrtt BBoosscchh,, ““AAuuttoommoottiivvee EElleeccttrriiccss AAuuttoommoottiivvee EElleeccttrroonniiccss”” GGMMBBHH PPuubblliiccaattiioonn,, 22000044..

2. P.M. Kohli, “Automotive Electrical Equipment”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi. 2004

REFERENCE BOOKS: 1. W.Bolton, Longman , Mechtronics , 2Ed, Pearson publications, 2007

2. A.P. Young & Griffiths, “Automobile Electrical Equipment”, ELBS & Newnes

Butterworths, London

3. W. Judge, “Modern Electrical Equipment”

4. Parker and smith, “Electrical Equipment for Automobile

5. Kenneth J Ayala – “ The 8051 Microcontroller- Architecture, Programming, & Applications” 3rd

edition Penram International Publishing (I) Pvt Ltd- Thomson Delmar Learning





At the end of the course student will be able to:

1. Explain the evolution of electrical systems, different accessories, construction, working

principle and trouble shooting of batteries used for automotive application

2. Explain the construction, working principle and identify troubles encountered in

Starting & charging Systems

3. Explain the working principle of different types of ignition system, lighting technology,

wipers and horns and describe their legal requirements

4. Explain the working principle of various types of sensors and actuators used in

automobile

5. Understand the application of micro controller in automobile

UNIT WISE PLAN

UNIT-I


At the end of the Unit-I student should be able to:

1. Explain the history of vehicles in electrical system(L2)

2. Draw the circuit diagram and symbols used in electrical wiring system(L1)

3. Explain construction and working principles of different types of batteries.(L2)

4. Differentiate between different types of batteries used in automotive vehicles.(L4)

5. Discuss the different defects and remedies of batteries.(L2)

6. Explain the specification and different ways of battery testing and rating.(L2)

LESSON SCHEDULE


1. Introduction to Vehicle Electricals System: History, Fundamentals of Vehicle Electricals

System,

2. Dimensions of wire, plug- in connections, circuit diagrams and symbols.

3. Battery design, method of operation, battery construction,

4. Substitute batteries, special cases, drive/traction batteries, electrically powered vehicles,

5. Battery systems. Principle of lead acid cells, plates and their characteristics containers

and separators,

6. Electrolyte and their preparation, different methods of battery testing , effect of

temperature on electrolyte, its specific gravity, capacity and efficiency,

7. Methods of charging, defects and remedies of batteries,

8. Different types of batteries and their principles like alkaline,

9. Lithium

10. Zinc air etc.

UNIT– II

TOPIC LEARNING OBJECTIVES(TLO) At the end of the Unit 2, student will be able to:

1. Explain the basic principles of generator of DC and AC currents.(L2)

2. Sketch and explain the DC generator and alternator working principle.(L3)

3. Distinguish between generator and alternator.(L4)

4. Explain the advantages and disadvantages of generator and alternator.(L2)

5. Explain the basic requirements of starting motors.(L2)

6. Sketch and explain the working of different types of starting motors.(L3)

LESSON SCHEDULE





1. Generation of electrical energy in the motor vehicle, Basic Principles,

2. Alternator versions ,

3. voltage regulator versions, over voltage protection,

4. cooling and noise, power losses, characteristics curves

5. Alternator and DC generators operations in the vehicles.

6. Development of starting systems, starting the internal combustion engine,

7. Starter motor design,

8. Design variations, Technology of electrical starting systems,

9. Types of drives.

10. Development and production of Alternators and

11. Starter motors: quality management,

12. Development and production

UNIT- III

TOPIC LEARNING OBJECTIVES(TLO) At the end of Unit-III student should be able to:

1. Explain the requirements and basic components of an ignition system.(L2)

2. Differentiate between different types of ignition system used in SI engine.(L4)

3. Explain the principles of automobile illuminator system.(L2)

4. Explain the working of different types of horn, Windscreen-wipers, windshield and head

lamp cleaning systems, etc., (L2)

LESSON SCHEDULE


1. Introduction Technical demands,

2. legal frame work, Development of lighting technology,

3. physical principles, Front and rear lighting system(components),

4. interior lighting system, instrument clusters, display types,

5. Special purpose lamps,

6. Diagram of typical wiring system,

7. Principle of automobile illumination, head lamp mounting and construction, sealed beam

8. Auxiliary lightings, horn,

9. Windscreen-wipers, and windshield washers

10. Types of Head lamp and cleaning systems

UNIT-IV


At the end of this chapter student should be able to Identify and Explain and/ solve about,

1. Evolution of mechatronics

2. Measurement system and their elements

3. Open loop and closed loop control system

4. Advantages of mechatronics

5. Microprocessor based controller

6. Transducers

7. Classification of transducers

8. Light sensors

9. Hall effect sensors

10. Proximity sensors

LESSON SCHEDULE


1. Overview, Definition Classification of Micro electronics and micro controllers,




2. Working principle, Demands on Electronic Systems,

3. History of Development,

4. Basic Principals of Semi conductor Technology,

5. Electronic Components,

6. Manufacturing of Semi Conductor

7. Components of semiconductors

8. Circuits of Semiconductor

UNIT V


At the end of this chapter student should be able to Identify and Explain and/ solve about

1. Architecture of micro controller

2. Memory organization in micro controller

3. Special function registers

4. Information flow in instruction execution,

5. pins and signals,

6. Port operation,

7. I/O interfacing,

8. I/O interfacing using external ports,

9. Timers/counters,

10. Interrupts,

11. Power down operations

LESSON SCHEDULE


1. Automotive Sensor:Introduction, Basics, position sensors(Travel/ angle ),

2. Measuring Principles, Application and examples Throttle valve sensor,

3. Fuel Level Sensor Accelerator Pedal sensors Steering wheel angle sensors,

4. axle sensor, Ultra sonic sensors, sensor plate potentiometer,

5. half differential short circuiting ring sensors.

6. Speed and RPM sensors: Measured Variables and Measuring Principals

7. Application and examples :-Relative RPM and speed Measurement,

8. Inductive Engine speed sensors, wheel speed sensors, gear box RPM sensors,

9. Nozzle holder with needle motion sensors,

10. Absolute rotating speed measurement, radar sensor,

11. rotational speed sensor and incremental

12. angle of rotation sensor, Hall effect face sensor.

REVIEW QUESTIONS:

UNIT-I

1. Explain the construction and working of a lead acid battery (L2)

2. Explain the construction and working of a Ni-Cad battery (L2)

3. Discuss in detail various tests for ascertaining the fitness of a battery to be used in a

vehicle (L 2)

4. What are the different troubles experienced in an automotive battery discuss their

5. Describe the chemical reactions that are taking place during charging and discharging

process of a lead acid battery (L2)

6. Describe with neat sketch charging and testing procedure of a lead acid battery(L3)

7. Choose appropriate electrical storage device for following




8. i) SI engine car ii) Electrical vehicle iii) Locomotive iv) Hybrid vehicle

(L1)

9. What are the advantages claimed for an alkaline battery? Describe briefly its

construction(L2)

10. Describe different methods of battery rating and capacities (L2)

11. Explain with suitable sketches Lithium battery (L2)

12. Describe clearly working of zinc air battery (L2)

UNIT-II

1. Describe in short the necessity of generating system in a vehicle (L 4)

2. Explain with neat sketch the construction and working principle of an alternator (L5)

3. Describe the necessity of voltage regulator used in an alternator generating system (L6)

4. How do you control the generator output in an automobiles? Explain briefly

5. Write in detail the procedure of testing of an alternator (L 3)

6. Illustrate in detail the fault diagnosing procedure for an alternator (L3)

7. Describe the construction and working of a series starter motor (L3)

8. Describe the construction and working of a shunt starter motor (L 8)

9. What are the different types of starting motor drives in current practice? explain With

suitable sketches

10. Explain why? the bendix drive is suitable for LCV’S (L 8)

11. Describe the construction and working of Bendix drive (L 8)

12. Describe the construction and working of Positively engaging and disengaging drive (LO 8)

13. Chose appropriate cranking motor drive for following vehicle (LO 8)

i) Two wheeler ii) Three wheeler iii) Bus iv) Truck

14. Arrange the Differences between positively engaging drive and positively disengaging drive

with reference to their construction, working and application point of view

UNIT-III

1. Briefly Explain the Technical demands of Automotive lighting Technology.

2. Explain the Asymmetrical projection patterns.

3. Sketch and Explain the various light sources.

4. List and Briefly Explain the Front lighting components.

5. List and Briefly Explain the Rear lighting components.

6. What are the various Components of the interior lighting system.

7. Explain the Design and operating concept of the. instrument duster.

8. List and Briefly Explain the various Display types in lighting system.

9. Write a note on, a) Flood lamps

b) Spot lamps

10. Explain the Design Construction and operation of the Wiper System.

11. Write a note on, a) Rain Sensor

b) Dirt Sensor

UNIT IV:

1. List the demands of Electronic systems.

2. Explain the developments of Electronic system.

3. What are the Diodes? Explain the various types of diodes.

4. What are the Transistor? Explain the method of operation of bipolar transistor.

5. Sketch and Explain the stages in the manufacture of Semiconductor component.




UNIT V: 1. Define Automotive Sensor? What are the classification of Automotive Sensor.

2. List the application of Throttle value sensor with example.

3. What are the application of Fuel level sensor.

4. Explain the Design and operating of the fuel level sensor.

5. Explain with an example the application of Accelerator pedal sensor.

6. Write a note on, a) Steering wheel angle sensor

b) Axle sensor

c) Ultrasonic sensor

Speed and RPM Sensors

1. List the advantages, limitations and Application of the inductive type sensors.

2. Explain the Design and operating concepts of Inductive engine speed sensors.

3. Explain the working of Hall –effect phase sensors.

What are the Application of nozzle holder with needle motion sensor

Course articulation matrix


Outcomes (PSOs)

Sl.

No. Course Outcome

Programme Outcomes

Programme

Specific

outcomes

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

1

Explain the evolution of electrical

systems, different accessories,

construction, working principle and

trouble shooting of batteries used for

automotive application

3 2 2 - - 2 1 - - - - 2 3 2 -

2

Explain the construction, working

principle and identify troubles

encountered in Starting & charging

Systems

3 2 - - 2 1 - - - - 2 2 -

3

Explain the working principle of

different types of ignition system,

lighting technology, wipers and horns

and describe their legal requirements

2 2 - - 2 1 - - - - 2 3 2 -

4

Explain the working principle of various

types of sensors and actuators used in

automobile

3 1 2 - - 2 1 - - - - 2 3 2 -

5 Understand the application of micro

controller in automobile 3 2 1 - - 2 1 - - - - 2 3 2 -




Course Title: THEORY OF ELASTICITY



Course objective: The course aims at enabling the students to understand the mathematical and

physical principles of Elasticity, with different solution strategies while applying them to

practical cases.

COURSE CONTENT

UNIT-I

Stress Analysis: Introduction to the general theory of elasticity, assumptions and

applications of linear elasticity. Stress tensors, state of stress at a point, principal

stresses, direction cosines, stress invariants, equilibrium equations, Mohr's stress

circle and construction of Mohr Circle for 2D stress systems. 10hrs

UNIT-II

Strain Analysis: Deformation, strain-displacement relation, strain components, The

state of strain at a point, principal strains, strain invariants, Equations of

Compatibility for Strain, cubical dilation. 08 hrs

UNIT-III

Stress–Strain Relations: Generalized Hooke’s law in terms of engineering

constants. Existence and uniqueness of solution, Saint Venant’s principle, principle

of superposition, Prandtl’s membrane analogy, Kirchoff’s law, Fundamental

boundary value problems, Inverse and Semi-inverse method of solving elasticity

problems. General case of Plane stress and Plane strain, transformation of

compatibility condition from strain component to stress components. Relation

between plane stress and plane strain. 10 hrs

UNIT-IV

2D Problems in Cartesian Coordinates: Airy stress function, stress function for

plane stress and plane strain case. Investigation for simple beam problems. Bending

of narrow cantilever under end load, simply supported beam with uniform load by

the use of polynomials. Torsion of circular and elliptical bars, stress function,

torsion of thin walled and multiple cell closed sections. 12 hrs

UNIT-V

Unit-5: General Equations in Cylindrical coordinate: Thick cylinder under

uniform internal and / or external pressure, shrink fit.

Thermal Stresses: Thermo elastic stress strain relationship, equations of

equilibrium, thermal stresses in thin circular disks and in long circular cylinder.

12 hrs

TEXT BOOKS

1. Timoshenko and Goodier “Theory of Elasticity”, McGraw Hill Book Company.

2. L S Srinath “Advanced Mechanics of Solids” McGraw Hill Book Company.

2010

REFERENCES 1. Sadhu Singh, “Theory of Elasticity” Khanna publisher, 2012

2. Wang. C. T. “Applied Elasticity”

3. T.G.Sitharam. Govindraju, “Applied Elasticity” Interline publishing. 2008

4. Arthur P Boresi and Richard J Schmidt Advanced Mechanics of Materials.




COURSE OUTCOMES At the end of the course the students should be able to:

1. Describe and calculate the state of stress at a point and principal stresses

and construct the Mohr’s circle.

2. Determine state of a strain at a point and principal strains.

3. Discuss the stress and strain relations.

4. Compute and analyze bending and shear stresses and deflections

induced in beams and torsional stresses of thin walled and multiple cell

closed sections.

5. Determine stresses in thin and thick cylinders and analyze stress

concentration.

UNITWISE PLAN

UNIT I

TOPIC LEARNING OBJECTIVES :


1 Describe the general theory of elasticity with assumptions and

applications of linear elasticity

2 Formulate the State of stress at a point and 3D Equilibrium equation.

3 Calculate state of stress at a point and principal stresses.

4 Describe Mohr's stress circle and construct Mohr Circle for stress systems.

UNIT II



1 Define the strain, state of strain at a point and Principal strain.

2 Derive and Apply strain –displacement relation.

3 Determine the Principal strain.

4 Formulate compatibility equation.

UNIT III



1 Derive the Hooke’s law in terms of engineering constants.

2 Discuss the principles; Saint venant, superposition, Kirchoff’s law and

boundary value problems.

3 Derive the thermo elastic stress strain relationship.

UNIT IV



1 Explain the Plane stress and plane strain.

2 Formulate the expression for compatibility condition from strain component

to stress components.

3 Determine the shearing stresses in beams.

4 Discuss Airy stress function.

5 Derive relation for Torsion of circular, elliptical and triangular bars.

UNIT V



1 Define thick cylinder.

2 Formulate the Hoop’s and Longitudinal stress for thick cylinder under

external and internal pressure.




3 Describe the solid disk and disk with a hole.

REVIEW QUESTIONS

1 Derive 3D differential equation of equilibrium subjected to body forces and

surface tractions.

2 Derive an equation for state of stress at a point.

3 What is meant by stress invariants?

4 Derive strain –displacement relation.

5 Derive the compatibility relation of strain in a 3D elastic body. What is its

significance?

6 State and explain Saint Venant’s principle and principle of superposition.

7 Write short note on Hooke’s law, methods of solution of elasticity problems.

8 Write short note on (i) Plane stress and plane strain (ii) Airy’s stress function.

9 Derive the equation for stresses developed in an elliptical section of a bar

subjected to torque.

10 Show that Mt=GJϴ in torsion of shafts with usual notations. Where G-

modulus of rigidity, j-polar moment of inertia and ϴ- angular twist for unit

length.

11 Derive the equilibrium equation in cylindrical coordinates for 2D elastic

body.

12 Derive the expression for radial and tangential stresses in a rotating disc of

uniform thickness.

13 Derive the expression for radial and circumferential stresses for the thick walled

cylinder subjected to uniform internal and external pressure.

LESSON PLAN

UNIT I

1 Introduction to the general theory of elasticity with assumptions and

applications of linear elasticity

2 Stress tensors, State of stress at a point. 3D Equilibrium equation.

3 Problems on state of stress.

4 Problems on state of stress.

5 Principal stresses, direction cosines, stress invariants

6 Problems on Principal stresses



9 Mohr's stress circle and construction of Mohr Circle for two dimensional

stress systems.

10 Problem on the Mohr Circle for two dimensional stress systems.

UNIT II

1 Deformation, strain-displacement relation, strain components.

2 The state of strain at a point and problems.

3 Problems on state of strain at a point.

4 Principal strains, strain invariants.

5 Problems on principal strains, strain invariants.

6 Problems on principal strains, strain invariants.

7 Equations of Compatibility.

8 Cubical dilation.




UNIT III

1 Generalized Hooke’s law in terms of engineering constants.

2 Problems on Generalized Hooke’s law.



5 Existence and uniqueness of solution, Saint Venant’s principle

6 Principle of superposition, Prandtl’s membrane analogy,

7 Kirchoff’s law, Fundamental boundary value problems

8 Inverse and Semi inverse method of solving Elasticity problems.

UNIT IV

1 General case of Plane stress and Plane strain.

2 Transformation of compatibility condition from strain component to stress

components.

3 Relation between plane stress and plane strain

4 Airy stress function, Investigation for simple beam problems.

5 Bending of narrow cantilever under end load and problems.

6 Simply supported beam with uniform load and problems.

7 Simply supported beam with uniform load and problems.

8 Torsion of circular bar.

9 Torsion of elliptical cross section.

10 Torsion of triangular cross section.

11 Stress function, torsion of thin walled tubes.

12 Problems on torsion of thin walled tubes.

13 Torsion of multiple cell closed sections.

14 Problems Torsion of multiple cell closed sections.

UNIT V

Thick cylinder under uniform internal and / or external pressure

Thick cylinder under uniform internal and / or external pressure

Problems on Thick cylinder under uniform internal and / or external pressure

Problems on Thick cylinder under uniform internal and / or external pressure

Shrink fit and force fit.

Rotating disks of uniform thickness.

Problems on Rotating disks of uniform thickness,

Circular disk with a hole.

Stress concentration.

Problems on Circular disk with a hole.

Problems on Circular disk with a hole.

Problems on stress concentration.





Mapping of Course Outcomes (CO) with Program Outcomes (POs) and

Program Specific Outcomes (PSOs)

Course Outcome Program Outcomes PSOs

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

1 Describe and calculate the state

of stress at a point and principal

stresses and construct the

Mohr’s circle.

2 2 1

2 2

2

2 Determine state of a strain at a

point and principal strains. 2 2

2

2

3 Discuss the stress and strain

relations. 2 2

2

2

4 Compute and analyze bending

and shear stresses and deflections

induced in beams and torsional

stresses of thin walled and

multiple cell closed sections.

2 2 1 2

2

5.

Determine stresses in thin and

thick cylinders analyze stress

concentration

2 2 1 2

2




Course Title: NON DESTRUCTIVE TESTING



Prerequisites:- Subject requires student to know about Various, Manufacturing methods,

Testing methods and Applications

COURSE OUTCOMES


1. Analyze ND testing; visual inspection, leaks testing, liquid penetration inspection and

magnetic particle inspection. Examine application and limitation.

2. Analyze Eddy current inspection, microwave inspection and microwave holography.

Examine applications and limitations

3. Analyze Ultrasonic inspection. Examine applications and limitations

4. Analyze Radiography inspection and Thermal inspection. Examine applications and

limitations

5. Analyze Optical and Acoustical holography. Examine applications, limitations and

Indian Standard for NDT


NDT is a foundation course in BE (automobile engineering) program that helps for the

understanding of NDT is used in a variety of settings that covers a wide range of industrial

activity, with new NDT methods and applications, being continuously developed. Non-

destructive testing methods are routinely applied in industries where a failure of a component

would cause significant hazard or economic loss, such as in transportation, pressure vessels,

building structures, piping, and hoisting equipment.

COURSE CONTENT

UNIT-I

Introduction to ND testing: selection of ND methods, visual inspection, leaks testing,

liquid penetration inspection, its advantages and limitations.

Magnetic particle inspection: Methods of generating magnetic field, types of magnetic

particles and suspension liquids – steps in inspection – application and limitation.

11 Hrs

UNIT-II

Eddy current inspection: principles, operation variables, procedure, inspection coils, and

detectable discounts by the method.

Microwave inspection: Microwave holography, applications and limitations. 11 Hrs

UNIT-III

Ultrasonic inspection: Basic equipment characteristics of ultrasonic waves, variables

inspection. Inspection methods pulse echo A, B, C scans transmission, resonance techniques

transducer elements, couplets, search units, contact types and immersion types inspection

standard-standard reference blocks, inspection of products like casting, extrusions, rolled

product, weld set. 10 Hrs

UNIT-IV

Radiography inspection: Principles, radiation source-Rays and gamma rays-rays tubes,

radio graphic films, scenes and filters, image intensifiers, techniques charts, industrial

radiography, image quality, radiography sensitivity, Penera motors, electron, neural

radiology, application of ICT. Thermal inspection principles, equipment inspection methods

applications. 10 Hrs




UNIT-V

Optical Holography: Basics of Holography, recording and reconstruction-info metric

techniques of inspection, procedures of inspection, typical applications. Acoustical

Holography: systems and techniques applications. Indian Standard for NDT. 10 Hrs

Text Books:

1. Baldev Raj, T. Jayakumar, M. Thavasimuthu, “Practical Non-destructive Testing”,

2. Mcgonnagle JJ “Non Destructive testing” – Garden and reach, New York

Reference Books:

1. “Non destructive Evolution and quality control” volume 17 of metals hand book 9

edition, Asia internal 1989

2. Davis H.E Troxel G.E Wiskovil C.T “Testing Instruction of Engineering

Materials”McGrew hill.

UNIT-I


After learning the contents of Unit-1, the student is able to

Interpret and Describe about, ND testing, its Types, selection of ND methods, Visual inspection,

its advantages and limitations, Leaks testing, its advantages and limitations., Liquid penetration

inspection, its advantages and limitations, Magnetic particle inspection, Methods of generating

magnetic field, types of magnetic particles and suspension liquids, steps in inspection, ND

testing application and limitation.

UNIT-II

After learning the contents of Unit-II, the student is able to

Interpret and Explain about Eddy current inspection, its principles, Instrumentation for Eddy

current inspection operation variables, procedure, inspection coils, and detectable discounts by

the method, Microwave inspection: Microwave holography, Advanced Eddy current testing

methods, applications and limitations.

UNIT-III

After learning the contents of Unit-III, the student is able to

Describe and Compare about Ultrasonic inspection, Basic equipment characteristics of ultrasonic

waves, variables inspection, inspection methods pulse echo A, B, C scans transmission,

resonance techniques transducer elements, couplets, search units, contact types and immersion

types inspection standard-standard reference blocks, inspection of products like casting,

extrusions, rolled product, weld set

UNIT-IV

After learning the contents of Unit-IV, the student is able to

Interpret and Describe about Radiography inspection Principles, radiation source-x-rays and

gamma rays-rays tubes, radio graphic films, scenes and filters, image intensifiers, techniques

charts, industrial radiography, image quality, radiography sensitivity, Penera motors, electron,

neural radiology, application of ICT. Thermal inspection principles, equipment inspection

methods applications.

UNIT-V

After learning the contents of Unit-V, the student is able to

Interpret and Explain about Optical Holography Basics of Holography, recording and

reconstruction-info metric techniques of inspection, procedures of inspection, typical

applications. Acoustical Holography: systems and techniques applications. Indian Standard for

NDT.

https://www.google.co.in/search?sa=X&biw=1024&bih=643&tbm=bks&tbm=bks&q=inauthor:%22Baldev+Raj%22&ved=0ahUKEwjsnP2o9ZXLAhUJc44KHQy1D_MQ9AgIMDAA

https://www.google.co.in/search?sa=X&biw=1024&bih=643&tbm=bks&tbm=bks&q=inauthor:%22T.+Jayakumar%22&ved=0ahUKEwjsnP2o9ZXLAhUJc44KHQy1D_MQ9AgIMTAA

https://www.google.co.in/search?sa=X&biw=1024&bih=643&tbm=bks&tbm=bks&q=inauthor:%22M.+Thavasimuthu%22&ved=0ahUKEwjsnP2o9ZXLAhUJc44KHQy1D_MQ9AgIMjAA

https://books.google.co.in/books?id=qXcCKsL2IMUC&printsec=frontcover&dq=Non+Destructive+testing&hl=en&sa=X&ved=0ahUKEwjsnP2o9ZXLAhUJc44KHQy1D_MQ6AEILjAA




LESSON SCHEDULE

UNIT-I

1. Introduction and principles of ND testing

2. Types of ND testing

3. Selection of ND methods,

4. Visual inspection, its advantages and limitations.

5. Leaks testing, its advantages and limitations.

6. Liquid penetration inspection, its advantages and limitations.

7. Magnetic particle inspection

8. Methods of generating magnetic field,

9. Types of magnetic particles and suspension liquids

10. Steps in inspection

11. ND testing application and limitation.

UNIT-II

1. Introduction and principles of Eddy current inspection

2. Principles of Eddy current inspection

3. Instrumentation for Eddy current inspection

4. Operation variables

5. Procedure of Eddy current inspection

6. Inspection coils, and detectable discounts by the method,

7. Applications and limitations

8. Microwave inspection

9. Microwave holograph

10. Advanced Eddy current testing methods

11. Applications and limitations.

UNIT-III

1. Introduction and principles of Ultrasonic inspection

2. Basic equipment characteristics of ultrasonic waves, variables inspection

3. Inspection methods pulse echo A, B, C scans transmission

4. Resonance techniques transducer elements,

5. Couplets, search units,

6. Contact types and immersion types

7. Inspection standard-standard reference blocks,

8. Inspection of products like casting, extrusions, rolled product and weld set

9. Applications of Ultrasonic inspection

10. Merits and Limitations of Ultrasonic inspection

UNIT-IV

1. Introduction and Radiography inspection Principles,

2. Radiation source-Rays and gamma rays-rays tubes,

3. Radio graphic films, scenes and filters, image intensifiers,

4. Techniques charts, industrial radiography,

5. Image quality, radiography sensitivity,

6. Penera motors, electron, neural radiology,

7. Application of ICT. Thermal inspection principles,

8. Equipment inspection methods and applications.

9. Applications and limitations of Radiography

10. Safety in industrial Radiography




UNIT-V

1. Introduction and principles of Optical Holography

2. Basics of Holography,

3. Recording and reconstruction

4. Info-metric techniques of inspection

5. Procedures of inspection,

6. Typical applications.

7. Acoustical Holography:

8. Systems and techniques applications.

9. Merits and limitations of Optical Holography and Acoustical Holography

10. Indian Standard for NDT.

REVIEW QUESTIONS

1. Write a note on ND testing.

2. List and briefly explain different Types of ND testing.

3. Write a note on selection of ND methods.

4. What do understand by Visual inspection in ND testing?

5. What are the advantages and limitations of Visual inspection in ND testing?

6. How Leaks testing is carried out in ND testing?

7. What are the advantages and limitations of Leaks testing?

8. Explain the steps followed in Liquid penetration inspection?

9. Leaks testing advantages and limitations Liquid penetration inspection?

10. Explain Magnetic particle inspection in typical ND testing methods.

11. Explain various Methods of generating magnetic field for ND testing.

12. What are the different types of magnetic particles and suspension liquids

13. What are ND testing applications and what are their limitations?

14. Write a note on Eddy current inspection

15. Explain the Principles of Eddy current inspection

16. Explain about Instrumentation for Eddy current inspection

17. What are Operation variables of Eddy current inspection?

18. Explain the Procedure of Eddy current inspection

19. Write a note on inspection coils, and detectable discounts by the method, used in Eddy

current inspection

20. What are the Applications and limitations of Eddy current inspection

21. What are the Applications and limitations of Eddy current inspection

22. Explain about Microwave inspection

23. What are the Applications and limitations of Microwave inspection

24. What is Microwave holography? Explain

25. What are Advanced Eddy current testing methods?

26. What are the Applications and limitations of Microwave holography?

27. Explain the basic principle of Ultrasonic inspection

28. What are the Basic equipment characteristics of ultrasonic waves

29. Write a note on variables inspection

30. Explain with neat sketches inspection methods pulse echo A, B, C scans transmission

31. What are the limitations of pulse echo A, B, C scans transmission? Explain

32. Explain Resonance techniques transducer elements,

33. Explain, Couplets, search units

34. What do you mean by Contact types and immersion types

35. Write a note on Inspection standard-standard reference blocks

36. What observations shall be made with the Inspection of products like casting, extrusions,

rolled product and weld set




37. What are the Applications of Ultrasonic inspection

38. Explain the Merits and Limitations of Ultrasonic inspection

39. Write a note on Radiography inspection Principles

40. Explain electromagnetic radiation source –X Rays and gamma rays-rays

41. Write a note on tubes, radio graphic films, scenes and filters,

42. What do you mean by image intensifiers? Explain

43. Write a note on techniques charts.

44. Write a note on industrial radiography and Safety in industrial Radiography.

45. Briefly explain, Image quality and radiography sensitivity,

46. What is the principle of neural radiology?

47. What is the application of ICT.

48. What are Thermal inspection principles

49. Explain equipment for Thermal inspection

50. Explain the methods applications for Thermal inspection.

51. Explain the basic principles of Optical Holography

52. Explain the Basics of Holography

53. What do you mean by recording and reconstruction

54. Explain Info-metric techniques of inspection

55. Explain the procedures of inspection

56. What are the typical applications of Optical Holography

57. Explain the basic principles of Acoustical Holography

58. Compare Optical Holography and Acoustical Holography

59. What are the systems and techniques applications?

60. What are the Merits and limitations of Optical Holography

61. What are the Merits and limitations of Acoustical Holography

62. Write a note on Indian Standard for NDT.

Course articulation Matrix


Outcomes (PSOs)

SL.

NO. Statement

Programme Outcomes

Programme

Specific

outcomes

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

1

Analyze ND testing; visual inspection,

leaks testing, liquid penetration inspection

and magnetic particle inspection. Examine

application and limitation.

3 3 1 - 1 1 1 - - - - 2 3 2 1

2

Analyze Eddy current inspection,

microwave inspection and microwave

holography. Examine applications and

limitations

3 3 1 - 1 1 1 - - - - 2 3 2 1

3 Analyze Ultrasonic inspection. Examine

applications and limitations 3 3 1 - 1 1 1 - - - - 2 3 2 1

4

Analyze Radiography inspection and

Thermal inspection. Examine applications

and limitations

3 3 1 - 1 1 1 - - - - 2 3 2 1

5

Analyze Optical and Acoustical

holography. Examine applications,

limitations and Indian Standard for NDT

3 3 1 - 1 1 1 - - - - 2 3 2 1




Model question Paper

Non-Destructive Testing (P15AU653)

Note: Answer FIYE full questions, selecting ONE full question from each UNIT

Qn.

No. Question Marks

Bloom’s

Level

UN

IT-1

1(a) List are the objectives of Leak Testing? Explain any one of the

methods with neat sketch to detect flaws using this technique. 10 L1,L2, L3

(b) Define a borescope for NDT? Explain any one type of borescope with a

neat sketch. 10 L1,L2, L3

2(a) Explain with block diagram, water washable system of liquid

penetrant inspection. 10 L1, L3

(b)

Explain, the various steps involved in magnetic particle inspection

method and the importance of demagnetrzation of the test piece after the

test is conducted

10 L2

UN

IT-2

3(a) Explain the effect of following parameters on Eddy current inspection:

i) Test frequency, ii) Lift off, iii) Conductivity, iv) Permeability 10 L2

(b) Explain various types of coils used in Eddy current inspection with neat

sketches. 10 L2, L3

4(a) Sketch and explain transmission technique used for microwave

inspection 10 L2, L3

(b) Sketch and explain, the concept of Microwave holography 10 L2, L3

UN

IT-3

5(a) Classify ultrasonic waves on the basis of the mode of particle

displacement? Define the characteristics with neat sketches 10 L2,L1, L3

(b) Explain the major variables in ultrasonic waves 10 L2

6(a) Briefly discuss pulse - Echo technique of ultrasonic inspection and its

application 10 L2, L3

(b) Discuss with Line diagram the C - scan display used for ultrasonic

inspection 10 L2, L3

UN

IT-4

7(a) Describe production of γ-rays? Explain the method of inspection using

γ-rays. Give its applications 10 L1,L2, L3

(b) Discuss applications and limitations of radiographic inspection 10 L2, L3

8(a) Outline about safety in industrial radiography 10 L1

(b) Explain, the principal of operation of an x-ray unit 10 L2

UN

IT-5

9(a) Describe the basic principle of optical holography? List the advantages

and limitations of the process 10 L1/L2

(b) Describe continuous wave & pulsed laser techniques used in optical

holography 10 L1/L2

10(a) Discuss the applications of optical holography 10 L2, L3

(b) State advantages and Disadvantages of using optical holographic

interferometry for nondestructive inspection 10 L1




Course Title: AUTOMOTIVE AIR CONDITIONING

Course Code: 15AU654 Semester: 6 L:T:P:H- 4:0:0:4 Credits:3


Prerequisites: At the end of the course, the students will be able to understand the components of the

automotive air-conditioning and their functions and the latest developments in this field.


This Course aims to

1. Learn the Basic air conditioning system.

2. Explain the concepts of Air conditioning and heating.

3. Interpret about the conventional and modern refrigerants for automotive applications.

4. Summarize about the air control, handling, trouble shooting and servicing.


1. The subject AUTOMOTIVE AIR CONDITIONING is an Elective course in BE

(Automobile Engineering) program that helps for the understanding, Basics of air

conditioning system heater system and Refrigerants and also it’s Classification.

2. Further this course aims at developing and understanding the components of the

automotive air-conditioning and their functions, conventional and modern refrigerants for

automotive applications, the air control, handling and the latest developments in

automotive field.

COURSE CONTENT

UNIT – I AIRCONDITIONING FUNDAMENTALS Basic air conditioning system - location of air

conditioning components in a car, schematic layout of a refrigeration system, compressor

components, condenser and high pressure service ports, thermostatic expansion valve, expansion

valve calibration, controlling evaporator temperature, evaporator pressure regulator, evaporator

temperature regulator. 12 hrs

UNIT-II

AIR CONDITIONER HEATING SYSTEM Automotive heaters, manually controlled air

conditioner, heater system, automatically controlled air conditioner and heater systems,

automatic temperature control, air conditioning protection, engine protection 10 Hrs.

UNIT-III REFRIGERANTS Refrigerant Classification, Designation, Alternate Refrigerants, Global

Warming Potential & Ozone Depleting Potential aspects. Handling refrigerants 10 Hrs

UNIT-IV

AIR ROUTING AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL Objectives, evaporator airflow through

the recirculating unit, automatic temperature control, duct system, controlling flow, vacuum

reserve, testing the air control and handling systems. 10 Hrs

UNIT-V AIR CONDITI0NING SERVICE Causes of air conditioner failure - Trouble shooting of air

controlling system - Air conditioner maintenance and service - Servicing heater system.

Removing and replacing components – leak testing - Compressor service. 10 Hrs

TEXT BOOK:

1. William H. Crouse and Donald I. Anglin -“Automotive Air conditioning”-

McGraw Hill 1990




REFERENCES:

1. Mitchell information Services, Inc -“Mitchell Automatic Heating and Air Conditioning

Systems” - Prentice Hall Ind.

2. Paul Weiser - “Automotive Air Conditioning” - Reston Publishing Co., Inc.,

3. Macdonald, K.I., - “Automotive Air Conditioning” - Theodore Audel series

4. Goings.L.F. – “Automotive Air Conditioning” - American Technical services

5. Boyce H.Dwiggins – “Automotive Air Conditioning” - Delmar –

Course Outcomes


1. Explain the Basic air conditioning system.(L1)

2. Explain the concepts of Air conditioning and heating. (L1,L2)

3. Interpret about the conventional and modern refrigerants for automotive

applications.(L1,L2.L3)

4. Summarize about the air control, handling, trouble shooting and servicing.(L1,L2)

5. Explain the causes of air conditioning failure and trouble shooting of air control system

(L1, L2)

UNIT WISE PLAN

UNIT-1


After learning the contents of Unit-I, the student is able to,

Recognize about

Basic air conditioning system - location of air conditioning components in a car, schematic

layout of a refrigeration system.

Explain about

Compressor components, condenser and high pressure service ports, thermostatic expansion

valve, expansion valve calibration, controlling evaporator temperature, evaporator pressure

regulator, and evaporator temperature regulator.

LESSON SCHEDULE

1. Basic air conditioning system,

2. Location of air conditioning components in a car,

3. Schematic layout of a refrigeration system,

4. Compressor components,

5. Compressor components,

6. Condenser and high pressure service ports,

7. Thermostatic expansion valve,

8. Expansion valve calibration,

9. Controlling evaporator temperature

10. Evaporator pressure regulator,

11. Evaporator temperature regulator,

12. Revision.

UNIT-II


After learning all the topics of unit-ll, the student is able to

Describe about

Automotive heaters, manually controlled air conditioner, heater system, automatically controlled

air conditioner and heater systems.

Explain about

Automatic temperature control, air conditioning protection, engine protection.




LESSON SCHEDULE

1. Automotive heaters,

2. Manually controlled air conditioner,

3. Heater system,

4. Automatically controlled air conditioner,

5. Automatically controlled air conditioner and heater systems ,

6. Automatic temperature control,

7. Air conditioning protection,

8. Air conditioning protection,

9. Engine protection,

Revision

UNIT-III


After learning all the topics of unit-III, the student is able to

Describe about

Refrigerant, Designation, Alternate Refrigerants, Global Warming Potential & Ozone Depleting

Potential aspects. Handling refrigerants.

Classify Refrigerant, Interpret about, Conventional and modern refrigerants for automotive

applications.

LESSON SCHEDULE

1. Refrigerant, Designation,

2. Alternate Refrigerants ,

3. Global Warming Potential,

4. Ozone depleting potential aspects,

5. Handling refrigerants,

6. Classifications of refrigerant,

7. Conventional refrigerants,

8. Modern refrigerants,

9. Conventional and modern refrigerants for automotive applications.

10. Revision

UNIT-IV


After learning all the topics of unit-IV, the student is able to Explain about

Objectives, evaporator airflow through the recirculating unit, automatic temperature control,

duct system, controlling flow, vacuum reserve, testing the air control and handling systems.

LESSON SCHEDULE

1. Objectives

2. Evaporator airflow through the recirculating unit,

3. Evaporator airflow through the recirculating unit,

4. Automatic temperature control,

5. Duct system,

6. Controlling flow,

7. Vacuum reserve,

8. Testing the air control and handling systems,

9. Testing the air control and handling systems,

10. Revision.




UNIT-V


After learning all the topics of unit-V, the student is able to

Explain about Causes of air conditioner failure, Trouble shooting of air controlling system, Air

conditioner maintenance and service, Air conditioner maintenance and service, Servicing heater

system, Removing and replacing components, Leak testing, Compressor service,

Lesson Schedule

1. Causes of air conditioner failure,

2. Trouble shooting of air controlling system,

3. Trouble shooting of air controlling system,

4. Air conditioner maintenance and service,

5. Air conditioner maintenance and service,

6. Servicing heater system,

7. Removing and replacing components,

8. Leak testing,

9. Compressor service,

10. Revision.

REVIEW QUESTIONS

1. Explain Basic air conditioning system,

2. Describe Location of air conditioning components in a car,

3. Explain Schematic layout of a refrigeration system,

4. Describe Compressor components,

5. Explain Compressor components,

6. Describe Condenser and high pressure service ports,

7. Explain Thermostatic expansion valve,

8. Describe Expansion valve calibration,

9. Explain Controlling evaporator temperature,

10. Describe Evaporator pressure regulator,

11. Explain Evaporator temperature regulator,

12. Describe Revision.

13. Explain Automotive heaters,

14. Describe Manually controlled air conditioner,

15. Explain Heater system,

16. Describe Automatically controlled air conditioner,

17. Explain Automatically controlled air conditioner and heater systems ,

18. Describe Automatic temperature control,

19. Explain Air conditioning protection,

20. Describe Air conditioning protection,

21. Explain Engine protection,


23. Explain Refrigerant, Designation,

24. Describe Alternate Refrigerants ,

25. Explain Global Warming Potential,

26. Describe Ozone depleting potential aspects,

27. Explain Handling refrigerants,

28. Describe Classifications of refrigerant,

29. Explain Conventional refrigerants,

30. Describe Modern refrigerants,

31. Explain Conventional and modern refrigerants for automotive applications.




32. Describe Revision

33. Explain Objectives

34. Describe Evaporator airflow through the recirculating unit,

35. Explain Evaporator airflow through the recirculating unit,

36. Describe Automatic temperature control,

37. Explain Duct system,

38. Describe Controlling flow,

39. Explain Vacuum reserve,

40. Describe Testing the air control and handling systems,

41. Explain Testing the air control and handling systems,


43. Explain Causes of air conditioner failure,

44. Describe Trouble shooting of air controlling system,

45. Explain Trouble shooting of air controlling system,

46. Describe Air conditioner maintenance and service,

47. Explain Air conditioner maintenance and service,

48. Describe Servicing heater system,

49. Explain Removing and replacing components,

50. Describe Leak testing,

51. Explain Compressor service,




Outcomes (PSOs)

SL.

NO. Statement

Programme Outcomes

Programme

Specific

outcomes

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

1 Explain the Basic air conditioning

system. 3 - - - - - - - - - - 2 2 - -

2 Explain the concepts of Air

conditioning and heating. 3 2 - - - - - - - - - 2 2 - -

3

Interpret about the conventional and

modern refrigerants for automotive

applications.

3 2 - - - - - - - - - 2 2 2 -

4

Summarize about the air control,

handling, trouble shooting and

servicing.

3 - - - - - - - - - - 2 2 - -

5

Explain the causes of air conditioning

failure and trouble shooting of air

control system

3 2 - - - - - - - - - 2 2 - -




Course Title: OPERATIONS RESEARCH

CourseCode: 15AU661 Semester: 6 L:T:P:H- 4:0:0:4 Credits:3


Course Learning Objectives (CLOs)

This course aims to:

1. Introduce students to use quantitative methods and techniques for effective decisions–

making;

2. Fundamentals of OR, formulation of linear programming problems.

3. Graphical solution, Simplex method, duality principles.

4. Various types of transportation and assignment problems

5. Replacement of machines at suitable time, queing model, Network analysis(PERT/CPM)

6. Games theory, replacement and maintenance management methods by graphical method

and dominance rule.

COURSE CONTENT

UNIT-I

Introduction: Definition, scope of Operations Research (O.R), limitations, OR Models,

Characteristics and phases of OR. Mathematical formulation of L.P. Problems, Graphical

solution methods.

Linear Programming Problems: The simplex method - slack, surplus , Concept of duality,

dual simplex method, degeneracy. 11hrs

UNIT-II

Transportation Problem: Formulation of transportation model, Basic feasible solution using

different methods, Optimality Methods, Unbalanced transportation problem, Degeneracy in

transportation problems, Applications of Transportation problems.

Assignment Problem: Formulation, maximization, unbalanced assignment, traveling salesman

problem. 10hrs

UNIT-III Sequencing:Johnsons algorithm, n - jobs to 2 machines, n jobs 3machines, n jobs n machines

without passing sequence. 2 jobs n machines with passing. Graphical solutions

Queuing Theory, Queuing system and their characteristics. The M/M/1 Queuing system,

Steady state performance, analysis of M/M/1 queuing model. 11 Hrs

UNIT-IV PERT-CPM Techniques: Network construction, determining critical path, floats, scheduling by

network, project duration, variance under probabilistic models, prediction of date of

completion, crashing of simple networks. 10hrs

UNIT-V

Game Theory: Formulation of games, Two person-Zero sum game, games with and without

saddle point, Graphical solution (2x n , m x 2 game), dominance property.

Inventory: Deterministic models with and without shortages; replenishment, mean time,

ordering cost, carrying cost, Economic order quantity(EOQ) 10hrs

TEXT BOOKS:

1. S.D.Sharma, “Operation Research”, Kedaranath&Ramnath Publications, 5th edition 2005

2. KantiSwaroop, “Operation Research”, Sultan Chand Publications 8th edition 2000.




3. Operations Research and Introduction, TahaH . A. – Pearson Education edition

4. Operations Research, S. D. Sharma –KedaranathRamnath& Co 2002.

References: 1. Philip Ravindran, “Operation Research”, Wiley Publications, 2nd edition 1987.

2. Hamid Taha, “Introduction to Operation Reaserch”, Pearson 7th edition,2005.

Course Outcomes(COs)

After learning all the units of the course student should be able to: 1. Identify and develop operation research models from the verbal description of real life.

2. Analyze real life problems using mathematical tool such as linear programming.

3. Describe transportation model and solving technique and analyze the results.

4. Solve assignment problem using different methods.

5. Explain the game theory with their characteristics and solve related problems.

Unit wise plan

UNIT-I

TOPIC LEARNING OBJECTIVES (TLOS)

After learning all the topics of unit – I, the student is able to:

1. Understand about the OR, importance of OR, scope of the OR

2. Explain the OR model formulation , characteristics of OR

3. Understand the various phases of OR formulation of LP problems

4. Analyse the solutions of LP problems.

LESSON SCHEDULE

Class Portion covered per hour (An estimate)

1. Introduction: Definition, scope of Operations Research (O.R),

2. limitations, OR Models,

3. Characteristics and phases of OR.

4. Mathematical formulation of L.P.

5. Problems, Graphical

6. Problems, Graphical

7. solution methods.

8. Linear Programming Problems: The simplex method - slack,

9. surplus , Concept of duality,

10. dual simplex method, degeneracy

11. Problems

UNIT-II

TOPIC LEARNING OBJECTIVES (TLOS)

After learning all the topics of unit – II, the student is able to:

1. Understand the concept of LP problems

2. Explain formulation of transportation model

3. Analyse the solution for transportation problems

4. Understand the concept of assignment problem

5. Explain the formulation of assignment problems

6. Analyse the solution for assignment problems




LESSON SCHEDULE


1. Transportation Problem: Formulation of transportation model,

2. Basic feasible solution using different methods,

3. Optimality Methods,

4. Unbalanced transportation problem,

5. Degeneracy in transportation problems,

6. Applications of Transportation problems.

7. Assignment Problem: Formulation,

8. maximization,

9. unbalanced assignment,

10. traveling salesman problem

UNIT-III


After learning all the topics of unit –III, the student is able to:

1. Understand the sequence of operations of different models

2. To find the optimum sequences

3. To find the total elapsed time of given sequences

4. Understand the concept of queuing systems & their characteristics

5. Explain the various models/types of queuing models

6. Analyse the solution for queuing models

LESSON SCHEDULE


1 Johnsons algorithm, n - jobs to 2 machines,

2 n jobs 3machines, n jobs n machines without passing sequence.

3 jobs n machines with passing

4 Graphical solutions

5 Problems

6 Queuing Theory

7 Queuing system and their characteristics

8 The M/M/1 Queuing system,

9 Steady state performance,

10 analysis of M/M/1 queuing model

11 Problems

UNIT-IV


After learning all the topics of unit – IV, the student is able to:

1. Understand the networks & their types

2. Explain the various types of networks

3. Analyze the solutions for the networks

4. Discuss about the crashing of simple networks

LESSON SCHEDULE


1. PERT-CPM Techniques: Network construction,




2. determining critical path,

3. floats, scheduling by network,

4. project duration,

5. variance under probabilistic models,

6. variance under probabilistic models

7. prediction of date of completion,

8. prediction of date of completion

9. crashing of simple networks.

UNIT-V


After learning all the topics of unit – V, the student is able to:

1. Understand the principle &concepts of game theory

2. Explain the various types of games

3. Analyse the solutions for the game problems

4. Understand the meaning &necessary of inventory

5. Explain the various types of costs & invented models

6. Analyse the solutions for inventory models

LESSON SCHEDULE


1. Game Theory: Formulation of games,

2. Two person-Zero sum game,

3. Two person-Zero sum game

4. games with and without saddle point

5. Graphical solution (2x n , m x 2 game),

6. dominance property.

7. Inventory: Deterministic models with and without shortages;

8. replenishment, mean time,

9. ordering cost, carrying cost,

10. Economic order quantity(EOQ),

REVIEW QUESTIONS:

1. Define operation research.

2. Discuss the origin and development of operations research with a suitable classification.

3. Define model. Discuss the steps of modelling.

4. Discuss the scope of operations research.

5. Explain the terminologies of linear programming model.

6. List and explain the assumptions of linear programming problems.

7. Define the following:

(a)alternate optimum solution

(b)Unbounded solution

(c)infeasible solution

(d)Degenerate solution

(e) slack variable

(f) Surplus variable

(g)Artificial variable

(h) Basic variable

(i)Criterion value




8. The manager of an oil refinery has to decide o the optimal mix of two possible blending

processes. The inputs and outputs per production run of the blending process are as

follows:

Input Output

Process crude A crude B Gasoline G1 Gasoline G2

1 5 3 5 8

2 4 5 4 4

The maximum amounts of availability of crude A and B are 200 units, respectively

Market requirements show that atleast 100 units of gasoline G1 80 units’ gasoline G2 must

be produced. The profit per production run from process 1 and process 2are Rs3,00,000

and Rs 4,00,000, respectively. Formulate this problem as a LP model to determine the

number of production runs of each process such that the total profit is maximized.

9. Solve the following LP problem graphically:

Maximize Z=20X1+80X2 subject to

4X1+6X2<=90

8X1+6X2<=100

5X1+4X2<=80

X1 and X2>=0

10. Solve the following LP problem graphically:

Maximize Z=20X1+10X2subject to

X1=+2X2<=40

3X1+X2>=30

4X1+3X2>=60

X1 and X2>=0

11. Write the dual of the following LP problem:

Minimize Z=3X1-2X2+4X3 subject to

3X1+5X2+4X3>=7

6X1+X2+3X3>=4

7X1-2X2-X3<=10

X1-2X2+5X3>=3

4X1+7X2-2X3=>=2

X1,X2 andX3>=0

12. Write the dual of the following LP problem:

Maximize Z=5X1+6X2 subject to

4x1+7x2=20

5x1+2x2=10

6x1+8x2=25

X1 and x2 >=0






Outcomes (PSOs)

SL.

NO. Statement

Programme Outcomes

Programme

Specific

outcomes

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

1 Identify and develop operation research

models from the verbal description of real

life.

3 3 3 - - - - - - - - 3 2 - -

2 Analyze real life problems using

mathematical tool such as linear

programming.

3 3 3 - - - - - - - - 3 2 - -

3 Describe transportation model and solving

technique and analyze the results. 3 3 3 - - - - - - - - 3 2 - -

4 Solve assignment problem using different

methods. 3 3 3 - - - - - - - - 3 2 - -

5 Explain the game theory with their

characteristics and solve related problems. 3 3 3 - - - - - - - - 3 2 - -




Course Title: TWO AND THREE WHEELED VEHICLES

Course Code: P15AU662 Semester: VI L:T:P:H- 4:0:0:4 Credits:3


Prerequisites: To be an Automobile engineer, the student needs to have a basic knowledge of

the automobile engineering, auxiliary systems of automobiles and two and three wheeled

vehicles. The subject of two and three wheeled vehicles involves the study of different types and

arrangement of engine, cooling and lubrication systems, chassis and suspension systems,

maintenance of vehicles and case studies.


This Course aims to

1. Know different types of two wheeler and three wheeler

2. Know types of Lubrication and Cooling System used in two and three wheelers

3. Know Motor cycle power train, motor cycle clutches, construction and operation of

clutches, clutch linkage

4. Know Front forks, fork type and spring type suspension systems used in two and three

wheelers

5. Understand the importance of decarburizing procedure for engine and silencer, periodic

inspection, maintenance schedules


1. The course aims at developing the understand of various two and three wheeled vehicles

and its systems

2. Get expertise in the selection of two and three wheeled vehicles oriented towards making

students to diagnose the problems in their vehicles and maintenance of vehicles

COURSE CONTENT

UNIT I

INTRODUCTION History of two wheeled vehicles, classification of two wheeler, definitions and main features of

moped, scooter and motor cycle, dirt bike, off road bike, sports bike, frames for two wheelers

and three wheelers, manufacturers of two and three wheeled vehicles in India, lay out of

different three wheelers.

The Power Unit: Types of engines for two wheelers, merits and demerits. Symmetrical

and unsymmetrical port timing diagrams. Types of scavenging processes, merits and

demerits, scavenging efficiency, Scavenging pumps. Engine components, reed and rotary

valve engine. Power plant for electric bikes. 10 hrs UNIT-II

FUELS, LUBRICATION AND COOLING SYSTEM

Layout of fuel supply system, fuel tank construction, carburettor types, construction, working

and adjustments. Types of cooling systems, advantages of air cooling system. Lubrication types,

Lubrication of parts, grades of lubricating oils

MOTOR CYCLE TRANSMISSION SYSTEM: Motor cycle drives, chain drive, shaft

drive. Motor cycle power train, motor cycle clutches, construction and operation of

clutches, clutch linkage. Gears and gear ratios, gear box types, Construction and working

gear shifting arrangements. 10 hrs

Unit-III FRAMES AND SUSPENSION: Types and constructional details of two wheeler frames,

advantages and disadvantages and limitations, Frame materials, loads on frames, front fork ,

suspension systems, fork type and spring type, shock absorber construction and working, panel

meters and handle bars.




MOTOR CYCLE BRAKES and wheels: Front and rear braking systems, , friction in

motor cycle brakes, disc and drum brakes, merits and demerits, Types of wheels, load

on wheels, construction, operation and materials for wheels, wheel designation. 12 hrs

UNIT-IV

Electrical System: Types of ignition system, their working principles, wiring diagram for Indian

vehicles, spark plug, plug construction, indicators and gauges used in two wheelers, lighting

systems

MAINTENANCE: Importance of maintenance, Preventive and brake down maintenance,

Decarburizing procedure for engine and silencer, periodic inspection, maintenance

schedules, trouble diagnosis charts, safety precautions, Lubrication charts 10hrs

UNIT-V

Case studies of two wheeler and three wheelers: Case study of major Indian models of motor

cycles, scooters and Mopeds, Electric two wheelers

Case study of Indian models of three wheelers, Front mounted engine and rear mounted

engine types, Auto rickshaws, and pickup van, and trailer, 10 hrs TEXT BOOK:

1. Dhruv U Panchal, “Two and three wheeler Technology”, PHI learning Pvt. Ltd., Aug

2015

2. P.E.Irving“Motor Cycle engines”, Temple Press Book, London,1992

3. William H. Crouse and Donald L.Anglin “Motor Cycle Mechanics”- TATA McGraw-

Hill , 1982

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Srinivas S, Motor cycle, scooters, Mopeds, New century book house, 1988

2. The Cycle Motor Manual - Temple Press Ltd, london1990

3. Michel M Griffin, Motor Cycles from inside and outside, Prenticehall inc, New Jersey,

1998

4. Service manuals of manufacturers of Indian two and three wheelers

COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of the course the student will be able to:

1. Discuss different two wheelers and three wheelers and their specification

2. Describe different Lubrication and Cooling System used in two and three wheelers

3. Discuss different power train, clutches and brake systems used in two and three wheelers

and explain their construction and working principle

4. Discuss different types of frames and suspension and explain their constructional details

used in two and three wheelers

5. Explain the electrical and lighting system of two and three wheelers and explain the

importance maintenance and periodic maintenance Schedule.

Unit Wise Plan

UNIT-1


After learning the contents of Unit-1, the student is able to 1. Describe historical developments classification of two wheeled vehicles

2. Explain the manufacturers two and three wheeled vehicles in India

3. Describe the types of engines for two wheelers and their merits and demerits

4. Explain the port time diagram, valve time diagram and scavenging processes

5. Describe the Power plant for electric bikes.

LESSON SCHEDULE




1. History of two wheeled vehicles and classification

2. Features of moped, scooter and motor cycle, dirt bike, off road bike, sports bike

3. Manufacturers of two and three wheeled vehicles in India

4. Lay out of different three wheelers

5. Types of engines for two wheelers

6. Arrangement of cylinders, merits and demerits

7. Symmetrical and unsymmetrical port timing diagrams

8. Scavenging process, scavenging efficiency

9. Rotary valve engine

10. Power plant for electric bikes

UNIT-II


After learning the contents of Unit-II, the student is able to

1. Explain the necessity of cooling and lubrication in two and three wheeled vehicles

2. Explain the different ways of fuel supply to SI engines. (L2)

3. Explain the mixture requirement for different operating conditions. (L2)

4. Explain Constructional and working principles of different types of carburetors. (L3)

5. Compare the air and water cooling system and advantages and disadvantages

6. Distinguish between different types of radiators

7. Distinguish between different types of radiators. (L4)

8. List the different antifreeze solutions. (L1)

9. Purpose of thermostat in cooling system.

10. Explain the need for transmission

11. Distinguish between positive and non positive drives

12. Explain the Constructional and working principles of different types of clutches

13. Explain the chain drive and shaft drive in two and three wheeled vehicles

14. Explain the constructional and working principle of different types of gear box and gear

shifting mechanisms.

LESSON SCHEDULE

1. Layout of fuel supply system and fuel tank construction

2. Carburettor types, construction,

3. Carburettors working and adjustments

4. Types of cooling systems air cooling system

5. Water cooling systems, Components of water cooling systems

6. Which type of motor cycle has liquid cooled engines? Explain with sketch how the liquid

cooled system works in two wheelers

7. Motor cycle drives, Motor cycle power trains

8. Two wheeler clutches

9. Two wheeler gear boxes

10. Construction and working gear shifting mechanisms

UNIT-III


After learning the contents of Unit-III, the student is able to

1. Identify and explain Types and constructional details of two wheeler frames

2. Explain frame materials

3. Explain loads on frame

4. Identify and explain two wheeler front fork, fork types spring type

5. Explain shock absorber construction and working

6. Explain friction in brakes

7. Explain drum and disc brake constructional features

8. Comparison of drum and disc brakes




9. Describe Brake maintenance, Brake trouble shooting

10. Identify and describe types of wheels

11. Explain loads on wheels and designation of wheels

LESSON SCHEDULE

1. Types and loads on frames

2. Constructional details of two wheeler frames

3. Frame materials, advantages and disadvantages and limitations and different frames

4. Two wheeler and three wheeled vehicles front forks, Fork types

5. Suspension systems and spring types

6. Shock absorber construction and working

7. Panel meters and handle bars

8. Types of brakes, drum brakes

9. Disc brakes, comparison of drum brake and disc brake

10. Inspection of brake system, adjustment of brakes, servicing of brakes

11. Types of wheels, loads on wheels

12. Construction, operation and materials for wheels and wheel designation.

UNIT-IV


After learning the contents of Unit-IV, the student is able to

1. Sketch and explain different types of ignition system used in two wheeled vehicles

2. Sketch and explain wiring diagram for two wheelers

3. Explain the construction and working of spark plugs

4. Explain the indicators and gauges used in two wheelers

5. Explain the lighting systems of two wheelers

6. Explain the importance of maintenance systems

7. Explain decarburizing procedure for engine and silencer

8. Explain the periodic inspection and maintenance schedule

9. Explain the lubrication charts

LESSON SCHEDULE

1) Ignition fundamentals and requirements

2) Types of ignition systems

3) Constructional details of different spark plug

4) Wiring diagram for two wheelers and three wheelers

5) Indicators and gauges

6) Lighting systems

7) Maintenance of two wheelers

8) Decarburizing procedure for engine and silencer

9) Periodic inspection, maintenance schedules,

10) Trouble diagnosis charts, safety precautions, Lubrication charts

UNIT-V


After learning the contents of Unit-V, the student is able to

1. Identify and explain the features of motor cycles, scooters and Mopeds.

2. Identify and explain the features of three wheeled vehicles

3. Identify and explain the features pickup vans and trailer

4. Identify and explain the features of Bijili vehicles

5. Compare the performance and features of two and three wheeled vehicles

6. Work on the given assignment and to get first hand information and also be able to

present and submit a brief report

LESSON SCHEDULE

1. Discussion about features of recent Mopeds

2. Discussion about features of recent scooters




3. Discussion about features of recent Motor cycles

4. Discussion about features of recent Three wheelers

5. Discussion about features of recent Pick up vans

6. Discussion about features of recent in trailers

7. Discussion about features of recent Electric Vehicles

8. Comparison of Mopeds, scooters and Motor cycles based on case studies

9. Comparison of Thee wheeled vehicles based on case studies

10. Case studies pertaining to two wheelers

REVIEW QUESTIONS

1. Write a note on historical developments of two wheeled vehicles

2. Differentiate between a motor Cycle and a Scooter

3. Sketch the different ways in which two cylinders (Twin) are arranged

4. Explain Merits & Demerits of different types of power unit used in two wheel vehicle

5. Write the advantages and disadvantages of 2 - stroke engines and 4 - stroke engine

6. Sketch the various arrangements of cylinders in four cylinder engines. Discuss their

merits and demerits

7. Sketch & explain crankshaft used in two wheelers

8. Sketch different cam and cam follower arrangement

9. With a meat sketch explain symmetrical and nonsymmetrical port diagram

10. Explain Read valve & Rotary valve Mechanism

11. Explain different scavenging process

12. Discuss the power plant for electric bikes

13. What is the difference between slide valve carburetor and a constant vacuum carburetor?

14. Explain the construction and working of venture slide type carburetor.

15. 3.Mention different types of two-cycle engine lubricating system

16. What are the two main complaints about the engine lubricating system

17. Explain the construction and working of plunger type oil plump used in motor cycle

Engines

18. .What are the two main types of cooling systems used in two wheeled vehicles

19. Sketch and explain forced circulation cooling system. What are the merits and demerits?

20. Discuss the different types of radiator matrices commonly used-what are the relative

advantages and disadvantages?

21. What is the necessity of a clutch for a motor cycle? With the aid of sketch describe the

22. Construction and working of multiplate clutch

23. What type of clutch is used in Bajaj auto rickshaw? Describe the construction

24. And operation with neat sketch

25. Describe the working of synchromesh gear box with the help of a neat sketch.

26. With the help of a neat sketch, explain the working of the gear box and the controls in

27. a typical two wheeler.

28. Enumerate the advantages and disadvantages of belt, chain and shaft drive

29. Sketch and explain the following frames: i) Triangulated ii) Backbone iii) Duplex cradle.

Write advantages and disadvantages of each

30. Define trail and rake angle referred to two wheelers

31. Define trailing link and leading link. Why is steering stability important in motorcycle

32. Explain the construction of front fork assembly, with a neat sketch

33. Explain any two rear spring with suitable sketches

34. Discuss the constructions and working of a shock absorber with a neat sketch

35. Explain the disc brake system in two wheeler with suitable sketch

36. Sketch and explain the working of the rear brake and controls in a typical two wheeler

37. Differentiate between disc brake and drum brake,

38. What are the loads acting on a motor cycle wheels?




39. Define spoke wheel. Why different arrangement used for spoke pattern? Compare spoke wheel and cast

wheel 40. Write a note on 'Types of wheels for a two wheeler'.

41. Explain the working of a battery ignition system for a Four-cylinder four stroke

Motor cycle engine.

42. Explain the vacuum advance and centrifugal advance mechanism

43. Draw a complete wiring diagram of a motor cycle and briefly explain the functions of

each component.

44. Explain the construction of a spark plug with a neat sketch.

45. . Compare the battery ignition system with magnet ignition system.

46. Sketch and explain the working of battery ignition system for a single cylinder four

stroke motor cycle engine.

47. Draw a complete wiring diagram of a scooter and briefly explain functions of each

component

48. A. Sketch and explain the working of magneto ignition system for a two wheeler.

49. .Explain the construction of a spark plug, with a neat sketch.

50. What are the periodic inspection checks and how are they performed?

51. What is top end overhaul? What is the biggest difference between servicing a two - cycle

52. Engine and servicing a four-cycle engine?

53. How do you decarbonize a silencer?

54. Discuss the current developments in mopeds

55. Discuss the current developments in any two scooters

56. Discuss the current developments in any two motorcycles

57. Explain the performance and features in recent Auto rickshaws

58. Give the details of recent electric vehicles

59. Compare the features of any three scooters

60. Explain the practical developments took place in two wheelers with the help of case

studies

61. Explain the practical developments took place in three wheelers with the help of case

studies






Outcomes (PSOs)

Sl.

No. Course Outcomes

Programme Outcomes

Programme

Specific

outcomes

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

1 Discuss different two wheelers and

three wheelers and their 3 2 3

2

Describe different Lubrication and

Cooling System used in two and

three wheelers

2 2 3

3

Discuss different power train,

clutches and brake systems used in

two and three wheelers and explain

their construction and working

principle

2 2 3

4

Discuss different types of frames

and suspension and explain their

constructional details used in two

and three wheelers

2 2 3

5

Explain the electrical and lighting

system of two and three wheelers

and explain the importance

maintenance and periodic

maintenance Schedule .

2 2 3


Two and Three Wheeled Vehicles (P15AU662)

Answer any Five Full questions Selecting at least one full question from each Unit

Unit-1

1.

a) Write a note on historical developments of two wheeled vehicles 8M

b) Differentiate between a Mopeds, Scooters and motor Cycle 6 M

c) Explain with neat sketch the layout of three wheeled vehicles 6M

2.

a) Sketch the different ways in which two cylinders (Twin) are arranged. 8M

b) Explain with neat sketch the symmetrical and unsymmetrical port diagram 7 M

c) Explain the Rotary valve Mechanism. 5M

Unit-II

3

a) Mention different types of two-cycle engine lubricating system. Explain any two

types 10M

b) Explain any two types of lubricating oil pumps with sketch 10M

4.

a) Explain the construction & function of a radiator cap? 10M

b) What is the purpose of engine cooling? What are the various components of liquid

cooling system? Compare liquid cooling to air cooling. 10M

Unit-III

5.




a) Explain the constructional details of any three frame structures used in Two Wheeled

Vehicles 10M

b) Sketch and explain any two types of rear springing system 10M

6

a) What type of clutch is used in Auto rickshaw? Describe the construction and operation

b) with sketch 10M

c) Explain with neat sketch the constructional details of disc brake used in two wheeler.

10M

Unit-IV

7.

a) Give the details of wiring diagram of any motor cycle. 10M

b) Explain the CDI system with neat sketch. 10M

8.

a) Explain the decarbonising procedure for two wheeled vehicles 8M

b) Explain the lubrication chart of two wheelers 6M

c) What is periodic maintainance of two wheelers, what are its advantage

6M

Unit-V

9

a) Discuss the current developments in any two motorcycles 10M

b) Compare the features of any three scooters 10M

10.

a) Explain the performance and features in recent Auto rickshaws 8M

b) What are the advantages and disadvantages of Front mounted engine and rear mounted

engine Auto rickshaws 6M

c) Give the details of recent electric vehicles 6M




Prerequisites: Basic knowledge of Management & Entrepreneurship, supply chain management

and Quality concepts.

COURSE LEARNING OBJECTIVES:

This Course aims the students, should be able to:

1. Understand Evolution and principles of TQM.[L1]

2. Understand management thinking process, models and tools for continuous

improvement.[L2]

3. Know the General guidelines and steps for proactive improvement to develop new

product. [L1]

4. Understand involvement of higher, middle and lower management for quality

improvement.[L2]

5. Understand strategic planning in hosing management.[L2]

6. Know Regional and nationwide networking in TQM.[L1]


Total Quality Management is a subject which deals with the concept of,

1. Evolution and principles of TQM,

2. models and tools for continuous improvement,

3. Importance of Reactive and Proactive improvement,

4. Principles of Team and Teamwork,

5. Importance of Societal networking, a TQM model for skill development ,

COURSE CONTENT

UNIT – I

Overview of total quality management: History of TQM. Axioms of TQM, CONTRIBUTION

OF Quality Gurus –Deming’s approach, Juran,s quality trilogy, Crosby quality improvement,

Kaizen, Ishikawa’s companywide quality control, and Feigenbaum;stheory of TQC.

Evolution of Quality Concepts and Methods: Qualityconcepts. Development of four fitness’s,

evolution of methodology, evolution of company integration, quality of conformance versus

quality of design from deviations to weaknesses to opportunities. Future fitness’s, four

revolutions in management thinking and fourlevel of practice. 11 Hours

UNIT – II

Four Revolutions in Management Thinking: Customer focus, Continuous Improvement, Total

participation, and Societal Networking.

Focus on Customers; Change in work concept marketing, and customers.

Continuous Improvement: Improvement As Problem Solving Process; Management By

Process, WV Model Of Continuous improvement, process control, process control and process

improvement, process versus creativity. QC tools; Identifying the problem, standard steps and

tools, seven steps case study, seven QC tools. 10Hours

UNIT-III

Reactive Improvement: Management diagnosis of seven steps of reactive improvement.

General guidelines for management diagnosis of a QI story, Discussion on case study for

diagnosis of the seven steps.

Proactive Improvement; Introduction to proactive improvement, standard steps for proactive

improvement, semantics, example-customer visitation, Applying proactive improvement to

develop new products- three stages and nine steps. 10Hours

Course Title: TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT

Course Code: P15AU664 Semester: VIII L – T – P–H : 3 – 0 – 0 –4 Credits: 3

Contact Period - Lecture: 52Hrs.; Exam: 3Hrs. Weightage: CIE: 50 %; SEE: 50%




UNIT – IV

Total Participation: Teamwork skill. Dual function of work, teams and teamwork, principles

for activating teamwork, creativity in team processes, Initiation strategies, CEO involvement

Example strategies for TQM introduction. Infrastructure for mobilization. Goal setting (Vision/

Mission), organization setting, training and E education, promotional activities, diffusion of

success stories, awards and incentives monitoring and diagnosis, phase-in, orientation phase,

alignment phase, evolution of the parallel organization. 10Hours

UNIT – V

Hoshin Management: Definition, phases in Hoshin management strategic planning (proactive),

Hoshin deployment, controlling with métiers (control), check and act (reactive). Hoshin

management versus management by objective, Hoshin management and conventional business

planning, Hoshin management as “systems Engineering” for alignment.

Societal Networking: Networking and societal diffusion – Regional and nationwide

networking, infrastructure for networking, change agents, Center for quality Management case

study, dynamics of a societal learning system. TQM as learning system, keeping pace with the

need for skill, a TQM model for skill development. 11 Hours

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Shoji Shiba, Alan Graham and David Walden, “A New American TQM Four Practical

Revolutions in Management”, Productivity Press, Portlans (USA), 2001.

2. N Logothetis, “Management for Total Quality t”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi.1994.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1.N.V.R Naidu, K.M.Babu, Rajendra “Total Quality Management”- N.V.R Naidu, K.M.Babu,

Rajendra,”, New Age International (P) Limited, 2013

2.Kesavan R, Total Quality Management I K International Publishing house Pvt. Ltd, 2008

COURSE OUTCOMES

UNIT WISE PLAN

UNIT-I


The Students should be able to,

1. Describe Concept of TQM (L1).

2. Explain History of TQM (L2).

3. Explain Deming’s approach (L2).

4. Describe Juran’s quality trilogy (L2).

5. Describe Crosby &Feigenbaum’s theory of TQC. (L2)

6. Explain Kaizen continuous improvements (L2)

7. Explain evolution of methodology (L2).

8. Compare quality of conformance versus quality of design (L4).

9. Explain the four level of practice in Quality concepts(L2)

1. Ability to discuss the Evaluation of Quality Guru’s approaches and Quality methods.

2. Ability to explain concepts of focus on customers and continuous improvements with QC

tools.

3. Ability to explain concepts of reactive improvement &Proactive improvements with case

studies.

4. Ability to understand the involvement of different levels of management in TQM.

5. Ability to explain objectives and phases in hosing management.

6. Ability to describe Regional and nationwide networking, infrastructure for networking.




LESSON SCHEDULE

1. History of TQM, Axioms of TQM

2. contribution of Quality Gurus –Deming’s approach

3. Juran’s quality trilogy, Crosby quality concepts

4. Ishikawa;s companywide quality control

5. Fegenbaums theory of TQC.

6. Quality concepts.

7. Development of four fatness’s.

8. Evolution of methodology.

9. Evolution of company integration.

10. Quality of conformance versus quality of design from deviations to weaknesses to

opportunities.

11. Future fitness’s, four revolutions in management thinking and four level of practice.

UNIT-II



1. Explain four revolutions in management thinking(L2).

2. Explain Focus on customers(L2).

3. Describe Focus on customers in market(L2).

4. Explain Improvement as problem solving process. (L2)

5. Explain WV model of continuous improvement(L2).

6. Describe process control and improvement (L2).

7. Compare process versus creativity in continuous improvement (L4).

8. Describe the steps involved in identifying the problem(L2).

9. Explain standard steps and tools(L2)

10. Explain 7 QC tools. (L2).

LESSON SCHEDULE

1. Four revolutions in management thinking, Focus on customers

2. Change in work concept marketing, and customers.

3. Continuous improvement: Improvement as problem solving process

4. Management by process

5. WV model of continuous improvement

6. process control, process control and process improvement

7. Process versus creativity.

8. QC tools; Identifying the problem

9. standard steps and tools

10. seven steps case study, seven QC tools

UNIT-III



1. Describe Concept of Reactive improvement (L2).

2. Explain seven steps of reactive improvement (L2).

3. Discussion on case study for diagnosis of the seven steps. (L6).

4. Describe Concept of proactive improvement (L2).

5. Explain standard steps for proactive improvement. (L2)

6. Discussion on case study for customer visitation (L6).

7. Explain three stages to applying proactive improvement to develop new products.(L2).

8. Describe nine steps to applying proactive improvement to develop new products (L2).

LESSON SCHEDULE

1. Reactive improvement:

2. Management diagnosis of seven steps of reactive improvement.

3. General guidelines for management diagnosis of a QI story,




4. Discussion on case study for diagnosis of the seven steps.

5. Proactive improvement; Introduction to proactive improvement,

6. standard steps for proactive improvement,

7. semantics,

8. example-customer visitation,

9. Applying proactive improvement to develop new products- three stages

10. Applying proactive improvement to develop new products nine steps

UNIT-IV



1. Describe Concept of total participation (L2).

2. Explain Teamwork skill(L2).

3. Explain principles for activating teamwork(L2).

4. Explain roles of creativity in team processes(L2).

5. Explain the importance of CEO involvement in TQM. (L2)

6. Describe importance of Infrastructure for mobilization(L2).

7. Explain three phases of TQM Phase-in (L2).

8. Explain evolution of the parallel organization (L2).

LESSON SCHEDULE

1. Total participation: Teamwork skill.

2. Dual function of work, teams and teamwork,

3. Principles for activating teamwork,

4. Creativity in team processes,

5. Initiation strategies, CEO involvement Example strategies for TQM introduction.

6. Infrastructure for mobilization. Goal setting (Vision/ Mission),

7. organization setting, training and E education, promotional activities,

8. Diffusion of success stories, awards and incentives monitoring and diagnosis,

9. phase-in, orientation phase, alignment phase,

10. Evolution of the parallel organization

UNIT-V



1. Describe Concept of Hoshin management (L2).

2. Explain Hoshin deployment (L2).

3. Compare Hoshin management and conventional business planning (L4).

4. Compare Hoshin management versus management by objective (L4).

5. Explain Centre for quality Management with case study. (L2)

6. Explain dynamics of a societal learning system (L2).

7. Describe Regional and nationwide networking (L2).

8. Explain TQM model for skill development (L2).

LESSON SCHEDULE

1. Hoshin management: Definition, phases in hosing management strategic planning

2. Hoshin deployment, controlling with metiers (control),

3. Check and act (reactive). Hoshin management versus management by objective,

4. Hoshin management and conventional business planning,

5. Hoshin management as “systems Engineering” for alignment.

6. Societal networking,Networking and societal diffusion – Regional and nationwide

networking,

7. infrastructure for networking,

8. change agents, Centre for quality Management case study,

9. Dynamics of a societal learning system.

10. TQM as learning system, keeping pace with the need for skill




11. TQM model for skill development

REVIEW QUESTION

1. Briefly explain History of TQM.

2. Define Quality w.r.t to TQM Guru’s.

3. Explain Axioms of TQM

4. List the Deming 14 point’s programme.

5. List the three phases of Juran’s, Trilogy. How these are successfully achieving

company’s quality objectives? Explain.

6. Discuss briefly the contribution of Feigenbaum’s in quality control.

7. Discuss briefly the contribution of Ishikawa in quality control.

8. List the Crosby 14 point’s programme.

9. Explain Kaizen continuous improvement.

10. List the Juran’s14 point’s programme.

11. Discuss in brief the quality of conformance versus quality of design with neat block

diagram

12. List the Four levels of practice? Explain with neat sketch.

13. Explain briefly the evolution of quality concepts with their weakness.

14. With a neat sketch explain briefly the four revolutions in Management thinking.

15. Explain evolution of methodology.

16. Explain evolution of company integration.

17. Explain Quality concept w.r.t to development of four fitness’s.

18. Define continuous improvement ii) customer focus iii) total participation iv) societal

networking w.r.t four revolutions in Management thinking.

19. With a neat block diagram discuss briefly the change in work concept.

20. Explain in brief, product out and market in concept with a neat sketch.

21. With a neat sketch explain in brief product out and market in concept.

22. “WV model is used as a key issues of continuous improvement” comment on this

statement.

23. With a neat sketch briefly explain the WV model of reactive improvement.

24. Explain management by process.

25. Discuss in brief process vs creativity.

26. With a neat sketch explain the process control and process improvement as a problem

solving process

27. List what are the standard steps and standard tools? Explain briefly the 7 QC tools.

28. List the different Management diagnosis of the seven steps. Discuss them briefly.

29. List and explain the George Fisher’s five principles of customer visitation.

30. List and explain briefly the seven key points of customer visitation.

31. With a neat sketch. Explain briefly the early phases of product development.

32. List the seven management and planning tools and explain any two of them.

33. Discuss briefly the seven principles of teamwork based on Shoji Shiba’s observation of

QC circles in Japan.

34. List the three types of goal setting. Explain them in brief.

35. Explain briefly the team positions in company hierarchy.

36. Draw the neat schematic diagram of three typical phases of TQM phase - in. Explain

37. List and explain the seven principles for activating the team work.

38. Explain the different types of teams with sketches.

39. Define is Hoshin Management? Discuss the components of Hoshin Management.

40. Compare Hoshin Management with Management by objectives (MBO).

41. Explain in brief the three phases of Hoshin Management to achieve the goals of TQM.

42. In brief discuss the six elements of infrastructure for networking.

43. What are the 4 aspects of TQM model for skill development? Explain them briefly.

44. Discuss in detail the TQM as a learning system.




45. With a neat sketch explain briefly the six elements of infrastructure for networking.

46. Explain TQM model for skill development.

47. Explain dynamics of a societal learning system.

48. Discuss in detail summary of skill development in societal networking.

49. Write note on i) openness with real cases. ii) Change agents.

50. Write notes on centre for quality management case study.


Mapping of Course Outcomes (CO) with Program Outcomes (POs) and Program Specific Outcomes

(PSOs)

L-Low, M-Moderate, H-High.

Course Articulation Matrix (CAM)

Sl. No Course Outcome – (CO)

Program outcome

(ABET/NBA-(3a-k)

a b c d e f g h i j k

01 Ability to discuss the Evaluation of Quality

Guru’s approaches and Quality methods.

M M L M H M H

02 Ability to explain concepts of focus on

customers and continuous improvements with

QC tools.

M M L M H

03 Ability to explain concepts of reactive

improvement &Proactive improvements with

case studies.

M M L L M H

04 Ability to understand the involvement of

different levels of management in TQM.

M M L L M H

05 Ability to explain objectives and phases in

hosing management.

H M L L M H

06 Ability to describe Regional and nationwide

networking, infrastructure for networking.

H L L M M H




TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT – Model Question Paper Answer any Five Full questions Selecting at least one full question from each Unit

Model Question Paper Marks CO’s Levels

Note: Answer Any FIVE full questions selecting ONE full question from each Unit

1

a) Elaborate the main characteristics of the database approach.

b) Write the classifications of DBMS.

10

10

CO1

CO1

L6

L2

2

a) What are the advantages of DBMS approach

b) Distinguish clearly between the stored and derived attributes.

c) Design an ER diagram for a BANK database schema

05

05

10

CO1

CO2

CO2

L1

L4

L6

Unit-2

3

a) Illustrate the difference between primary and secondary storage?

b) List the main goals of the RAID technology.

c) How a B-tree does differ from a B+-tree?

08

06

06

CO3

CO3

CO3

L2

L2

L1

4

a) Distinguish between the fixed-length and variable-length records.

b) Discuss about the techniques for allowing a hash file to expand

and shrink dynamically.

c) Show the structure of B-tree nodes.

06

08

06

CO3

CO3

CO3

L4

L6

L1

Unit-3

5

a) “Relation must have a key”. Justify this statement.

b) If RESULT 1

1234

3334

6668

4534

And RESULT 2

3334

8886

Then find RESULT 1 U RESULT 2

c) List and explain the additional features of SQL.

06

06

08

CO4

CO4

CO4

L5

L1

L1&L2

6

a) Construct the schema diagram for the COMPANY relational

database schema

b) SELECT *

FROM Employee

WHERE Dno=5;

Interpret the meaning of this SQL statement.

c) Name the aggregate functions in SQL

10

06

04

CO4

CO4

CO4

L3

L5

L1




Unit-4

7

a) Distinguish between the First, Second and Third normal forms.

b) Elaborate the phases of Database design and implementation for

large databases.

08

12

CO5

CO5

L4

L6

8

a) Compose the Inference rules for Functional dependencies.

b) Compare and contrast the two main approaches to conceptual

schema design

c) Illustrate the ACID properties.

06

06

08

CO5

CO5

CO5

L6

L2&L2

L2

Unit-5

9

a) Identify the Object relational features included in SQL-99.

b) Outline the significance of Deductive database.

c) Build a general architecture for an infrastructure-based mobile

platform

06

06

08

CO6

CO6

CO6

L3

L2

L6

10

a) Perceive the advantages and disadvantages of DDBMS?

b) When are HTML, XML and XSL used?

c) Compare the Data mining and Data Warehousing

08

06

06

CO6

CO6

CO6

L5

L1

L5




Course Title: Computer Integrated Manufacturing

Course Code: P15AU664 Sem: 06 L-T-P-H : 4:0:0:4 Credit: 03

Contact Period: Lecture: 52 Hrs Exam: 3 Hrs Weightage: CIE 50%, SEE: 50%

Course objective: This course helps the students to understand production concepts in industries

and to analyze automated flow line and manual assembly line. It also exposes the students to

various inspection technologies used in industry

COURSE CONTENT

UNIT – I

Computer Integrated Manufacturing Systems: Introduction, Automation definition, Types of

automation, CIM, processing in manufacturing, Production concepts, Mathematical Models-

Manufacturing lead time, production rate, components of operation time, capacity, Utilization

and availability, Work-in-process, WIP ratio, TIP ratio, Problems using mathematical model

equations.

High Volume Production System: Introduction Automated flow line symbols, objectives,

Work part transport-continuous, Intermittent, synchronous, Pallet fixtures, Transfer Mechanism-

Linear-Walking beam, roller chain drive, Rotary-rack and pinion, Rachet & Pawl, Geneva

wheel, Buffer storage. 11Hrs

UNIT – II

Analysis of Automated Flow Line: General terminology and analysis, Analysis of Transfer

Line without storage-upper bound approach, lower bound approach and problems, Analysis of

Transfer lines with storage buffer, Effect of storage, buffer capacity with simple problem, Partial

automation-with numerical problem, flow lines with more than two stages, numerical problems.

Manual Assembly Lines: Line balancing & problems, work station process time, Cycle time,

precedence constraints. Precedence diagram, balance delay methods of line balancing largest

candidate rule, Kilbridge and Westers method, Ranked positional weight method, Numerical

problems covering above methods and computerized line balancing. 11Hrs

UNIT – III

Automated Assembly Systems: Design for automated assembly systems, types of automated

assembly system, Parts feeding devices elements of parts delivery system-hopper, part feeder,

Selectors, feedback, escapement and placement analysis of multi station assembly machine,

analysis of single station assembly.

Computerized Manufacturing Planning System: Introduction, Computer Aided process

planning, Retrieval types of process planning , Generative type of process planning, Material

requirement planning, Fundamental concepts of MRP inputs to MRP, Capacity planning.

10Hrs

UNIT – IV

Automated Material Handling And Storage: Material functions, types of material handling

equipment, analysis of material handling systems, design of system, conveyor system, automated

guided vehicle systems, automated storage/retrieval systems, carousel storage systems work in

process storage, interfacing handling & storage with manufacturing.

Industrial Control and Process Planning: Industrial Control Systems, Sensors, Actuators, &

other Control Systems, Discrete Control using PLC. 10Hrs

UNIT – V

Automatic Identification and Data Capture: Overview of automatic identification methods,

Bar code technology, Radio frequency identification, other AIDC technologies.




Inspection Technologies: Introduction, coordinate measuring machines, construction, operation

& programming, software, application and benefits, machine vision & its applications, optical

inspection methods & noncontact non optical inspection techniques. 10Hrs

Text books

1 M.P.Groover, “Automation, Production system & Computer Integrated

manufacturing,” PHI Publication, 2nd edition, 2007.

2 S. Kant Vajpayee “Principles of Computer Integrated Manufacturing,” Prentice Hall

India, 1st Edition, 1998.

References 1 James. A. Rehg and Henry.W. Kraebber, “Computer Integrated Manufacturing,”

Pearson Publication, 3rd Edition, 2004.

2 Ibrahim Zeid, “CAD/CAM,” Tata McGraw Hill, 2nd Edition, 2009

COURSE OUTCOMES At the end of the course the students should be able to:

1. Estimate manufacturing lead time and identify part transfer mechanism and devices

used in high volume production system.

2. Analyze automated flow lines and line balancing process.

3. Summarize computer aided process planning, MRP and automated assembly systems.

4. Identify material handling, storage systems & different control systems.

5. Create new identification methods & Apply inspection techniques.

TOPIC LEARNING OBJECTIVES (UNIT WISE)

UNIT - I


1 Explain the Production System Facilities

2 Discuss Automation in Production systems

3 Illustrate Production concepts and Mathematical Models

4 Explain Transfer Mechanisms.

5 Solve problems on mathematical models.

UNIT - II


1 Analysis of transfer line with storage & without storage.

2 Compare different storage buffers.

3 Solve problems on different flow lines.

4 Explain manual & automated assembly lines.

5 Solve problems on methods of line balancing.

UNIT - III


1 Explain types of automated assembly system.

2 Describe parts feeding devices elements of parts delivery system.

3 Analysis of single station & multistation assembly systems.

4 Discuss Computer Aided Process Planning.

5 Explain Concurrent Engineering & Design for Manufacturing.

UNIT - IV


1 Explain types of material handling equipment.

2 Analysis of material handling systems.

3 Discuss different storage systems.

4 Illustrate different control systems.

5 Describe PLC.

UNIT - V 1 Discuss automatic identification methods.




2 Compare other AIDC technologies.

3 Describe Automated Inspection

4 Demonstrate the working of Coordinate Measuring Machine

5 Discuss Inspection Probes on Machine Tools

REVIEW QUESTIONS

1 Define Automation& Explain types of Automation.

2 Describe the mathematical model of product life cycle.

3 Sketch and explain different work part transfer mechanisms.

4 List the reasons for implementing storage buffers in a production line.

5 Discuss upper bound & lower bound approach.

6 Explain the terms used in line balancing.

7 Illustrate schematically & explain the elements of part delivery system.

8 Discuss retrieval CAPP system with a block diagram.

9 Discuss the fundamental concepts and input to the MRP systems.

10 Name types of material handling equipments.

11 Explain vehicle guidance methods used in AGV, for automated manufacturing systems.

12 Describe the components of a PLC schematically.

13 Explain radio frequency identification method.

14 Discuss other AIDC technologies.

15 Describe Noncontact non optical inspection techniques.

LESSON PLAN

UNIT – I

1 Introduction to manufacturing support system.

2 Define automation and types of automation.

3 CIM and its components.

4 Processing in manufacturing.

5 Production concepts.

6 Mathematical Models.

7 Problems on mathematical models.

8 Introduction automated flow line.

9 Automated flow line symbols & objectives.

10 Work part transport systems.

11 Different transfer mechanisms

UNIT - II

1 Introduction to automated flow line.

2 Analysis of Transfer Line without storage & with storage.

3 Numerical problems on without storage & with storage.

4 Numerical problems on buffer storage & partial automation.

5 Numerical problems on flow line with two stages.

6 Line balancing & problems.

7 Precedence diagram

8 Balance delay methods of line balancing largest candidate rule.

9 Kilbridge and Westers method,

10 Ranked positional weight method.


UNIT - III

1 Introduction to automated assembly systems.

2 Design for automated assembly systems.

3 Types of automated assembly system.

4 Parts feeding devices elements of parts delivery systems.

5 Analysis of multi station assembly machine.




6 Analysis of single station assembly.

7 Introduction to Manufacturing Support System

8 Computer Aided Process Planning

9 Material requirement planning & its fundamentals.

10 Capacity planning.

UNIT - IV

1 Introduction to material functions & types of material handling equipment.

2 Analysis of material handling systems.

3 Automated guided vehicle system.

4 Automated storage/retrieval systems.

5 Carousel storage systems work in process storage.

6 Interfacing handling & storage with manufacturing.

7 Introduction to Industrial Control Systems.

8 Sensors & Actuators.

9 Other Control Systems.

10 Discrete Control using PLC.

UNIT - V

1 Overview of automatic identification methods.

2 Bar code technology.

3 Radio frequency identification.

4 Other AIDC technologies.

5 Introduction to automated Inspection.

6 Coordinate Measuring Machines Construction, operation & Programming.

7 Software, Application & Benefits, Flexible Inspection System.

8 Probes on Machine Tools.

9 Machine Vision, Optical Inspection Techniques.

10 Non contact Non optical Inspection Technologies.







SI.

No. Course Outcomes


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

1 Estimate manufacturing

lead time and identify part

transfer mechanism and

devices used in High volume

production system.

3 3 2

1 2

2 Analyze automated flow

lines and line balancing

process.

3 3 3

1 1

3 Summarize computer aided

process planning, MRP and

Automated assembly

systems.

3 1 1

1 1

4 Identify material handling,

storage systems & different

control systems.

3 2 2

1 1

5 Create new identification

methods & Apply inspection

techniques. 3 1 1

1 1




MODEL QUESTION PAPER


ii) Missing data, if any, may be suitably assumed.

Unit – 1

1 a. Define Automation. Explain different types of automation with examples. 10

b.An average of 10 new orders are started each month. An order consists of 75 parts to be

processed through 8 machines. The average operation time per machine for each part is 25

mins. The average setup time is 5 hrs and average non operation time is 10 hrs. There were

20 workstations in the factory. The plant operates 175hrs/month.Determine (i) MLT (ii)

Plant Capacity (iii) Utilization (iv) WIP (v) TIP Ratio. 10

2 a. Classify and explain Work transport mechanisms with examples. 10

b. List and Explain automated flow line objectives. 10

Unit – 2

3 a. Explain and differentiate between upper bound approach and lower bound approach with

reference to automated flow line. 10

b. A transfer machine has six stations that function as follows:

In addition transfer time is 0.18 mins. Average downtime per occurrence is 8min. Solve the

problem assuming that when station breakdown occurs, the work parts must be removed.

Determine (i) Proportion downtime (ii) Average actual production rate. 10

4 a. Define the following (i) Minimum rational work element (ii) Balance delay (iii) Cycle time

(iv) Precedence Diagram 10

b. Explain with mathematical Expressions different terms in Line Balancing 10

Unit – 3

5 a. With neat figures explain elements of parts delivery system 10

b. With neat sketches explain horizontal and vertical escapement and placement devices 10

6 a. With a block diagram explain two approaches used for designing the CAPP system. 10

b. Describe inputs to MRP system. 10

Unit – 4

7 a. Illustrate the automated Material Handling system with a line sketch 10

b. Define AGV’s. List types of AGV’s. Write a note on Vehicle guidance Technology adopted

in AGV’s 10

8 a. Explain different automated Storage and Retrieval Systems 10

b. Write Short Notes on (i) Sensors (ii) Actuators 10

Unit – 5 9 a. Explain Bar code Technology 10

b. List different automatic identification systems. Explain any one of them 10

10 a. Discuss importance of CMM in ensuring quality in Inspection Methods 10

b. Write short notes on (i) Optical Inspection Methods (ii) Non Contact Inspection Methods

10

Station Operation Process Time(min) Pi

1 Load Part 0.78 0

2 Drilling 1.25 0.02

3 Reaming 0.90 0.01

4 Tapping 0.85 0.04

5 Milling 1.32 0.01

6 Unloading 0.45 0




Course Title: AUTOMOTIVE CHASSIS AND TRANSMISSION LAB

Course Code: P15AUL67 Semester: VI L:T:P:H- 4:0:0:4 Credits:1.5


Prerequisites:


Basic knowledge of an automobile and its layout

Basic knowledge of requirements of an automobile

Basic knowledge of Chassis types and components

Basic knowledge of transmission types and parts

COURSE OUTCOMES (COS):


1. Identify technical specifications of chassis and transmission components.

2. Examine Trouble shooting charts for chassis and transmission components.

3. Analyze by Testing and servicing of electrical components and microprocessors related

to automobiles.

4. Examine Dismantled of chassis and transmission components and identify remedies for

the possible problems Comparing with trouble shooting charts

5. Analyze door, seating arrangements, seat adjustments mechanisms and comfort levels for

driver and passengers.


The automotive chassis and transmission Laboratory is a foundation course in BE (Automobile

Engineering) program that builds the program design and implementation competence in student

through learning through observation about various chassis and transmission components, its

types, materials and functions by practical experience.

The course aims at developing the understanding, of major systems of chassis and transmission

components of automobiles through Dismantling and assembling, their basic specifications,

Trouble shooting charts and Testing and servicing of electrical components. Further, it also helps

them to understand and learn about seating arrangements, seat adjustments mechanisms and

mechanisms of door

COURSE CONTENT

Unit-1 Writing technical specifications and description of all types of chassis and transmission

components of automobiles, including body and interiors (two wheeler, four wheeler and

heavy vehicle – one each)

Unit-2 Trouble shooting charts for major parts of chassis and transmission components of

automobiles like clutch, gear box, differential, brakes, and wheels with tyres, steering

system and suspension

Unit-3 Testing and servicing of electrical components like battery, starting system, ignition

system, central locking system, lighting system, and alternator. Experiments on

microprocessors related to automobiles

Unit-4 Dismantle and assemble of major systems of chassis and transmission components of

automobiles (clutch system, Gear boxes, Propeller shaft, Differential, Front and Rear

axles, brake system, steering system and suspension system) and identifying remedies

(like backlash adjustment, brakes adjustment, bleeding of brakes) for the possible

problems based on trouble shooting charts

Unit-5 Sketching of seating arrangements, seats for commercial vehicle and study the comfort

levels provided for driver and passengers. Sketching of different mechanisms of door,

seat adjustments mechanisms in automobiles.

Text book/References:

Heldt.P.M.- “Automotive Chassis”- Chilton Co., (Nyack, N.Y., P.M. Heldt, 1945)

Literary Licensing, LLC, 2012




Automotive Mechanics – N.K. Giri , Khanna Publications, New Delhi,2008

Automotive Mechanics by William H. Crouse, Tata Mc Graw Hill Publication, New

Delhi, 2007

Service Manuals of the automobiles

Automotive Transmissions and power trains - William H. Crouse, 5th edn., TMH, 1976

Automotive chassis and body – P.L. Kohli, TMH

Hand book of vehicle body design – SAE publication

Vehicle body Engineering by Giles J pawlowski

UNIT WISE PLAN

UNIT-1


Interpret technical specifications and comprehend of different types of

automobiles. L3,L2

Interpret and know different types of chassis and transmission components of

automobiles. L3,L2

UNIT-2


Understand and Relate Trouble shooting charts for major parts of chassis and

transmission components of automobiles.L1,L2

UNIT-3


Gain knowledge about, and Analyze by Testing and servicing of electrical components

of automobiles. L1,L4

Gain knowledge about, and Analyze by Testing and servicing of centre locking systems

of automobiles. L1,L4

Gain knowledge about, and Analyze by Testing and servicing of microprocessors related

to automobiles. L1,L4

UNIT-4


Dismantle and assemble of major systems of chassis and transmission components and

identifying remedies for the possible problems Comparing with trouble shooting

charts.L1,L2

UNIT-5


Understand seating arrangements for driver and passengers and comfort levels. Learn

mechanisms of door and seat adjustments mechanisms in automobiles.L1




Lesson Schedule

UNIT-1

Class Hr. Portion covered per Class hour (An estimate)

1. Technical specifications of different types of automobiles.

Technical specifications of different types of chassis and transmission components of

automobiles.

UNIT-2

Class Hr. Portion covered per Class hour (An estimate) 1. Trouble shooting charts for major parts of chassis and transmission components of

automobiles like clutch, gear box, differential, brakes, and wheels with tyres, steering

system and suspension.

UNIT-3


1. Testing and servicing of electrical components like battery, starting system, ignition

system, central locking system, lighting system, and alternator.

2. Experiments on microprocessors related to automobiles

UNIT-4


Dismantle and assemble of major systems of chassis and transmission components of

automobiles like:

1. Clutch system,

2. Gear boxes,

3. Propeller shaft,

4. Differential,

5. Front and Rear axles, brake system,

6. steering system and

7. suspension system

and identifying remedies (like backlash adjustment, brakes adjustment, bleeding of

brakes) for the possible problems based on trouble shooting charts

UNIT-5


1. Sketching of seating arrangements,

Seats for commercial vehicle and

Study the comfort levels provided for driver and passengers.

Sketching of different mechanisms of door, seat adjustments mechanisms in automobiles







Sl.

No. Statement

Programme Outcomes

Programme

Specific

outcomes

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

1 Identify technical specifications of

chassis and transmission components. 3 3 - - - - - - - - - 2 3 1 1

2 Examine Trouble shooting charts for

chassis and transmission components. 3 3 - - 1 2 1 - 1 - - 2 3 1 1

3

Analyze by Testing and servicing of

electrical components and

microprocessors related to

automobiles.

3 3 - - 1 2 1 - 1 - - 2 3 1 1

4

Examine Dismantled of chassis and

transmission components and identify

remedies for the possible problems

Comparing with trouble shooting

charts

3 3 - - 1 2 1 - 1 - - 2 3 1 1

5

Analyze door, seating arrangements,

seat adjustments mechanisms and

comfort levels for driver and

passengers.

3 3 - - 1 2 1 - 1 - - 2 3 1 1




REVIEW QUESTIONS

1. What is the need of clutch in the automobile?

2. What is the maximum torque for clutch is usually designed?

3. What is the major factor limiting clutch capacity?

4. Why should the inertia of rotating parts of clutch be minimum?

5. What are the disadvantages of a cone clutch?

6. Why is there an upper limit of stiffness for the clutch springs?

7. What is the function of thrust bearing in a clutch?

8. What is the purpose of pressure plate in a clutch?

9. In a clutch with coil springs, how will the axial clamping load vary with wear of clutch

facing?

10. What are the advantages of a friction clutch with a diaphragm spring over the one in which

coil springs are

11. What is the advantage of hydraulically operated clutch, compared to mechanically

operated type?

12. What is the purpose of installing coil springs in the clutch plate?

13. Why do we have cushioning springs in the clutch friction plate?

14. Why are the clutch friction plates perforated?

15. What is the material for clutch facing?

16. Why is asbestos being phased out as material for clutch facings?

17. What are the advantages and disadvantages of glueing and riveting the friction facings on

clutch plates?

18. What is 'clutch free pedal play'? Approximately, how much it is kept at the clutch pedal?

19. What happens when the driver is in the habit of keeping his foot on the clutch pedal

constantly during driving?

20. What will be the most likely result of dropping the clutch in too quickly?

21. What are the advantages and disadvantages of a fluid flywheel?

22. What happens if clutch free pedal play is excessive?

23. What is likely result if clutch free pedal play is less?

24. What is the necessity of a gear box at all in the automobile when the engine speed can be

varied by means of accelerator?

25. 'It is easier to drive over sandy road in top gear than in low gear*. True or false?

26. What is a counter gear?

27. 'All the gears on the lay shaft in a gear box are always rotating when the drive gear is in

motion." True or false?

28. What are the approximate gear ratios provided in a three forward speed gear box?

29. Does the countershaft stand still or rotate when the transmission of the car is being driven

in high gear?

30. Which is better — a gear shift lever on the steering column, or on the top of transmission

case ?

31. What is a synchronizer?

32. Why synchromesh device is usually not employed for the reverse gear?

33. How is the lubrication of a gear box done?

34. Should the grease be used ordinarily for gear box lubrication?

35. What is a transfer box? Where is it used?

36. What are the possible causes of hard gear?

37. What may be the possible reasons when the gear slips out of engagement?

38. What should be the cause when the vehicle is running with excessive noise in the gear

box?

39. What are the three active members of a planetary gear set?

40. In an epicyclic gear set, what is the driven member in forward drive?

41. In an epicyclic gear set, what is the driving member in forward drive?




42. How many gear reductions are possible in a Wilson gear box ?

43. By what means are the members of an epicyclic gear box made stationary?

44. What is the advantage of the epicyclic gear box over the ordinary crash type gear box?

45. What are the advantages and disadvantages of freewheeling?

46. What provision is made for reversing the car which is fitted with a free wheel?

47. What is the basic difference between a fluid flywheel and a torque converter?

48. Name the three operating members of a torque converter.

49. Why is it necessary to have oil under pressure in a torque converter?

50. What force in the torque converter rotates the turbine?

51. During torque conversion what is the direction of oil flow at the turbine outlet?

52. What is the function of stator in a torque converter?

53. Approximately how much torque multiplication occurs at stall?

54. When does maximum torque multiplication occur in a torque converter?

55. What is a coupling point?

56. Why do some torque converters use lock-up clutch?

57. Name the main components of an automatic transmission.

58. Name the material used for (i) converter housing (ii) oil pan (Hi) case.

59. What is an overdrive? What are its advantages?

60. What are the various positions of a control lever for automatic transmissions?

61. What is a continuously variable transmission?

62. Name any two cars using CVT.

63. What is the main limitation of a CVT?

64. Name the factor limiting the capacity of a CVT for torque transmission.

65. What is a toroidal transmission ?

66. State main disadvantages of a toroidal transmission.

67. What is AMT?

68. What is the full form of DCT?

69. How is the length of propeller shaft varied automatically?

70. What is the material used for propeller shaft?

71. Define the whirling of shafts.

72. What is critical whirling speed?

73. Which type of propeller shaft is used in case of Ashok Leyland vehicles?

74. What is the advantage of a two-piece propeller shaft?

75. What is the function of Hooke's joint?

76. Why is it desirable to have small operating angle between shafts in case of Hooke's joint?

77. What is the need for a constant velocity universal joint when the cheaper Hooke's joint is

available?

78. What is a plunging type joint?

79. Name two basic types of constant velocity joints.

80. How is the drive from propeller shaft turned at right angles?

81. What is ‘hypoid'?

82. What is the advantage of hypoid gear over the straight bevel type?

83. What is the effect of 'offset* in hypoid gears?

84. State the materials used for the pinion and the crown wheel.

85. Why do we use multi-start worms for final drive?

86. Which type of final drive is used most commonly?

87. Why do we have a differential in automobile, when we don't have one in a rickshaw?

88. How will be the torque divided between the wheels when the differential is operating on

turns so that the wheels are rotating at different speeds?

89. Does the non-driving axle also require differential? Why?

90. What rotates the differential pinion shaft?

91. What rotates the differential cage?




92. What is a non-slip or limited-slip differential?

93. What are the various loads acting on the rear axles?

94. What is ‘torque reaction'?

95. What is a 'radius rod"?

96. What is a 'pan hard rod'?

97. How many universal joints are used with a torque tube derive? How many on a Hotchkiss

drive? Why?

98. Which member takes the torque reaction in Hotchkiss drive? How?

99. What loads are carried by the axle shaft in case of semi- floating axle?

100. Which loads are withstood by the axle shaft in case of a three-quarter floating axle? How

are the other loads taken up?

101. What loads does the axle shaft carry in fully-floating axle?

102. What carries the weight of the vehicle in the "full-floating" type of rear axle?

103. Which type of rear axle is best suited for cheap, light vehicles?

104. Which type of rear axle is best suited for heavy vehicles?

105. What is a banjo type axle casing?

106. What is a Salisbury type axle casing?

107. In case of a hammering noise from the rear axle, what may be the possible reason?

108. What are the objectives of vehicle suspension?

109. What do you understand by pitching and rolling of a vehicle?

110. What is brake dip?

111. What is unsprung weight?

112. Why is the unsprung weight kept as low as possible?

113. What is the function of a spring?

114. How does a spring absorb vertical loading?

115. How is the side thrust countered in a vehicle?

116. What is the function of a shackle with a leaf spring?

117. What is the material used for leaf springs?

118. If the spring leaves are not lubricated, what may be the result?

119. They say, laminated leaf springs are self-damping. How?

120. What is the effect of moisture on the leaf springs?

121. What is the purpose served by phosphate paint in leaf springs?

122. What is the effect of shot peening on spring levels?

123. How is the fatigue strength of a leaf spring increased?

124. What forces are supported by a leaf spring?

125. What are helper springs?

126. State the advantages of a tapered leaf spring.

127. State the advantages and disadvantages of a coil spring.

128. What is a torsion bar?

129. What material is used for making a torsion bar?

130. State the advantages and disadvantages of a torsion bar.

131. What are the advantages of rubber suspension?

132. State the advantages of a plastic suspension.

133. What is the function of a shock absorber?

134. How is aeration caused in a shock absorber?

135. What is the effect of aeration in the shock absorber?

136. What is the function of a gas-charged shock absorber?

137. What is an inflatable shock absorber?

138. What is shock absorber ratio?

139. How is the variation in shock absorber damping achieved?

140. What are the advantages of independent suspension over the rigid axle suspension?

141. State the disadvantages of independent suspension.




142. What is wishbone type suspension?

143. Which type of independent suspension is mostly used for front drive vehicles?

144. What are the advantages of MacPherson strut suspension?

145. Which type of independent suspension is used in Maruti 800 car?

146. What is a de Dion axle?

147. What is the function of an anti-roll device?

148. What is an interconnected suspension system?

149. State the advantages of an air suspension.

150. State the requirements of a steering system.

151. What is the material used for front axle? How is it manufactured?

152. Why for a front axle do we have I-section in the middle and elliptical section at the ends?

153. What is a stub axle?

154. What is the function of king pin?

155. What is steering axis?

156. What do you understand from * wheel alignment'?

157. What is thrust angle?

158. What is ‘tracking’?

159. State factors of wheel alignment.

160. What happens to vehicle steering if the road wheels are not balanced?

161. Name important angles of steering geometry.

162. Define camber, SAI and castor.

163. What is scrub radius?

164. Name the steering geometry parameter to give road feel to the driver.

165. What should be the approximate amount of the following in a car: camber, kingpin

inclination, included angle, castor and toe- in?

166. If the kingpin and the wheel centre lines meet below the ground, will the wheels try to toe-

in?

167. What is centre point steering?

168. Define perfect steering.

169. What is 'lock* position in steering?

170. Define 'turning circle'. State its approximate value for any (i) car (ii) bus.

171. What is 'toe-out on turns'?

172. Why is it easier to steer a vehicle in reverse than in forward?

173. What is slip angle?

174. Define cornering force and cornering power.

175. What is self-righting torque?

176. What is (i) pneumatic trail (ii) castor trail?

177. Define 'under steer' and 'over steer'.

178. What is the purpose of ball joints in the steering linkage?

179. What is the function of steering gear?

180. Name any three types of steering gears.

181. What is the function of balls in the recirculating ball type steering gear?

182. Why are the teeth on the nut in the recirculating ball type steering gear made tapered?

183. Which is the most popular steering gear for cars?

184. State the advantages of a rack and pinion type steering gear.

185. Why is the pinion usually placed tilted to rack in the rack and pinion type steering gear?

186. What purpose does a tilt wheel column serve?

187. What is the purpose of a telescopic steering column?

188. What is power steering?

189. Name two basic types of power steering.

190. What are the main components of integral power steering system?

191. What is the purpose served by a variable steering ratio steering gear?




192. Out of the camber and the castor, which is measured first and why?

193. Which angle out of the camber and the castor is adjusted first? Why?

194. Name the various gauges used for the checking of wheel alignment.

195. What do you mean by the terms 'wander' and •shimmy' in steering? How are they caused?

196. What does the term 'dynamic balance' mean?

197. What is 'wheel tramp' in case of steering?

198. What is the principle of automotive brakes?

199. What do the brakes do to the energy as they stop a moving car?

200. What is a service brake?

201. What are 'primary' and 'secondary' brakes?

202. What is the basis of defining brake efficiency?

203. What are the approximate brake efficiency values in the case of cars and heavy vehicles?

204. What should be the minimum stopping distance for a car running at 80 km. p.h.?

205. Why do we not use brakes with more than 80% efficiency in automobiles?

206. What is the usual percentage of total braking effort provided at the front wheels and why?

207. What is 'fading' of brakes?

208. What is 'transfer of weight' in brakes? What is its effect?

209. On what factors does the force of adhesion between the road wheels and the road depend?

210. How does skidding take place?

211. What is locking of wheel during braking?

212. Enumerate different considerations for classifying the automotive brakes.

213. Out of the transmission and the wheel brakes, which are better and why?

214. What are different methods of brake actuation?

215. What is the difference between 'power-assisted' and 'power-operated' brakes?

216. Name important components of a drum brake.

217. What is a leading shoe?

218. What is a two-shoe-leading brake? What are its advantages and disadvantages?

219. Which type of the brakes out of the following, are used in Hindustan Ambassador "cars :

(i) Two shoe leading (ii) Two shoe trailing (iii) One shoe leading and the other trailing.

220. What is the effect of floating the brake expander, instead of fixing it on the back plate?

221. How does floating of the brake shoe anchor influence the braking effect?

222. What is the advantage of a two-shoe trailing brake?

223. Name the factors that influence braking performance.

224. Name important components of a disc brake.

225. What is the advantage of a swinging caliper type disc brake?

226. Name two latest materials for brake discs.

227. How much is approximately the saving in weight by using disc brake instead of drum

brake?

228. Out of the disc and the drum brakes, which have better anti-fade characteristics?

229. Why is there greater consistency of braking effect in case of disc brakes compared with the

drum brakes?

230. Which car in India has the distinction of using the disc brakes first?

231. What is 'brake compensation'?

232. Name the simplest type of brake compensator.

233. Approximately how much residual pressure is maintained in hydraulic brakes and why?

234. What are the functions of (i) intake port (ii) by-pass port in a master cylinder?

235. Why do we not fill the master cylinder completely with the brake fluid?

236. What was the need to develop such a complicated master cylinder? Why could a simple

barrel with piston not do?

237. Why drum type hydraulic brakes are so designed that there should be residual pressure in

the brake lines even when the brakes are in the released position ?

238. Do we maintain the residual pressure in case of disc brakes also? Why?




239. When do we have to pump the brake pedal quickly?

240. What is the purpose of a brake shoe adjuster?

241. Name any two brake shoe adjusters.

242. Do we have brake shoe adjuster in case of disc brakes also? Why?

243. What is a split hydraulic brake system?

244. What is the function of a pressure differential valve?

245. Why do you use proportioning valve in brakes?

246. What is the function of a metering valve in the braking system?

247. What is a combination valve?

248. What are the advantages of hydraulic brakes over mechanical brakes?

249. Why can't water be used as brake fluid?

250. What would be the result if a petroleum oil is used as brake fluid?

251. State the main requirements of brake fluid.

252. What should be the approximate minimum boiling point of a good braking fluid?

253. What are the main constituents of brake fluid?

254. When does the necessity of bleeding the brakes arise?

255. What is a servo brake?

256. What is suspended vacuum servo system?

257. What is the function of booster in the Hydromax brakes?

258. Name major components of a compressed air brake system.

259. What is function of unloader valve? Where is it located?

260. What is the function of an air brake valve?

261. What is the extra merit of a dual air brake valve compared to a single diaphragm type?

262. What is the function of air brake chamber?

263. What is the spring brake chamber?

264. What is a slack adjuster? What is its function?

265. On which wheels in a car are the parking brakes generally provided?

266. What are the requirements of a good brake drum?

267. Which material is generally used for brake drums? Why?

268. Why are the brake drums usually finned?

269. State the advantages of integral wheel-brake drum.

270. Upto what temperature the fade does not occur in case of moulded brake lining?

271. What are the advantages of using synthetic resin adhesives for attaching brake linings as

compared to the conventional rivetting?

272. In which type of vehicles it is generally preferred to use adhesives for brake lining?

273. What is an ABS ?

274. What is 'pressure modulation' with reference to ABS ?

275. State the effect of (a) front wheels locking, (b) rear wheels locking.

276. List main parts of an ABS.

277. What is the function of lateral acceleration sensor ?

278. Name four main manufacturers of antilock brake systems.

279. Differentiate between functions of one-channel and two-channel systems.

280. Differentiate between functions of three-channel and four-channel systems.

281. Name the various common forms of brake drum wear.

282. How do you adjust the brake shoes?

283. What is major brake adjustment?

284. What is minor brake adjustment?

285. Approximately what minimum amount of free pedal pay is allowed in case of car brakes?

286. What is the function of Emergency Brake Assist' ?

287. What is a dynamic braking system ?

288. What is 'brake by wire' ? State its two advantages.

289. What happens when the oil leaks into the brake drum and wets the shoe linings?




290. How will it affect the braking performance if the bypass port in the master cylinder is

blocked?

291. Out of petrol and alcohol, which should be used for cleaning the brake master cylinder and

why?

292. Why are the brakes overheated sometimes?

293. What happens if the rivets attaching the brake lining to the shoe are not chamfered?

294. If only the brake on one of the four brake drums is incorrectly adjusted, how does it affect

braking performance?

295. What is the effect of the dust accumulating in the brake drum?

296. Name any three firms manufacturing automotive brakes.

297. State the functions of a car wheel.

298. Name three types of automobile wheels.

299. What are the advantages of a disc wheel?

300. Define 'offset' with reference to automobile wheels.

301. What are inset, zeroset and outset wheels?

302. What is a reversible wheel?

303. What is a divided wheel?

304. Are well type wheels also used for heavier vehicles?

305. What is the purpose of 'well' in the wheel rim?

306. Why is there a small taper on the sides of a wheel rim?

307. How is the vehicle weight supported in case of a wire wheel?

308. What are the advantages of a wire wheel?

309. Why can't you use wire wheel to mount a tubeless tyre?

310. Name different materials for automobiles wheels.

311. Name the light alloys commonly used for automobile wheels.

312. State the advantages of (i) magnesium alloy (ii) aluminium alloy wheels.

313. What is a composite wheel?

314. How do you specify a car wheel?

315. What are the functions of an automobile tyre?

316. State various desirable properties of an automobile tyre.

317. What is 'ply rating' of a tyre?

318. Should the tyre sidewalls be rigid or flexible? Why?

319. Should the tyre tread be hard or soft?

320. How is a tyre bead formed?

321. What is the purpose of tyre tread sipes ?

322. What is the function of a tyre bead?

323. What is static unbalance? What is dynamic unbalance?

324. How is the wheel wobble caused?

325. What is a tyre carcass?

326. Name different types of tyres based upon the carcass design.

327. Why are the cords of tyre plies not woven like warp and weft of ordinary cloth?

328. What is the function of a breaker belt?

329. State the requirements of material for breaker belts.

330. How does a radial-ply tyre contributes to saving of fuel?

331. Why does a radial ply-tyre give comfortable ride at high speeds and a cross-ply tyre at low

speeds?

332. Why are the steering characteristics of radial ply tyres better than those of cross ply tyres?

333. What is the reason for higher braking efficiency on wet roads in case of radial ply tyres?

334. State the commonly used materials for (0 ply-cords (ii) stabilizer belts (Hi) beads (iv)

tread.

335. State the factors on which road-grip of a tyre depends.

336. What is 'aspect ratio' of a tyre?




OR

337. What is the advantage of low aspect ratio in automobile tyres?

338. How do you designate a tyre?

339. State various factors affecting tyre life.

340. What are the specified inflation pressures in case of (i) Hindustan Ambassador car, (ii)

Maruti Car (Hi) Ashok Leyland bus?

341. Should the tyre inflation pressure be checked while it is hot or cold?

342. How does over inflation increase tendency for concussion break?

343. How does a tyre wear in case of (i) overinflation (ii) underinflation?

344. What is the effect of bleeding the tyre?

345. List various irregularities in the vehicle maintenance which lead to deterioration of tyre

life.

346. How does heat affect the tyre life.

347. What is the basic advantage of a Dunlop 'Danovo' tyre?

348. Draw the tyre rotation sequence for a (i) car (ii) truck.

349. State whether true or false :

(a) Ply rating refers to the actual number of cord plies in tyre.

(b) Higher aspects ratios are used in case of tyres for sports cars.

(c) One side and both sides wear of tyre tread are caused on account of the same

reason.

(d) The high tyre pressure causes the tyre to wear more at the centre of the tread.

350. State reasons for the following tyre defects :

(a) Concussion break (b) Rim bruise (c) Sidewall scuffing (d) Tread cracking

(e) Ply separation (/) Uneven wear.


1. Write major technical specifications of chassis and transmission components of the

following automobiles

A two wheeler,

A four wheeler and

A heavy vehicle

Write down Trouble shooting charts for any three major parts of chassis and transmission

components of automobiles. 10marks

2. Test and service the given electrical/ microprocessor components of automobile for its

working condition and prepare a test report for the same. 5marks

3. Dismantle and assemble the given chassis and transmission systems of an automobile,

check for its suitability of working condition, prepare a report for the same.

15marks

4. Sketch and briefly explain seating arrangements and comfort levels, seat adjustments

mechanisms provided for driver and passengers in an automobile. 10marks

5. Viva 10marks

Answer the following questions 1 a) Write major technical specifications of chassis and transmission components of __________

1 b) Write down Trouble shooting charts for_______________________________ 5+5

marks

2. Test and service the given components of automobile for its working condition and prepare a brief

test report for the same. 5marks

3. Dismantle and assemble the given chassis and transmission system of an automobile, check for its

suitability of working condition, prepare a brief report for the same.

15marks

4. With simple Sketches, briefly explain




a) Seating arrangements, seats for commercial vehicle

b) Comfort levels provided for driver and passengers

c) Different mechanisms of door and seat adjustments mechanisms provided

10marks

5. Viva 10marks

Answer the following Viva questions

[1] In a differential with a gear ratio of 4, the drive pinion would revolve four times to cause the ring gear to

rotate a. 1 time

b. 2 times d. 6 times

[2] In the vacuum suspended system, the brakes are applied when a. Atmospheric pressure is applied to one side of the diaphragm

b. Vacuum is applied to both sides of diaphragm

[3] On a straight road, the ring gear a. Rotates at the same speed as wheels

b. Rotates faster than wheels

d. Does not rotate

[4] In the atmospheric suspended system the brakes are applied when a. Vacuum is applied to both sides of the diaphragm

b. Atmospheric pressure is applied to both sides of the diaphragm

[5] In a vacuum suspended unit, when the brakes are on, the piston or diaphragm has on both sides of it a. Atmospheric pressure

b. Vacuum

[6] The function of the relay valve in a compressed air brake system is to a. Limit the maximum pressure reached in brake chambers

b. Relieve air pressure in brake chambers when it reaches a maximum value

d. Speed up the supply of air to brake chambers located at a distance from brake valve

[7] In the hydraulic braking system, the movement of the pistons in the wheel cylinder is transmitted to the

brake shoes by a. Actuating pins

b. Springs

d. Joints

[8] In the integral type of power brake, the diaphragm acts directly on the hydraulic piston in the a. Master cylinder

b. Wheel cylinder

[9] As the load on the vehicle increase it demands a. Increased braking torque

b. Decreased braking torque

[10] In the hydraulic brake system, the movement of a piston in the master cylinder produces hydraulic

pressure which causes movement of a. Brake shoe

b. Brake pedal




Answer the following questions

1 a) Write major technical specifications of chassis and transmission components of __________


marks





15marks





10marks

5. Viva 10marks


[1] In the case of brake linings saturants and bonding materials are used to a. Facilitate moulding and curing of brake linings

b. To improve the heat dissipating capacity of linings

d. To make the lining material impervious to moisture and oil and to ensure a steady coefficient of friction up

to 3000 C

[2] In the hydraulic brake system, movement of a piston in the master cylinder produces hydraulic pressure

which causes movement of the a. Wheel cylinder pistons

b. Brake pedal

[3] The radius of a pneumatic tyre is a. The radius of unloaded fully inflated tyre

b. The height of centre of tyre from the ground when it is loaded

d. It is fixed radius, based on the dimensions of the tyre

[4] The Ackermann steering layout a. Makes for safer driving

b. Enables the driver to feel ahead position

d. Reduces load on the kingpins and stub axles

[5] The main function of the suspension system is best described as a. Reducing the body movement

b. Reducing the accelerations to which the body is subjected

[6] Helper springs are usually used a. In heavy vehicles in suspension system to obtain a two stage spring rate

b. In vehicles to improve the load capacity of suspension system

d. To stiffen the suspension

[7] On the coaxial steering gear, the gear housing is lubricated a. From the hydraulic system

b. From the worm housing

[8] Turning the adjustment screw to make the over centre adjustment causes a. End-wise movement of the ball nut

b. End-wise movement of the Pitman shaft

d. End-wise movement of steering shaft

[9] In the coaxial power steering unit, the spool valve a. Rotates

b. Moves end-wise

[10] In the steering gear of the linkage connecting to the wheel, steering knuckle, a gear sector, stud or

toothed roller is meshed with a. A worm

b. A ball bearing







marks





15marks





10marks

5. Viva 10marks


[1] The steering gear is a device for converting the rotary motion of the steering wheel into a. To and fro movement

b. Up and down movement

[2] In the steering gear, a gear sector or toothed roller is meshed with a. A Worm

b. A ball bearing

d. Steering wheel

[3] Toe-out on turns means that the right wheel in a right hand turn would turn-out or away from straight

ahead a. More than the left wheel

b. Less than the left wheel

[4] Positive caster will tend to cause the car to a. Roll out on turns

b. Bank on turns

[5] The backward tilt of the king pin from the vertical is called a. Positive caster

b. Negative caster

d. Negative camber

[6] When the point of intersection of the centre line of the wheel and the centre line of the king pin cross is

below the road surface, then the front wheel will tend to a. Toe-out

b. Toe-in

[7] Positive caster tends to make the front wheels a. Toe in

b. Toe out

[8] Tilting of the front wheels away from the vertical is called a. Camber

b. Caster

d. Toe-out

[9] In front end geometry factors that are involved include a. Camber

b. Caster

d. Toe-out

[10] When the front wheels are not parallel to each other and moved further away at the top, it is termed as a. Positive camber

b. Negative camber

d. Roll out







marks





15marks





10marks

5. Viva 10marks


1. The point at which the centre line of the wheel and the centre line of the ball joints cross is called the

point of a. Departure

b. Intersection

2. The backward tilt of the centre line of the ball joints from the vertical is called a. Negative caster

b. Positive caster

d. Negative camber

3. The tilting of the front wheels away from the vertical is called a. Caster

b. Camber

d. Toe-out

4. Caster is defined as the inclination of a. Front wheel to the vertical

b. The king pin axis in the fore and aft plane

d. The axis of stub axle to the horizontal

5. When an automobile takes a tum to avoid the skidding and over turning a. Each wheel will roll independently

b. Front two wheels will have a common centre during a turning

6. To equalize tyre wear, it is suggested that tyres be rotated from one wheel to another every a. 80 kms

b. 8000 kms

7. Movement of the brake pedal forces brake fluid from the master brake cylinder through brake lines and

into the a. Brake shoes

b. Wheel cylinders

d. Pedal rod

8. Power brakes in general operate making use of the pressure differential between the vacuum from the

intake manifold and a. Compressed air

b. Atmospheric pressure

9. In the air brake, air pressure is supplied by a. Engine manifold

b. A compressor

10. The type of braking system referred to as power brake, makes use of a. Electromagnets

b. Compressed air







marks





15marks





10marks

5. Viva 10marks


1. The drive line consists of the propeller shaft with a. Drive and universal joints

b. Universal joints and slip joints

2. The most widely used brakes are operated a. Electrically

b. Hydraulically

d. By vacuum

3. In a passenger car a typical arrangement of braking with drum brakes will be a. Two leading shoes at front and leading & trailing at rear

b. All the wheels having leading and trailing shoes

d. Front leading and trailing, rear two leading shoes

4. More often, the condition that draws attention to trouble in the differential is a. Rough operation

b. Noise

5. In the linkage type of power steering system, the piston rod is attached at one end to a. A tie rod

b. A connecting rod

6. In the linkage type of power steering system, the swinging end of the pitman arm actuates a. A spool valve

b. A tie rod

d. An idler lever

7. In the constant control power steering unit the spool valve is moved by a. A pivot lever

b. A valve rotor

8. In jeeps we use

a. Mechanical brakes

b. Hydraulic brakes

9. Camber angle plus king pin inclination angle is called the a. Caster

b. Included angle

d. Toe-out

10. The only service that a steering linkage normally requires is a. Tie-rod adjustment

b. Lubrication







marks





15marks





10marks

5. Viva 10marks


1. Toe-in is adjusted by a. Adding or removing shims

b. Changing the effective length of the tie rods

2. When the top of the king pin is tilted towards the driver, the phenomenon is known as a. Negative caster

b. Positive caster

d. Skidding

3. For a thorough inspection a tyre should be a. On the car

b. Inflated

d. On the wheel

4. The working fluid normally used in hydraulic brake systems is a. High speed diesel oil along with alcohol

b. A solution of castor oil in alcohol along with neutralizer

d. SAE 20 oil with anti-corrosion additives

5. In a vacuum type servo-assisted brake system, vacuum is available in ........ is made use of

a. Exhaust manifold

b. Inlet manifold

d. Combustion chamber

6. The metal used for the brake drum is a. Aluminium alloy

b. Cast iron

d. Cast steel

7. The most popular drive at the drive axle for the passenger car is a. Straight bevel gear

b. Hypoid drive

d. Spiral bevel gear

8. Caster action on the front wheels of a vehicle will a. Make it easier to take corners

b. Enable the driver to feel straight wheel position

d. Reduce the load on the king pins

9. Which of the following factors is not related to the effect of independent front suspension a. Reducing the unsprung masses

b. Elimination of gyroscopic couples

d. Reducing tyre wear

10. Which one of the following is not apart of the chassis a. Wheels

b. Passenger seats

d. Front axle




Course Title: AUTOMOTIVE ELECTRICALS AND AUTOTRONICS LAB

Course Code: P15AUL68 Semester: VI L:T:P:H- 1:0:2:3 Credits:1.5


1. Testing of Basic Electrical components

a) Switches, Relays, Resistors

2. Battery Test

a) High discharge test – Multi meter

b) Open voltage circuit test – cell tester

c) Specific gravity test – Hydro meter

d) Temperature correction test

e) Battery leakage test

f) Battery drain test

g) Capacity test

h) Types of charging (Trickle chargers)

i) Jump starters

3. Charging system

a) Voltage output test

b) Current output test

c) Circuit and ground resistance

d) AC generator service

4. Electrical Accessories

a) Wind shield wiper / washer systems

b) Wiper system service

5. Dynamo Armature Test:

a) Open test

b) Ground test

c) Armature shorts

i) Field coils for open circuit test

ii) Testing field coils for short circuit

iii) Test insulated Brush holder for ground

6. Kirloskar generator performance test for lamp loading

7. Battery charger- front and rear wind shield cleaning

8. Head lamp testing and cleaning system

9. Study of Automotive wiring system

10. Testing of Alternator and starting motors.

AUTOTRONICS LAB

1. Interfacing LEDs and blinking them for specific amount of time

2. Interfacing 16 X 2 LCD panel and displaying characters

3. Interfacing keypad (4 X 4) and displaying key pressed

4. Interfacing temperature sensor and displaying the temp value

5. Interfacing displacement senor and displaying amount of displacement

6. Interfacing stepper or DC motor and controlling speed and direction of rotation

REVIEW QUESTIONS

1) Testing of given electrical components and report it (a) switches (b)relays (c) resistors

2) To check battery and discuss the types of batteries used in automobiles

3) To conduct the specific gravity test & to compare the standard ones




4) What are the troubles of batteries? Explain in detail

5) By using multi meter to conduct the HRD test &describe the same

6) To check &conduct the open voltage test by using given instruments

7) To inspect the battery temperature &correct it its required

8) To check the electrolyte &to conduct leakage test

9) What are the types of battery charging systems? Explain about trickle charging

10) To check &conduct the battery capacity test using the instruments

11) Explain jump starters &discuss their applications

12) Explain the following charging tests (voltage output, current output, charging circuits &

ground resistance, AC generator)

13) Servicing the given wind shield wiper &washer system.

14) what are the factors depending on WS wiper & washer system.

15) To conduct the dynamo armature tests of following (a) open test (b) ground test (c)

armature shorts

16) To conduct the test on KIRLOSKAR generator performance for lamp loading

17) To inspect the rear wind shield cleaning &correct it

18) Inspect &Test the head lamp &cleaned it

19) To study the automotive wiring system in vehicles

20) Tests the given alternator &starting motors




Course Title : Mini project

Course Code : P15AU69 Semester : 6 L : T : P : H - 0 : 0 : 2 : 2

Contact Period: Lecture: 32 Hr, Exam: 3 Hr Weightage: CIE:50%; SEE:50%

Guidelines proposed for the conduction and evaluation of the Mini Projects (One credit

courses) are as follows-

.

Mini Projects:

a) To provide 2hrs/week for Mini Projects during VI Sem BE programs.

b) Mini Projects shall comprise of an exercise assigned to a batch of students similar to

major projects.

c) The topics may be related to technological, sociological issues.

d) A report (not less than 20 A4 pages) to be submitted, detailing the solution to the

problem/concept worked out during the semester.

e) The work may be evaluated for award of Internal Assessment marks (CIE) based on a

presentation/demonstration and viva voce, by a committee coordinated by the Course

coordinators.

Course Title : Aptitude and Reasoning Development - EXPERT (ARDE)

Course Code : P15HU610 Semester : 6 L : T : P : H - 0 : 0 : 2 : 2

Contact Period: Lecture: 32 Hr, Exam: 3 Hr Weightage: CIE:50%; SEE:50%

Prerequisites : Number system, Concept of percentage, Analytical reasoning-2.


This course aims to 1. Explain different types of functions, representation of different functions on the graphs.

2. Describe the properties of quadratic equations and application of quadratic equations.

3. Demonstrates the principle of counting.

4. Differentiates between permutation and combination and solve problems conceptually.

5. Predict the probabilities in different scenarios and its application in our day-to-day life.

6. Evaluate the cause and effect of the statements logically.

7. Recognize different ways in which a statement can be strengthened or weakened.

8. Explain the criticality of data sufficiency chapter., universal methodology to solve any

problem.

9. Analyse the data in a bar graph , pie chart and tabular column and line graph and the

combination of these graphs.

10. Compare the data in different format and understand the difference between them

COURSE CONTENT

UNIT – I

Functions and Quadratic equations:

Functions: Basic methods of representing functions– Analytical representation, tabular

representation, graphical representation of functions. Even and odd functions, Inverse of a

function, Shifting of graph. Representation of standard set of equations. Methodology to tackle

inverse functions. Graphical process for solving inequalities, graphical view of logarithmic




function.

Quadratic equations: Theory, properties of quadratic equations and their roots, the sign of

quadratic equation, Equations in more than one variable. Simultaneous equations, number of

solutions of the simultaneous equations. 6 hrs

UNIT – II

Permutation and Combination: Understanding the difference between the permutation and

combination, Rules of Counting-rule of addition, rule of multiplication, factorial function,

Concept of step arrangement, Permutation of things when some of them are identical, Concept of

2n, Arrangement in a circle.

Probability: Single event probability, multi event probability, independent events and

dependent events, mutually exclusive events, non-mutually exclusive events, combination

method for finding the outcomes. 8 hrs

UNIT – III

Analytical reasoning 3: Punchline: Introduction, format of the problem, An analysis, Does a

suggested statement qualify as a punchline?. If a given statement fits as a punchline, what is its

idea or wavelength?, The complete method of solving a punchline problem, Solved examples,

conclusion, Sample company questions.

Strengthening and Weakening arguments: Format of the problem, An analysis, Suggested

methods, solved examples, conclusion, sample company questions.

Cause and Effect :Cause and Effect—A theoretical discussion, Immediate cause, Principal

cause, A quick check– Cause always antecedent. The strategy for solution. 6 hrs

UNIT IV

Data Sufficiency: Introduction, answer choices in data sufficiency, tips to solve data sufficiency

problems, directions of questions, classification of sections in data sufficiency– Number system,

Algebra, series and sequence, logical, geometry and mensuration, arithmetic. 6 hrs

UNIT V

Data Interpretation: Approach to interpretation - simple arithmetic, rules for comparing

fractions, Calculating (approximation) fractions, short cut ways to find the percentages,

Classification of data– Tables, Bar graph, line graph, Cumulative bar graph, Pie graph,

Combination of graphs. Combination of table and graphs 6 hrs

REFERENCE BOOKS: 1. “The Trachtenberg speed system of basic mathematics, published by Rupa publications.

2. CAT Mathematics by AbhijithGuha. published by PHI learning private limited.

3. Quantitative aptitude by Dr. R. S Agarwal, published by S.Chand private limited.

4. Verbal reasoning by Dr. R. S Agarwal , published by S. Chand private limited.

5. Quantitative aptitude for CAT by Arun Sharma, published by McGraw Hill publication.

6. Analytical reasoning by M.K Pandey BSC PUBLISHING.CO.PVT.LTD

COURSE OUTCOMES (CO)

After learning all the units of the course, the student is able to:

1. Graphically represent the functions and analyze it. L5

2. Infer the conclusions based on the roots obtained by solving quadratic equations and establish

relationship between them. L6

3. Effective solve the problems of permutation and combination. L4

4. Predict different possibilities by the principle of probability. L3

5. Interpret the data given in the graphical format and infer the results. L5

6. Analyze the statement critically and solve the questions from verbal logic section. L5

TOPIC LEARNING OUTCOMES

After learning all the topics of UNIT – I, the student is able to




1. Recognize the properties of a function by observing its graphical representation. L3

2. Write the general equations for the functions by analyzing the characteristics.L1

3. Write tabular and graphical representation of the fuctions.L1

4. Differentiate between even and odd functions.L2

5. Compose the inverse of a functions.L2

6. Analyze the shifting of graphs and combining movements.L5

7. Modify the equations under some constraints to get the required graph.L3

8. Design the logical graphical process for solving the inequalities.L4

9. Analyze the graphical view of logarithmic functions.L5

10. Compute the roots of linear, quadratic and cubic equations.L6

11. Describe the properties of quadratic equations and their roots.L1

12. Analyze the sign of quadratic expressions and infer the results graphically.L5

After learning all the topics of UNIT – II, the student is able to

1. Apply the fundamental principle of counting to solve basic level problems and apply its

logic in complex problems.L2

2. Distinguish between permutation and combination.L4

3. Combine the principles of counting with combination to solve the problems on

permutation.L4

4. Select and arrange “r” objects out of “n” objects under different constraints.L4

5. Criticize the restricted use of nPr.L6

6. Analyze the concept of step arrangement and apply its principles in problem solving.L5

7. Analyze the permutation of things when some of them are identical.L5

8. Apply the concepts of combination.L2

9. Describe the applications of the concept of 2n.L1

10. Solve the problems under division of things into groups.L3

11. Differentiate between linear arrangement and circular arrangement.L3

12. Recognize the importance of probability. L4

13. Use the conjunction AND tool and OR tool.L2

14. Define an event and solve it under specific constraints.L1

15. Develop the ability to apply the concepts of probability and its applications in real file

scenarios.L6

After learning all the topics of UNIT – III, the student is able to 1. Interpret the format of any given problem. L4

2. Interpret whether a given statement qualify as a punchline. L4

3. Analyze an idea or a wavelength. L5

4. Develop a methodology to solve a punchline problem. L3

5. Evaluate problems involving strengthening and weakness problem. L6

6. Device a universal strategy to solve the problems of logical reasoning. L3

7. Interpret cause and effect problems and solve them logically. L2

8. Differentiate between immediate cause and a principal cause and apply the knowledge of it

in problem solving. L1

After learning all the topics of UNIT – IV, the student is able to 1. Distinguish between data sufficiency type problems and any other problem. L1

2. Apply the universal strategies taught in solving problems. L5

3. Apply the strategy to solve problems under the topics such as Number system, Algebra, series

and sequence. L5

4. Apply the strategy to solve problems under the topics such as logical, geometry and

mensuration, arithmetic. L5

5. Apply the knowledge of flow chart and mind map to tackle problems. L4




After learning all the topics of UNIT – V, the student is able toDemonstrate better

interpretation and representation of data.L1

1. Discover various forms of data representation their advantages and disadvantages.L1

2. Analyze the data provided in the form of tabular column, pie graph, bar graph, line graph,

combination of two or more. L5

3. Understand the concept of angles and area swept in a pie chart. L5

4. Apply simple arithematics and shortcuts to solve problems based on given graph. L2

5. Identify percentage hacks and use shortcuts to find the actual value when percentage is

given.L4

6. Convert ratios to percentages and vice versa. L4

7. Analyze case studies based on statistical data. L5

8. Identify the limitations of each data representation technique. L6

9. Choose better, the correct method to represent statistics in corporate presentations. L2

A. Course Articulation Matrix (CAM)

Course Outcome

(CO)

Program Outcome

(ABET/NBA-(3a-k))

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

Graphically represent

the functions and

analyze it.

L5 2 - - - 2 - - - - - - -

-

-

Infer the conclusions

based on the roots

obtained by solving

quadratic equations and

establish relationship

between them.

L6 2 - - - - - - - - - - -

-

-

Effective solve the

problems of

permutation and

combination.

L4 3 - - - 2 - - - 2 - - -

-

-

Predict different

possibilities by the

principle of probability.

L3 3 - - - - - - - 2 - - -

-

-

Interpret the data given

in the graphical format

and infer the results.

L5 2 - - - - - - - - - - -

-

-

L- Low, M- Moderate, H-High

SYLLABUS - · PDF fileSYLLABUS (With effect from ... in the academic year 2008-09. Since, then...

Documents

Transcript of SYLLABUS - · PDF fileSYLLABUS (With effect from ... in the academic year 2008-09. Since, then...